Disclaimer

All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.

Internal use only

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you first drive off, read these Operating
Instructions carefully and familiarise yourself with
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer
vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning
notices in these Operating Instructions. Disre‐
garding them may result in damage to the vehicle
or environment or in personal injury.
The standard equipment and product description
of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol‐
lowing factors:
R model
R order
R national version
R availability

The illustrations in these Operating Instructions

show a left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-
drive vehicles, the layout of vehicle parts and
control elements differs accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehi‐
cles further.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R design
R equipment
R technical features

Therefore, the description may differ from your

vehicle in some cases.
The following documents are integral parts of the
vehicle:
R Digital Operator's Manual
R printed Operating Instructions
R service booklet
R equipment-dependent supplements

Always keep these documents in the vehicle. If

you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents
on to the new owner.

4475844508Z102

4475844508Z102
2 Contents

Electric sliding door ................................... 54

Symbols ..................................................... 4 Tailgate ...................................................... 58
Side window .............................................. 61
At a glance ................................................. 6 Panorama sliding sunroof .......................... 63
Cockpit ........................................................ 6 Anti-theft prevention ................................. 66
Indicator and warning lamps ....................... 7
Steering wheel with buttons ........................ 8 Seats and stowage .................................. 69
Centre console ............................................ 9 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐
Overhead control panel ............................. 13 tion ............................................................ 69
Door control panel ..................................... 14 Seats ......................................................... 69
Steering wheel ........................................... 96
Digital Operating Instructions ............... 15 Stowage areas ........................................... 96
Calling up the Digital Operating Folding table .............................................. 98
Instructions ............................................... 15 Information about the bottle holder ......... 100
Cup holders ............................................. 101
Ashtray and cigarette lighter .................... 101
General notes .......................................... 16 Sockets .................................................... 102
Environmental protection ........................... 16 Switching the refrigerator box in the
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ................ 16 centre console on and off ........................ 104
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts .................... 16 Notes on attaching the iPad® .................. 104
Information about attachments, add-
on equipment, installations and con‐
versions ..................................................... 17 Light and vision .................................... 105
Operating Instructions ............................... 17 Exterior lighting ....................................... 105
Operating safety ........................................ 18 Adjusting the interior lighting ................... 111
Declarations of conformity ........................ 19 Changing bulbs ........................................ 111
Diagnostics connection ............................. 21 Windscreen wipers ................................... 116
Notes on changes to the engine output ..... 22 Mirrors ..................................................... 118
Qualified specialist workshop .................... 22 Operating sun visors ................................ 119
Vehicle registration ................................... 22
Correct use of the vehicle ......................... 23
Climate control ..................................... 120
Information on the REACH directive .......... 23
Notes for persons with electronic med‐ Overview of climate control systems ....... 120
ical aids ..................................................... 23 Operating climate control systems .......... 122
Implied warranty ........................................ 24 Operating air vents .................................. 126
QR codes for rescue card .......................... 24 Auxiliary heating ...................................... 126
Data storage .............................................. 24
Copyright ................................................... 26 Driving and parking .............................. 136
Driving ..................................................... 136
Occupant safety ...................................... 27 Manual transmission ................................ 141
Restraint system ........................................ 27 Automatic transmission ........................... 142
Seat belts .................................................. 28 All-wheel drive ......................................... 146
Airbags ...................................................... 31 AIRMATIC ................................................ 146
Refuelling ................................................. 147
PRE-SAFE® System .................................... 36 Parking .................................................... 150
Automatic measures after an accident ...... 36 Driving and driving safety systems .......... 153
Safely transporting children in the Trailer operation ....................................... 176
vehicle ....................................................... 37
Notes on pets in the vehicle ...................... 48
Instrument cluster and on-board
computer ............................................... 180
Opening and closing ............................... 49 Notes on the instrument cluster and
Key ............................................................ 49 on-board computer .................................. 180
Doors ......................................................... 51 Overview of the instrument cluster .......... 180
Sliding door ............................................... 54
 Contents 3

Overview and operation of the on- Battery .................................................... 235

board computer ....................................... 181 Towing or tow-starting ............................. 242
Overview of what is shown on the mul‐ Electrical fuses ........................................ 247
tifunction display ..................................... 182 Vehicle tool kit ......................................... 247
Setting the instrument lighting ................ 183
Overview of menus on the on-board
computer ................................................. 183 Wheels and tyres .................................. 249
Menus and submenus ............................. 183 Information on noise or unusual driving
characteristics ......................................... 249
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels
Mercedes PRO ....................................... 191 and tyres ................................................. 249
Information about Mercedes PRO Information on driving with summer
(Mercedes me) ......................................... 191 tyres ........................................................ 249
Information about Mercedes PRO con‐ Information on M+S tyres ........................ 249
nect (Mercedes me connect) ................... 191 Notes on snow chains ............................. 250
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Tyre pressure ........................................... 250
Centre using the multimedia system ........ 191 Changing a wheel .................................... 256
Making a call via the overhead control Information on wheel and tyre combi‐
panel ....................................................... 192 nations ..................................................... 261
Information on the breakdown assis‐ Spare wheel ............................................ 265
tance call via the overhead control
panel ....................................................... 192
Giving permission for data transfer .......... 192 Technical data ....................................... 267
Transmitted data during a service call ..... 192 Information on the technical data ............ 267
On-board electronics ............................... 267
Vehicle identification plate, vehicle
MBUX multimedia system .................... 194 identification number (VIN) and engine
Overview and operation ........................... 194 number .................................................... 268
System settings ....................................... 197 Operating fluids and capacities ............... 269
Navigation ............................................... 200 Vehicle data ............................................. 276
Telephone ................................................ 205 Trailer hitch ............................................. 277
Overview of Smartphone Integration ....... 207 Lashing points and carrier systems ......... 278
Web browser overview ............................ 208
Radio and media ...................................... 208
Sound settings ......................................... 211 Display messages and warning and
indicator lamps ..................................... 279
Display messages .................................... 279
Transporting .......................................... 212 Warning and indicator lamps ................... 302
Notes on loading guidelines ..................... 212
Load distribution ...................................... 213
Securing loads ......................................... 214 Index ....................................................... 311
Load securing aid ..................................... 216
Carrier systems ........................................ 219

Maintenance and care .......................... 220

Notes on maintenance ............................ 220
Service interval display ........................... 220
Engine compartment ............................... 221
Cleaning and care .................................... 227

Breakdown assistance ......................... 232

Emergency .............................................. 232
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ... 233
Flat tyre ................................................... 235
4 Symbols

In these Operating Instructions, you will find the

following symbols:

& DANGER Danger due to not observing

the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐
ards that may endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
# Observe the warning notices.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental

damage due to failure to observe environ‐
mental notes
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behaviour or
environmentally responsible disposal.
# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure

to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks
which may lead to your vehicle being dam‐
aged.
# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or

further information that could be helpful to
you.
# Instructions
(/ Further information on a topic
page)
Display Display in the multifunction display/
media display
4 Highest menu level to be selected in
the multimedia system
5 Corresponding submenus to be selec‐
ted in the multimedia system
* Indicates a cause
6 At a glance – Cockpit

1 Combination switch → 106 9 Ignition lock → 136

2 Instrument cluster → 180 A Cruise control lever → 158
3 Adjusts the steering wheel → 96 B Diagnostics connection → 21
Horn M Opens the bonnet → 221
4 DIRECT SELECT lever (auto‐ → 142 C Parking brake → 151
matic transmission) →
D Light switch 105
5 Multimedia system display
E Driving systems control panel:
6 Glove compartment → 97
Ç Lane Keeping Assist → 174
7 Centre console operating units →
f DSR 160
8 Steering wheel gearshift pad‐ → 145
dles (automatic transmission) Ô 360° camera
 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps 7

1 å ESP® OFF → 302

E 6 Restraint system → 302
2 ÷ ESP® → 302 F →
ü Seat belt 306
3 · Distance warning → 307 G K High beam → 106
4 Ð Power steering → 307 H L Low beam → 105
5 #! Turn signal lights → 106 I 6 Reserve fuel → 307
6 ! Parking brake (yellow) → 302 J T Standing lights and → 105
7 ! ABS → 302 licence plate and instrument
lighting
8 ; Engine diagnostics → 307
K R Rear fog light → 106
9 % Preglow
N Inoperative
A ! Parking brake (red) → 302
L h Tyre pressure monitoring → 309
B J Brakes (red) → 302 system
C ? Coolant → 307 Corresponding messages may → 279
D J Brakes (yellow) inopera‐ also be shown on the multi‐
tive function display.
8 At a glance – Steering wheel with buttons

1 Multifunction display → 182 3 ò Calls up the main menu → 181

2 ~ Ends or declines calls/ → 188 9: Selects a menu or
exits the phone book or redial submenu or scrolls through
memory lists
6 Makes or accepts calls/ a Confirms a selection/
switches to the redial memory hides display messages
WX Adjusts the volume % Back
8 Mutes ñ Deactivates LINGUA‐
TRONIC
ó Activates LINGUATRONIC
 At a glance – Centre console 9

Centre console, upper section

1 Multimedia system display 6 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator → 34

lamps
2 Climate control system operat‐ → 120
ing unit 7 | Calls up radio or media
3 £ Switches the hazard → 107 8 z Calls up navigation
warning light system on/off
9 % Calls up the telephone
4 f Calls up favourites
5 \ Calls up vehicle functions
10 At a glance – Centre console, middle section

Centre console, middle section

Vehicle with automatic transmission (example)

1 Touchpad 6 è Switches the ECO start/ → 140
stop function on and off
2 Adjusts and mutes the volume
7 Å Opens and closes the → 55
3 Switches the multimedia sys‐
electric sliding door on the left
tem on and off
side of the vehicle
4 Æ Opens and closes the → 55
8 é Switches PARKTRONIC → 167
electric sliding door on the
on/off
right side of the vehicle
9 DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 144
5 å Switches ESP on/off → 154
 At a glance – Centre console, lower section 11

Centre console, lower section

Stowage compartment with cover

1 Cover → 96 5 Cup holder
2 12 V socket → 102 6 Ashtray → 102
Cigarette lighter → 102 7 Stowage compartment
3 Holder for the mobile phone Switch clock for auxiliary → 131
bracket warm-air heater
4 Media Interface with two USB Device installation frame for
ports or with two USB ports auxiliary equipment, e.g. a
and one SD card slot tachograph
12 At a glance – Centre console between the driver's and front passenger seats

Centre console between the driver's and front passenger seats

1 Stowage compartment 5 Stowage compartment

2 Cup holders 6 Cigarette lighter → 102
3 Stowage compartment Ashtray → 102
Media Interface with two USB 12 V socket → 103
ports and an SD card slot →
230 V socket 103
Refrigerator box → 104
7 Stowage compartment
4 Temperature-controlled cup → 101
holder
 At a glance – Overhead control panel 13

1 Ì Deactivates interior pro‐ → 68 8 ï Button for Info call → 192

tection →
9 3 Opens/closes the pano‐ 64
2 p Switches the left-hand → 111 rama sliding sunroof
reading lamp on/off →
Opens/closes the roller sun‐ 65
3 | Switches automatic inte‐ → 111 blinds
rior lighting control on/off →
A ATA indicator lamp 67
4 c Switches the front inte‐ → 111
B Glasses compartment → 97
rior lighting on/off
C G SOS button → 233
5 w Switches the rear/load → 111
compartment lighting on/off D F Breakdown assistance → 192
→ call button
6 p Switches the right-hand 111
reading lamp on/off
7 Ë Deactivates tow-away → 67
protection
14 At a glance – Door control panel

d Vehicles with electrically 6 Adjusts the seat electrically → 71

adjustable front seats →
7 Adjusts and folds the exterior 118
e Vehicles with manually adjusta‐ mirrors in/out electrically
ble front seats →
8 W Opens/closes the front 61
1 Opens a door → 51 side windows
2 p123 Saves the seat and → 73 9 W Opens/closes rear → 62
exterior mirror settings hinged windows
3 @ Seat heating → 94 A Disables/enables rear-com‐ → 48
→ partment hinged window con‐
4 s Seat ventilation 95
trols (override feature)
5 % & Unlocks/locks the → 52
vehicle
 Digital Operating Instructions 15

Calling up the Digital Operating Instructions Some sections of the Digital Operating Instruc‐
tions, e.g. warnings, can be expanded and col‐
Multimedia system: lapsed.
4 Info 5 Owner's Manual 5 Õ Additional options for calling up the Digital
Operating Instructions
Direct access: pressing and holding down an
entry in the tab bar of the multimedia system
opens the corresponding content in the Digital
Operating Instructions.

The Digital Operating Instructions describe the

function and operation of the vehicle and the
multimedia system.
# Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Operating Instructions:
R Search: here you can use keywords to quickly
LINGUATRONIC: calls up via the voice control
locate answers to questions concerning vehi‐ system
cle operation.
The Digital Operating Instructions are deactivated
R Quick start: the first steps towards setting up
for safety reasons while driving.
your driver's seat can be found here.
% The Operating Instructions can also be found
R Tips: provides you with information on spe‐
in the Mercedes-Benz Guides App in all com‐
cific everyday situations for your vehicle. mon app stores.
R Animations: here you can watch animations
of the vehicle functions.
R Messages: here you can receive additional
information about the messages in the Instru‐
ment Display.
R Bookmarks: you can access your saved per‐
sonal bookmarks here.
R Language: you can set the language for the
Digital Operating Instructions here.

1 Back
2 Add bookmarks
3 Picture
4 Content area
5 Menu
16 General notes

Environmental protection accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-

Life Vehicles Directive.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental A network of vehicle take-back points and dis‐
damage due to operating conditions and mantlers has been established for you to return
personal driving style your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these
points free of charge. This makes an important
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is contribution to closing the recycling circle and
directly related to the vehicle's operation. conserving resources.
Operate the vehicle in an environmentally For further information about the recycling and
responsible manner to make a contribution to disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back
environmental protection. To do this, observe conditions, please visit the national
the following recommendations on operating Mercedes-Benz website for your country.
conditions and your personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
# Make sure that the tyre pressures are
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
always correct.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
# Do not transport any unnecessary
damage caused by not using recycled
weight (e.g. a roof rack which is no lon‐ reconditioned components
ger required).
# Observe the service intervals.
Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled recondi‐
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐ tioned components and parts with the same
ute to environmental protection. quality as new parts. The same entitlement
from the implied warranty is valid as for new
# Always have maintenance work carried
parts.
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Recycled reconditioned components

Personal driving style: and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG.

# Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine. * NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐
# Do not warm up the engine while sta‐
ciency of the restraint systems from
installing accessory parts or from repairs
tionary.
or welding
# Drive carefully and maintain a sufficient
distance to other vehicles. Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as
# Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
control units and sensors for the restraint
systems, may be installed in the following
braking.
areas of your vehicle:
# Shift gears in good time and use each
R doors
gear only up to Ô of its maximum
engine speed. R door pillars
# Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐ R door sills
fic, e.g. use the ECO start/stop func‐ R seats
tion.
R cockpit
# Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Pay
R instrument cluster
attention to the ECO display for a fuel-
efficient driving style. R centre console

# Do not install accessories such as audio

systems in these areas.
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
EU countries only: # Have accessory parts retrofitted at a
Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life qualified specialist workshop.
vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in
 General notes 17

If you use parts, tyres, wheels or safety-relevant responsible for the products that they have man‐
accessories which have not been approved by ufactured. Manufacturers of attachments, add-on
Mercedes-Benz, the operating safety of the vehi‐ equipment, installations and conversions must
cle may be jeopardised. Safety-relevant systems, guarantee compliance with Directive
e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Use only 2001/95/EC on general product safety.
genuine Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of Mercedes-Benz recommends the following proce‐
equal quality. Use only tyres, wheels and acces‐ dure for safety reasons:
sory parts that are approved for your vehicle
model. R Do not make any other changes to the vehi‐
cle.
Mercedes-Benz tests original parts, conversion
parts and accessory parts that have been R Obtain approval from Mercedes-Benz in the
approved for your vehicle model for reliability, event of deviations from the approved body/
safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market equipment mounting directives.
research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess Acceptance tests performed by public test bodies
other parts. Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsi‐ or official approvals do not rule out safety risks.
bility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz
vehicles, even if they have been approved offi‐ Comply with the information about Mercedes-
cially or independently by a testing centre. Benz genuine parts (/ page 16).
Certain parts are only officially approved for You will find the Mercedes-Benz body/equipment
installation or modification if they comply with mounting directives online on the https://bb-
legal requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz portal.mercedes-benz.com/de/GLOBAL
GenuineParts meet the registration requirements. You will also find information about the PIN
The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the assignment and changing the fuse there.
vehicle's general operating permit. % You can obtain further information at a quali‐
This is the case in the following situations: fied specialist workshop.
R the vehicle type changes from that stated in
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury in
the general operating permit.
the event of improper conversions or
R other road users could be endangered. changes to the vehicle
R the exhaust gas or noise levels are adversely
Conversions or changes to the vehicle can
affected. prevent systems or components from func‐
Always specify the vehicle identification number tioning properly and/or jeopardise the vehi‐
(VIN) and engine number when ordering genuine cle's operational safety.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts (/ page 268). # Always have conversions or changes to
the vehicle carried out at a qualified
workshop.
Information about attachments, add-on
equipment, installations and conversions Notes on the radiator
Notes on body/equipment mounting direc‐ Even seemingly minor changes to the vehicle,
tives such as attaching a radiator grille in winter, are
not permitted. Do not cover the radiator. Do not
For safety reasons, have add-on equipment pro‐
use any thermal mats, insect protection covers
duced and fitted in accordance with the valid
etc.
Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting direc‐
tives. These body/equipment mounting directives Otherwise, the values of the vehicle's diagnostic
ensure that the chassis and add-on equipment system will be distorted. In some countries, the
form one unit and that the greatest possible level recording of engine diagnostics data is prescri‐
of operational and driving safety is achieved. bed by law and must be verifiable and correct at
all times.
Both vehicle manufacturers and body manufac‐
turers must always ensure that the products they
manufacture come into circulation only in a safe Operating Instructions
state and do not pose any risks to people. Other‐
wise, there may be consequences under civil, These Operating Instructions describe all models,
criminal or public law. All manufacturers are as well as standard and optional equipment of
18 General notes

your vehicle that was available at the time of If you make any changes to the on-board elec‐
going to press. Country-specific differences are tronics, the general operating permit is rendered
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted invalid.
with all functions described. This is also the case Observe the "Vehicle electronics" section in
for systems and functions relevant to safety. "Technical data".
Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may dif‐
fer from that in the descriptions and illustrations. & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
The original purchase agreement documentation materials on hot parts of the exhaust sys‐
for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems tem
in your vehicle.
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Should you have any questions concerning equip‐ twigs may ignite if they come into contact
ment and operation, consult a Mercedes-Benz with hot parts of the exhaust system.
Service Centre. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-
The Operating Instructions and Service Booklet road, regularly check the vehicle under‐
are important documents and should be kept in side.
the vehicle. # Remove trapped plants or other flam‐
Note on vehicles which are equipped by body mable material, in particular.
manufacturers # If there is damage, consult a qualified
Always observe the body manufacturer's Operat‐ specialist workshop immediately.
ing Instructions. You could otherwise fail to rec‐
ognise dangers. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv‐
ing too fast and due to impacts to the
Operating safety vehicle underbody or suspension compo‐
nents
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ In the following situations, in particular, there
tions or system failure is a risk of damage to the vehicle:
In order to avoid malfunctions or system fail‐ R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
ures: high kerb or an unpaved road
# Always have the specified service/ R the vehicle is driven too fast over an
maintenance work as well as any neces‐ obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot‐
sary repairs carried out at a qualified hole
specialist workshop. R a heavy object strikes the underbody or
suspension components
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due
to improper modifications to electronic In situations such as these, damage to the
components body, underbody, suspension components,
wheels or tyres may not be visible. Compo‐
Modifications to electronic components, their nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly
software or wiring can impair their functional‐ fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon‐
ity and/or the functionality of other net‐ ger absorb the resulting force as intended.
worked components or safety-relevant sys‐ If the underbody panelling is damaged, flam‐
tems. mable materials such as leaves, grass or
This can endanger the vehicle's operating twigs can collect between the underbody and
safety. the underbody panelling. These materials may
# You must not tamper with wiring, elec‐ ignite if they come into contact with hot parts
tronic components, or their software. of the exhaust system.
# Always have work on electrical and elec‐ # Have the vehicle checked and repaired
tronic devices carried out at a qualified immediately at a qualified specialist
specialist workshop. workshop.
or
 General notes 19

# If driving safety is impaired while con‐ Ukraine only:

tinuing your journey, pull over and stop The manufacturer hereby declares that the vehi‐
the vehicle immediately, while paying cle components that receive and/or transmit
attention to road and traffic conditions, radio waves fulfil the technical regulations for
and contact a qualified specialist work‐ two-way radios. Further information is available
shop. from any Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Manufacturer addresses:
Below you will find the addresses of the manufac‐
Declarations of conformity turers of wireless components. The addresses
Electromagnetic compatibility cannot be displayed on the equipment due to its
size or nature.
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle
components has been checked and certified Convenience central locking system
according to the currently valid version of Regula‐ Marquardt GmbH, Schloßstraße 16, 78604 Rie‐
tion UN R10. theim, Germany
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger
Wireless vehicle components Straße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany

EU and EFTA countries only: Tyre pressure monitoring sensors

The following information is valid for all wireless Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park,
components in the vehicle as well as the informa‐ Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland
tion systems and communication devices integra‐ Heater booster function remote control
ted in the vehicle: Eberspächer Climate Control Systems GmbH &
The manufacturers of the wireless components Co. KG, Eberspächerstrasse 24, 73730 Esslingen,
ensure that all wireless components installed in Germany
the vehicle conform to Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity Radar sensors
are available at the following web address: Autoliv Electronics ASP Inc., 26545 American
https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ Drive, Southfield, MI 48034, USA
baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/ Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6,
index.html 71229 Leonberg, Germany
Mobile communication and telematics
Alpine Electronics Inc., 20-1 Yoshima-Kogyodan‐
chi, Iwaki-Shi Fukushima-Ken, Japan
Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, Post‐
Further information is available from any fach 2260, 76303 Karlsbad, Germany
Mercedes-Benz service centre. Type of wireless applications in the vehicle
For Brazil only: Besides the typical frequencies for mobile com‐
Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle: munications, Mercedes-Benz vehicles use the fol‐
lowing wireless applications:
These systems are not protected against harmful
interference and must not cause interference in
properly approved systems.
20 General notes

Type of wireless applications in the vehicle

Frequency range Technology Transmission output/

magnetic field strength

433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) Convenience central locking ≤ 10 mW ERP

system, tyre pressure monitor‐
ing system, heater booster
function remote control
2.4 GHz ISM Band (2400– Bluetooth®, RLAN ≤ 100 mW EIRP
2483.5 MHz)
24.05–24.25 GHz 24 GHz ISM radar ≤ 100 mW EIRP
24.25–26.65 GHz 24 GHz UWB radar ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean
≤ 0 dBm/50MHz EIRP peak
76–77 GHz 76 GHz radar ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP

Information on the specific absorption rate the indication of the specific absorption rate of
Only for France: radio-based vehicle components.
The values have been determined and tested in
accordance with Décret n° 2019-1186 regarding

Information on the specific absorption rate

Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Limit value to be used

(designation in accord‐
ance with EU DoC)

Telephone system radio < 0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg

data transmission
Hermes 2.1 < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
Compensator ECE DE003 < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
& ECE DE004
Tablet PC SM-T230NZ < 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg
DAI RSE < 1.8 W/kg 4 W/kg
NRCS2P < 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7RSU < 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7 < 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg
 General notes 21

Radio operating permit of transmitter key A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20,
MBN 10435, AS 2693
Radio equipment approval number DC12B and
B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN
DC12K
10435
Country Radio equipment approval C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10
information
Technical documentation for the product is held
Serbia DC12B: И005 20 20 by the manufacturer. Representative for compil‐
P1620124700 ing technical documentation: director of the tech‐
DC12K: И005 20 P1620124800 nical department at Brano a.s.
4.
Hradec nad Moravicí
City
Jack
5.
Copy and translation of the original declaration of 05.05.2015
conformity:
Date
EC declaration of conformity
Signed by:
1.
Director of Quality
The signatory, as a representative
Manufacturer:
Diagnostics connection
BRANO a.s.
The diagnostics connection is a technical inter‐
74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000, face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the
Czech Republic context of repair and maintenance work or for
ID no.: 64-387-5933 reading out vehicle data by a specialist workshop.
Diagnostic devices should therefore only be con‐
VAT ID no.: CZ64-387-5933
nected by a qualified specialist workshop.
hereby declare under our sole responsibility that
the product: & WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐
2. a) necting devices to the diagnostics con‐
Designation: nection
Jack If you connect devices to the diagnostics con‐
nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle
Type, number:
systems and operating safety may be
A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 impaired.
B) A 240 580 00 18 # For safety reasons, we recommend that
C) A 639 580 02 18 you only use and connect products
Year of manufacture: 2015 approved by your Mercedes-Benz
service centre.
Fulfils all relevant conditions
Directive no. 2006/42/EC & WARNING Risk of accident due to
b) objects in the driver's footwell
Description and intended use: Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
The jack is only intended for raising the specified pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
vehicle in accordance with the operating instruc‐ This jeopardises the operating and road
tions affixed to the jack. safety of the vehicle.
3. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
Reference data of the harmonised standards or so that they cannot get into the driver's
specifications footwell.
22 General notes

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as Notes on changes to the engine output
prescribed in order to ensure that there Output increases can:
is always sufficient room for the pedals.
R Change the emission values.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another. R Lead to malfunctions.
R Result in consequential damage.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using The operating safety of the engine is not guaran‐
devices connected to the diagnostics teed in all situations.
connection
If the vehicle's engine output is increased:
Using devices at the diagnostics connection R Tyres, suspension, brake system and engine
drains the battery. cooling system must be adapted to the
# Check the charge level of the battery. increase engine output.
# If the charge level is low, charge the bat‐ R Vehicle must be recertified.
tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis‐ R Report changes in output to the accident
tance. insurance body.
This will otherwise lead to the invalidation of the
vehicle's general operating permit and its insur‐
ance coverage.
If you sell the vehicle, inform the buyer of any
alterations to the vehicle's engine output. This
may constitute a punishable offence under
national legislation.

Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary
special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly
carry out any necessary work on your vehicle.
This particularly applies to work relevant to
safety.
The connection and use of another device on the Always have the following work on the vehicle
diagnostics connection can have the following carried out at a qualified specialist workshop:
effects: R Safety-relevant works
R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Service and maintenance work
R Permanent damage to vehicle components R Repair work
Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions R Modifications as well as installations and con‐
regarding this. versions
In addition, connecting equipment to the diagnos‐ R Work on electronic components
tics connection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This may Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
lead to the vehicle failing to meet the require‐ Mercedes-Benz service centre for this purpose.
ments of the next emissions inspection during
the main inspection. Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to
carry out technical inspections on certain vehi‐
cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is
improved as a result of the inspection.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle
checks if it has your registration data.
 General notes 23

In the following cases your vehicle may not be Information on the REACH directive
registered to you yet:
EU and EFTA countries only:
R you did not purchase your vehicle at an
The REACH directive (Directive (EC) No.
authorised specialist dealer.
1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to sup‐
R your vehicle has not yet been inspected at a ply information about substances of very high
Mercedes-Benz service centre. concern (SVHCs).
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes‑Benz AG acts to the best of its knowl‐
Mercedes-Benz service centre. edge to prevent these SVHCs from being used
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about and to enable customers to safely handle these
any change in address or vehicle ownership. You substances. There are SVHCs known to
can do this, for example, at a Mercedes-Benz Mercedes‑Benz AG, according to supplier infor‐
service centre. mation and internal product information, found in
individual components of this vehicle in quanti‐
ties of over 0.1 percent by weight.
Correct use of the vehicle Further information can be obtained at the follow‐
If you remove warning stickers, you or others may ing addresses:
fail to recognise the dangers. Leave warning R https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/
stickers in position.
R https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/
Observe the following information in particular
when operating the vehicle:
R safety notes in these Operating Instructions
Notes for persons with electronic medical
aids
R technical data for the vehicle
Despite careful development, Mercedes-Benz AG
R traffic rules and regulations
cannot completely rule out the interaction of
R laws pertaining to motor vehicles and safety vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such
standards as cardiac pacemakers.
In addition, there are components built into the
& WARNING Risk of fire and accident when
vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of
transporting substances which are haz‐ your vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a
ardous to health or react aggressively par with permanent magnets. These fields can be
Gases and fluids can even escape from con‐ found, for example, in the area around the multi‐
tainers which are fully closed. media and sound system or also in the seating
This can adversely affect your concentration area, depending on the vehicle equipment.
during the journey and your health. Electronic For this reason, the following can occur in isola‐
component parts may also experience mal‐ ted cases, depending on the aids used:
functions, short circuits or system failures. R medical aids malfunctioning
# Do not stow or transport any substan‐
R adverse health effects
ces which are hazardous to health
and/or aggressively reactive in the vehi‐ Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac‐
cle interior. turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the
device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there
Substances that constitute a health hazard or is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibil‐
react aggressively include, for example: ity of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-
R solvents
Benz AG recommends using only a few electrical
vehicle systems and/or maintaining an appropri‐
R fuel ate distance from the components.
R oil and grease
R cleaning agents
R acid
24 General notes

Only have repairs and maintenance work in the The following provides you with general informa‐
area of the following components carried out by a tion regarding data processing in the vehicle.
qualified specialist workshop: Additional information regarding exactly which
R vehicle components carrying live voltage
data in your vehicle are collected, saved and
transmitted to third parties, and for what pur‐
R transmission aerials pose, can be found in the information directly
R multimedia system and sound system related to the functional characteristics in ques‐
tion in their respective operating instructions.
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a This information is also available online and,
qualified specialist workshop. depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.
Personal data
Implied warranty Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle
identification number. Depending on the country,
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from this vehicle identification number can be used by,
violation of these operating instructions. for example, governmental authorities to deter‐
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐ mine the identity of the owner. There are other
tion of these operating instructions. possibilities for using data collected from the
vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as
Such damage is not covered by either the the licence plate number.
Limited Warranty or the new or used-vehicle
warranty. Therefore, data generated or processed by con‐
trol units may be attributable to a person or,
# Observe the instructions in these oper‐
under certain conditions, become attributable to
ating instructions on proper operation a person. Depending on which vehicle data are
of your vehicle as well as regarding pos‐ available, it may be possible to make inferences
sible vehicle damage. about, for example, your driving behaviour, your
location, your route or your use patterns.

QR codes for rescue card Legal requirements regarding the disclosure

of data
The QR code stickers are affixed to the B-pillar on
If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in
the driver's and co-driver's side. In the event of
individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov‐
an accident, emergency services can use the QR
ernmental entities, upon request and to the
code to quickly determine the corresponding res‐
extent required, data stored by the manufacturer.
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card
For example, this may be the case during the
contains, in compact form, the most important
investigation of a criminal offence.
information about your vehicle e.g. the routing of
electric cables. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ‐
ual cases and within the applicable legal frame‐
Further information can be obtained at https://
work, authorised to read out data from the vehi‐
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
cle. In the case of an accident, information that
can help with an investigation can, therefore, be
Data storage taken from the airbag control unit, for example.
Data processing in the vehicle Operational data in the vehicle
This is data regarding the operation of the vehi‐
Electronic control units cle, which have been processed by control units.
Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle.
Control units process data which, for example, This includes the following data, for example:
they receive from vehicle sensors, generate R vehicle status information such as the speed,
themselves or exchange between themselves. longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration,
Some control units are required for the safe oper‐ number of wheel revolutions or the fastened
ation of your vehicle, some assist you when driv‐ seat belts display
ing, such as driver assistance systems, while oth‐ R ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain
ers enable comfort or infotainment functions. sensor or distance sensor
 General notes 25

Generally, these are volatile data and will not be Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a
stored beyond the period of operation but will service outlet or at your request as part of repair
only be processed within the vehicle itself. Con‐ or maintenance work.
trol units, vehicle keys for example, often contain
data memories. Their use permits the temporary Convenience and infotainment functions
or permanent documentation of technical infor‐ You can store convenience settings and individual
mation about the vehicle's operating state, com‐ settings in the vehicle and change or reset them
ponent loads, maintenance requirements and at any time.
technical events or faults. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this
Depending on the technical equipment, the fol‐ includes the following settings, for example:
lowing data are stored: R seat and steering wheel positions
R operating status of system components, such R suspension and climate control settings
as fill levels, tyre pressure or battery status R individual settings, such as interior lighting
R malfunctions or faults in important system
Depending on the selected equipment, you can
components, such as lights or brakes
import data into vehicle infotainment functions
R system reactions in special driving situations, yourself.
such as airbag deployment or the intervention
of stability control systems Depending on the vehicle equipment, this
includes the following data, for example:
R information on events in which the vehicle is
R multimedia data, such as music, films or pho‐
damaged
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
In certain cases, it may be required to store data system
that would have otherwise been temporary. This R address book data for use in an integrated
may be the case if the vehicle has detected a hands-free system or an integrated navigation
malfunction, for example. system
If you use services, such as repair services and R entered navigation destinations
maintenance work, stored operational data as
R data on the use of Internet services
well as the vehicle identification number can be
read out and used. They can be read out by These data for convenience and infotainment
service network employees, such as workshops functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or
and manufacturers or third parties, such as they may be located on a device which you have
breakdown services. The same is true in the case connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone,
of warranty claims and quality assurance meas‐ USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have
ures. entered these data yourself, you can delete them
In general, the readout is performed via the at any time.
legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con‐ This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third
nection in the vehicle. The operational data that parties only at your request. This applies, in par‐
are read out document technical states of the ticular, when you use online services in accord‐
vehicle or of individual components and assist in ance with the settings that you have selected.
the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with
warranty obligations and quality improvement. To Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or
that end, these data, in particular information Apple CarPlay®)
about component loads, technical events, mal‐ If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you can
functions and other faults may be transmitted connect your smartphone or another mobile end
along with the vehicle identification number to device to the vehicle. You can then control them
the manufacturer. In addition, the manufacturer is by means of the control elements integrated in
subject to product liability. For this reason, the the vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound
manufacturer also uses operational data from the can be output via the multimedia system. Simul‐
vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can taneously, specific items of information are trans‐
also be used to examine the customer's warranty ferred to your smartphone. Depending on the
and guarantee claims. type of integration, this includes position data,
day/night mode and other general vehicle sta‐
tuses. For more information, please consult the
26 General notes

vehicle Operating Instructions/infotainment sys‐ For this reason, when services are provided by
tem. third parties, please ask the service provider in
This integration allows the use of selected smart‐ question for information about the type, extent
phone apps, such as navigation or music player and purpose of the collection and use of personal
apps. There is no additional interaction between data.
the smartphone and the vehicle, particularly
active access to vehicle data. The type of addi‐ Data protection rights
tional data processing is determined by the pro‐
vider of the app being used. Which settings you Depending on your country or the equipment and
can make, if any, depends on the specific app range of functions of your vehicle as well as the
and the operating system of your smartphone. services you use and the services on offer, you
are entitled to different data protection rights.
Further information on data protection and your
Online services data protection rights can either be found on the
Wireless network connection manufacturer's website or you will receive this
information as part of the various services and
If your vehicle has a wireless network connection,
service offers. There, you will also find the con‐
data can be exchanged between your vehicle and
tact information for the manufacturer and its data
other systems. The wireless network connection
protection officer.
is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter
and receiver or by a mobile end device that you At a workshop, for example, with the support of a
have brought into the vehicle, for example, a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have
smartphone. Online functions can be used via data read out which is stored only locally in the
this wireless network connection. This includes vehicle.
online services and applications/apps provided
to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.
Copyright
Manufacturer's own services Information on licences for free and open-source
Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the software used in your vehicle is available along
individual functions are described by the manu‐ with updates online at:
facturer in a suitable place, for example, in the
Operating Instructions or on the manufacturer's https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource.
website, where the relevant data protection infor‐
mation is also given. Personal identification data
may be used to provide online services. Data is
exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the man‐
ufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal
data which are collected, processed and used,
other than for the provision of services, is done
so exclusively on the basis of legal permission.
This is the case, for example, for a legally prescri‐
bed emergency call system, a contractual agree‐
ment or when consent has been given.
You can have services and functions, some of
which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva‐
ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions
and services, such as an emergency call system.
Services of third parties
If you use online services from other providers
(third parties), these services are the responsibil‐
ity of the provider in question and subject to that
provider's data protection conditions and terms
of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has
no influence on the content exchanged.
 Occupant safety 27

Restraint system # Never alter the parts of the restraint

Protection provided by the restraint system system.
# Never tamper with the wiring or any
The restraint system includes the following com‐ electronic component parts or their
ponents: software.
R Seat belt system
R Airbags If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accom‐
modate a person with disabilities, contact a quali‐
R Child restraint system fied specialist workshop.
R Child seat securing systems Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle driving aids which have been approved specifi‐
occupants from coming into contact with parts of cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In
the event of an accident, the restraint system can Restraint system functionality
also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu‐
pants are subjected. When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐
Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can pro‐
tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later
vide the intended level of protection. Depending
than a few seconds after the vehicle is started.
on the detected accident situation, seat belt ten‐
The components of the restraint system are then
sioners and/or airbags supplement the protec‐
functional.
tion offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat
belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed
in every accident. Restraint system malfunction
In order for the restraint system to provide the A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐
intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐ tem in the following cases:
pant must observe the following information:
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does
R Fasten seat belts correctly. not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R Sit in an almost upright seat position with R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
their back against the seat backrest. lights up continuously or repeatedly during a
R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possi‐ journey.
ble.
R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
an additional restraint system suitable for tions in the restraint system
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Components in the restraint system may be
activated unintentionally or not deploy as
However, no system available today can com‐
intended in an accident.
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and # Have the restraint system checked and
airbag generally do not protect against objects repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐
penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also cialist workshop.
not possible to completely rule out the risk of
injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Function of the restraint system in an acci‐
dent
Limited protection provided by the restraint
system How the restraint system works is determined by
the severity of the impact detected and the type
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to of accident anticipated:
modifications to the restraint system R frontal impact
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec‐ R rear impact
ted as intended if alterations are made to the R side impact
restraint system.
28 Occupant safety

The activation thresholds for the components of larly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an air‐
the restraint system are determined based on the bag deployed.
evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari‐ If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air‐
ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre- bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small
emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of amount of powder may also be released:
the components of the restraint system should
take place in good time at the start of the colli‐ R the bang will not generally affect your hear‐
sion. ing.
Factors which can only be seen and measured R in general, the powder released is not hazard‐
after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci‐ ous to health but may cause short-term
sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro‐ breathing difficulties to persons suffering
vide an indication of airbag deployment. from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐ Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if immediately or open the window in order to
only parts which are relatively easily deformed prevent breathing difficulties.
are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration
is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be
Seat belts
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts, Protection provided by the seat belt
such as longitudinal members, are hit, the vehicle
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
deceleration may be high enough for this to hap‐
starting a journey. Only a seat belt which is worn
pen.
correctly can provide the intended level of protec‐
Depending on the detected deployment situation, tion.
the components of the restraint system can be
activated or deployed independently of each & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
other: incorrectly fastened seat belt
R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
impact, side impact perform its intended protective function.
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
impact can also cause injuries, for example, in the
R Side airbag: side impact event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
R Window airbag: side impact, frontal impact
# Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
The co-driver airbag can only be deployed in the have their seat belts fastened correctly
event of an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG and are sitting properly.
OFF indicator lamp is off. If the co-driver seat is
occupied, make sure, both before and during the Always observe the instructions about the correct
journey, that the status of the co-driver airbag is driver's seat position and adjusting the seat
correct (/ page 34). (/ page 69).
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐
components vide the intended level of protection, each vehicle
occupant must observe the following information:
The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has
R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit
been deployed.
tightly and snugly across the body.
# Do not touch the airbag parts.
R The seat belt must be routed across the
# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a centre of the shoulder and as low down
qualified specialist workshop as soon as across the hips as possible.
possible.
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck nor be routed under your
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
arm or behind your back.
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident. Take this into account, particu‐
 Occupant safety 29

R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter # Always secure persons under 1.50 m
coat. tall in a suitable restraint system.
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
der section of the belt. Never route the lap damaged or modified seat belts
belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular Seat belts cannot provide protection in the
care with this. following situations:
R the seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐
ted, abrasive or fragile objects. fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R the seat belt buckle is damaged or
R Only one person should use each seat belt at
any one time. Infants and children must never extremely dirty
travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. R modifications have been made to the seat
R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat
seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle's belt retractor
occupants. Always observe the instructions Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
for loading the vehicle when securing objects, an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
luggage or loads (/ page 212).
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, fail in the event of an accident, for example.
are ever placed between a person and the
Modified seat belt tensioners could acciden‐
seat.
tally trigger or fail to function as intended.
If children are travelling in the vehicle, always # Never modify the seat belt system, for
observe the instructions and safety notes on example the seat belt, seat belt buckle,
"Children in the vehicle" (/ page 37). seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage
and seat belt retractor.
Limitations of the protection provided by the # Make sure that the seat belts are
seat belt undamaged, not worn and clean.
# Always have the seat belts checked
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to immediately after an accident at a quali‐
incorrect seat position fied specialist workshop.
The seat belt will not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat
backrest to an almost vertical position. belts which have been approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
# Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tension‐
ning your journey. ers
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
in an almost vertical position and that been deployed are no longer operational and
the shoulder section of your seat belt is are unable to perform their intended protec‐
routed across the centre of your shoul‐ tive function.
der.
# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
seat belt tensioners immediately
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
additional restraint systems are not used shop.
for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
seat belt correctly without a suitable addi‐ vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
tional restraint system. after an accident.
30 Occupant safety

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the impact airbag may also deploy in the event of
seat belt an accident along with other systems.
# Only one person should use each seat
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
may become trapped in the door or in the belt at any one time.
seat mechanism.
Vehicles without automatic co-driver airbag
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt
shutoff:
is fully retracted.
* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten‐
sioner when the front passenger seat is
Fastening and adjusting seat belts
unoccupied
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐ belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger
not be pulled out any further. seat, the seat belt tensioner may also deploy
in the event of an accident along with other
systems.
# Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after a front seat belt
has been fastened, the automatic seat belt
adjustment may apply a certain tightening force.
Do not hold onto the seat belt while it is adjust‐
ing.
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function using the multimedia system
(/ page 30).
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the
seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐
responding seat. Activating or deactivating the seat belt
# Press and hold the seat belt outlet release
adjustment using the multimedia system
and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired Multimedia system:
position. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
# Let go of the seat belt outlet release and
# Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.
ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into
position.
% Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can Releasing the seat belts
provide the intended level of protection. # Press the release button in the seat belt
Observe the notes on fastening the seatbelt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
(/ page 28). seat belt tongue.
Vehicles with automatic co-driver airbag
shutoff: Function of the seat belt warning system for
driver and co-driver
* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten‐
sioner and side impact airbag when the The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru‐
front passenger seat is unoccupied ment Display reminds you that all vehicle occu‐
pants must fasten their seat belts correctly.
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger A warning tone may also sound.
seat, the seat belt tensioner and the side
 Occupant safety 31

The seat belt warning goes out when the driver Possible protection per airbag:
and co-driver fasten their seat belts. R Driver's airbag, co-driver airbag: head and rib‐
Only for certain countries: regardless of whether cage
the driver and co-driver's seat belts are already R Window airbag: head
fastened, the ü seat belt warning lamp comes
R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis
on for six seconds every time after switching on
the ignition. After the vehicle is started, it goes
out as soon as the driver's and the co-driver's & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
seat belts have been fastened. co-driver airbag is enabled
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on
the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-
Airbags driver airbag during an accident.
Overview of airbags NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.

When fitting a child restraint system to the co-

driver seat, observe the vehicle-specific informa‐
tion (/ page 46). Also be sure to observe the
notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child
restraint systems on the co-driver seat.
Information on the automatic co-driver airbag
Example: vehicles with window airbag above shutoff
front door The co-driver airbag can only be deployed in the
1 Driver's airbag event of an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG
2 Co-driver airbag OFF indicator lamp is off. If the co-driver seat is
occupied, make sure, both before and during the
3 Window airbag journey, that the status of the co-driver airbag is
4 Side airbag correct (/ page 34).

* NOTE Deployment of components of the

restraint system when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on
the front passenger side if:
R There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
Example: vehicles with window airbag for all R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
rows of seats seat belt buckle of the front passenger
1 seat and the front passenger seat is unoc‐
Driver's airbag
cupied.
2 Co-driver airbag
3 Window airbag # Stow objects in a suitable place.
4 Side airbag # Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
An airbag's installation location is identified by
the label AIRBAG.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
32 Occupant safety

Protection provided by the airbags Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air‐
bag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag
occupant must always make sure of the following
may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt. in particular:
R There are no people, animals or objects
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to between the vehicle occupants and an airbag.
an incorrect seat position R There are no objects between the seat, door
If you deviate from the correct seat position, and door pillar (B-pillar).
the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐ R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
tective function. hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile
following: navigation devices, mobile phones or cup
R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant holders, attached to the vehicle within the
women must take particular care to deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the
ensure that the lap belt never lies across cockpit, on the door, on the side window or
the abdomen. on the side trim.
R Adopt the correct seat position and keep In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
as far away as possible from the airbags. straps or retaining straps must be routed or
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
R Observe the following information.
area of an airbag. Always comply with the
# Always make sure that there are no accessory manufacturer's installation instruc‐
objects between the airbag and vehicle tions and, in particular, the notes on suitable
occupant. places for installation.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store
of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe such objects in a suitable place.
the following information in particular:
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat Limited protection provided by airbags
correctly; both the driver's and co-driver seat
should be moved as far back as possible. & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifica‐
When doing so, always observe the informa‐ tions to the cover of an airbag
tion on the correct driver's seat position If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix
(/ page 69). objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may
R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering no longer function correctly.
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
deployed. do not affix objects to it.
R Always lean against the seat backrest when
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards An airbag's installation location is identified by
or against the door or side window. You may the label AIRBAG (/ page 31).
otherwise be in the deployment area of the
airbags. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put the use of unsuitable seat covers
your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags
feet may otherwise be in the deployment area cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten‐
of the airbag. ded.
R If children are travelling in the vehicle, In addition, the operation of the automatic
observe the additional notes (/ page 37). front passenger airbag shutoff could be
R Always stow and secure objects correctly. restricted.
 Occupant safety 33

# You should only use seat covers that When fitting a child restraint system to the co-
have been approved for the correspond‐ driver seat, always make sure of the following:
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz. R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐
tioned correctly (/ page 40).
Vehicles with window airbags in all rows of R Always comply with the child restraint system
seats: manufacturer's installation instructions.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or
tioning sensors in the door behind the child restraint system.
R The entire base of the child restraint system
The function of the airbags can be impaired
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
due to modifications or incorrect work per‐
co-driver seat.
formed on the doors or door trim, or if the
doors are damaged. R The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
# Never modify the doors or parts of the
resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver
doors.
seat.
# Always have work on the doors or door
R The child restraint system must not touch the
trim carried out at a qualified specialist
roof or be put under strain by the head
workshop.
restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐
tion and the head restraint setting accord‐
& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed ingly.
airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
tection. objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system
# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop in order to have the Objects between the sitting surface and the
deployed airbag replaced. child restraint system could affect the func‐
tion of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. # Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint
Status of the co-driver airbag system.
# Make sure that the entire base of the
Function of the automatic co-driver airbag child restraint system is resting on the
shutoff sitting surface of the co-driver seat.
The automatic co-driver airbag shutoff is able to
# Make sure that the backrest of the
detect whether the co-driver seat is occupied by
forward-facing child restraint system is,
a person or a child restraint system. The co-driver
as far as possible, resting on the seat
airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly.
backrest of the co-driver seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # Always comply with the child restraint
objects under the co-driver seat system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can
interfere with the function of the automatic A person on the co-driver seat must observe the
co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys‐ following information:
tem.
R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 28).
# Do not store any objects under the co-
driver seat. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
# When the co-driver seat is occupied,
make sure that no objects are trapped R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possi‐
under the co-driver seat. ble.
34 Occupant safety

The co-driver airbag may otherwise be disabled Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
by mistake, for example, in the following situa‐ lamps
tions:
R The co-driver transfers their weight by sup‐
porting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
R The co-driver sits in such a way that their
weight is raised from the sitting surface.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to

a disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is disabled when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is lit.
A person in the front passenger seat could
then, for example, come into contact with the
vehicle interior, especially if the person is sit‐
ting too close to the cockpit.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
inoperative. When the ignition is switched on, it
always ensure that:
lights up briefly and then goes out again. Only the
R the classification of the person in the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays
front passenger seat is correct and the the status of the co-driver airbag. The
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be
bled in accordance with the person in the lit continuously or be off.
front passenger seat. Vehicles without an automatic co-driver airbag
R the front passenger seat has been moved shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side
as far back as possible. of the cockpit on the co-driver side
R the person is seated correctly. (/ page 45).
# Both before and during the journey, Self-test of automatic co-driver airbag shutoff
ensure that the status of the front The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
passenger airbag is correct. lights up for approximately six seconds during the
self-test when the ignition is switched on.
If the co-driver seat is occupied, the classification The status of the co-driver airbag is displayed
of the person or child restraint system on the co- after the self-test:
driver seat takes place after the co-driver airbag
R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is not lit: the co-
shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp displays the status of the co-driver driver airbag may deploy during an accident.
airbag. R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐
Always observe the notes on the function of the ously: the co-driver airbag is disabled. It will
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp not be deployed in the event of an accident.
(/ page 34). If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light
up simultaneously, the co-driver seat may not be
used. Also in this case, do not fit a child restraint
system to the co-driver seat. Have the automatic
co-driver airbag shutoff checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Status indicator
If the co-driver seat is occupied, ensure, both
before and during the journey, that the status of
 Occupant safety 35

the co-driver airbag is correct for the current sit‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
uation. incorrect positioning of the forward-
After fitting a rearward-facing child restraint facing child restraint system
system to the co-driver seat: PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF must be lit continuously. If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in
using a rearward-facing child restraint the event of an accident, the child could:
system while the front passenger airbag R come into contact with the vehicle interior
is enabled if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child lamp is lit, for example
restraint system on the front passenger seat R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can # Always move the front passenger seat
deploy in the event of an accident.
as far back as possible and fully retract
The child could be struck by the airbag. the seat cushion length adjustment.
# Always ensure that the front passenger While doing so, always make sure that
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR the shoulder belt strap is correctly
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. routed from the seat belt outlet of the
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child
vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the
restraint system on a seat with an ENA‐ child restraint system. The shoulder belt
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in strap must be routed forwards and
the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the downwards from the seat belt outlet. If
CHILD. necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet
and the front passenger seat accord‐
When fitting a child restraint system to the co- ingly.
driver seat, observe the vehicle-specific informa‐ # Always comply with the child restraint
tion (/ page 46). system manufacturer's installation
Depending on the child restraint system and the instructions.
stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do When fitting a child restraint system to the co-
not fit the rearward-facing child restraint system driver seat, observe the vehicle-specific informa‐
to the co-driver seat. tion (/ page 46).
If a person is sitting on the co-driver seat:
Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint
system to a suitable rear seat. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously
or be off, depending on the person's stature.
After fitting a forward-facing child restraint
system to the co-driver seat: depending on the A person on the co-driver seat must always
child restraint system and the stature of the observe the following information:
child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐ R If the co-driver seat is occupied by an adult or
tinuously or be off. Always observe the following a person with a stature corresponding to that
information. of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that
the co-driver airbag is enabled.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
with a build corresponding to that of an adult
should not use the co-driver seat.
Instead, they should use a rear seat.
R If the co-driver seat is occupied by a person
of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small
adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐
tor lamp either lights up continuously or
36 Occupant safety

remains off, depending on the result of the R Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: closing the
classification. sliding sunroof.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator R Vehicles with memory function: adjusting
lamp is off: move the co-driver seat as far the co-driver seat to a more favourable seat
back as possible, or the person of smaller position.
stature should use a rear seat.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
lamp is lit continuously: the person of footwell or behind the seat
smaller stature should not use the co- The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐
driver seat. tion may result in damage to the seat and/or
the object.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures
lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front
passenger airbag is disabled. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that: You will need to make certain adjustments your‐
self.
R The classification of the person in the
# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ move the seat backrest back slightly.
bled in accordance with the person in the The locking mechanism releases.
front passenger seat.
R The person is seated properly with a cor‐ Automatic measures after an accident
rectly fastened seat belt.
Depending on the type and severity of the acci‐
R The front passenger seat has been moved dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment,
as far back as possible. the following measures can be implemented, for
example:
Be sure to also observe the following further rela‐ R activating the hazard warning lights
ted subjects:
R triggering an automatic emergency call
R Child restraint system on the co-driver seat (/ page 233)
(/ page 46).
R switching off the engine
R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys‐
tem (/ page 40). To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off
and switch it back on (/ page 136). Depend‐
ing on the type and severity of the accident, it
PRE-SAFE® System may possible that the vehicle can no longer
be started.
Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
R switching off the fuel supply
protection)
R unlocking the vehicle doors
PRE-SAFE® can detect certain hazardous situa‐ R lowering the front side windows
tions and take pre-emptive measures to protect
the vehicle occupants. R switching on the interior lighting

PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐

ures independently of each other:
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and co-driver seat.
R Closing the side windows.
 Occupant safety 37

Safely transporting children in the vehicle Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
Always observe when children are travelling
in the vehicle Only use approved child restraint systems
Only child restraint systems with the UNECE
% Always observe the safety notes relevant to standard UN-R44 are approved for use in the
the situation. In doing so, you will be able to vehicle.
identify possible risks and avoid dangers
when children are travelling in the vehicle Information on child restraint system approval
(/ page 37). categories and details on the approval label on
the child restraint system (/ page 40).
Be diligent
Bear in mind that negligence when securing a
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
child in the child restraint system may have seri‐
ous consequences. Always be diligent and secure Securing systems for child restraint systems
a child carefully before each journey. in the vehicle
To improve protection for children younger than Only use the following securing systems for child
12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, restraint systems:
Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the fol‐
R the ISOFIX securing rings
lowing information:
R the seat belt system of the vehicle
R Always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐ R the Top Tether anchorages
cle. Fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system is prefer‐
R The child restraint system must be appropri‐ red.
ate to the age, weight and size of the child. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the
R The vehicle seat must be suitable for fitting a vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child
child restraint system (/ page 40). restraint system incorrectly.
Accident statistics show that children secured on When securing a child with the integrated seat
the rear seats are generally safer than children belt of the ISOFIX child restraint system, always
secured on the front seats. For this reason, comply with the permissible gross weight for the
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you fit a child and child restraint system (/ page 42).
child restraint system to a rear seat. Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint
The generic term child restraint system system
The generic term child restraint system is used in It is preferable to transport a baby or a small
child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint
this set of Operating Instructions. A child
system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite
restraint system is, for example:
direction to the direction of travel and faces
R a baby car seat backwards.
R a rearward-facing child seat Babies and small children have comparatively
R a forward-facing child seat weak neck muscles in relation to the size and
R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat
weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in
belt guides
a rearward-facing child restraint system.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to
Always secure a child restraint system cor‐
the age, weight and size of the child.
rectly
Observe laws and regulations
Always observe the legal requirements when & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
using a child restraint system in the vehicle. incorrect installation of the child restraint
Make sure that the child restraint system is system
approved in accordance with the valid test speci‐ The child can then not be protected or
fications and guidelines. You can obtain further restrained as intended.
information at a qualified specialist workshop.
38 Occupant safety

# Be sure to comply with the manufactur‐ Do not modify the child restraint system
er's installation instructions for the child
restraint system and its correct use. & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifica‐
tions to the child restraint system
# Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system always rests on The child restraint system can no longer func‐
the sitting surface of the seat. tion properly. This poses an increased risk of
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) injury.
under or behind the child restraint sys‐ # Never modify a child restraint system.
tem. # Only affix accessories which have been
# Use child restraint systems only with specially approved for this child
the original cover designed for them. restraint system by the child restraint
# Always replace damaged covers with system's manufacturer.
genuine covers.
Mercedes‑Benz recommends Mercedes-Benz
care products for cleaning child restraint systems
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
unsecured child restraint systems in the
vehicle Only use child restraint systems which are in
proper working condition
If the child restraint system is incorrectly fit‐
ted or not secured, it can come loose. & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
The child restraint system could be flung by the use of damaged child restraint
around and hit vehicle occupants. systems
# Always install child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐
correctly, even when not in use. tems that have been subjected to stress in an
# Always comply with the child restraint accident may not be able to perform their
system manufacturer's installation intended protective function.
instructions. It may be the case that the child cannot be
properly restrained.
R Always observe the child restraint system
# Always immediately replace child
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions as well as the vehicle-specific restraint systems that have been dam‐
information: aged or involved in an accident.
# Have the securing systems for the child
- Fitting the ISOFIX child restraint system
on the rear seat (/ page 42). restraint systems checked at a qualified
specialist workshop before installing a
- Securing the child restraint system with child restraint system again.
the seat belt on the rear seat
(/ page 45). Avoid direct sunlight
- Securing the child restraint system with
the seat belt on the co-driver seat & WARNING Risk of burns when the child
(/ page 46). Observe the specific seat is exposed to direct sunlight
instructions for the rearward-facing and
If the child restraint system is exposed to
forward-facing child restraint systems
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
(/ page 46).
Children could suffer burns from these parts,
If the co-driver seat is occupied, ensure,
particularly on metallic parts of the child
both before and during the journey, that
restraint system.
the status of the co-driver airbag is cor‐
rect for the current situation # Always make sure that the child
(/ page 34). restraint system is not exposed to direct
sunlight.
R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
interior and on the child restraint system. # Protect the child restraint system with a
blanket, for example.
R Also secure Top Tether if present.
 Occupant safety 39

# If the child restraint system has been Type1 BABY SAFE plus
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool before securing a child into it. Order number2 B6 6 86 8224
# Never leave children unattended in the 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
vehicle.
Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from
Observe when stopping or parking approximately 9 months to 4 years)
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury Type1 DUO plus
due to leaving children unattended in the
vehicle Size categories B1

If children are left unattended in the vehicle, Approval E1 04 301 133

they could, in particular:
Order number2 A 000 970 43 02
R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.

Securing with the seat belt on the vehicle
R operate vehicle equipment and become
seat
trapped, for example.
Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approx‐
In addition, the children could also set the imately 6 months) and weight category 0+
vehicle in motion by, for example: (up to 13 kg and approximately 15 months)
R releasing the parking brake.
Type1 BABY SAFE plus II
R changing the transmission position.
R starting the vehicle. Approval E1 04 301 146
# Never leave children unattended in the Order number2 A 000 970 38 02
vehicle.
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of approximately 9 months to 4 years)
children.
Type1 DUO plus

Approval E1 04 301 133

Overview of recommended child restraint
systems Order number2 A 000 970 43 02
% Further information on the correct child 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
restraint system can be obtained at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec‐ Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz approximately 3 to 12 years)
Service Centre for this purpose.
Type1 KIDFIX XP
Securing with ISOFIX
Approval E1 04 301 304
Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to
approx. 15 months) Order number2 A 000 970 49 02
Type1 BABY SAFE plus Type1 AMG KIDFIX XP
Size categories E Approval E1 04 301 304
Approval E1 04 301 146 Order number2 A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
40 Occupant safety

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for Approval categories in accordance with UN-
fitting a child restraint system R44
Left/right rear seat (second and third seat
row)
Preferred securing system:
® ISOFIX child seat anchor (/ page 41)
¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 43)
Alternative securing system:
7 Seat belt on vehicle seat (/ page 44)

Co-driver seat
Securing system:
7 Seat belt on vehicle seat (/ page 44)
Always observe the following:
Example of an approval label
R If the co-driver seat is occupied, ensure, both
before and during the journey, that the status R Universal: child restraint systems in the "Uni‐
of the co-driver airbag is correct for the cur‐ versal" category are approved for installation
rent situation (/ page 34). in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance
with overviews of the suitability of seats for
R Observe the notes on automatic co-driver air‐
securing child restraint systems, on seats
bag shutoff (/ page 33).
labelled U, UF or IUF.
Centre rear seat (second and third seat row) The IUF label refers to an ISOFIX child
Securing system: restraint system in the "Universal" category.
These child restraint systems must also be
7 Seat belt on vehicle seat (/ page 44)
secured using Top Tether or support points.
¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in
(/ page 43)
the "Semi-Universal" category may only be
used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed
Approval categories for child restraint sys‐ in the child restraint system manufacturer's
tems vehicle model list.
R Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in
Only use approved child restraint systems the "Vehicle-specific" category may only be
Only child restraint systems with the UNECE used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed
standard UN-R44 are approved for use in the in the child restraint system manufacturer's
vehicle. vehicle model list.
Identification on the child restraint system Please note the suitability of the vehicle
Information about the approval category, weight seats
category and approval number, for example, is on
the approval label on the child restraint system. Depending on the approval category, there are
forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint
There may be further information such as the systems. Their use may be restricted for certain
ISOFIX size categories, depending on the
vehicle seats.
approval category of the child restraint system.
R Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child
restraint systems (/ page 41)
R Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured
child restraint systems (/ page 44)
 Occupant safety 41

Fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system on the rear seat

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
ISOFIX designation

® ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for special restraint systems.

R The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in
accordance with UN R44 (/ page 40).
R Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per
the following ISOFIX tables.

Size class: Device: Rear seat / rear bench seat

Carry cot
F ISO/L1 X (rear seat) IL1 (rear bench seat)
G ISO/L2 X (rear seat) IL2, 3 (rear bench seat)
Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months)
E ISO/R1 IL2, 3
Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)
E ISO/R1 IL2, 3
D ISO/R2 IL2, 3
C ISO/R3 IL2, 3, 4
Weight group 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years)
D ISO/R2 IL2, 3
C ISO/R3 IL2, 3, 4
B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
42 Occupant safety

Size class: Device: Rear seat / rear bench seat

X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle
and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.

1 Only on the first rear seat row on a rear bench seat.

2 The seat must be installed in the direction of travel.

3 It is permissible to use a seat on the second rear seat row only if the maximum distance between the two rear seat rows is set. To this end,
the seat on the second rear seat row must be fitted in the rearmost position allowed and the seat on the first rear seat row in front of it must be
fitted in the foremost position allowed. If you use the centre seat on the second rear seat row, all seats on the first rear seat row must be fitted
in the foremost position allowed.

4 If you are using a child restraint system in size class C (ISO/R3), make sure that the front seat backrest does not rest against the child
restraint system. If possible, move the front seat to the highest position and the seat backrest to the upright position.

Fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system on When you install a child restraint system, observe
the rear seat the following:
O Always observe the correct use and suitabil‐
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the ity of the seats for attaching a child restraint
permissible gross mass of the child and system.
child restraint system together is excee‐
ded. ISOFIX child seat anchor (/ page 41)
O Always observe the manufacturer's installa‐
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX tion and operating instructions for the child
child restraint system and the child may not restraint system used.
be restrained correctly in the event of an
accident, for example. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
# If the child and the child restraint sys‐
seat slightly forwards.
tem together weigh more than the per‐
missible gross mass of 33 kg , only use ®When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint sys‐
an ISOFIX child restraint system with tem, also observe the following:
which the child is secured with the vehi‐
O When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat
cle seat belt. and a Group 1 rearward-facing child
# Also secure the child restraint system restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the
with the Top Tether belt, if available. front seat so that the seat does not touch
the child restraint system.
Always comply with the information about the
O Move the rear seat backrest to an upright
mass of the child restraint system: position before you fit the child seat. Do not
R in the manufacturer's installation and operat‐ adjust the seat backrest when an ISOFIX
ing instructions for the child restraint system child restraint system is fitted.
used O For certain child restraint systems in weight
R on a label on the child restraint system, if group 2 or 3, there may be restrictions on
available the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐
ble contact with the roof.
Check regularly that the permissible gross mass
of the child plus the child restraint system is not O Do not put the child restraint system under
exceeded. strain between the roof and the sitting sur‐
face and/or fit it facing the wrong direction.
 Occupant safety 43

O Do not put the child restraint system under additional connection between the child
strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint system attached with ISOFIX and
restraints as appropriate. the vehicle.

1 ISOFIX mounting brackets Example

Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX Top Tether anchorage 2 is on the lower part of
child restraint system is engaged correctly in the rear seat on the cross strut between the
both mounting brackets in the vehicle. seats or bench seat legs.
# If necessary, move head restraint 1 upwards
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the (/ page 94).
centre seat during installation of the child # Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top
restraint system Tether. Comply with the child restraint system
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ manufacturer's installation instructions.
ped.

# Attach the ISOFIX child restraint system to

both mounting brackets 1 in the vehicle.

Securing Top Tether

* NOTE Damage to the single rear seat

when you use the EASY ENTRY easy entry
and exit feature and a child restraint sys‐
tem secured using Top Tether # Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint
If a child restraint system is secured using 1 between the two head restraint bars.
Top Tether and the EASY ENTRY easy entry # Hook Top Tether hook 3 into Top Tether
and exit feature is used, the single rear seat anchorage 2 without twisting.
may be damaged. # Tension Top Tether belt 4. Comply with the
# Before you use the EASY ENTRY easy child restraint system manufacturer's installa‐
entry and exit feature, unhook the Top tion instructions.
Tether hook from the anchorage. # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down‐
wards (/ page 94). Make sure that you do
¯ If the child restraint system is equipped not interfere with the correct routing of Top
with a Top Tether belt: Tether belt 4.
The risk of injury can be reduced by Top
Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an
44 Occupant safety

Securing the child restraint system with the Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
seat belt
Rear seat U, L
Notes on the suitability of seats for attaching
belt-secured child restraint systems Rear bench seat U, L
Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured
child restraint systems Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg

Rear seats Rear seat U, L

Weight category 0: up to 10 kg Rear bench seat U, L
Rear seat U1 U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Univer‐
sal" category in this weight category.
Rear bench seat U1, L 1
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg according to the table in "Recommended child
restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are
Rear seat U1
listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's
Rear bench seat U1, L1 vehicle model list.

Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg 1 The seat must be installed in the direction of

travel.
Rear seat U1, L1
Rear bench seat U1, L1

Co-driver seat – Notes

Notes on child restraint systems on the co-driver seat

R If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the co-driver seat, be sure to
observe the information on child restraint systems on the co-driver seat (/ page 46).
Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys‐
tems. If the co-driver seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status
of the co-driver airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 34).

Co-driver seat/co-driver bench seat

Co-driver airbag enabled UF2, L
Weight category 0: up to 10 kg
Co-driver airbag disabled1 U2, L
Co-driver airbag enabled X
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Co-driver airbag disabled1 U2, L
Co-driver airbag enabled UF2, L
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg
Co-driver airbag disabled1 U2, L
Co-driver airbag enabled X
X Not suitable for children in this weight category.
Co-driver airbag disabled1 U2, L
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Univer‐
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg sal" category in this weight category.

Co-driver airbag enabled UF2, L UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint sys‐
tems of the "Universal" category in this weight cate‐
Co-driver airbag disabled1 U2, L
gory.
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
 Occupant safety 45

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems O The child restraint system must not be put
according to the table in "Recommended child
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the
restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are
head restraints as appropriate.
listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
vehicle model list.
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat slightly forwards.
1 The vehicle is equipped with automatic co-driver
# Install the child restraint system.
airbag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
The entire base of the child restraint system
cator lamp must be lit. must always rest on the sitting surface of the
rear seat.
2 In combination with a long seat belt buckle
(police seat) not suitable for child restraint systems.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap
is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of
Securing the child restraint system with the the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system.
seat belt on the rear seat
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system, wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐
observe the following: let.
O Always comply with the manufacturer's Instructions for vehicles without automatic
installation and operating instructions for the co-driver airbag shutoff
child restraint system used.
O For a child restraint system in the "Univer‐
sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure
that the system has been approved for the
vehicle seat.
Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats
for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys‐
tems" (/ page 44).
O When using a category 0/0+ baby car
seat and a category I rearward-facing
child restraint system on a rear seat:
adjust the front seat so that the seat does
not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a category I forward-facing
child restraint system: remove the head
restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐
ble. The sticker is visible when the co-driver door is
open:
After the child restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraint immedi‐ Vehicles without an automatic co-driver airbag
ately and adjust all head restraints correctly. shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side
O The backrest of the forward-facing child of the cockpit on the co-driver side.
restraint system must, as far as possible, be If you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. lock, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
O For certain child restraint systems in weight PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps light up
category II or III, there may be restrictions on briefly. However, they have no function and are
the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐ not an indication of the automatic co-driver air‐
ble contact with the roof. bag shutoff.
O The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion inclination accordingly.
46 Occupant safety

Be sure to observe the following notes: Always observe the status of the co-driver airbag
R Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint sys‐ on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
tem to the co-driver seat. R If it is absolutely necessary to fit a child
R Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint restraint system to the co-driver seat, always
system to a suitable rear seat observe the information on automatic co-
driver airbag shutoff (/ page 33).
- Suitability of seats for attaching belt-
secured child restraint systems R When using a rearward-facing child restraint
(/ page 44) system on the co-driver seat, the co-driver
airbag must always be disabled. It is only
- Securing the child restraint system with
deactivated if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
the seat belt on the rear seat
indicator lamp is lit continuously
(/ page 45)
(/ page 34).
R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing
R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
child restraint systems on the co-driver seat
lamp is off, the co-driver airbag is enabled.
(/ page 46)
The co-driver airbag may deploy during an
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing accident.
child restraint systems on the co-driver seat Securing the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the co-driver seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when
using a child restraint system while the When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system
co-driver airbag is enabled on the co-driver seat, always observe the follow‐
ing:
If you secure a child in a child restraint sys‐
tem on the co-driver seat and the O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is forward-facing child restraint systems on the
off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the co-driver seat (/ page 46).
event of an accident. O Observe the child restraint system manufac‐
The child could be struck by the airbag. turer's installation and operating instruc‐
tions.
# Always ensure that the co-driver airbag
is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG O For a child restraint system in the "Univer‐
OFF indicator lamp must be lit. sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure
that the system has been approved for the
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint vehicle seat.
on a seat protected by an ENABLED AIRBAG
Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats
in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to
for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys‐
the CHILD may occur.
tems" (/ page 44).
Observe the specific instructions for the rear‐ O When using a forward-facing child restraint
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint system in category I: remove the head
systems (/ page 46). restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐
ble.
After the child restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraint immedi‐
ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver
seat.
O For certain child restraint systems in weight
category II or III, there may be restrictions on
Warning notice on the co-driver sun visor the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐
ble contact with the roof.
 Occupant safety 47

O The child restraint system must not be put # Never leave children unattended in the
under strain between the roof and the seat vehicle.
cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong
direction.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
O The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the
# Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
head restraints as appropriate. children.
O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or
behind the child restraint system. & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure
to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
# Set the co-driver seat as far back as possible
If people, particularly children, are exposed to
and move the seat into the highest position
extreme temperatures over an extended
possible.
period of time, there is a risk of serious injury
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical or danger to life.
position possible.
# Never leave persons, children in particu‐
# Install the child restraint system. lar, unattended in the vehicle.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
co-driver seat.
due to children left unattended in the
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap vehicle
is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of
the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the If children are travelling in the vehicle, they
child restraint system. could, in particular:
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐ R open doors, thereby endangering other
wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐ persons or road users
let. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and R operate vehicle equipment and become
the co-driver seat as appropriate.
trapped, for example

Child safety locks

# Always activate the child safety locks
installed if children are travelling in the
Activating or deactivating child safety locks vehicle.
for the doors # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
due to children left unattended in the
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ The following doors have child safety locks:
cle, they could, in particular: R sliding doors
R open doors, thereby endangering other R pop-out windows
persons or road users. The child safety locks on the doors secure each
R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. door separately. The doors can no longer be
R operate vehicle equipment and become opened from the inside (exception: electric slid‐
trapped, for example. ing door). When the vehicle is unlocked, the door
can be opened from the outside.
In addition, the children could also set the If the electric sliding door is secured, only the
vehicle in motion, for example by: sliding door controls in the rear are deactivated.
R releasing the parking brake. The electric sliding door can be opened at any
R changing the transmission position. time using the switch in the centre console.
R starting the vehicle.
48 Occupant safety

Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

due to animals left unsecured or unatten‐
ded in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended
or unsecured, they could press buttons or
switches, for instance.
An animal may:
R activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users

# Slide child safety lock bolt 1 to position 2 Unsecured animals may be thrown about the
(activate) or 3 (deactivate). vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden
steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure
# Make sure that the child safety locks are vehicle occupants.
working properly.
# Never leave animals unattended in the
Activating or deactivating child safety locks vehicle.
for the pop-out windows # Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car‐
rier.

# To activate and deactivate: press button

1.
If the indicator lamp on button 1 is lit, oper‐
ation of the electrical pop-out windows is dis‐
abled. Operation is then only possible using
the buttons in the driver's door.
 Opening and closing 49

Key
Overview of key functions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

due to leaving children unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could, in particular:
R open doors, thereby endangering other
Key (example: vehicles with an EASY-PACK tail‐
persons or road users. gate and/or rear window which can be opened
R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. separately)
R operate vehicle equipment and become 1 Indicator lamp
trapped, for example. 2 To open or close the EASY-PACK tailgate, or
to unlock the rear window which can be
In addition, the children could also set the opened separately
vehicle in motion by, for example:
3 To lock the vehicle centrally
R releasing the parking brake. 4 To unlock the EASY-PACK tailgate and sliding
R changing the transmission position. doors, or to unlock and open/close the elec‐
R starting the vehicle. tric sliding door
5 Emergency key
# Never leave children unattended in the
6 To unlock the vehicle centrally or only the
vehicle.
driver's door
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. The key's factory setting enables you to centrally
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of lock and unlock the following components:
children. R the driver's door and co-driver door
R the sliding doors
& WARNING Risk of accident due to inad‐ R the tailgate
vertent turning of the key in the ignition
lock % If you do not open the vehicle within approx‐
imately 40 seconds of unlocking, the vehicle
If you attach large or heavy objects to the key, will lock again and anti-theft protection will
the key could inadvertently turn in the ignition be primed again.
lock while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not keep the key together with electronic devi‐
# Do not attach any large or heavy objects
ces or metallic objects. This can affect the key's
to the key. functionality.
# Remove a key ring if it is cumbersome
% If the check lamp does not light up when you
before you insert the key in the ignition press the % or & button, the battery is
lock. discharged.
Replace the key battery (/ page 50).
* NOTE Damage to the key caused by mag‐
netic fields
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking
# Keep the key away from strong mag‐ verification signal
netic fields.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
# Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock.
% Please note:
50 Opening and closing

The selected setting for the acoustic locking Replacing the key battery
verification signal must comply with the rele‐
vant national road and traffic regulations. In & DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
some countries, including Germany, using the swallowing batteries
acoustic locking verification signal is forbid‐
den by traffic laws (in accordance with §16 Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan‐
Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe
national road traffic regulations). The driver internal burns to occur within two hours.
of the vehicle must comply with these regula‐ There is a risk of fatal injury.
tions. In countries where the use of this func‐ # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
tion is forbidden, this function is not activa‐ dren.
ted in the vehicle and must not be activated. # If the battery compartment does not
close securely, do not use the key any
Changing the unlocking settings longer and keep it out of the reach of
children.
The key has the following adjustable unlocking
# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
functions:
attention immediately.
R unlock centrally
R unlock the driver's door
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
# To switch between settings: press and hold damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
the % and & buttons at the same time teries
for approximately six seconds until the indica‐
tor lamp flashes twice.
# To unlock the vehicle centrally when the
unlocking function is selected for the driv‐ Batteries contain pollutants. It is
er's door: press the % button a second illegal to dispose of them with the household
time. rubbish.
#

Removing and inserting the emergency key

Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.

Requirements
R you require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery

Changing the battery

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
% The anti-theft alarm system (ATA) is triggered battery changed at a qualified specialist work‐
when you unlock and open the vehicle using shop.
the emergency key (/ page 67).
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 50).
# To remove: push release catch 1 in the
direction of the arrow and simultaneously pull
emergency key 2 completely out of the key.
# To insert: push emergency key 2 com‐
pletely into the key until it engages and
release catch 1 is back in its initial position.
 Opening and closing 51

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp

and replace the battery, if necessary
(/ page 49).
# Use the emergency key element to lock and
unlock the vehicle (/ page 50).
# Have the key checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine cannot be started using the key.
Possible causes:
# Press emergency key 2 into the opening in
the key in the direction of the arrow until bat‐ R The on-board electrical system voltage is too
tery compartment cover 1 opens. When low.
doing so, do not hold battery compartment # Switch off non-essential consumers, such as
cover 1 shut. interior lighting, and try to start the engine
# Tap the key against the palm of your hand so again.
that battery 3 falls out of the battery com‐
partment. If this does not work:
# Check the starter battery and charge it, if
# Insert the new battery into the battery tray
with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a necessary (/ page 237).
lint-free cloth to do so. or
# Fit battery compartment cover 1 to the key # Jump-start the vehicle.
casing with the front lugs first and push it or
closed. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Slide emergency key 2 back into the key
(/ page 50). You have lost a key.
# Have the key deactivated at a qualified spe‐
Rectifying problems with the key cialist workshop.
# Report the loss immediately to the vehicle
It is no longer possible to lock the vehicle insurers.
using the key. # If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Possible causes:
R The doors are not closed properly.
Doors
R The central locking system has malfunc‐
tioned. Unlocking and opening the door from inside

# Close the doors properly and lock the vehicle

again.
# Lock the vehicle using the emergency key
(/ page 50) or press down the locking pins
and then close the doors.
# Have the central locking system checked as
soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle any‐
more. Door handle (example: driver's door)
Possible causes: # Pull door handle 2.
Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is
R The key battery is weak or discharged.
unlocked.
R The key is faulty.
52 Opening and closing

Centrally locking and unlocking the door from

the inside

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

due to leaving children unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could, in particular:
R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the Central locking buttons (vehicles with manually
vehicle in motion by, for example: adjustable front seats)
R releasing the parking brake.
R changing the transmission position.
R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure

to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to
extreme temperatures over an extended
Central locking buttons (vehicles with electrically
period of time, there is a risk of serious injury adjustable front seats)
or danger to life.
# Never leave persons, children in particu‐ # To lock or unlock the entire vehicle: press
lar, unattended in the vehicle. button 1 (unlock) or 2 (lock) when the
doors are closed.
You can use the central locking buttons to cen‐ Observe the following settings when locking and
trally lock and unlock the entire vehicle from the unlocking from inside:
inside.
R If the driver's or co-driver's door is open, the
The central locking buttons are located in the open door is not locked.
driver's door.
All other doors and the tailgate are locked.
R If a sliding door or the tailgate is open, only
the driver's and co-driver's doors are locked.
R You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the key.
R If the vehicle has been locked using the cen‐
tral locking button and a door is opened from
 Opening and closing 53

the inside, only the door that has been

opened is unlocked.
R If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the key, opening a door from the inside will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off
the alarm (/ page 67).

Activating/deactivating the automatic lock‐

ing mechanism
Requirements
R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
R The doors are closed.

When the ignition is switched on and the vehicle Central locking buttons (vehicles with electrically
is travelling at a speed above 15 km/h, the vehi‐ adjustable front seats)
cle locks automatically.
R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐
mometer or is being tow-started or push-star‐
ted, there is a risk of being locked out when
the function is activated.
# To activate: press and hold button 2 until
you hear a tone.
# To deactivate: press and hold button 1
until you hear a tone.

Unlocking and locking the driver's door with

the emergency key
% To lock the vehicle fully with the emergency
key, press down the locking pins of the
doors. Then lock the driver's door with the
emergency key.
Central locking buttons (vehicles with manually
adjustable front seats) # To unlock: insert the emergency key fully into
the driver's door lock and turn it anti-clock‐
wise.
# To lock: insert the emergency key fully into
the driver's door lock and turn it clockwise.
% Right-hand drive vehicles: turn the emer‐
gency key in the opposite direction for each
case.
54 Opening and closing

Sliding door Opening/closing the sliding door from inside

Opening/closing the sliding door from out‐ & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due
side to sliding door opening towards the rear
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due When you open the sliding door, the sliding
to an open sliding door which is not door could hit other people as it moves
engaged in place towards the rear of the vehicle.
# Only open the sliding door when traffic
On an incline, the sliding door can move by
itself. conditions permit.
This can cause you or other people to Requirements
become trapped. R The child safety lock is deactivated.
# Always make sure that the open sliding
door is engaged. To do so, open the slid‐ Opening
ing door to the stop.

* NOTE Damage to the sliding door due to

incorrect use
Using the lower guide of the sliding door (car‐
riage) as a step can result in damage to the
trim and/or mechanical components of the
sliding door.
# Do not use the lower guide of the sliding
door (carriage) as a step. # Pull back rocker switch 1.
If the door is locked, locking pin 3 pops up.
Opening The sliding door unlocks and opens.
# Push back the sliding door using door handle
2 until it engages.
# Check the sliding door catch.
Closing
# Push rocker switch 1 forwards.
The sliding door is released from its catch.
# Push the sliding door forwards using door
handle 2 and close it.
The sliding door is equipped with an active
retainer, which engages when the door is opened Electric sliding door
as far as it will go. Function of the electric sliding door
# Pull door handle 1 in the direction of the
arrow. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
The sliding door opens. despite reversing function
# Push back the sliding door using door handle
The reversing feature does not react:
1 until it engages.
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
# Check the sliding door catch.
R over the last 8 mm of the closing move‐
Closing ment
# Pull the sliding door by door handle 1. The reversing feature therefore cannot pre‐
The sliding door is released from its catch. vent someone being trapped in these situa‐
# Push the sliding door firmly forwards using tions.
door handle 1 and close it.
 Opening and closing 55

# Make sure that no body parts are in the The automatic blockage detection with reversing
closing area. function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for
your attentiveness when closing the electrical
If someone becomes trapped, take the follow‐ sliding door.
ing actions:
If an obstacle is detected, the display shows the
R press the 5 button on the key or Left-hand electric sliding door Obstruction detec-
R pull the exterior door handle or ted message, for example, and five warning tones
R press the appropriate sliding door button sound.
in the centre console or % In unfavourable operating conditions, e.g.
R press the button on the door sill or frost, ice or heavy soiling, press and hold the
appropriate sliding door button. The electric
R pull the rocker switch on the door handle
sliding door moves with increased force.
Observe that in such circumstances, the
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due blockage detection is less sensitive. To stop
to sliding door opening towards the rear the movement, release the sliding door but‐
ton.
When you open the sliding door, the sliding
door could hit other people as it moves
towards the rear of the vehicle. Opening and closing the electrical sliding
# Only open the sliding door when traffic
door from the inside
conditions permit.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due
to sliding door opening towards the rear
* NOTE Damage to the sliding door due to
incorrect use When you open the sliding door, the sliding
door could hit other people as it moves
Using the lower guide of the sliding door (car‐ towards the rear of the vehicle.
riage) as a step can result in damage to the # Only open the sliding door when traffic
trim and/or mechanical components of the
conditions permit.
sliding door.
# Do not use the lower guide of the sliding
door (carriage) as a step.

You must reset the electric sliding door if there

has been a malfunction or a drop in voltage
(/ page 57).
Your vehicle can be equipped with an electric
sliding door on the left and/or right-hand side.
You can open and close the sliding door with
these controls:
R Sliding door buttons on the centre console
R Sliding door button on the door sill (B-pillar)
R Door handle (inside or outside)
R Key

The sliding door is equipped with automatic

blockage detection with reversing function. If a
solid object blocks or restricts the sliding door
during the automatic closing process, the sliding
door opens again automatically. If the sliding
door is obstructed during the opening procedure,
it moves back a few centimetres in the opposite
direction and stops.
56 Opening and closing

Opening If you use sliding door button 1 or 2 in the

centre console you will hear two warning sig‐
nals during the opening procedure.
The indicator lamp in sliding door button 1
or 2 in the centre console flashes for the
duration of automatic operation.
The indicator lamp in sliding door button 1
or 2 in the centre console is lit whenever
the appropriate sliding door is open. Depend‐
ing on the vehicle equipment, the display can
also show the Sliding door open message.
Closing
# Briefly press appropriate sliding door button
1 or 2 in the centre console.
or
# Press sliding door button 5 in the door sill.

or
# Briefly push rocker switch 3 forwards.
The sliding door is released from its lock and
automatic operation is started. The sliding
door closes.
If you use sliding door button 1 or 2 in the
centre console you will hear two warning sig‐
nals during the closing procedure.
1 Sliding door button for the sliding door on the The indicator lamp in sliding door button 1
or 2 in the centre console goes out when‐
left-hand side
ever the corresponding sliding door is closed.
2 Sliding door button for the sliding door on the
right-hand side Interrupting automatic operation
3 Rocker switch # Press corresponding sliding door button 1
4 Locking knob or 2 in the centre console again.
5 Sliding door button in the door sill or
# Press sliding door button 5 in the door sill
You can only open a sliding door with sliding door
button 5 in the door sill or with rocker switch again.
3 on the door handle if the child-proof lock has or
not been activated. # Briefly pull back rocker switch 3.
The sliding door is equipped with an active
retainer, which engages the door at the end stop Opening/closing the electric sliding door
when opened. with the key
# Briefly press appropriate sliding door button
1 or 2 in the centre console. % If the vehicle is fitted with two sliding doors,
the 5 button on the key can only be used
or to open or close one of the two sliding doors
# Press sliding door button 5 in the door sill. (/ page 57).
or # To unlock: briefly press the 5 button on
# Briefly pull back rocker switch 3. the key.
If the door is locked, locking knob 4 pops # To open: press and hold the 5 button on
up. The sliding door unlocks, automatic oper‐ the key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
ation is started and the sliding door opens. You will hear two acoustic signals and the
sliding door will open automatically.
 Opening and closing 57

# To close: press and hold the 5 button on

the key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
You will hear two acoustic signals and the
sliding door will close automatically.
# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly
press the 5 button on the key.
The sliding door stops moving.
% In unfavourable operating conditions, e.g.
frost, ice or heavy soiling, press and hold the
appropriate sliding door button. The electric
sliding door moves with increased force.
Observe that in such circumstances, the
obstacle detection is less sensitive. To stop
the movement, release the sliding door but‐
ton.
1 Sliding door button for the sliding door on the
Opening/closing the electrical sliding door left-hand side
from the outside 2 Sliding door button for the sliding door on the
right-hand side
# Press and hold sliding door button 1 or 2
in the centre console for the appropriate slid‐
ing door until the sliding door is closed and
four tones have sounded.
The Left-hand electric sliding door key pro-
grammed/Right-hand electric sliding door
key programmedmessage appears in the dis‐
play.

# To open: pull door handle 1. Resetting the electric sliding door

The sliding door unlocks, automatic operation
You must reset the electric sliding door if there
is started and the sliding door opens. In addi‐
has been a malfunction or a drop in voltage.
tion, you will hear two warning signals.
# If the sliding door is open: close it by hand.
# To close: pull door handle 1.
The sliding door is released from its lock and # Using the corresponding 5 or 4 sliding
automatic operation is started. The sliding door button on the centre console, open the
door closes. sliding door at least 40 cm and then close the
sliding door completely.
# To interrupt automatic operation: pull door
handle 1 again. # When the sliding door is closed, open the slid‐
ing door fully using the corresponding 5
or 4 sliding door button on the centre
Programming the key button for the sliding console.
door The sliding door is reset and operational.
Requirements
R The vehicle is equipped with two electric slid‐ Rectifying problems with the electric sliding
ing doors. door
R The sliding door to be programmed is open.
The electric sliding door is locked in place.
R The ignition is switched on. Unfavourable operating conditions, e.g. frost, ice
The 5 button on the key can be programmed. or heavy soiling, may obstruct the sliding door.
Program the 5 button to open the right or left
sliding door.
58 Opening and closing

# Press and hold the sliding door button until

the sliding door has opened or closed.
The sliding door moves with increased force.
Observe that in such circumstances, the
blockage detection is less sensitive. To stop
the movement, release the sliding door but‐
ton.
# Remove the cause of the blockage at the ear‐
liest opportunity.
# To close: pull the tailgate firmly downwards
Tailgate by loop 2 and close it from outside.
Opening and closing the tailgate Opening the tailgate in an emergency
If the battery voltage is low or the voltage supply
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning is interrupted, the tailgate cannot be opened.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust In an emergency, you can open the tailgate using
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust the release catch for service purposes.
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐ # Prise off the cover on the lower part of the
gate is open when the engine is running, tailgate with a suitable tool, e.g. the screw‐
especially if the vehicle is in motion. driver from the vehicle tool kit.
# Always switch off the engine before
# Insert the screwdriver into the opening and
opening the tailgate. move the release lever until the tailgate
# Never drive with the tailgate open. unlocks and opens.
# Lift the tailgate upwards.
* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by
obstacles above the vehicle
EASY-PACK tailgate
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
when it is opened. Notes on the EASY-PACK tailgate
# Make sure that there is sufficient space
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
behind and above the tailgate.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
% You will find details of the tailgate opening gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
dimensions under "Technical data" gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐
(/ page 276). gate is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate.
# Never drive with the tailgate open.

* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by

obstacles above the vehicle
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
when it is opened.
# Make sure that there is sufficient space
behind and above the tailgate.

% You will find details of the tailgate opening

dimensions under "Technical data"
(/ page 276).
# To open: push button 1 on the handle and
raise the tailgate.
 Opening and closing 59

Obstruction detection with reversing function Opening

The tailgate is equipped with automatic object
detection with reversing function. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the tailgate during the auto‐
matic closing process, the tailgate opens again
automatically. The automatic object detection
with reversing function is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attentiveness when closing
the tailgate.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

despite reversing function
The reversing feature does not react:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R over the last 8 mm of the closing move‐
ment
# Press button 1 in the handle and step out of
The reversing feature therefore cannot pre‐
the swinging range of the tailgate.
vent someone being trapped in these situa‐
tions. or
# Make sure that no body parts are in the # Press the q button on the key for longer
closing area. than 0.5 seconds.
Automatic operation is started. The tailgate
If someone is trapped:
opens and swings upwards.
R press the q button on the key or
In addition, you will hear two warning signals.
R press the closing button on the tailgate or
Closing
R pull the handle of the tailgate

Opening and closing the EASY-PACK tailgate

Requirements
R The rear window is closed.
R The tailgate is unlocked.
R There are no persons within the swinging
range of the tailgate.
R The q button on the key is programmed to
open and close the tailgate (/ page 61).

# Press button 2 in the tailgate and step out

of the swinging range of the tailgate.
or
# Press the q button on the key for longer
than 0.5 seconds.
Automatic operation is started and the tail‐
gate closes.
During closing, closing button 2 flashes and
two warning tones sound.
60 Opening and closing

Interrupting automatic operation Opening and closing the rear window

# Press button 1 in the handle again.

or & DANGER Risk of poisoning from exhaust

gases
# Press closing button 2 in the tailgate again.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
or
gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
# Press the q button on the key again for
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the rear
longer than 0.5 seconds. window is open when the engine is running,
Adjusting the opening angle of the tailgate especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before
Setting the end position opening the rear window.
You can set the opening angle of the tailgate by
# Never drive with the rear window open.
saving the desired position as the end position.
# Open the tailgate and stop automatic opera‐ Requirements
tion in the desired position. R The vehicle or load compartment is unlocked
or and the tailgate is closed.
# Open the tailgate and manually swing it into R To open using the key:
the desired position. - The vehicle is equipped with an EASY-
# Press and hold the closing button q on PACK tailgate and the q button on the
the tailgate until the confirmation tone key is programmed to open the rear win‐
sounds once. dow (/ page 61) or the vehicle is
The current position of the tailgate has been equipped with the Bunk Package.
saved as the end position.
Opening
Resetting to the maximum opening angle
# Open the tailgate.
# Press and hold the closing button q on
the tailgate until the confirmation tone
sounds twice.
The saved end position has been deleted and
the tailgate opens again to the maximum
extent.
Resetting the tailgate
You must reset the tailgate if there has been a
malfunction or an interruption in the voltage sup‐
ply.
# If the tailgate is open: close the tailgate by
hand.
# Briefly press the button in the handle of the
tailgate, step out of the swinging range of the
# Press the q button on the key.
tailgate and open the tailgate. or
# When the tailgate is fully open, press the # Press button 1 on the handle on the rear
q closing button in the tailgate and step window.
out of the swinging range of the tailgate.
Closing
The tailgate closes. When the tailgate is fully
closed, it is reset and operational. # Swing the rear window down and push it
closed.
% When the q button of the key is program‐
med for operating the tailgate (/ page 61),
you can also use the key to open and close
the tailgate.
 Opening and closing 61

Programming the key button for the tailgate # Activate the child safety lock for the
or rear window rear side windows.
Requirements # When leaving the vehicle, always take
R The tailgate and the rear window are closed. the key with you and lock the vehicle.
R The ignition is switched on. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
If your vehicle is fitted with an EASY-PACK tail‐
gate, you can program the q button on the
key either to open/close the tailgate or to open & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure
the rear window. to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
# Press the buttons in the handle of the tailgate If people, particularly children, are exposed to
and in the handle of the rear window simulta‐ extreme temperatures over an extended
neously for approximately five seconds. period of time, there is a risk of serious injury
After successfully changing the function, the or danger to life.
vehicle turn signal lamps flash once. # Never leave persons, children in particu‐
# Check the function of the q button on the lar, unattended in the vehicle.
key.

Side window
Opening and closing the side windows

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

when opening a side window
When you open a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
# When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
# If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or pull it in order to
close the side window again. # To open manually: press and hold button 1
or 2.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped # To close manually: pull and hold button 1
when closing a side window or 2.
When closing a side window, body parts could
The windows in the front doors can also be oper‐
be trapped in the closing area in the process.
ated automatically.
# When closing, make sure that no body
# To open completely: briefly press button 1
parts are in the closing area.
or 2 beyond the point of resistance.
# If someone is trapped, release the but‐
Automatic operation will start.
ton immediately or press the button in
# To close completely: briefly pull button 1
order to reopen the side window.
or 2 beyond the point of resistance.
Automatic operation will start.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly
when children operate the side windows
press or pull button 1 or 2 again.
Children could become trapped if they oper‐
ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐ You can still operate the side windows when the
tended. vehicle is parked. This function will remain availa‐
ble for around five minutes or until you open a
front door.
62 Opening and closing

Automatic reversing function of the side win‐

dows
If an object blocks a side window during the clos‐
ing process, the side window will open again
automatically. The automatic reversing function is
only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten‐
tiveness.
# During the closing process, make sure that no
body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
Button in the rear (example: left-hand side of the
R during resetting. vehicle)
1 Opens and closes the rear left pop-out win‐
The reversing function cannot prevent some‐
one from becoming trapped in these situa‐ dow
tions. 2 Opens and closes the rear right pop-out win‐
dow
# During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing 3 Child safety lock for electric rear pop-out
area. window (/ page 48)
4 Opens and closes the pop-out window
# If someone becomes trapped, press the
W button to open the side window You can operate the pop-out window with button
again. 4 only if the child safety lock is not activated.
# To start automatic operation: press/pull
the corresponding button beyond the point of
Opening and closing the pop-out windows
resistance.
Requirements: # To stop automatic operation: press/pull the
R The power supply or the ignition is switched corresponding button beyond the point of
on. resistance again.

Ventilating the vehicle before starting a jour‐

ney (convenience opening)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when

opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
# When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
# Release the button immediately if some‐
body becomes trapped.

Example: driver's door control panel The "convenience opening" function can only be
operated using the key. The key must be in close
proximity to the driver's or co-driver door.
 Opening and closing 63

# Press and hold the % button on the key. Rectifying problems with the side windows
The following functions are performed:
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
R the vehicle is unlocked
fatally injured if reversing protection is
R the side windows are opened not activated
R the panoramic sliding sunroof is opened If you close a side window again immediately
R the hinged windows are opened after it has been blocked, the side window
R the seat ventilation for the driver's seat is will close with increased or maximum force.
switched on The reversing function is then not active and
body parts may become trapped.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release
# Make sure that no parts of the body are
the % button.
in the closing area.
# To stop the closing process, release the
Closing the side windows from the outside
button or press the button again to
(convenience closing) reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not You cannot open or close a side window all
paying attention during convenience clos‐ the way.
ing
# Check to see if there are any objects in the
When the convenience closing feature is window guide.
operating, parts of the body could become
# Reset the side windows (/ page 63).
trapped in the closing area of the side win‐
dows.
# When the convenience closing feature is Panorama sliding sunroof
operating, monitor the entire closing Notes on the panorama sliding sunroof
process and make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers
to the panorama sliding sunroof.
# Press and hold the & button on the key.
The following functions are performed: & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when the sliding sunroof is being opened
R the vehicle is locked and closed
R the side windows are closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range
R the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed of movement.
# To interrupt convenience closing: release # During opening and closing, make sure
the & button. that no body parts are in the range of
movement.
# Release the button immediately if some‐
Adjusting the side windows
body becomes trapped.
The side windows must be readjusted after a mal‐ or
function or a voltage supply interruption.
# Briefly press the button in any direction
# Switch on the power supply (/ page 136).
during automatic operation.
# Push both buttons on the power window and The opening or closing process will be
hold for approximately one second after the stopped.
side window has closed.
# If the side windows remain closed when you & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid‐
release the buttons, they have been reset cor‐ ing sunroof is operated by children
rectly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps
described for the open side windows. Children operating the sliding sunroof could
get caught in the moving parts, particularly if
unattended.
64 Opening and closing

# Never leave children unattended in the & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
vehicle. even with the reversing feature active
# When leaving the vehicle, always take In particular, the reversing function will not
the key with you and lock the vehicle. react:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
R over the last 4 mm of the closing path
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof R during resetting
to malfunction.
R when you close the sliding sunroof again
# Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
manually immediately after automatic
of snow and ice. reversing

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding

# During the closing process, make sure
objects that no body parts are in the closing
area.
Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof # Release the button immediately if some‐
may damage the sealing strips. body becomes trapped.
# Do not allow anything to protrude from or
the sliding sunroof. # Press the button in any direction during
the automatic closing process.
* NOTE Damage to on-board electronics The closing process will be stopped.
caused by the ingress of water
Water may enter the vehicle interior when the Opening and closing the panorama sliding
sliding sunroof is being cleaned. sunroof
This may damage the on-board electronics.
Requirements
# Clean the sliding sunroof only when it is
R The power supply has been switched on.
closed.

% When the sliding sunroof is open, resonance

noise may also occur in addition to the usual
airflow noises. This is caused by minor pres‐
sure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. To
prevent or stop these noises, alter the posi‐
tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side win‐
dow slightly.
Sliding sunroof reversing function
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic
reversing function. If a solid object prevents or
hinders the closing process, the sliding sunroof
will open again automatically. The automatic
reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
stitute for your attentiveness in the process of
closing the sliding sunroof. # To raise (vent position): press the 3 but‐
ton.
# To open: pull back the 3 button.
# To close and lower: pull down the 3 but‐
ton.
# To start automatic operation: push or pull
the 3 button beyond the point of resist‐
ance and release it.
 Opening and closing 65

# To stop automatic operation: push or pull Requirements

the 3 button beyond the point of resist‐ R The power supply has been switched on.
ance and release it.
Reversing function of the roller sunblind
You will still be able to operate the sliding sunroof You can open and close the roller sunblind only
if you switch off the engine or remove the key. when the sliding sunroof is closed.
This function will remain available for 30 seconds The roller sunblinds are fitted with an automatic
or until you open a front door. reversing function. If a solid object prevents or
When the power supply is switched off, the slid‐ hinders the closing process, the roller sunblind
ing sunroof will close automatically in the follow‐ will open again automatically. The automatic
ing situations: reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
R If it starts to rain
stitute for your attentiveness in the process of
closing the roller sunblinds.
R In the event of extreme outside temperatures
# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
R After six hours that no body parts are in the range of move‐
R If there is a malfunction in the power supply ment.
The sliding sunroof will remain raised at the rear & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
to allow the vehicle interior to continue to be ven‐ despite reversing function
tilated.
In particular, the reversing function will not
The sliding sunroof will not close in the following
react:
situations:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear.
R when you close the roller sunblind again
R If the sliding sunroof is obstructed.
manually immediately after automatic
R If it is not raining on the field of the rain sen‐ reversing
sor on the windscreen because the vehicle is
underneath a bridge, for example. # When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range
If the sliding sunroof closes via the rain closing of movement.
function and is obstructed in the process, it will # Release the button immediately if some‐
open again slightly. The rain closing function will body becomes trapped.
then be disabled.
or
# Press the button in any direction during
Opening and closing the roller sunblinds of the automatic closing process.
the sliding sunroof The closing process will be stopped.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped Opening and closing roller sunblinds
when the roller sunblind is being opened
and closed
Body parts may become trapped between the
roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.
# When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the roller sun‐
blind's range of movement.
# Release the button immediately if some‐
body becomes trapped.
or
# Briefly press the button in any direction
during automatic operation.
The opening or closing process will be
stopped.
66 Opening and closing

You can close the roller sunblinds only when the Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
sliding sunroof is closed.
# To open: press the 3 button. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
The roller sunblinds will open, and the sliding fatal injuries when closing the sliding
sunroof will then be raised into the vent posi‐ sunroof again
tion. If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi‐
or ately after it has been blocked or reset, the
# Pull back the 3 button. sliding sunroof will close with increased or
The roller sunblinds will open. maximum force.
# To close: pull down the 3 button. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
When the sliding sunroof is closed, the roller in the closing area.
sunblinds will close. # Release the button immediately if some‐
body becomes trapped.
If you push or pull the 3 button beyond the
point of resistance and release it, you will start or
automatic operation in the direction in question. # Briefly press the button in any direction
You can stop automatic operation by pushing or during the automatic closing process.
pulling the button again. The closing process will be stopped.
Opening and closing roller sunblinds from the The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you
rear cannot detect the cause.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing
and opens again slightly:
# Immediately after the sliding sunroof has
been obstructed, pull the 3 button down
again to the point of resistance until the slid‐
ing sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with
increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and

opens again slightly:
# Immediately after the sliding sunroof has
been obstructed, pull the 3 button down
again to the point of resistance until the slid‐
ing sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed without the
# Push or pull button 1 to the point of resist‐
automatic reversing function.
ance and hold it until the roller sunblind or
the sliding sunroof has reached the desired
position. Anti-theft prevention
# Automatic operation: push or pull button 1 Function of the immobiliser
beyond the point of resistance and release it.
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being
With the sliding sunroof, a complete opening or started without the correct key.
closing process will always pass through "vent
position", a fixed intermediate position. You will The immobiliser is automatically activated when
need to operate button 1 twice to execute a the ignition is switched off, and deactivated when
complete opening or closing process. the ignition is switched on.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. If the key is left
inside the vehicle, anyone can start the engine.
 Opening and closing 67

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) # Lock the vehicle with the key.
Indicator lamp 1 in the overhead control
Function of ATA (Anti-theft Alarm system) panel flashes.
If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in the following situations: Deactivating
# Unlock the vehicle with the key.
R when opening a door
or
R when opening the vehicle with the emergency
# Insert the key into the ignition lock.
key
Indicator lamp 1 in the overhead control
R when opening the bonnet panel goes out.
R when opening the tailgate
Stopping the alarm
After locking the vehicle with the key, the ATA # Press the % or & button on the key.
system is automatically primed. or
# Insert the key into the ignition lock.
The alarm stops.

Function of tow-away protection

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the incli‐
nation of the vehicle changes, e.g. when lifted on
one side, and tow-away protection is primed.

Priming/deactivating tow-away protection

When the ATA system is primed, indicator lamp
1 flashes in the overhead control panel. Requirements
ATA is automatically deactivated in the following R The doors are closed.
situations: R The tailgate is closed.
R After unlocking the vehicle with the key.
Priming
R When the key is inserted into the ignition
# Lock the vehicle with the key.
lock.
Tow-away protection is automatically primed
% The alarm is not deactivated, even if you after about 50 seconds.
immediately close the open door that has
Deactivating
triggered it, for example.
# Open the vehicle with the key.
Priming/deactivating ATA (Anti-theft Alarm or
system) # Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Priming Tow-away protection is deactivated.

# Close all the doors.

68 Opening and closing

Deactivating Priming
# Make sure that nothing (such as mascots or
coat hangers) is hanging on the rear-view mir‐
ror or on the grab handles. This will prevent
false alarms.
# Lock the vehicle with the key.
The interior motion sensor is primed after
approximately 20 seconds.
Deactivating
# Unlock the vehicle with the key.

or
# Insert the key into the ignition lock.
The interior motion sensor automatically
switches off.
Deactivating
# Remove the key from the ignition lock.
# Press button 1.
When the button is released, indicator lamp
2 in the button lights up for approximately
three seconds.
# Lock the vehicle with the key.
Tow-away protection is deactivated.
Tow-away protection remains deactivated until
you lock the vehicle again.
In the following situations, a false alarm can
occur:
R when loading and/or transporting the vehicle
on a ferry or car transporter, for example
R when parking the vehicle on a movable sur‐
face, such as a split-level garage # Remove the key from the ignition lock.
Deactivate tow-away protection in these situa‐ # Press button 1.
tions. When the button is released, indicator lamp
2 in the button lights up for approximately
three seconds.
Function of interior protection
# Lock the vehicle with the key.
If the primed interior motion sensor detects The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
motion in the vehicle interior, a visual and acous‐
tic alarm is triggered. This can happen if some‐ Interior protection remains deactivated until you
one reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. lock the vehicle again.
In the following situations, a false alarm can
Priming and deactivating the interior motion occur:
sensor R if there are people or animals remaining
inside
Requirements
R when transporting the vehicle on a ferry or
R The side windows are closed.
car transporter, for example
R The doors are closed.
R The tailgate is closed.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor in these sit‐
uations.
 Seats and stowage 69

Notes on the correct driver's seat position R You have a good overview of the traffic condi‐
tions.
& WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set‐ R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in and passes across the centre of your shoul‐
motion der and across your hips in the pelvic area.
You could lose control of the vehicle in partic‐
ular in the following situations: Seats
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head Adjusting the front seat mechanically
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
ror while the vehicle is in motion. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ the seats are adjusted by children
cle is in motion.
Children could become trapped if they adjust
# Before starting the engine: adjust the the seats, particularly when unattended.
driver's seat, head restraints, steering # When leaving the vehicle, always take
wheel and mirror in particular and fas‐ the key with you and lock the vehicle.
ten your seat belt. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set‐

tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in partic‐
ular in the following situations:
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
ror while the vehicle is in motion.
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion.
# Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, head restraints, steering
Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel and mirror in particular and fas‐
wheel 3, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 1: ten your seat belt.
R You are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur‐
R You are sitting in an upright position. ing seat adjustment
R Your thighs are gently supported by the seat When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
cushion. occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can
seat guide rail.
reach the pedals easily. # Make sure when adjusting a seat that

R The back of your head is supported at eye

no one has any body parts in the sweep
level by the middle part of the head restraint of the seat.
R You can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent. & WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
R You can move your legs without any restric‐
tions. The driver's seat may move unexpectedly
while driving.
R You can see all of the instrument cluster dis‐
plays well This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
70 Seats and stowage

# Always make sure that the driver's seat The amplifier can become hot during opera‐
is engaged before starting the vehicle. tion.
You could burn yourself if you touch the
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to amplifier.
the front seat being positioned too close # Do not reach underneath the driver's
to the cockpit seat.
The front airbags can also injure the occu‐ # Adjust the driver's seat carefully.
pants in the front of the vehicle.
# Always adjust the front seats so they * NOTE Damage to the seats and the seat
are as far away as possible from the heating due to fluids, sharp objects or
front airbags. insulating materials
# In addition, observe the notes on cor‐
To avoid damage to the seats or seat heating,
rect seat adjustment. take the following steps:
# Do not spill any fluids onto the seats. If
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to something does get spilt onto the seats,
incorrect seat position dry the seats as quickly as possible.
The seat belt will not offer the intended level # If the seat covers are moist or wet, do
of protection if you have not moved the seat not switch the seat heating on. Do not
backrest to an almost vertical position. use the seat heating to dry the seats.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt # Clean the seats as recommended. See
and injure yourself. the "Cleaning and care" section.
# Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ # Do not transport any heavy loads on the
ning your journey. seats. Do not place any sharp objects
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is such as knives, nails or tools on the
in an almost vertical position and that seats. Use the seats only for people if
the shoulder section of your seat belt is possible.
routed across the centre of your shoul‐ # While the seat heating is in operation,
der. do not cover the seats with insulating
materials such as blankets, coats, bags,
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head protective covers, child seats or booster
restraints not being fitted or being adjus‐ seats.
ted incorrectly
Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints fit‐
ted.
# Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
1 Seat fore-and-aft position adjustment
2 Seat angle adjustment
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot ampli‐
3 Seat height adjustment
fiers under the driver's seat
4 Seat backrest adjustment
Vehicles with amplifiers under the driver's
seat:
 Seats and stowage 71

# Pull lever 1 upwards and slide the seat for‐ & WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set‐
wards or back until the desired position has tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in
been reached. motion
# Release lever 1 and push the seat back or
forwards until you hear the seat engage. You could lose control of the vehicle in partic‐
ular in the following situations:
% For front swivel seats, the lever in position
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
1 is used to release the swivel seat. The
lever to adjust the fore-and-aft position is in restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
the form of a bar in front of the seat ror while the vehicle is in motion.
(/ page 74). R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion.
Adjusting the seat height
# Pull or push lever 3 repeatedly until the
# Before starting the engine: adjust the
desired seat height has been reached. driver's seat, head restraints, steering
wheel and mirror in particular and fas‐
Adjusting the seat backrest ten your seat belt.
# Turn handwheel 4 forwards.
The seat backrest will move to a vertical posi‐ & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur‐
tion. ing seat adjustment
# Turn handwheel 4 backwards. When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
The seat backrest will tilt back. occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
Adjusting the seat angle seat guide rail.
# Make sure when adjusting a seat that
# Turn handwheel 2 forwards.
no one has any body parts in the sweep
The front of the seat cushion will tilt down.
of the seat.
# Turn handwheel 2 backwards.
The front of the seat cushion will tilt up. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐
dren in the vehicle".
Adjusting the front seat electrically
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the front seat being positioned too close
to the cockpit
the seats are adjusted by children
The front airbags can also injure the occu‐
Children could become trapped if they adjust
pants in the front of the vehicle.
the seats, particularly when unattended.
# Always adjust the front seats so they
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
are as far away as possible from the
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
front airbags.
# Never leave children unattended in the
# In addition, observe the notes on cor‐
vehicle.
rect seat adjustment.
The seats can be adjusted when there is no key in
the ignition lock. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat
backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself.
# Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
72 Seats and stowage

the shoulder section of your seat belt is # Do not transport any heavy loads on the
routed across the centre of your shoul‐ seats. Do not place any sharp objects
der. such as knives, nails or tools on the
seats. Use the seats only for people if
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head possible.
restraints not being fitted or being adjus‐ # While the seat heating is in operation,
ted incorrectly do not cover the seats with insulating
materials such as blankets, coats, bags,
If head restraints have not been installed or
protective covers, child seats or booster
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
seats.
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when Requirements
braking. R The ignition is switched on or the door is
# Always drive with the head restraints fit‐ open.
ted.
# Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the

front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to set the height and inclination of the head
restraints to the correct position.

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot ampli‐

fiers under the driver's seat
Vehicles with amplifiers under the driver's
seat:
The amplifier can become hot during opera‐
1 Head restraint height adjustment
tion.
2 Seat backrest inclination adjustment
You could burn yourself if you touch the
3 Seat height adjustment
amplifier.
4 Seat angle adjustment
# Do not reach underneath the driver's
5 Seat fore-and-aft position adjustment
seat.
# Adjust the driver's seat carefully. # Adjust the seat using buttons 1 to 5 on
the door trim.
* NOTE Damage to the seats and the seat If the ignition is not switched on, you can adjust
heating due to fluids, sharp objects or the seat within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehi‐
insulating materials cle.
To avoid damage to the seats or seat heating, % Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if PRE-SAFE®
take the following steps: intervenes, the front passenger seat will
# Do not spill any fluids onto the seats. If automatically be adjusted from a less favour‐
something does get spilt onto the seats, able position into one that offers better pro‐
dry the seats as quickly as possible. tection. The front passenger seat can be
readjusted only after the hazardous situation
# If the seat covers are moist or wet, do
is over. Information about the system can be
not switch the seat heating on. Do not
found under "PRE-SAFE® System"
use the seat heating to dry the seats.
(/ page 36).
# Clean the seats as recommended. See
% You can save the settings for the seat with
the "Cleaning and care" section.
the memory function (/ page 73).
 Seats and stowage 73

Setting 4-way lumbar support & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the

memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti‐
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.

The memory function can be used when the igni‐

tion is switched off.

* NOTE Damage to the seat when moving

into a stored position
If the seat is moved out of the fully reclined
1 Higher position into a stored seat position, it can col‐
2 Weaker lide with other vehicle parts.
3 Lower This can damage the seat.
4 Stronger
# Before moving the seat into a stored
# Use buttons 1 to 4 adjust the backrest position, move the seat backrest into an
contour individually to your spine. upright position.

Storing seat settings

Operating the memory function
% Vehicles with luxury rear seat: the memory
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the function is used identically to the front seats.
memory function is used while driving Two memory positions are available.
Seat settings for up to three people can be stored
If you use the memory function on the driv‐
and called up using the memory function.
er's side while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments The following settings are stored as a single
being made. memory preset:
# Only use the memory function on the R the position of the seat, seat backrest and
driver's side when the vehicle is station‐ head restraint
ary. R additionally for the driver's side, the position
of both exterior mirrors
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when
adjusting the seat with the memory func‐
tion
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particu‐
larly children – could become trapped.
# During the adjustment process of the
memory function, make sure that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of
the seat.
# If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐
ately release the memory function posi‐
tion button.
The adjustment process is stopped.
74 Seats and stowage

# Adjust the seat to the desired position. # Adjust the steering wheel in such a way that
# Adjust the exterior mirror to the desired posi‐ there is sufficient clearance to rotate and
tion. adjust the driver's seat (/ page 96).
# Briefly press memory button V and then # Push lever 1 in the direction of the arrow.
press preset position button 4, T or The turning device will be unlocked.
U within three seconds. # Rotate the seat in the desired direction.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are # If there is a risk of collision with the centre
stored. console or the B‑pillar, pull lever 2 upwards
# To call up: press and hold preset position and move the front seat forwards or back‐
button 4, T or U until the seat and wards into the desired position. Then release
the exterior mirrors are in the stored position. lever 2.
# In the desired position, make sure that the
Rotating the front seats seat has engaged in the direction of rotation
and the longitudinal direction.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
due to the driver's seat and front Adjusting armrests
passenger seat not being engaged
In this situation, the restraint systems cannot
perform their intended protective function.
# Engage the driver's seat‑ and front
passenger seat in the direction of travel
before starting the engine.

* NOTE Damage to the seats due to colli‐

sion with adjacent car parts
The seats can collide with adjacent car parts # Fold the armrest upwards more than 45° in
when they are rotated. position 2.
This can damage the seats. The armrest will be unlocked.
# When rotating the seats, make sure # Fold the armrest forwards 3 as far as it will
there is sufficient clearance. go.
# Slowly fold the armrest upwards into the
required position.
# To fold the armrest upwards: if necessary,
fold the armrest upwards more than 90° in
position 1.

Rear seats and rear bench seat

Notes on the rear seats
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
You can rotate the driver's and front passenger seats and bench seats in the rear compartment:
seats by 50° and 180°. The seats engage both in R Standard rear seat
and opposite to the direction of travel as well as
at 50° to the exit. R Luxury rear seat

# When rotating the seat, open the respective R Comfort rear bench seat
front door in order to avoid a collision with R Seat/bunk combination
the door trim.
 Seats and stowage 75

Bench seat anchorage age. The tool is available as a Mercedes-Benz

accessory or as part of a seat/bunk combi‐
& WARNING Risk of accident‑ and injury if nation.
the seat is not engaged
Seating variants
If a seat is not engaged, it may be thrown
about while the vehicle is moving. & WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrect
# Always make sure that all seats are installation of the rear bench seats
engaged as described. If the rear bench seats are incorrectly instal‐
led, the integrated safety precautions in the
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as rear bench seats cannot work as intended.
a result of rear bench seat not being # Install the rear bench seats only as
engaged described.
If the rear bench seat is not engaged, it may # Only use rear bench seats approved for
be flung around during travel. your vehicle.
# Always make sure that the rear bench
seat is engaged as described. Depending on the type of seat anchorage in the
vehicle floor, you can install the following seating
Keep the seat anchorages in the vehicle floor free variants:
of dirt and objects at all times to ensure that the R Rear bench seats with two or three seats
seat engages securely.
R Single rear seats
If the indicator tab of the anchorage is not retrac‐
R Seat/bunk combination with three seats
ted into the seat leg, the seat is not correctly
engaged. Engage the seat again. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can fit
the rear bench seats and the rear seats on the
first and/or second rear seat row.
The seating variants shown are permitted only if
the conditions specified below for safe rear seat‐
ing are met. Other seating variants are not per‐
mitted and may endanger the occupants.
When using only the individual seats, the rear
seats can be installed facing in the direction of
travel in all combinations and configurations.

Example: seat rail system with quick-locking

mechanism
Guide rails 1 of the seat rail system can be used
for the following purposes:
R For mounting up to two rear seat rows
R For mounting both rear seat rows facing one
another
R For mounting rear seats and rear bench seats
R For moving rear seats and rear bench seats

% When you remove a rear bench seat or a

seat, the seat slider may slide into a guide
rail. The seat sliders will then no longer be
parallel in the guide rails. In this case, you
will no longer be able to fit the respective
seating. The seat sliders must be moved only
using a special tool or at a qualified specialist
workshop in order to prevent the risk of dam‐
76 Seats and stowage

Seating variants facing in the direction of travel Seating variants for the rear seats and rear bench
seats facing in the direction of travel

Seating variants for the rear bench seats in the

face-to-face position

Seating variants for the rear bench seats facing in

the direction of travel
 Seats and stowage 77

Seating variants for the rear seats and rear bench Seating variants in the face-to-face position, part
seats facing in the direction of travel, part 1 1

Seating variants for the rear seats and rear bench Seating variants in the face-to-face position, part
seats facing in the direction of travel, part 2 2
EE Easy entry and exit feature – EASY-ENTRY
S/L Seat/bunk combination
BV Bed extension
78 Seats and stowage

Please observe the following conditions for safe & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due
rear seating: to the rear bench seat not being engaged
R Use only rear seats and rear bench seats
The rear bench seat will not engage when fol‐
approved for your vehicle.
ded forward. The rear bench seat may inad‐
R A rear seat or rear bench seat may be fitted vertently fold back while the vehicle is accel‐
facing the rear only if each seat has a seat erating, braking or changing direction sud‐
opposite it – face-to-face position. denly or in the event of an accident, forexam‐
R Fit luxury rear seats in the first rear seat row ple.
and in the direction of travel only. People within the sweep of the rear bench
R Vehicles with a seat rail system in the vehicle seat may become trapped.
floor: # Always fold back a rear bench seat that
- The seat/bunk combination (S/L) may has been folded forward before you
not be installed in combination with start driving.
bench seats. # Ensure that the rear bench seat is
- Passengers may use the seats only if the engaged.
rear seat and/or rear bench seat has
engaged correctly (/ page 79). Folding the EASY-ENTRY section forwards and
back
Using the EASY-ENTRY easy entry and exit If you fold the EASY-ENTRY section of the rear
feature (rear bench seat) bench seat forwards, it is easier to get into or out
of the second rear seat row.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as
a result of rear bench seat not being
engaged
If the rear bench seat is not engaged, it may
be flung around during travel.
# Always make sure that the rear bench
seat is engaged as described.

In order to ensure that the rear bench seat can

securely engage, keep the seat guide rails and
anchorages in the vehicle floor free of dirt and Rear bench seat with EASY-ENTRY feature (exam‐
foreign objects. ple: comfort rear bench seat)
If the indicator tab of the seat anchorage is not 1 Grab handle
retracted into the seat leg, the seat is not cor‐ 2 EASY-ENTRY release handle
rectly engaged. Engage the seat again. 3 Release handle for front seat anchorages
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped # Pull EASY-ENTRY release handle 2 upwards.
when adjusting the rear bench seat # Fold the EASY-ENTRY section forwards with
When adjusting a rear bench seat, you or the aid of grab handle 1.
another vehicle occupant could become trap‐ # To fold the EASY-ENTRY section back: fold
ped by the guide rail of the rear bench seat, the EASY-ENTRY section back until it engages
forexample. in the seat anchorages. The indicator tab will
# Make sure that no one has any part of no longer be visible.
their body within the sweep of the rear % The EASY-ENTRY section is correctly engaged
bench seat when adjusting it. when the seat anchorage engages audibly
and the indicator tab is no longer visible and
is fully retracted into the seat anchorage.
 Seats and stowage 79

Removing the EASY-ENTRY section Moving the rear bench seat

# Vehicles with comfort rear bench seat:
fold the seat backrest forward. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when adjusting the rear bench seat
# Pull EASY-ENTRY release handle 2 upwards.

# Fold the EASY-ENTRY section forwards with

When adjusting a rear bench seat, you or
another vehicle occupant could become trap‐
the aid of grab handle 1.
ped by the guide rail of the rear bench seat,
# Pull release handle 3 for the front seat
forexample.
anchorages upwards.
# Make sure that no one has any part of
# Fold the EASY-ENTRY section further for‐ their body within the sweep of the rear
wards. bench seat when adjusting it.
# Lift the EASY-ENTRY section up and out of the
anchorage. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
Installing the EASY-ENTRY section the rear bench seat while the vehicle is in
motion
# Place and engage the front seat anchorage of
the EASY-ENTRY section on the seat ancho‐ If you move the rear bench seat while driving,
rages. the seat may move in an unexpected or jerk‐
ing manner, forinstance when braking.
# Fold the EASY-ENTRY section back.
The rear seat leg of the EASY-ENTRY section You could become trapped as well as thrown
will engage audibly. The indicator tab on the against parts of the vehicle or other vehicle
seat anchorage will no longer be visible. occupants.
# Only move the rear bench seat when
% The EASY-ENTRY section is correctly engaged
the vehicle is stationary.
when the seat anchorage engages audibly
and the indicator tab is no longer visible and # Make sure that the rear bench seat is
is fully retracted into the seat anchorage. engaged after it is moved.
# Vehicles with comfort rear bench seat:
fold the seat backrest back to the seat posi‐ & WARNING Risk of injury due to no pro‐
tion. tective effect from the window airbag
Adjusting the seat backrest (comfort rear If you move the seat position outside the
bench seat) marked area, the window airbag can no lon‐
ger provide optimum protection.
The protective effect of the window airbag is
gradually reduced and may in some positions
no longer be provided at all.
# Engage the rear seats or the rear bench
seat on the guide rail within the marked
area.

& WARNING Risk of injury from the front

seat being positioned too close to vehicle
Only the seat backrests of a comfort rear bench occupants
seat can be adjusted. If you move the rear seats or the rear bench
# Pull release handle 1 for the seat backrest seat outside the markings on the guide rail,
upwards and hold it in position. this could result in the passenger striking
# Move the seat backrest to the desired posi‐ their head on the front seat.
tion. # Maintain a minimum clearance of 5 cm
# Release the seat backrest release handle 1 between the knees of the respective
and move the seat backrest slightly. vehicle occupants and the seat in front
The seat backrest will engage in position. of them.
80 Seats and stowage

Requirements # Make sure that all sliders for fore-and-aft

R The vehicle is equipped with a seat rail sys‐ adjustment engage audibly on both sides.
tem in the vehicle floor. It will no longer be possible to move the rear
bench seat.
Folding the rear bench seat forwards and
backwards

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as

a result of rear bench seat not being
engaged
If the rear bench seat is not engaged, it may
be flung around during travel.
# Always make sure that the rear bench
Maintain a minimum clearance of 5 cm 1
between the knees of the vehicle occupants and seat is engaged as described.
the seat in front of them.
In order to ensure that the rear bench seat can
securely engage, keep the seat guide rails and
anchorages in the vehicle floor free from dirt and
foreign objects.
If the indicator tab of the seat anchorage is not
retracted into the seat anchorage, the seat is not
correctly engaged. Engage the seat again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due

to the rear bench seat not being engaged
Starting from the basic setting 2, the rear The rear bench seat will not engage when fol‐
bench seat for passengers can be moved for‐ ded forward. The rear bench seat may inad‐
wards or backwards by 5 cm. In doing so, make vertently fold back while the vehicle is accel‐
sure that passengers have sufficient legroom to erating, braking or changing direction sud‐
reduce the risk of injury during braking. denly or in the event of an accident, forexam‐
ple.
People within the sweep of the rear bench
seat may become trapped.
# Always fold back a rear bench seat that
has been folded forward before you
start driving.
# Ensure that the rear bench seat is
engaged.

You can slide the rear bench seat only when it is

unoccupied. If possible, slide the rear bench seat
with the assistance of a second person.
# Pull up release handle 4 for seat fore-and-
aft adjustment.
# Move the rear bench seat to the desired posi‐
tion by grab handles 3.
# Let go of release handle 4.
Release handle 4 will fold down to its origi‐ # Remove the head restraints (/ page 92).
nal position. # Fold the seat backrest forwards (/ page 79).
 Seats and stowage 81

# Pull the release handles for rear seat anchor‐ # Fold the rear bench seat forwards
age 2 up and tilt the rear bench seat. (/ page 80).
# Grasp the rear bench seat by grab handles 1 # Pull release handle 3 upwards.
and fold the seat forwards. # Grasp the rear bench seat by grab handles 1

Installing and removing the comfort rear and lift it out of seat anchorages 4.
bench seat % If the second rear seat row is to be removed
or tilted, the seat or bench seat in the first
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as rear seat row must first be tilted forward to
a result of rear bench seat not being avoid damage to the seats.
engaged
Installing the rear bench seat
If the rear bench seat is not engaged, it may # Grasp the rear bench seat by grab handles 1
be flung around during travel. and insert it into front seat anchorages 4
# Always make sure that the rear bench from the front and above at an angle.
seat is engaged as described. # Tilt the rear bench seat back and allow it to
engage.
Keep the seat anchorages in the vehicle floor free Release handles 2 fold down towards the
of dirt and objects at all times to ensure that the vehicle floor.
rear bench seat engages securely.
# Fold the rear bench seat back into the seat
If the indicator tab of the anchorage is not retrac‐ position.
ted into the seat leg, the seat is not correctly
engaged. Engage the seat again. The rear seat legs of the rear bench seat are cor‐
Removing the rear bench seat rectly engaged when the seat legs engage audibly
and the indicator tabs on the seat legs are no lon‐
ger visible and have fully retracted into the seat
legs.
# Slide the rear bench seat into the basic set‐
ting (/ page 79).
Using the EASY-ENTRY easy entry and exit
feature (rear seat)

& WARNING Risk of accident‑ and injury if

the seat is not engaged
If a seat is not engaged, it may be thrown
about while the vehicle is moving.
# Always make sure that all seats are
engaged as described.

In order to ensure that the seats can securely

engage, keep the seat guide rails and anchorages
in the vehicle floor free from dirt and foreign
objects.
% In vehicles with a seat rail system, carry out & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
the release, removal and subsequent reinstal‐
when adjusting the seats
lation of the rear bench seats at the marked
basic position only (/ page 79). When you adjust a seat, you may trap your‐
# Make sure that all sliders for fore-and-aft self or a vehicle occupant.
adjustment are engaged on both sides. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
It should not be possible to move the rear no one has any body parts in the sweep
bench seat. of the seat.
82 Seats and stowage

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if # Let go of release handle 1 for the seat back‐
the seat is not engaged rest and move the seat backrest slightly.
The seat backrest will engage in position.
The seat does not engage when folded for‐
wards. The seat can fold backwards unex‐ Moving the rear seat
pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in
the event of an abrupt change of direction or & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
an accident. when adjusting the seats
People in the seat's sweep can become trap‐ When you adjust a seat, you may trap your‐
ped. self or a vehicle occupant.
# If a seat is folded forwards, always fold # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
it back before driving off. no one has any body parts in the sweep
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. of the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving

the rear seat while the vehicle is in
motion
If you move a rear seat while driving, the seat
may move in an unexpected or jerking man‐
ner, forinstance when braking.
You could become trapped as well as thrown
against parts of the vehicle or other vehicle
occupants.
If you fold the rear seat forwards, it is easier to # Move a rear seat only when the vehicle
get into or out of the second rear seat row. is stationary.
# To fold the rear seat forwards: pull one of # Make sure that the rear seat is engaged
the two EASY-ENTRY release handles 2 after it is moved.
upwards and fold the rear seat forwards.
# To fold the rear seat back: fold the rear seat & WARNING Risk of injury due to no pro‐
back using the grab handle 1 until it tective effect from the window airbag
engages in the seat anchorages. If you move the seat position outside the
The indicator tab 3 is no longer visible and marked area, the window airbag can no lon‐
is fully retracted into the seat anchorage. ger provide optimum protection.
Adjusting the seat backrest (rear seat) The protective effect of the window airbag is
gradually reduced and may in some positions
no longer be provided at all.
# Engage the rear seats or the rear bench
seat on the guide rail within the marked
area.

# Pull the release handle for seat backrest 1

upwards and hold it in position.
# Move the seat backrest to the desired posi‐
tion.
 Seats and stowage 83

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if

the seat is not engaged
The seat does not engage when folded for‐
wards. The seat can fold backwards unex‐
pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in
the event of an abrupt change of direction or
an accident.
People in the seat's sweep can become trap‐
ped.
1 Release handle for seat fore-and-aft adjust‐ # If a seat is folded forwards, always fold
ment it back before driving off.
2 Fore-and-aft setting marking # Make sure that the seat is engaged.
3 Basic setting marking
Starting from the basic setting 3, the rear seats * NOTE Damage to the folding table or the
for passengers can be moved forwards or back‐ armrest when the rear seats are folded
wards by 5 cm. In doing so, make sure that pas‐ forwards or backwards
sengers have sufficient legroom to reduce the If the folding table is not positioned all the
risk of injury during braking. way back when the rear seats are folded for‐
# Pull release handle 1 in the direction of the wards or backwards, the folding table and/or
arrow. the armrest of the rear seat may be damaged.
# With the release handle pulled, slide the rear # Slide the folding table all the way back
seat to the desired position. before folding the rear seats forwards or
# Release the release handle 1. backwards.
# Slide the rear seat forwards and backwards
until the carriage is correctly engaged on both * NOTE Damage to the cup holder from the
sides. rear seat
It should not be possible to move the seat. Folding the rear seat in the third row of seats
Folding the rear seat forwards and back‐ forwards can damage the cup holder.
wards # Remove the cup holder before folding
the seat.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when adjusting the seats Folding the seat backrest forwards (table
When you adjust a seat, you may trap your‐ position)
self or a vehicle occupant.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.

& WARNING Risk of accident‑ and injury if

the seat is not engaged
If a seat is not engaged, it may be thrown
about while the vehicle is moving.
# Always make sure that all seats are # Fold up the armrests (/ page 74).
engaged as described. # Pull the release handle for seat backrest 1
up and fold the seat backrest forwards.
In order to ensure that the seats can securely
engage, keep the seat guide rails and anchorages
in the vehicle floor free of dirt and foreign
objects.
84 Seats and stowage

Folding the rear seat forwards & WARNING Risk of injury‑ or fatal injury
when the last row of seats is rotated
180 °
The vehicle occupants in the rear seats can
be injured by unsecured loads.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
# If loads are being transported, never
install the rear seats in the last row of
seats rotated by 180 °.
% Pictogram 4 on the seat reminds you not to # Always store and secure objects and
travel sitting behind a seat that has been fol‐ loads properly in the vehicle.
ded forwards.
# Slide the folding table to its rearmost position & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
(/ page 98). when adjusting the seats
# Remove the head restraint (/ page 92). When you adjust a seat, you may trap your‐
# Fold the seat backrest forwards into the table self or a vehicle occupant.
position. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
# Pull release handle 3 upwards. no one has any body parts in the sweep
# Grasp the seat by grab handle 2 and fold of the seat.
the seat forwards.
Removing
# To fold back the rear seat: using grab han‐ When installing and removing the rear seats with
dle 2, pull the seat backwards forcefully. seat heating and seat ventilation or the luxury
The rear seat anchorages will engage. rear seats, note the routing of the cables and
The rear seat legs of the rear bench seat are cor‐ their original installation positions. Otherwise,
rectly engaged when the seat legs engage audibly you may damage the cables and the on-board
and indicator tabs 5 on the seat legs are no lon‐ computer may detect the seat position incor‐
ger visible and have fully retracted into the seat rectly.
legs. Use only rear seats with seat heating and seat
ventilation or luxury rear seats that were supplied
Installing and removing the rear seat with the vehicle. Due to the high-quality design
and the technical equipment, Mercedes-Benz rec‐
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as ommends that you have luxury rear seats instal‐
a result of rear bench seat not being led at a qualified specialist workshop.
engaged
If the rear bench seat is not engaged, it may
be flung around during travel.
# Always make sure that the rear bench
seat is engaged as described.

In order to ensure that the rear bench seat can

securely engage, keep the seat guide rails and
anchorages in the vehicle floor free of dirt and
foreign objects.
If the indicator tab of the seat anchorage is not Rear seat folded forward (example: standard rear
retracted into the seat leg, the seat is not cor‐ seat)
rectly engaged. Engage the seat again.
 Seats and stowage 85

# Make sure that all sliders for fore-and-aft Fitting

adjustment are engaged on both sides. # Hold the seat by grab handle 1.
It should not be possible to move the rear
seat. # From above, guide the seat in a tilted position
into front seat anchorages 3 and allow it to
# Fold the seat forwards (/ page 83). engage.
% For luxury rear seats, the electrical connector % For luxury rear seats, the electrical connector
must also be disconnected. must also be connected.
# Remove cover 4 of the floor socket and
remove the dummy cap from socket 6.
# Remove electrical connector 5 for the seat
ventilation and seat heating from bracket 7
and insert into socket 6.
# Attach the dummy cap to bracket 7 on the
seat.
# Close the floor socket with cover 4.
# Fold the seat back to the table or seat posi‐
# Remove cover 4 of the floor socket. tion (/ page 83) and slide into the basic set‐
# Remove the dummy cap from the bracket on ting (/ page 82).
the seat.
Using the EASY-ENTRY easy entry and exit
feature (luxury rear seat)

& WARNING Risk of accident‑ and injury if

the seat is not engaged
If a seat is not engaged, it may be thrown
about while the vehicle is moving.
# Always make sure that all seats are
engaged as described.

In order to ensure that the seats can securely

engage, keep the seat guide rails and anchorages
in the vehicle floor free of dirt and foreign
objects.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap your‐
self or a vehicle occupant.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that
# Press in the sides of electrical connector 5 no one has any body parts in the sweep
in socket 6 and remove. of the seat.
# Insert the dummy cap into socket 6 and
close the floor socket with cover 4. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
# Secure electrical connector 5 onto bracket the seat is not engaged
7 on the seat. The seat does not engage when folded for‐
# Grasp the seat by grab handle 1 and fold wards. The seat can fold backwards unex‐
two release handles 2 upwards. pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in
the event of an abrupt change of direction or
# Move the folded seat towards the front and
an accident.
lift it out.
86 Seats and stowage

People in the seat's sweep can become trap‐ & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
ped. the seats are adjusted by children
# If a seat is folded forwards, always fold
Children could become trapped if they adjust
it back before driving off. the seats, particularly when unattended.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Folding the luxury rear seat forwards
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the leg rest due to

overload
The leg rest can be damaged if it is loaded
with more than 25 kg.
# Do not place more than 25 kg on the leg
rest.

# Make sure that the luxury rear seat is in the * NOTE Damage to the leg rest due to
upright position and the leg rest is fully folded manual adjustment
under the sitting surface.
# Pull one of two EASY-ENTRY release handles The leg rest can be damaged if it is adjusted
1 upwards and fold the luxury rear seat manually.
forward using the release handle. # Only adjust the leg rest electrically.

or
# For luxury rear seats installed on the left * NOTE Damage to the luxury seat due to
side only: push the lever on the left side of incorrect adjustment of the leg rest
the seat downwards and fold the luxury rear If you turn the luxury seat's leg rest or move
seat forwards it in the longitudinal direction, the seat may
# To fold the luxury rear seat back: fold the be damaged.
luxury rear seat back until it engages into the # Only adjust the leg rest inclination as
seat anchorages.
described in the following.
Indicator tab 2 is no longer visible and is
fully retracted into the seat anchorage.
Adjusting the luxury rear seat electrically

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to

incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat
backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself.
# Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul‐
der.
 Seats and stowage 87

Requirements Setting the massage function

R The ignition is switched on.

# To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly

1 Head restraint height adjustment until the desired massage program has been
2 Head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment set.
3 Seat backrest inclination adjustment # To switch off: press button 1 until all indi‐
4 Leg rest inclination adjustment cator lamps are off.
# Adjust the luxury rear seat using the buttons Moving the luxury rear seat
in the left-hand side trim.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
% You can save the settings for the luxury rear
when adjusting the seats
seats with the memory function
(/ page 73). When you adjust a seat, you may trap your‐
self or a vehicle occupant.
Adjusting the upright position of the luxury
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that
rear seat
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving

the rear bench seat while the vehicle is in
motion
If you move the rear bench seat while driving,
the seat may move in an unexpected or jerk‐
ing manner, forinstance when braking.
You could become trapped as well as thrown
against parts of the vehicle or other vehicle
occupants.
# Only move the rear bench seat when
the vehicle is stationary.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat is
# Press button 1 until the luxury rear seat is in engaged after it is moved.
the upright position and the leg rest is fully
folded under the seat surface.
88 Seats and stowage

& WARNING Risk of injury due to no pro‐ # With the release handle pulled, slide the
tective effect from the window airbag luxury rear seat to the desired position.
# Let go of release handle 1.
If you move the seat position outside the
marked area, the window airbag can no lon‐ # Slide the luxury rear seat forwards and back‐
ger provide optimum protection. wards until the carriage is correctly engaged
on both sides.
The protective effect of the window airbag is
It should not be possible to move the seat.
gradually reduced and may in some positions
no longer be provided at all. Moving the luxury rear seat from the second
# Engage the rear seats or the rear bench seat row
seat on the guide rail within the marked
area.

& WARNING Risk of injury from the front

seat being positioned too close to vehicle
occupants
If you move the rear seats or the rear bench
seat outside the markings on the guide rail,
this could result in the passenger striking
their head on the seat.
# Push lever 3 down.
# Maintain a minimum clearance of 5 cm
between the knees of the respective # Slide the luxury rear seat forwards or back‐
vehicle occupants and the seat in front wards.
of them. % A luxury rear seat is generally removed and
installed in the same way as a standard rear
seat (/ page 84). Due to the high-quality
design and the technical equipment,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
luxury rear seats installed at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Notes on the seat/bunk combination

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

when adjusting the rear bench seat
When adjusting a rear bench seat, you or
another vehicle occupant could become trap‐
ped by the guide rail of the rear bench seat,
forexample.
# Make sure that no one has any part of

1 Release handle for seat fore-and-aft adjust‐ their body within the sweep of the rear
ment bench seat when adjusting it.
2 Fore-and-aft setting marking
3 Basic setting marking & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
the rear bench seat while the vehicle is in
Starting from the basic setting 3, you can move motion
a luxury rear seat for vehicle occupants forwards
or backwards by 5 cm. In doing so, make sure If you move the rear bench seat while driving,
that vehicle occupants have sufficient legroom to the seat may move in an unexpected or jerk‐
reduce the risk of injury during braking. ing manner, forinstance when braking.
# Pull release handle 1 in the direction of the
You could become trapped as well as thrown
arrow. against parts of the vehicle or other vehicle
occupants.
 Seats and stowage 89

# Only move the rear bench seat when # To move, use the loop between the seat
the vehicle is stationary. backrest and sitting surface.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat is # When moving, make sure that the space
engaged after it is moved. in front of or behind the seat/bunk
combination is clear.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to no pro‐
tective effect from the window airbag
If you move the seat position outside the
marked area, the window airbag can no lon‐
ger provide optimum protection.
The protective effect of the window airbag is
gradually reduced and may in some positions
no longer be provided at all.
# Engage the seat‑/‑bunk combination on
the guide rail within the marked area.
1 Seat backrest grab strap
& WARNING Risk of injury due to position‐ 2 Seat/bunk combination grab strap
ing the seat‑/‑bunk combination outside Use only corresponding grab straps 1 and 2 to
the markings adjust the seat/bunk combination.
If you move the seat‑/‑bunk combination out‐ The seat/bunk combination can accommodate
side the markings on the guide rail, this could three persons. You can adjust the seat backrest
result in the passenger striking their head on to a vertical and horizontal position. If you set the
the seat. seat backrest to the horizontal position, this –
# Maintain a minimum clearance of 5 cm together with the bed extension – will give you a
between the knees of the respective full-length bed for two people.
vehicle occupants and the seats in front Passengers may use the seats of the seat/bunk
of them. combination only when the seat backrest is
upright. Only then do the seat belts provide the
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt retractor intended degree of protection.
due to pulling on the seat belts The seat/bunk combination is fitted with two
removable stowage compartments under the seat
The function of the seat belt retractor can be
surface (/ page 98). You can use these stow‐
impaired by pulling on the seat belts to adjust
age compartments to store bedding, for example.
the seat backrest.
# Always use the grab strap on the seat Positioning the seats in the optimum area of
backrest of the middle seat to align the protection
seat backrest.

* NOTE Damage to the seat/bunk combi‐

nation when moving
If you grasp and push the seat/bunk combi‐
nation by the stowage compartment plastic
cover only, the cover may break off.
If the space in front of or behind the seat/
bunk combination is not clear, objects may
become trapped when displaced.
1 Basic setting
The seat/bunk combination, trim or the
objects may become damaged. Starting from the basic setting 1, the seat/bunk
combination for passengers can be moved for‐
wards or backwards by 5 cm. In doing so, make
90 Seats and stowage

sure that passengers have sufficient legroom to # To fold up: pull release handle 2 back and
reduce the risk of injury during braking. move bed extension 3 into an upright posi‐
tion.
Using the seat/bunk combination
The bed extension will engage in an upright
Moving the seat/bunk combination position.
You can move the seat/bunk combination only
when it is unoccupied. Pull the seat/bunk combi‐
nation forwards using only the loop between the
seat surface and the seat backrest.

% If the seat sliders on the front rear seat row

are too far back in the guide rails, the seat/
# To remove: fold up bed extension 3 and
bunk combination cannot be moved forward.
In this case, use the handle for the seat slid‐ unscrew thumbscrews 4.
ers to move the seat sliders. The bed extension will now be loose and
capable of being removed from the guide
# Pull release handle 1 up as far as it will go rails.
and hold it in this position.
# To install: guide bed extension 3 into the
# Grasp the loop between the seat surface and guide rails and tighten thumbscrews 4.
the seat backrest and move the seat/bunk
combination. Setting up/folding away the berth
# Let go of release handle 1.
The locking mechanism will engage automati‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
cally. berth is used while the vehicle is in
motion
# Make sure that all seat sliders for fore-and-aft
adjustment engage audibly on both sides. Any vehicle occupant using a bed while the
It should no longer be possible to move the vehicle is in motion cannot be restrained
seat/bunk combination. properly.
# Use the bed only when the vehicle is
Bed extension
parked.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

when the seat backrest is folded up and
down
When folding the seat backrest up or down,
you could cause yourself or other vehicle
occupants to become trapped.
# Make sure that the range of movement
of the seat backrest is clear and that no
one is trapped.

The safety net for the top berth is not a restraint

system for vehicle occupants while the vehicle is
in motion.
 Seats and stowage 91

Moving the seat sliders

The berth can accommodate two persons.

# Fold up the short section of bed extension
6.

When you remove the seat/bunk combination, a

rear bench seat or a seat, the seat slider may
slide in a guide rail. The seat sliders will then no
# Move the seat/bunk combination forwards to
longer be parallel in the guide rails. In this case,
mark 7 on the guide rail.
you will no longer be able to fit the respective
# Remove the head restraints of the seat/bunk seating. The seat sliders must be moved using
combination. only the handle for seat sliders 1 or at a quali‐
# Rotate the head restraints by 180° and insert fied specialist workshop in order to prevent the
them into brackets 5 on the rear side of the risk of damage.
seat backrest. In addition, you can use the end of the handle to
open and close the locks on the sliders.
% Handle 1 is in the stowage compartment of
the seat/bunk combination (/ page 98).
# Place the tip of handle 1 onto the middle
bolt of three bolts 4.
# Swing handle 1 downwards onto seat slider
2.
# Press seat slider 2 into guide rail 3 with
handle 1.
Seat slider 2 will be unlocked.
# Pull backrest release handle 8 up and adjust
# Move seat slider 2 into the correct position
the seat backrest to a horizontal position.
When doing so, hold on to the seat backrest and engage it there.
only by the grab strap. Installing and removing the seat/bunk combi‐
# Fold down the short section of the bed exten‐ nation
sion 6.
# To fold away: perform the steps to set up the & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as
berth in reverse order. a result of rear bench seat not being
engaged
After use, finish by moving the seat/bunk combi‐
nation back to the basic setting and ensure that If the rear bench seat is not engaged, it may
the seat backrest is in an upright position. be flung around during travel.
92 Seats and stowage

# Always make sure that the rear bench Installing the seat/bunk combination
seat is engaged as described.

In order to ensure that the rear bench seat can

securely engage, keep the seat guide rails and
anchorages in the vehicle floor free from dirt and
foreign objects.
If the indicator tab of the seat anchorage is not
retracted into the seat anchorage, the seat is not
correctly engaged. Engage the seat again.
Removing the seat/bunk combination
A seat/bunk combination may not be fitted in the
# Hold the seat/bunk combination by the lower
face-to-face position. edge of the seat cushion.
# Place the seat/bunk combination into the
front seat anchorages 3 from above at the
front and allow to engage.
# Make sure that release handles for front seat
legs 2 are folded underneath in the direc‐
tion of the floor of the vehicle.
# Fold the seat/bunk combination back into
the seat position.
# Press the release handle for the rear seat
anchorage 1 downwards until the indicator
tabs 4 have fully retracted into the rear seat
anchorages.
The rear seat anchorages of the seat/bunk com‐
bination are correctly engaged when the seat
anchorages engage audibly and the indicator tabs
4 on the seat anchorages are no longer visible
and have fully retracted into the seat anchorages.

Head restraints
% In vehicles with a seat rail system, carry out
the release, removal and subsequent reinstal‐ Adjusting the head restraint mechanically
lation of a rear bench seat at the marked at
the marked basic setting. & WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set‐
tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in
# If necessary, remove the bed extension motion
(/ page 90).
You could lose control of the vehicle in partic‐
# Remove the stowage compartments
(/ page 98). ular in the following situations:
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
# Fold the release handle for the rear seat
anchorage 1 up. restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
ror while the vehicle is in motion.
# Tilt the seat/bunk combination forward using
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
the upper edge of the seat backrest.
cle is in motion.
# Pull the release handle for front seat ancho‐
rages 2 up. # Before starting the engine: adjust the
# Hold the seat/bunk combination by the lower driver's seat, head restraints, steering
edge of the seat cushion. wheel and mirror in particular and fas‐
ten your seat belt.
# Fold the seat/bunk combination forwards
and lift it out of seat anchorages 3.
 Seats and stowage 93

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head # To move backwards: press release button
restraints not being fitted or being adjus‐ 1 and slide the head restraint backwards
ted incorrectly into the desired position.
# To remove: press release button 2 and pull
If head restraints have not been installed or
the head restraint up and out.
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck # To fit: press the head restraint with detent
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when into the holes on the left-hand side when
braking. viewed in the direction of travel until it
# Always drive with the head restraints fit‐
engages.
ted. Adjusting the head restraint electrically
# Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the * NOTE Damage to the electrical head
head restraint supports the back of the restraint when adjusted manually
head at about eye level. If the height of the electrically adjustable
head restraint is adjusted manually, this can
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
damage the mechanism of the head restraint.
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
# Adjust the height of the electrically
able to set the height and inclination of the head
restraints to the correct position. adjustable head restraints using the
buttons in the door trim.
Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment,
adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to Requirements
the back of the head as possible. R The ignition is switched on or the door is
open.

# To raise: pull the head restraint upwards into

the desired position and ensure that it
engages.
% Use the head restraint only when it is
engaged.
# To lower: press release button 2, slide the
head restraint downwards into the desired
position and ensure that it engages.
% Use the head restraint only when it is
engaged.
# To move forwards: press release button 1 # To adjust the height: push button 1 up or
and pull the head restraint forwards until it down in the direction of the arrow.
engages in the desired position.
94 Seats and stowage

# To move forwards or backwards: press and Switching the seat heating on/off
hold release knob 2 and slide the head
restraint forwards or backwards into the & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐
desired position. edly switching on the seat heating
% If the ignition is not switched on, you can Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
adjust the head restraint height within 30 cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
seconds of unlocking the vehicle. padding to become very hot.
Adjusting the head restraint on a luxury rear In particular, the health of persons with limi‐
seat ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability
to react to high temperatures may be affec‐
Adjusting the side bolsters ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating

may be temporarily deactivated after it is
switched on repeatedly.

* NOTE Damage to the seat heating due to

overheating
The seat heating may overheat if the seat is
# Push or pull right-hand and left-hand side bol‐ unoccupied when the seat heating is
ster 1 into the desired position. switched on or if objects are placed on the
Adjusting the head restraint electrically seat.
# Switch off the seat heating when the
seat is unoccupied.
# Do not place any objects on the seat
when the seat is unoccupied.

Requirements
R The power supply has been switched on.

# Switch on the ignition.

# To adjust the height: slide the button up or
down in the direction of arrow 1.
# To adjust the longitudinal direction: slide
the button forwards or backwards in the
direction of arrow 2.
Front seat
 Seats and stowage 95

Switching the seat ventilation on and off

Requirements
R The power supply has been switched on.

Comfort rear seat

Front seat

Luxury rear seat

# To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
Depending on the heating level, one to three Comfort rear seat
indicator lamps will light up.
# To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
When all indicator lamps are off, the seat
heating is switched off.
% The seat heating will automatically switch
back out of the three heating levels after 7,
10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating
switches off.
% Rear seat heating activation is possible only
with the engine running.

Luxury rear seat

96 Seats and stowage

# Make sure that the air inlet grilles on the back & WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐
of the seat backrest are not covered dren when adjusting the steering wheel
(/ page 97).
# To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel.
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired blower
setting is set. # Never leave children unattended in the
Depending on the blower setting, one to three vehicle.
indicator lamps will light up. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
# To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐ the key with you and lock the vehicle.
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired blower
setting is set. Adjusting the steering wheel
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila‐
tion is switched off.
% The convenience opening function automati‐
cally switches the seat ventilation for the
driver's seat to the highest blower setting
(/ page 62).
% Rear seat ventilation activation is possible
only with the engine running.

Steering wheel # To unlock: push release lever 3 down as far

Adjusting the steering wheel as it will go.
The steering column is unlocked.
& WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set‐ # Adjust height 1 and distance 2 to the
tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in steering wheel.
motion # To lock: push release lever 3 up as far as it
You could lose control of the vehicle in partic‐ will go.
ular in the following situations: The steering column is locked.
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ Stowage areas
ror while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage spaces and stowage compartments
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion. Opening and closing the stowage compart‐
ment in the centre console
# Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, head restraints, steering
wheel and mirror in particular and fas‐
ten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to

unlocked steering wheel
The steering wheel may move unexpectedly if
it is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion.
# Make sure that the steering wheel is
locked before driving off. # Slide cover 1 of the centre console up or
# Never unlock the steering wheel when down using handle 2.
the vehicle is in motion.
 Seats and stowage 97

The following can be found in the stowage com‐ # Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
partment of the centre console depending on the pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
car's equipment: objects in the boot.
R A 12 V socket (/ page 102) or the cigarette
lighter (/ page 102) Comply with the instructions for loading the vehi‐
cle.
R The Media Interface with two USB ports or
with two USB ports and one SD card slot
R The holder for the mobile phone cradle
R The ashtray (/ page 101)
R A stowage compartment or a device installa‐
tion frame for auxiliary equipment, e.g. a
tachograph
Opening and closing the stowage compart‐
ment under the armrest

1 Unlocked
2 Locked
3 Glove compartment handle
# To lock/unlock: turn the emergency key a
# To open: press button 1.
quarter turn anti-clockwise 2 (to lock) or
The stowage compartment opens.
clockwise 1 (to unlock).
# To close: press to close the caps of the stow‐
# To open: pull glove compartment handle 3
age compartment in any order.
in the direction of the arrow.
Opening and closing the glove compartment # To close: fold the glove compartment handle
up and press it until it engages.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly Using the stowage net on the seat backrest
# Store lightweight small parts in the stowage
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed nets.
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, % On front seats with seat ventilation, make
cup holders, open stowage spaces and sure that no objects protrude out of the stow‐
mobile phone brackets cannot always retain age net and cover the seat ventilation air inlet
all objects they contain. above.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the Opening the glasses compartment
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
98 Seats and stowage

# Press the 1 button. over or be thrown around and thereby hit

Installing and removing stowage compart‐ vehicle occupants.
ments underneath the seat/bunk combina‐ There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
tion event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
Removing
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.

& WARNING Risk of accident‑ and injury

due to the folding table not being
engaged
The folding table can come loose and be flung
around while the vehicle is in motion.
# Install the folding table as described.

# Only move the folding table when the

vehicle is stationary.
# Ensure that the folding table is correctly
% The maximum load that can be placed in engaged.
each stowage compartment is 13 kg.
# Slide seat/bunk combination 1 as far back * NOTE Damage to the folding table or the
as possible (/ page 90). armrest when the rear seats are folded
# Pull stowage compartment 2 out as far as it forwards or backwards
will go.
If the folding table is not positioned all the
# Pull left-hand plastic tongue 3 down and way back when the rear seats are folded for‐
right-hand plastic tongue 3 up, when viewed wards or backwards, the folding table and/or
in the direction of travel. Pull out stowage the armrest of the rear seat may be damaged.
compartment 2 a little each time.
# Slide the folding table all the way back
The corresponding stop will be released.
before folding the rear seats forwards or
# Pull out stowage compartment 2. backwards.
Fitting
Installing the folding table
# Slide seat/bunk combination 1 as far back
as possible (/ page 90).
# Slide stowage compartment 2 into guide
rails 4 underneath the seat/bunk combina‐
tion.
Plastic tongues 3 will engage automatically.

Folding table
Installing and removing the folding table

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured

items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
 Seats and stowage 99

# Observe the notes on loading (/ page 212).

# Push the rear seats back fully or, if necessary,
remove them.
# Lift off both covers 1 from the guide rail
using a suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver.

# Pull lever 5 on the front or rear side of the

# Press both covers 1 together slightly and folding table upwards and push the folding
remove them from the guide rail. table backwards.
The openings in the rail for the middle slide
on the underside of the folding table will be Press both covers 1 together slightly and
open. engage them in the openings of the guide rails.
# Rotate the folding table until the arrow on the Moving the folding table
underside of the folding table is pointing in # Keep lever 5 pulled and move the folding
the direction of travel. table into the desired position.
# Release lever 5.
# Move the folding table until it automatically
engages in the next possible position.
# After repositioning the table, ensure that the
folding table is properly secured again.
Removing the folding table
# Fold in the table panels and retract the table.
# Push the rear seats back fully or, if necessary,
remove them.
# Push the folding table back far enough so that
covers 1 of the openings in the rail can be
removed.
# Lift off both covers 1 from the guide rail
using a suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver.
Installation position
# Press both covers 1 together slightly and
# Insert the folding table into guide rails 2 so remove them from guide rail 2.
that arrows 3 on the folding table point to The openings in the rail for the middle slide
both markings 4 on guide rail 2. on the underside of the folding table will be
The guides and sliding rail on the underside of open.
the folding table fit into the guide rail.
# Push the folding table forwards into the
installation position.
Arrows 3 on the folding table point to both
markings 4 on guide rail 2.
# Lift the folding table out of guide rail 2.
100 Seats and stowage

# Press both covers 1 together slightly and # To fold out the table panel: pull out the
engage them in the openings of guide rails table panels upwards to the stop using handle
2. 2 and swing them to the side until they
engage.
Using the folding table # To fold in the table panel: swing the table
panels up using handle 3 and slide them
Extending the folding table vertically downwards into the table.
Installing and removing the insert

# Press button 1 all the way down and release

it.
The folding table will move upwards and 4 Recesses on the folding table
engage automatically. 5 Stowage compartments
Retracting the folding table
# Press button 1 all the way down and simul‐
taneously press the centre section of the fold‐
ing table downwards.
# Release button 1 when the folding table is in
its retracted position.
The centre section of the folding table will
engage automatically.
Folding the table panel in and out
# To remove: press lug 6 and remove the
insert.
# To install: put in the insert and press it down
until it engages.

Information about the bottle holder

The bottle holders are in front of the stowage
compartments in the front doors.
There are additional bottle holders on the left and
right in the rear compartment side trim.
 Seats and stowage 101

Cup holders # To switch off: press the button 1 repeat‐

edly until the indicator lamp in the button
Inserting the cup holder in the rear passenger goes out.
compartment
% Clean the removable rubber mat only with
clean, lukewarm water and the cup holder 2
only with a damp cloth.

Ashtray and cigarette lighter

Using ashtrays

# Position cup holder 1 above stowage com‐

partment 3 so that "INSIDE" lettering on its # Slide cover 1 of the centre console upwards
base 2 faces towards the vehicle interior. (/ page 96).
# Insert base 2 into stowage compartment 3 # Insert the ashtray with cap 2 into a cup
and press down on both sides. holder in the centre console with cover or
into a cup holder in the rear passenger com‐
The cup holder is correctly inserted when both partment.
sealing rings 5 are inserted in stowage com‐
partment 3 and upper edge 4 of the base
locks positively with stowage compartment 3. Using ashtrays
# To remove: grasp the bottom of cup holder
1 from below and remove it by lifting its
base 2 out vertically.

Switching the temperature-controlled cup

holders on and off
Requirements:
R The ignition is switched on.

# Slide cover 1 of the centre console upwards

(/ page 96).
# Insert the ashtray with cap 2 into a cup
holder in the centre console with cover or
into a cup holder in the rear passenger com‐
partment.

# To switch on: press the button 1 repeatedly

until the blue (keep cool) or red (keep warm)
indicator lamp in the button lights up.
102 Seats and stowage

Using the ashtray and cigarette lighter in the Requirements:

rear passenger compartment R The power supply has been switched on.
Requirements
R The ignition is switched on.

Cigarette lighter in the centre console (example:

centre console with cover)
# Pull down the cover. # Slide cover 1 of the centre console upwards
(/ page 96).
# To use the cigarette lighter: press cigarette
# Press in cigarette lighter 2.
lighter 2.
The cigarette lighter will pop out when the % You can use the cigarette lighter socket for
heating element is red-hot. accessories with a maximum current draw of
# To remove the ashtray: press ribbing 1 180 W (15 A).
and remove insert 3.
# To insert the ashtray: push in insert 3 Sockets
from above and press it into the holder until it
Using the 12 V socket in the front centre con‐
engages.
sole

Using the cigarette lighter in the front centre Requirements:

console R The power supply has been switched on.
R Only devices with up to a maximum of
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from 180 watts (15 A) are permissible.
the hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials may ignite if:
R you drop the hot cigarette lighter
R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob. # Slide cover 1 of the centre console upwards
# Always make sure that the cigarette (/ page 96).
lighter is out of reach of children. # Fold up cover 2 of the socket.
# Never leave children unattended in the # Insert the plug of the device.
vehicle.
 Seats and stowage 103

Using the socket in the rear centre console & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐
Requirements rect handling of the socket
R The power supply has been switched on. You could receive an electric shock in particu‐
R Only devices with up to a maximum of 180 W lar:
(15 A) are permissible. R if you reach into the socket.
R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket.
# Do not reach into the socket.
# Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries from elec‐

tric shock
You could get an electric shock if you clean
the 230 V socket with a wet cloth.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
Omit the area around the 230 V socket when
cleaning.
# Pull down the cover.
Requirements
# Fold out the cover of socket 1. R Only connect devices with a suitable plug
# Insert the plug of the device. which conforms to the standards specific to
the country you are in.
Using the 230 V socket R Only devices with a maximum power con‐
sumption of 150 W (15 A) may be connected.
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐ R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
aged connecting cable or socket R The on-board electrical system voltage is
You could receive an electric shock when within a permissible voltage range.
pulling the connecting cable or the 230 V R The electronic device plug is inserted fully
power socket out of the trim, or if it is dam‐ into the 230 V socket.
aged or wet.
# Use only connecting cables that are dry
and free of damage.
# When the ignition is switched off, make
sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.
# Immediately have the 230 V power
socket checked or replaced at a quali‐
fied specialised workshop if it is dam‐
aged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Never plug the connecting cable into a
230 V power socket that is damaged or
has been pulled out of the trim.

# Open flap 2.
104 Seats and stowage

# Insert the plug of the device into 230 V % If you do not need to use the refrigerator box
socket 3. for an extended period, you should switch it
When the on-board electrical system voltage off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so,
is sufficient, indicator lamp 1 lights up. leave the cap open for a time.
When you are not using the 230 V power socket,
keep the flap closed. Notes on attaching the iPad®

Switching the refrigerator box in the centre

console on and off

& WARNING Risk of fire due to a covered

ventilation grille on the coolbox
If you cover the ventilation grille for the cool‐
box, it may overheat.
# Always make sure that the ventilation
grille is not covered.
Your vehicle is equipped with iPad® attachment
1 on the driver's and co-driver's seat backrests.
The coolbox ventilation grille is between the front
seat base and the centre console sidewall. A mount, which has been tested and approved
especially for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, is availa‐
Requirements ble as an accessory. Only this mount can unlock
R The ignition is switched on.
the attachment opening and allow the iPad® to
R The stowage compartment under the armrest be charged whilst it is installed.
is open (/ page 96). iPad® attachment 1 may only be used for
accessories up to 42 W (3.5 A).
Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
information and availability. Before using the
mount, please read the operating instructions for
the mount.
% Only use accessories which have been tested
and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

The refrigerator box can bear a maximum load of

3.5 kg.
# To open: fold cover 1 upwards.

# To switch the cooling level to low: press

button 2 for approximately two seconds.
# To switch the cooling level to high: press
button 2 again.
# To switch off: press button 2 for approx‐
imately two seconds until all indicator lamps
go out.
 Light and vision 105

Exterior lighting Light switch

Notes on changing the lights when driving Operating the light switch
abroad
Low beam
In countries in which traffic drives on the oppo‐
site side of the road from the country in which
the vehicle is registered, you will have to switch
the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam. This
will prevent oncoming traffic from being dazzled.
Symmetrical dipped beam will no longer illumi‐
nate the edge of the carriageway as far or as
high.
Vehicles with halogen headlamps:
It is not necessary to change the headlamps over
to symmetrical dipped beam. The statutory
requirements of the countries in which traffic
drives on the opposite side of the road from the
country in which the vehicle is registered will also 1 W Left parking lights
be met without changing over. 2 X Right parking lights
Vehicles with LED headlamps: 3 T Standing lights and licence plate and
You can set the low beam for driving on the right instrument lighting
or left via the on-board computer (/ page 189). 4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
5 L Low beam or high beam
Information about lighting systems and your
responsibility 6 R Rear fog light
7 N Front fog lamp
The vehicle's various lighting systems are only
aids. The vehicle driver is responsible for adjust‐ If you hear a warning tone when exiting the vehi‐
ing the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, cle, the lights may still be on.
visibility, statutory conditions and traffic condi‐ # Turn the light switch to Ã.
tions.
The exterior lighting (except standing and parking
lights) will automatically switch off in the follow‐
ing cases:
R if you remove the key from the ignition lock.
R if you open the driver's door while the key is
in position g in the ignition lock.
Switching on the daytime running lights
# Turn the light switch to Ã.
Automatic driving lights function
The standing lights, low beam and daytime run‐
ning lights will be switched on automatically
depending on the ignition status and the light
conditions.
106 Light and vision

& WARNING Risk of accident when the You can use the headlamp range adjuster to
dipped beam is switched off in poor visi‐ adjust the light cone of the headlamps to your
bility vehicle's load condition. The light cone will
change as the seats are occupied or the load
When the light switch is set to Ã, the compartment is loaded or unloaded. This can
dipped beam may not be switched on auto‐ cause visibility conditions to deteriorate and you
matically if there is fog, snow or other causes could dazzle oncoming traffic.
of poor visibility such as spray.
# In such cases, turn the light switch to
Operating the combination light switch
L.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid.

Responsibility for vehicle lighting rests with you.
If the standing lights and low beam have been
switched on, the green T (standing lights) and
L (low beam) indicator lamps on the instru‐
ment cluster will light up.
Activating/deactivating the fog light
Requirements:
R The light switch is in the L or à posi‐
tion.
R The power supply has been switched on.

# To switch the rear fog light on or off: press

the button R. 1 High beam
Comply with the country-specific regulations for 2 Right turn signal light
using the rear fog lamp. 3 Headlamp flashing
Adjusting headlamp range 4 Left turn signal light
# Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function.
Switching on high beam
# Switch on the low beam (/ page 105).
# Push the combination switch forwards 1.
The K indicator lamp on the instrument
cluster will light up.
% The high beam switches to the à position
only in darkness and when the engine is run‐
ning.
# To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its starting position.
The K indicator lamp on the instrument
cluster will light up.
# Turn headlamp range adjuster 1 to the
required position. Headlamp flashing
# If the vehicle is unladen, select position g. # Briefly pull the combination switch in the
direction of arrow 3.
The illumination of the road should be 40 m to
100 m and low beam must not dazzle oncoming Turn signal lights
traffic. # To indicate: push the combination switch in
the required direction 2 or 4 until it
 Light and vision 107

engages. In the case of larger steering move‐ The system comprises the following functions:
ments, the combination switch will automati‐ R Active light function (/ page 107)
cally switch back.
R Cornering light (/ page 107)
# To indicate briefly: tap the combination
R Motorway mode (/ page 108)
switch briefly in the required direction 2 or
4. The corresponding turn signal lamp will R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 108)
flash three times.
You can switch the Intelligent Light System func‐
tion on or off via the on-board computer
Switching the hazard warning light system (/ page 108).
on/off
Active light function

The active light function has the following func‐

tions:
R The headlamps follow the steering move‐
ments.
# Press button 1. R Relevant areas are better illuminated during a
journey.
If you operate a turn signal indicator while the
hazard warning light system is switched on, only The functions will be active when low beam is
the turn signal lamps on the relevant side of the switched on.
vehicle will light up. The active light function can, for example, detect
The hazard warning light system will switch on pedestrians, cyclists and animals at an earlier
automatically in the following situations: stage.
R The airbag is deployed Cornering light function
R The vehicle is heavily braked from a speed of
more than 70 km/h to a standstill.
The hazard warning light system will automati‐
cally switch off when the vehicle regains a speed
of more than 10 km/h after maximum full-stop
braking.
% The hazard warning light system will work
even when the vehicle has been switched off.

Intelligent Light System The function is active under the following condi‐
tions:
Function of the Intelligent Light System
The Intelligent Light System adapts the head‐ R Your speed is less than 40 km/h and the turn
lamps' lighting function to the current driving and signal light has been switched on or the
weather situation. steering wheel is turned.
R Your speed is between 40 km/h and
70 km/h and the steering wheel is turned.
108 Light and vision

The cornering light may still light up for a short Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off
time but will be switched off automatically after a # Press the ò button to call up the list of
maximum of three minutes. menus.
Motorway mode function # Use the : or 9 button to select Set-

Motorway mode increases the range and bright‐ tings.

ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility. # Press the a button.

# Use the : or 9 button to select

Lights.
# Press the a button.

# Use the : or 9 button to select Intelli-

gent Light System.
If the Intelligent Light System has been
switched on, the display will show the L
symbol in yellow on the instrument cluster.
# Press the a button.

Motorway mode will automatically be activated in When you switch on the Intelligent Light System
the following cases: function, you will enable the following functions:
R Your speed is greater than 110 km/h and the R Motorway mode
vehicle has covered at least 1,000 m without R Active light function
any significant steering movement.
R Cornering light
R Your speed is greater than 130 km/h.
R Enhanced fog light function
If your speed falls below 80 km/h after motorway
mode has been activated, it will automatically be
% If you set the low beam for driving on the
right or left, the display will show the display
deactivated.
message Inactive for left-side traffic or Inac-
Enhanced fog light function tive for right-side traffic in the Lights sub‐
The enhanced fog light function reduces self-daz‐ menu instead of Intelligent Light System
zling and improves the illumination of the edge of (/ page 189). This display message will
the carriageway. appear only if the setting for driving on the
right or left is the opposite to your vehicle's
national version.
% You can find further information in "Intelli‐
gent Light System" (/ page 107).

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

& WARNING Risk of accident despite

If your speed is below 70 km/h and the fog light Adaptive Highbeam Assist
has been switched on, the enhanced fog light Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:
function will automatically be activated. R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
The enhanced fog light function will automatically R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
be deactivated after activation in the following
R road users whose lighting is obstructed,
cases:
e.g. by a barrier
R Your speed is greater than 100 km/h.
R The fog light is switched off.
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognise other road users
with their own lighting, or may recognise
them too late.
 Light and vision 109

In these, or in similar situations, the auto‐ Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
matic high beam will not be deactivated or responsible for ensuring correct vehicle lighting
will be activated despite the presence of in accordance with the prevailing light, visibility
other road users. and traffic conditions.
# Always observe the road and traffic con‐ The system's optical sensor is located behind the
ditions carefully and switch off the high windscreen near the overhead control panel.
beam in good time. Switching Highbeam Assist on/off
Requirements
R The light switch is in the à position.
# To switch on: switch on high beam using the
combination switch.
If high beam is automatically switched on in
darkness, the _ indicator lamp on the
multifunction display will light up.
# To switch off: switch off high beam using the
combination switch.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function

& WARNING Risk of accident despite

The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
switches between the following settings:
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react
R Low beam
to:
R High beam
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
The system detects that vehicle lights are R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
approaching in the opposite direction or driving
R road users whose lighting is obstructed,
ahead of the vehicle.
e.g. by a barrier
If your speed is greater than 30 km/h and no
other road users are detected, high beam will On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
automatically be switched on. Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road
If your speed is greater than 25 km/h, the head‐ users with their own lighting, or may recog‐
lamp range will be controlled automatically nise them too late.
depending on the distance from other road users. In these, or in similar situations, the auto‐
High beam will automatically be deactivated in matic high beam will not be deactivated or
will be activated despite the presence of
the following cases:
other road users.
R Your speed is lower than 25 km/h.
# Always observe the road and traffic con‐
R Other road users have been detected. ditions carefully and switch off the high
R The road is sufficiently illuminated. beam in good time.
System limits Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take the road, account road, weather or traffic conditions.
weather or traffic conditions into consideration.
Detection may be restricted in the following
The detection of obstacles may be restricted if: cases:
R visibility is poor, e.g. in fog, heavy rain or R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
snow.
R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
R the sensors are dirty or covered. are obscured
110 Light and vision

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You At speeds greater than 40 km/h, Highbeam
are responsible for ensuring correct vehicle light‐ Assist Plus will perform the following actions:
ing in accordance with the prevailing light, visibil‐ R If no other road users are detected and the
ity and traffic conditions. road is straight, high beam will be switched
on.
R If highly reflective signs are detected, high
beam will automatically be switched off.
R If other road users are detected, partial high
beam will be switched on automatically.
R The K indicator lamp on the instrument
cluster will light up.
The system's optical sensor is located behind the
windscreen near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
on/off
Requirements
R The light switch is in the à position.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus switches auto‐
# To switch on: switch on high beam using the
matically between the following light types:
combination switch.
R Low beam If high beam is automatically switched on in
R Partial high beam darkness, the _ indicator lamp on the
R High beam multifunction display will light up.
# To switch off: switch off high beam using the
Partial high beam uses high beam to shine past combination switch.
other road users rather than dazzling them. The
low beam illumination area covers the vehicle in
front. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay
At speeds lower than 25 km/h or if there is insuf‐ time
ficient street lighting, Highbeam Assist Plus will Requirements:
perform the following actions: R The light switch is in the à position.
R Partial high beam and high beam will be auto‐
Multimedia system:
matically deactivated.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights
R The K indicator lamp on the instrument
5 Ext. light. del. sw. off
cluster will go out. The _ symbol for High‐
beam Assist Plus will remain switched on. # Set a switch-off delay time.

At speeds greater than 30 km/h, Highbeam When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exte‐
Assist Plus will perform the following actions: rior lighting will be activated for the set time.
R If no other road users are detected, high
beam will be switched on. Activating and deactivating the surround
R If other road users are detected, partial high lighting
beam will be switched on. Multimedia system:
R The K indicator lamp on the instrument 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights
cluster will light up. 5 Surround lighting

# Activate or deactivate the function.

The exterior lighting will remain on for 40 sec‐

onds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you
start the vehicle, the surround lighting will be
 Light and vision 111

deactivated and the automatic driving lights acti‐ # Set the required colour.
vated.
Adjusting the brightness
# Select Brightness.
Adjusting the interior lighting # Adjust the brightness.
Adjusting the interior lighting # Select a colour combination.
Front overhead control panel
Switching the interior lighting switch-off
delay time on/off
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights
5 Int. light. del. sw. off

# Switch the switch-off delay time on or off.

When this function is active, the interior light‐
ing switches on automatically when the
engine is unlocked or switched off.
Interior lighting buttons (example: comfort over‐
head control panel)
Changing bulbs
1p Front-left reading lamp
2| Automatic interior lighting control Instructions for replacing light sources
3c Front interior lighting
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
4w Rear or load compartment lighting
ponent parts whilst replacing a bulb
5p Front-right reading lamp
Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can
# To switch on/off: press the corresponding become very hot during operation.
button 1 – 5. When replacing a bulb, you could burn your‐
The layout and number of buttons depend on the self on these component parts.
equipment. # Allow the component parts to cool
down before replacing the bulbs.
Operating unit in the grab handle
Important safety notes
R Before changing the bulbs, switch off the
vehicle's lighting system. This will prevent a
short circuit.
R Use only spare bulbs of the same type and
with the correct voltage.
R Use bulbs only in enclosed lamps that have
been designed for them.
R Do not use any light source that has been
1p Rear reading lamp dropped or has scratches on its glass tube.
Otherwise, the light source may explode.
# To switch on/off: press button 1.
R The light source may explode under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
Adjusting ambient lighting - if it is hot and you touch it
Multimedia system: - if you drop it
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient lighting - if you scratch it
Setting the colour R Stains on the glass tube will reduce the
service life of the light source. Do not touch
# Select Colour. the glass tube with your bare hands. If neces‐
112 Light and vision

sary, clean the glass tube with alcohol or spi‐ Fitting/removing the cover in the front wheel
rits while it is cold and wipe it down with a arch
lint-free cloth.
R Protect light sources from moisture and do
not bring them into contact with liquids.
Always ensure the bulbs are firmly secured.
Have the following light sources changed at a
qualified specialist workshop only:
R Additional turn signal lamps on the outside
mirror
R Bulbs in the licence plate lighting

Replacing front light bulbs (vehicles with hal‐

ogen headlamps)
Overview of front light source types

# To remove: grip the centre of cover 1, slide

it upwards and pull it out.
The cover will hang downwards on the strap.
# To fit: insert cover 1 at the top and slide it
downwards until it engages.
Low beam

1 Additional turn signal lamp on the outside

mirror: LED
2 Turn signal light: PY 21 W
3 Low beam: H7 55 W
4 High beam/standing/parking lights/daytime
running lights: H15 55 W/15 W
Replacing light sources in the headlamp
Requirements
R The lighting system is switched off.
R The appropriate front wheel is turned
inwards.
R Low beam: you require a H7 55 W light bulb. # Remove the cover in the front wheel arch.
R Turn signal light: you require a PY 21 W light # Turn housing cover 1 anti-clockwise and
bulb. remove it.
R High beam / standing/parking lights / # Turn socket 2 for low beam to the left and
daytime running lights: you require a pull it out.
H15 55 W/15 W light bulb. # Pull the bulb out of socket 2.
# Insert the new bulb into socket 2.
# Insert socket 2 and rotate it to the right to
tighten it.
# Press on housing cover 1 and rotate it to
the right to tighten it.
 Light and vision 113

# Replace the cover in the front wheel arch. Replacing rear bulbs
High beam, standing/parking lights and day‐ Overview of rear light source types
time running lights

Vehicles with standard tail lamp

1 Third brake light: LED
2 Licence plate lighting: LED
3 Rear fog light (driver's side): P 21 W
4 Reversing light: P 21 W
5 Brake light, tail light/parking lights: P 21 W
# Open the bonnet.
6 Turn signal light: P 21 W
# Turn housing cover 1 anti-clockwise and Vehicles with LED tail lamps
remove it.
1 Third brake light: LED
# Pull out the bulb with socket 2. 2 Licence plate lighting: LED
# Insert the new bulb with socket 2 and 3 Rear fog light (driver's side): LED
engage it as far as it will go. 4 Reversing light: W 16 W
# Press on housing cover 1 and rotate it to 5 Brake light, tail light/parking lights: LED
the right to tighten it. 6 Turn signal light: LED
# Close the bonnet.
Replacing light sources in the tail lamp
Turn signal light
Requirements
R The lighting system is switched off.
R Standard tail lamp: you require a P 21 W
light source.
R LED tail lamp: you require a W 16 W light
source.
Removing the tail lamp

* NOTE Damage to the paintwork during

tail lamp removal
# Open the bonnet.
The paintwork may be damaged when the tail
# Turn socket 1 anti-clockwise and pull it out.
lamps are removed. The tail lamp may, for
# Pull the bulb out of socket 1. example, scratch the paintwork when it is
# Insert the new bulb into socket 1. removed.
# Insert socket 1 and turn it clockwise until it # Remove the tail lamps carefully.
engages. # Mercedes-Benz recommends having the
# Close the bonnet. tail lamp light sources replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop.
114 Light and vision

Bulb mount
3 Turn signal light
4 Brake light, tail light, parking light
5 Reversing light
6 Rear fog light (only on the driver's side)
Please note that you can change the bulb of the
reversing light only in the case of an LED tail # Remove the tail lamp.
lamp. # Gently turn the bulb anti-clockwise and take it
# Open the tailgate. out of the socket.
# Push the new bulb into the socket and turn it
% You will find a screwdriver in the vehicle tool clockwise to screw it in.
kit (/ page 247).
# Insert bulb mount 2 into the tail lamp and
# Unscrew two side screws 1. tighten all three screws 1.
# Push tail lamp 2 outwards against bolts 3 # Install the tail lamp.
as far as it will go.
# Press tail lamp 2 off outwards and away LED tail lamp
from bolts 3.
# Pull the connector off the bulb mount of tail
lamp 2.
Installing the tail lamp
# Push the connector into the bulb mount of tail
lamp 2.
# Push tail lamp 2 onto bolts 3 from the side
and press it against the vehicle.
# Tighten two side screws 1.
# Remove the tail lamp.
Standard tail lamp # Unscrew housing cover 1 by turning it anti-
clockwise.
# Turn the socket anti-clockwise and pull it out.
# Pull the bulb out of the socket.
# Insert the new bulb into the socket.
# Insert the socket and rotate it clockwise to
tighten it.
# Press on housing cover 1 and rotate it
clockwise to tighten it.
# Install the tail lamp.
# Unscrew three screws 1 and remove bulb
mount 2 from the tail lamp.
 Light and vision 115

Replacing interior light bulbs

Replacing light sources in the interior
Requirements
R The interior lighting has been switched off.
R Rear and load compartment lamp: you
require a T10 6W xenon light source.
R Interior and surround lighting: you require
a W 5 W light source.
R Signal and ambient lamp in the tailgate:
you require a W 5 W light source.
Rear and load compartment lamps

# Push in the catch spring of lamp housing 1

with a suitable object, e.g. a screwdriver, and
prise off lamp housing 1.
# Turn socket 2 anti-clockwise and pull it out
of lamp housing 1.
# Pull bulb 3 out of socket 2.
# Push new bulb 3 into socket 2.
# Screw socket 2 into lamp housing 1 by
turning it clockwise.
# Place lamp housing 1 in position on the left
and engage it.
Signal and ambient lamp in the tailgate
# Push in the catch spring of lens 1 with a
suitable object, e.g. a screwdriver, and then
prise off the lens with the lamp housing.
# Push the lugs of socket 2 inwards.
# Remove light source 3 from the lamp hous‐
ing.
# Insert the new light source.
# Position the lens on the lamp housing and
engage it.
# Align the lens with the lamp housing and
engage it.
Additional interior and surround lighting
Depending on the equipment, replacing the light
sources as described here applies to the follow‐ # Push in the catch spring of the lamp housing
ing lamps: on the side of transparent lens 3 with a suit‐
R The sun visor mirror lamp able object, e.g. a screwdriver, and prise off
R The ambient lamp at the bottom of the front the lamp housing.
door # Turn socket 2 anti-clockwise and pull it out
R The ambient lamp on the inside of the tailgate of the lamp housing.
# Pull the bulb out of socket 2.
# Push the new bulb into socket 2.
116 Light and vision

# Screw socket 2 into the lamp housing by Switching the rear window wiper on/off
turning it clockwise.
Requirements
# Place the lamp housing in position at the side R The power supply has been switched on.
of red lens 1 and engage it.

Windscreen wipers
Switching the windscreen wipers on and off
Requirements:
R The power supply has been switched on.

1 ô Wiping with washer fluid

2 ° Intermittent wiping
3 g Rear window wiper off
4 ô Wiping with washer fluid
# Move the è switch to the corresponding
position.
1 g Windscreen wipers off When the rear window wiper is switched on,
2 Ä Intermittent wiping, low the on-board computer will show the è
symbol on the Assistance graphic menu.
(low rain sensor sensitivity)
3 Å Intermittent wiping, high
# To wipe with washer fluid: push the è
switch beyond its current position as far as it
(high rain sensor sensitivity) will go towards 1 or 4 and hold it there.
4 ° Continuous wiping, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
# Turn the combination switch to the corre‐
sponding position 1 – 5. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
# Single wiping: push the button on the combi‐ the windscreen wipers are switched on
nation switch in the direction of arrow 6. while wiper blades are being replaced
# Washing: push the button on the combina‐ If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
tion switch in the direction of arrow 6 as far you are changing the wiper blades, you can
as the second point of resistance. be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
ers and ignition before changing the
wiper blades.

* NOTE Damage to the windscreen or rear

window during wiper blade replacement
If the wiper arm on the windscreen or rear
window is folded back before a wiper blade
has been fitted, the window may be damaged
by the force of the impact.
 Light and vision 117

# Never fold the wiper arm on the wind‐ Fitting the wiper blades
screen or rear window back until a
wiper blade has been fitted. Keep hold
of the wiper arm when replacing a wiper
blade.

* NOTE Damage to bonnet or windscreen

wipers when opening the bonnet
If the windscreen wipers have been folded
back from the windscreen when the bonnet is
opened, the windscreen wipers or the bonnet
may be damaged.
# Ensure that the windscreen wipers have
not been folded back from the wind‐
screen.

Removing the wiper blades # Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 1.
# Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐
screen. # Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the locking position.
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor‐
rectly.
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐
screen.
Maintenance display

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the

other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐
tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm as
far as it will go.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the removal position.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm # Remove protective film 1 from the mainte‐
in the direction of arrow 4. nance displays on the tips of the newly fitted
wiper blades.
If the colour of the maintenance display changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
% The time until the colour changes varies
depending on the usage conditions.
118 Light and vision

Replacing the rear window wiper blade & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐
Tailgate judgement of distance when using the
outside mirror
The outside mirrors reflect objects on a
smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact
closer than they appear.
# Therefore, always look over your shoul‐
der in order to ensure that you are
aware of the actual distance between
you and the road users driving behind
you.

# Fold wiper arm 1 away from the rear win‐ Adjusting the outside mirrors electrically
dow until it engages in the replacement posi‐
tion.
# Hold wiper arm 1 firmly and pull wiper blade
2 off the wiper arm in the direction of the
arrow.
# Place new wiper blade 2 on wiper arm 1.
# Hold wiper arm 1 firmly and push wiper
blade 2 in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
# Make sure that wiper blade 2 is seated cor‐
rectly.
# Fold wiper arm 1 back onto the rear win‐
dow.

Mirrors
# Switch on the power supply or the ignition.
# Press button 3 or 4 to select the outside
Operating the outside mirrors
mirror to be adjusted.
& WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle set‐ # Set the position of the mirror glass using but‐
tings are adjusted while the vehicle is in ton 2.
motion Folding the electric outside mirrors in/out
You could lose control of the vehicle in partic‐
ular in the following situations: * NOTE Damage to the electric outside
mirrors
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ If you fold the electric outside mirrors in or
ror while the vehicle is in motion. out manually, you may damage the outside
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ mirrors and they will not lock in place prop‐
cle is in motion. erly.
If the outside mirrors are not folded in when
# Before starting the engine: adjust the washing the vehicle in a car wash, the washer
driver's seat, head restraints, steering brushes may fold them in forcibly and dam‐
wheel and mirror in particular and fas‐ age them.
ten your seat belt.
# The outside mirrors must only be folded
in and out electrically.
# Fold the outside mirrors in before wash‐
ing the vehicle in a car wash.
 Light and vision 119

# Switch on the power supply or the ignition. Operating sun visors

# Briefly press button 1.
You will no longer be able to fold in the outside
mirrors once you reach a speed greater than
47 km/h.
Engaging the outside mirrors
If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged
forwards or backwards, proceed as follows.
# Press and hold button 1 until you hear a
click followed by the mirror audibly engaging
in position. # Glare from front: Fold the sun visor 1
The mirror housing will now be engaged and downwards.
you will be able to adjust the outside mirrors
# Glare from the side: Swivel the sun visor 1
as normal.
to the side.
Resetting the outside mirrors % The sun visor can only be moved to the side
% If the battery has been disconnected or com‐ for vehicles without a window airbag.
pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must
be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror
folding function work properly.
# Switch on the power supply or the ignition.
# Briefly press button 1.
Heating the outside mirrors
Vehicles without a rear window heater: at
temperatures below 15°C, the mirror heater will
automatically switch on permanently once the
engine has been started.
Vehicles with a rear window heater: at temper‐
atures below 15°C, the mirror heater will auto‐
matically switch on for ten minutes once the
engine has been started. The mirror heater can
also be switched on together with the rear win‐
dow heater.
# Switch on the ignition.

# Press the top or bottom section of the ¤

rocker switch on the control panel for the air
conditioning.
The indicator lamp above the ¤ rocker
switch will light up and the mirror heater will
be switched on together with the rear window
heater.
120 Climate control

Overview of climate control systems

TEMPMATIC overview

1 w Sets the temperature (/ page 124)

2 _ Adjusts the air distribution
(/ page 123)
3 H Sets the airflow (/ page 123)
4 ¿ Switches cooling with air dehumidifica‐
tion on/off (/ page 122)
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen (/ page 124)
6 Calls up the air conditioning menu of the
multimedia system
7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater and
mirror heater on/off (/ page 125)
8 Switches the hot-water auxiliary heater (sta‐
tionary heater) on/off (/ page 128)
9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
manually (/ page 124)
A Y Calls up the air conditioning menu of
the multimedia system for rear-compartment
heating/rear-compartment air conditioning
 Climate control 121

THERMOTRONIC overview

Vehicles with a hot-water auxiliary heater (stationary heater)

Front operating unit: 8 & Switches the hot-water auxiliary heater
1 w Sets the temperature on the left on/off (/ page 128)
(/ page 124) 9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
2 _ Sets the air distribution (/ page 123) manually (/ page 124)
3 H Sets the airflow (/ page 123) A Y Calls up the air conditioning menu of
4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode the multimedia system for the rear air condi‐
(/ page 123) tioning system
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen (/ page 124) B w Sets the temperature on the right
6 Calls up the air conditioning menu of the (/ page 124)
multimedia system Rear operating unit:
Ì Switches residual heat utilisation C w Sets the temperature (/ page 124)
on/off (/ page 125) D Display
7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater and E K Sets the airflow (/ page 123)
mirror heater on/off (/ page 125)
122 Climate control

Vehicles without a hot-water auxiliary heater (stationary heater)

Front operating unit: # To switch on: press the top or bottom sec‐

1 w Sets the temperature on the left tion of the ! rocker switch.

(/ page 124) The multimedia system air conditioning menu
2 _ Sets the air distribution (/ page 123) will open.
3 H Sets the airflow (/ page 123) or
4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode # Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the

(/ page 123) H rocker switch.

# To switch off: press the top or bottom sec‐
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen (/ page 124)
6 Calls up the air conditioning menu of the tion of the ! rocker switch.
multimedia system or
Ì Switches residual heat utilisation # Set the airflow to level g using the H
on/off (/ page 125) rocker switch.
7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater and % When climate control is switched off, "OFF"
mirror heater on/off (/ page 125) will appear on the display of the rear operat‐
8 ¿ Switches cooling with air dehumidifica‐ ing unit.
tion on/off (/ page 122) % When the vehicle is started, the climate con‐
9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off trol settings most recently selected will be
manually (/ page 124) adopted automatically.
A Y Calls up the air conditioning menu of
the multimedia system for the rear air condi‐ Switching the A/C function on/off
tioning system
B w Sets the temperature on the right Requirements
(/ page 124) R The climate control system has been
Rear operating unit: switched on (/ page 122).
C w Sets the temperature (/ page 124) R The engine is running.
D Display When the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
E K Sets the airflow (/ page 123) function is switched on, the air inside the vehicle
is cooled and dehumidified according to the tem‐
perature selected.
Operating climate control systems
The function can be activated or deactivated only
Switching the climate control system on/off in the climate control menu and not in the cli‐
# Switch on the ignition.
 Climate control 123

mate control menu for rear-compartment air con‐ the à rocker switch will go out. The function
ditioning (second menu level). that has not been changed manually, however,
# Press the top or bottom section of the will continue to be regulated automatically. When
¿ rocker switch. the manually changed function switches back to
When the indicator lamp above the automatic mode, the indicator lamp above the
¿ rocker switch lights up, the "Cooling à rocker switch will light up again.
with air dehumidification" function is
switched on. Information on the air distribution settings
or
TEMPMATIC air-conditioning system and
# Switch the function on and off via the air con‐
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control
ditioning menu of the multimedia system.
For vehicles with THERMOTRONIC automatic cli‐ ¯ Directs air to the demister vents
mate control and a hot-water auxiliary heater, b Directs air to the demister, centre and side
there is no ¿ rocker switch. You can activate air vents
or deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica‐ _ Directs air to the demister, centre, side
tion" function via the multimedia system. and footwell vents
When the indicator lamp above the ¿ rocker a Directs air to the demister and footwell
switch flashes three times, the function is vents
switched off due to a defect. Have the climate
P Directs air to the centre and side air vents
control system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. S Directs air to the centre, side and footwell
vents
% Switch off the A/C function only briefly. Oth‐
erwise, the windows could mist up more O Directs air to the footwell vents
quickly. W Controls air distribution automatically
% Condensation may leak from the underside of
the vehicle in cooling mode. This is not a sign
Setting the air distribution
of a defect.
Requirements:
Automatically regulating climate control R The climate control system is switched on.

Requirements: # Press rocker switch _ up or down.

R The climate control system has been The various air distribution settings appear in
switched on (/ page 122). the air conditioning menu of the multimedia
system.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control # Press the _ rocker switch up or down until
When THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control the desired setting is reached.
is in automatic mode, the set temperature will
automatically be kept constant. The system auto‐ Vehicles with rear climate control
matically regulates the temperature of the dis‐ When the rear air conditioning system is switched
pensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. on, the air distribution setting on the control
Automatic mode can be activated or deactivated panel also applies to rear climate control.
only on the climate control menu and not on the This also applies to the automatic mode of
climate control menu for rear compartment air THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. The
conditioning (second menu level). air is then automatically directed to the footwell
# To switch automatic mode on/off: press and/or the headroom of the rear compartment.
the top or bottom section of the à rocker
switch. Setting the airflow
When the indicator lamp above the Ã
rocker switch lights up, automatic mode is Requirements
switched on. R The climate control system is switched on.
In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or air # To increase or decrease: press the top or
distribution manually, the indicator lamp above bottom section of the H rocker switch.
124 Climate control

Vehicles with rear climate control: press the Y The temperature, airflow and air distribution
button first to set the airflow for the rear com‐ will be regulated automatically to optimise
partment via the front control panel. the demisting effect. Air-recirculation mode
will be deactivated.
Setting the temperature When you enable automatic mode, the "Demist
windscreen" function will switch off automati‐
Requirements cally.
R The climate control system is switched on.
When you switch off the "Demist windscreen"
# To increase or decrease: press the top or function, the previous settings for automatic cli‐
bottom section of the w rocker switch. mate control will be applied again.
Vehicles with rear climate control: press the Y Note the following exceptions:
button first to set the temperature for the rear R Air-recirculation mode will remain switched
compartment via the front control panel. off.
R If the A/C function has been automatically
Switching the synchronisation function activated, it will remain active.
on/off
Requirements Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
R The climate control system has been When air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
switched on (/ page 122). windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-
recirculation mode only briefly.
The temperature can be set centrally using the
synchronisation function. The temperature set‐ # Press the top or bottom section of the g
ting for the driver's side will then be adopted for rocker switch.
the front passenger side and, in vehicles with rear When the indicator lamp above the g
climate control, the rear compartment as well. rocker switch lights up, air-recirculation mode
# Switch the "Synchronisation" function on and
is switched on.
off via the air conditioning menu of the multi‐ Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch
media system. on in the following cases:
The synchronisation function will be switched off R in high outside temperatures
if the settings for the front passenger side or rear R while the vehicle is driving through a tunnel
compartment are changed. (vehicles with THERMOTRONIC automatic cli‐
mate control and navigation only)
Demisting the windscreen After approximately 30 minutes, outside air will
automatically be introduced again.
You can use this function to defrost and demist
the windscreen and the front side windows from Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch
the inside. Switch off the "Demist windscreen" off in the following cases:
function as soon as the windscreen is clear. R after approximately five minutes at outside
% Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC: if the vehicle temperatures below approximately 7°C
detects mist on the windows, the function R after approximately five minutes when the
will automatically be switched on. "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is
# Switch on climate control (/ page 122). deactivated
# To switch on/off: push the top or bottom R after approximately 30 minutes at outside
section of the ¬ rocker switch on the front temperatures above approximately 7°C and
control panel. when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
If the indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker function is switched on.
switch lights up, the function has been
switched on. The current air-conditioning set‐
tings will be deactivated.
 Climate control 125

Convenience opening/closing # Pre-entry climate control and conveni‐

ence opening with the key: press and hold
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not the % button on the key.
paying attention during convenience clos‐ The side windows open automatically and the
ing blower of the climate control system is activa‐
ted.
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side win‐ Switching the rear window heater on/off
dows.
The rear window heater consumes a lot of elec‐
# When the convenience closing feature is tricity. You should therefore switch off the rear
operating, monitor the entire closing window heater as soon as the rear window is
process and make sure that no body clear.
parts are in the closing area.
# Switch on the ignition.

# Press the top or bottom of the ¤ rocker

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from the
switch.
convenience opening feature
If the indicator lamp above the ¤ rocker
During convenience opening parts of the switch lights up, the rear window heater is
body could be drawn in or become trapped switched on.
between the side window and window frame.
The rear window heater will switch off automati‐
# When opening, make sure that nobody
cally after a few minutes.
is touching the side windows.
# If someone becomes trapped, immedi‐
Switching the residual heat utilisation on/off
ately press the W button in the door
to open the side windows. When the engine is switched off, it is possible to
The side windows stop. make use of the residual heat of the engine to
# To continue closing the side windows, heat or ventilate the vehicle interior for approx‐
pull on the W button. imately 30 minutes. The heating or ventilation
time depends on the set vehicle interior tempera‐
# Convenience closing with the air recircu‐ ture.
lation rocker switch: press and hold the # Switch off the engine or remove the key.
g rocker switch up or down until the side # To switch on: press the top or bottom sec‐
windows close automatically. tion of the ! rocker switch.
The indicator lamp above the g rocker When residual heat utilisation is switched on,
switch lights up. The initial position of the the indicator lamp above the ! rocker
side windows is saved. Air-recirculation mode switch will light up.
is activated.
The blower will run at a low speed regardless
If you open the side windows manually after of the airflow setting.
closing them with the convenience closing
feature, they will open automatically as far as If the "Residual heat" function is switched on
the start position before the convenience at high outside temperatures, only the sta‐
closing. tionary ventilation will be switched on. The
# Convenience opening with the air-recircu‐ blower will then run at medium speed.
lation rocker switch: press and hold the # To switch off: press the top or bottom sec‐
g rocker switch up or down until the side tion of the ! rocker switch again.
windows open automatically. The indicator lamp above the ! rocker
The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch goes out.
switch goes out. Air-recirculation mode will
be deactivated.
126 Climate control

Residual heat utilisation will switch off automati‐ Adjusting the side air vents:
cally in the following cases:
R after a running time of approximately
30 minutes
R if the starter battery's charge status is too
low
R when the ignition is switched on
R when the hot-water auxiliary heater is
switched on

Operating air vents # To open/close: turn controller 2 to the

right or left as far as it will go.
Adjusting the air vents
# To adjust the airflow direction: hold side air
& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite vent 1 by controller 2 and move it up or
due to being too close to the air vents down or to the left or right.

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air Opening/closing the rear air vents:
vents.
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance
from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.

Adjusting the centre air vents

1 Adjustment wheel for vertically adjusting and

regulating airflow
2 Adjustment wheel for horizontally adjusting
airflow
The air vents can be adjusted only on vehicles
with rear-compartment air conditioning.
# To open: turn adjustment wheel 1 of the
rear air vent to the centre position.
# To open/close: turn controller 3 or 4 to
# To close: turn adjustment wheel 1 to the
the right or left as far as it will go.
upper or lower end position.
# To adjust the airflow direction: hold centre
air vent 1 or 2 by controller 3 or 4 and
move it up or down or to the left or right. Auxiliary heating
Information about auxiliary heating

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐

sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if
the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.
 Climate control 127

# Always switch the stationary heater off # Do not block the flow of hot air.
in enclosed spaces without an air
extraction systems, e.g. in garages. * NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta‐
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around tionary heater or stationary ventilation
the vehicle free from snow when the operation
engine or the stationary heater are run‐
ning. Operating the stationary heater or stationary
ventilation drains the battery.
# Open a window on the windward side of
# After heating or ventilating the vehicle
the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup‐
ply of fresh air. twice, drive for a longer period of time.

Your vehicle may be equipped with either a hot-

& WARNING Risk of fire due to hot station‐ water auxiliary heater or an auxiliary warm-air
ary heater components and exhaust heater.
gases
The hot-water auxiliary heater is adjusted and
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or operated using the & rocker switch on the cli‐
twigs may ignite. mate control system control panel and via the
# When the stationary heater is switched multimedia system or by remote control.
on, make sure that: The auxiliary warm-air heater is adjusted and
R hot vehicle parts do not come into operated via the switch clock on the lower centre
contact with flammable materials. console or by remote control
R the exhaust gas can flow out of the
stationary heater exhaust pipe Hot-water auxiliary heater
unhindered.
R the exhaust gas does not come into
Function of the hot-water auxiliary heater
contact with flammable materials. Observe the notes on auxiliary heating
(/ page 126).
The heater for the auxiliary heating is fitted at the The hot-water auxiliary heater has a heater boos‐
front of the vehicle underbody. The emissions ter, stationary heater and stationary ventilation
outlet is on the left side of the vehicle below the function. In addition, the auxiliary heating system
front door. heats the engine coolant to protect the engine.
The stationary heater automatically adapts its
& WARNING Risk of poisoning during work operating mode to changes in outside tempera‐
on the auxiliary warm-air heater ture and weather conditions. It is therefore possi‐
If work on the heat exchanger of the auxiliary ble that the stationary heater may switch from
warm-air heater is not performed correctly, ventilation to heating mode or from heating to
exhaust fumes could leak into the passenger ventilation mode.
compartment. The stationary heater will automatically switch
# Have all work on the auxiliary warm-air itself off after a maximum of 50 minutes. The
heater carried out at a qualified special‐ heater booster function helps to heat up the vehi‐
ist workshop. cle while the engine is running and at low outside
temperatures.
If you are transporting hazardous materials, com‐ You can set up to three departure times for pre-
ply with the relevant safety regulations. Place entry climate control by remote control or via the
objects a sufficient distance from the auxiliary multimedia system. The switch-on time is then
heating outlet opening. calculated based on the outside temperature and
the activated departure time. This means that
* NOTE Damage to the auxiliary heating your vehicle is preheated or precooled by the set
due to overheating departure time.
If the flow of hot air is blocked, the auxiliary If the departure time is reached and the engine is
heating may overheat and switch off. not started, the auxiliary heating will continue to
128 Climate control

run for approximately five more minutes. It will Adjusting the hot-water auxiliary heater by
then switch off automatically. remote control
When the auxiliary heating is heating and the Requirements:
engine is started, the heater booster function of R The fuel tank is filled above the reserve level.
the auxiliary heating will be activated.
When the auxiliary heating is ventilating and the Switching on immediately
engine is started, the auxiliary heating will be
automatically switched off.
Switching the hot-water auxiliary heater
on/off with the button
Requirements
R The fuel tank is filled above the reserve level.

# Press and hold the u button until the ON

message appears on the remote control's dis‐
play.
Setting the departure time
# Briefly press the u button.
# Continue to press the , or . button
The coloured indicator lamps above the & until the time to be changed appears on the
rocker switch have the following meanings: display.
R Blue – stationary ventilation is switched on
# Press the u and ^ buttons simultane‐
ously.
R Red – the stationary heater is switched on
The Î symbol on the remote control display
R Yellow – a departure time is preselected will flash.
# To switch on: press the top or bottom sec‐ # Set the required departure time with
tion of rocker switch 1. the , and . buttons.
The red or blue indicator lamp above rocker # Press the u and ^ buttons simultane‐
switch 1 will light up. ously.
The multimedia system will be activated for The new departure time will be saved.
approximately one minute.
Up to three departure times can be saved.
# Set the desired temperature via the multime‐
# To activate the departure time: briefly
dia system.
press the u button.
# To switch off: press the top or bottom sec‐
# Select the required departure time with
tion of rocker switch 1 again.
The red or blue indicator lamp above rocker the , and . buttons.
switch 1 will go out. # Press and hold the u button.
The Í symbol, the departure time and,
depending on the selected departure time,
letter A, B or C will appear on the remote con‐
trol's display.
 Climate control 129

# To deactivate the departure time: select # If the battery cover does not close
the required departure time and press and securely, do not continue to use the
hold the ^ button. remote control, and keep it out of the
OFF will appear on the display. reach of children.
# To check the status of the active station‐ # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
ary heater: briefly press the u button. attention immediately.
Switching off immediately
# Press and hold the ^ button. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
Overview of remote control displays (station‐ teries
ary heating/ventilation)

Batteries contain toxic and corro‐

sive substances.
#

Take discharged batteries to

a qualified specialist workshop or to a
collection point for used batteries.
1 Stationary ventilation switched on
Requirements
2 Stationary heating switched on
R A CR2450 lithium battery is available.
3 Selected departure time
4 Remaining stationary heating or ventilation Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
time (in minutes) battery replaced by a qualified specialist work‐
5 Stationary heating or ventilation active shop.
6 Departure time activated
7 Signal strength
Further display options:
R Time: the selected departure time.
R 0 minutes: the running time of the stationary
heating extends as the engine has not yet
reached the operating temperature.
R OFF: stationary heating or ventilation has
been switched off. # Push a pointed object into recess 1.
Changing the remote control's battery (sta‐ # Slide battery cover 2 backwards in the
tionary heater) direction of the arrow.
# Insert new battery 3 with the lettering
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to facing upwards.
swallowing batteries
# Slide battery cover 2 onto the remote con‐
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan‐ trol in the opposite direction to the arrow
ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe until the battery cover engages.
internal burns within two hours.
There is a risk of fatal injuries.
# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
dren.
130 Climate control

Rectifying problems with the hot-water auxili‐ You have the following options for operating the
ary heater auxiliary heating:
FAIL ¨ appears on the remote control dis‐ R The switch clock in the stowage compartment
play below the centre console
R The switch clock on the lower centre console
Possible cause:
R Remote control
R Signal transmission between transmitter and
receiver is malfunctioning. You can use the switch clock to set up to three
departure times for pre-entry climate control.
# Change your position in relation to the vehi‐
cle, moving closer if necessary. Auxiliary warm-air heater switch clock over‐
view
FAIL appears on the remote control display
Use the switch clock to configure the following
Possible cause:
settings:
R The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.
R Switching immediate heating mode on/off
# Charge the starter battery. R Setting up to three preselection times
Possible cause: R Setting the operating duration within a range
R The fuel tank is not filled up to the reserve of 10 to 120 minutes or to continuous opera‐
level. tion
R Adjusting the heating level (preselected tem‐
# Refuel at the nearest filling station. perature).
FAIL appears on the remote control dis‐
play ¯
Possible cause:
R The auxiliary heating has malfunctioned.

# Have the auxiliary heating checked at a quali‐

fied specialist workshop.

Auxiliary warm-air heater

Function of the auxiliary warm-air heater
Observe the notes on auxiliary heating
(/ page 126).
The air-intake opening for the auxiliary warm-air
heater is located on the inner side of the left
front seat base. The warm-air outlet is on the rear 1 Program column on the display
side of the left front seat.
G Selects preselection memory number
The auxiliary warm-air heater supplements the 1–3
climate control system of your vehicle and has an Mon–Sun, sets days
auxiliary heating function.
2 Menu bar on the display
The stationary heater will switch off automatically y Switches immediate heating mode
when the engine is switched off or when the set on/off
heating duration has elapsed.
B Sets the preselection periods
The immediate heating mode of the auxiliary
Ñ Sets the day, time and operating dura‐
heating supports the climate control system
tion
when the engine is running and the outside tem‐
perature is low. ß Sets the heating level
3 Display section for time, heating level and
operating duration on the display
à Continuous operation on
 Climate control 131

ß Heating level set The operating duration set is the default setting
4 Selects an option in program column 1 or for immediate heating mode. You can set the
on menu bar 2 (forwards) operating duration within a range of 10 to
120 minutes or to continuous operation.
Increases values
# Press the Û or â button to set the
5 Confirms a selection or setting
6 Status bar minute value or the à symbol to select
continuous operation.
y Heating mode on
# Press the a button.
7 Activates the switch clock
The operating duration will be stored and the
Cancels or terminates the settings in a menu time will be shown on display section 3.
8 Selects an option in program column 1 or
on menu bar 2 (backwards) Setting the heating level
Reduces values You can set the heating level to between 10 and
30.
Operating the switch clock (auxiliary warm- The heating level corresponds to a preselected
air heater) temperature for the vehicle interior. This is a
Activating the switch clock guide value and, depending on the ambient tem‐
The switch clock will switch to standby mode perature, may differ from the actual vehicle inte‐
after ten seconds. The display will go off. rior temperature.
# Activate the switch clock.
Saved settings will not be lost when the switch
clock switches to standby mode. # Press the Û or â button until the ß

# Press and hold the Ü button until menu symbol flashes on menu bar 2.
bar 2 and the time are shown on the dis‐ # Press the a button.
play. The heating level will flash on display section
3.
Setting the day, time and operating duration
# Press the Û or â button to set the
When you switch the auxiliary heating on for the
first time after a malfunction, set the day and desired heating level.
time. # Press the a button.

% You can find further information on malfunc‐ Immediate heating mode

tions under "Problems with the auxiliary
warm-air heater".
# To switch on: activate the switch clock.
# Activate the switch clock.
# Press the Û or â button until the y
symbol flashes on menu bar 2.
# Press the Û or â button until the Ñ
symbol flashes on menu bar 2.
# Press the a button.
The y symbol will be shown on display
# Press the a button.
section 3 and the operating duration will
The selected day will flash in program column flash.
1.
# Set the operating duration.
# Press the Û or â button to select the
The temperature level will be shown on dis‐
desired day. play section 3.
# Press the a button. # To switch off: press the Û or â button
The selected day will be stored. until the y symbol flashes on menu bar
The hour value on the clock will flash. 2.
# Set the hour and minute value on the clock to # Press the a button.
correspond with the day and confirm using The y symbol will not be shown on display
the a button. section 3.
The time will be stored. Program column 1 The auxiliary heating will continue to run for
will not be shown and the operating duration approximately three minutes and will then
will flash on display section 3. switch off automatically.
132 Climate control

Preselected heating mode # To deactivate the switch-on time: complete

Preselected heating mode is available only for the steps as described in the "Setting the
vehicles that are not equipped to transport haz‐ switch-on time" section.
ardous goods. # If the y symbol is shown on display sec‐
You can set three preselection periods using the tion 3: press the Û or â button until
switch clock. off appears.
When setting the preselection period, make sure # Press the a button.
that it corresponds not to the switch-on time but The preselection period will be deactivated
to the switch-off or departure time. The auxiliary and the time will be shown on display section
heating will start up automatically prior to depar‐ 3.
ture and run for the set operating duration.
Operating the auxiliary heating by remote
If identical preselection periods (time and day) control (auxiliary warm-air heater)
are set in the preselection memory, only the last
You can switch the auxiliary heating on and off as
preselection period set will be saved.
well as set the operating duration with a remote
When switching on the auxiliary heating for the control. The remote control must be synchron‐
first time following a malfunction or voltage sup‐ ised with the auxiliary heating system receiver.
ply interruption, you will need to set the preselec‐ For more information, please contact a qualified
tion periods again. specialist workshop.
# To set the switch-on time: activate the Store the remote control for the auxiliary heating
switch clock. such that the auxiliary heating function cannot be
# Press the Û or â button until the B switched on unintentionally. In particular, ensure
symbol flashes on menu bar 2. that the remote control is kept out of the reach of
# Press the a button.
children.
The preselection memory numbers G will The remote control has a range of approximately
be shown in program column 1. The selec‐ 300 m. The range is reduced by sources of radio
ted preselection memory number will flash. interference or solid objects, for example.
# Press the Û or â button to select the
desired preselection memory number.
# Press the a button.
The preselection memory number will be
selected. The days will be displayed.
# Set the day and time as described in the "Set‐
ting the day, time and operating duration"
section.
The preselection period will be stored. Pro‐
gram column 1 will be hidden. The message
on and symbol y will appear on display
section 3.
# Press the a button.
The operating duration will flash on display
section 3.
# Set the operating duration.
1 Indicator lamps
The operating duration for the preselection 2 Confirms settings
period will be stored. The time and the num‐ 3 Switches the remote control on/off
ber of the set preselection memory will be Changing the operating duration or cancel‐
shown. ling or terminating settings
% An underscore denotes the preselection Indicator lamp 1 lights up in various ways to
memory that will be next to be activated in show different operating modes:
chronological order. The selected day will
R Lights up red – remote control switched on
also be shown.
R Flashes red – auxiliary heating switched off
 Climate control 133

R Lights up green – auxiliary heating switched # Press the a button.

on During data transfer, indicator lamp 1 will
R Flashes green – change operating duration light up red.
option active When indicator lamp 1 emits two long,
R Flashes alternately red and green – remote green flashes, the selected operating duration
control in synchronising mode is stored.
If no adjustment is made to the operating
When the remote control battery is weak, indica‐ duration, indicator lamp 1 will flash six
tor lamp 1 will flash red rapidly. times and the remote control will enter
# Replace the remote control battery standby mode.
(/ page 132).
Replacing the remote control battery (auxili‐
% You can find further information on lamp sta‐ ary warm-air heater)
tuses under "Problems with the auxiliary
heating" .
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
Switching the remote control on/off swallowing batteries
The remote control will switch to standby mode Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan‐
after ten seconds. Indicator lamp 1 will go out. ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe
# To switch on: press and hold the Ü but‐ internal burns within two hours.
ton until indicator lamp 1 lights up red. There is a risk of fatal injuries.
# To switch off: press and hold button Ü # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
until indicator lamp 1 goes out. dren.
Switching auxiliary heating on and off # If the battery cover does not close

# Switch on the remote control. securely, do not continue to use the

remote control, and keep it out of the
# To switch on: when indicator lamp 1 reach of children.
flashes red, press the a button.
# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
During data transfer, indicator lamp 1 will
attention immediately.
light up red.
When indicator lamp 1 lights up green, the
auxiliary heating is switched on. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
# To switch off: when indicator lamp 1 lights teries
up green, press the a button.
During data transfer, indicator lamp 1 will
light up red.
When indicator lamp 1 flashes red, the aux‐ Batteries contain toxic and corro‐
iliary heating is switched off. sive substances.
Changing the operating duration #

# Switch on the remote control.

# When indicator lamp 1 flashes red, press Take discharged batteries to
the Ü and a buttons simultaneously. a qualified specialist workshop or to a
Indicator lamp 1 will flash green. collection point for used batteries.
# Press the Ü button repeatedly until the
desired operating duration is shown. Requirements
R 20 minutes – indicator lamp 1 will flash R A CR2430 lithium battery is available.
green twice.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
R 30 minutes – indicator lamp 1 will flash battery replaced by a qualified specialist work‐
green three times. shop.
R 40 minutes – indicator lamp 1 will flash
green four times.
134 Climate control

The message ini appears on the display sec‐

tion of the switch clock or the clock is flash‐
ing.
Possible cause:
R The on-board electrical system voltage has
been interrupted. All saved settings have
been deleted.
Automatic hardware detection is currently
active.
# Turn battery cover 2 anticlockwise using a
suitable object, e.g. a coin, and remove it.
# When automatic hardware detection is com‐
plete, set the day, time, operating duration
# Check the seal on battery cover 2 for dam‐ and preselection period (/ page 131).
age and replace it if necessary.
The indicator lamp on the remote control
# Remove battery 3.
flashes red rapidly.
# Insert a new battery 3 into the battery com‐
partment with the positive terminal facing Possible cause:
upwards. R The remote control battery is discharged.
Use a lint-free cloth to do so. Data transmission is not possible.
# Position battery cover 2 so that mark 1 on # Replace the remote control battery
the raised area points between two recesses (/ page 133).
4.
# Turn the battery cover clockwise as far as it The indicator lamp on the remote control
will go. flashes red and green in rapid succession.
# Check all the functions of the remote control. Possible cause:
R There is no connection between the remote
Rectifying problems with the auxiliary warm- control and the receiver in the vehicle.
air heater
# Change your position in relation to the vehi‐
The display section of the switch clock shows cle, e.g. hold the remote control higher or
the message Err. move it to the side.
Possible cause: # Move closer.
R The fuel level in the fuel tank is too low.
If you cannot make a connection and the auxiliary
The auxiliary heating switches off automati‐
heating is switched on, you can switch off the
cally.
auxiliary heating only via the switch clock in the
# Refuel the vehicle. vehicle.
# Start the auxiliary heating several times until Possible cause:
the fuel lines are full. R The remote control is not synchronised.
Possible cause: # Have the remote control synchronised at a
R A malfunction has occurred. qualified specialist workshop.
The auxiliary heating switches off automati‐ The indicator lamp on the remote control
cally. slowly flashes red and green alternately.
# Have the auxiliary heating checked at a quali‐ Possible cause:
fied specialist workshop. R The remote control is not synchronised.

# Have the remote control synchronised at a

qualified specialist workshop.
 Climate control 135

The auxiliary heating will not switch on or

switches off automatically.
Possible cause:
R The air ducts are clogged.

# Ensure that the flow of hot air is not blocked.

# Have the auxiliary heating checked at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
136 Driving and parking

Driving
Key positions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

due to leaving children unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could, in particular:
R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. g Inserting/removing the key
1 Switching on the power supply
R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
2 Switching on the ignition
R operate vehicle equipment and become
3 Start the engine
trapped, for example.
% If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it
In addition, the children could also set the
can still be turned in the ignition lock. How‐
vehicle in motion by, for example:
ever, the ignition will not be switched on. The
R releasing the parking brake. engine cannot be started.
R changing the transmission position. # Insert the key into the ignition lock in position
R starting the vehicle. g and turn it to the desired position.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Running-in notes
# When leaving the vehicle, always take Protect the engine during the first 1,500 km by:
the key with you and lock the vehicle. R driving at varying road and engine speeds.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of R shift to the next highest gear at the very lat‐
children. est when the needle reaches the last third
before the red area in the rev counter.
& DANGER Risk of death caused by R avoiding stress on the vehicle such as driving
exhaust gases at full throttle.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust R not shifting manually to a lower gear to brake.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling R after 1,500 km, gradually increasing the
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health engine speed and accelerating the vehicle up
and leads to poisoning. to full speed.
# Never leave the engine or, if present,
R vehicles with automatic transmission: not
the auxiliary heating running in an
depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
pressure point (kickdown).
lation.
This also applies if the engine or parts of the driv‐
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable etrain have been replaced.
material in the engine compartment or Also observe the following running-in notes:
the exhaust system R After the vehicle has been delivered or after
Flammable materials may ignite. repairs, the sensor system of some driving
# Therefore, check regularly that there are
systems and driving safety systems adjusts
no flammable materials in the engine itself automatically after the vehicle has been
compartment or on the exhaust system. driven a certain distance. Full system effec‐
tiveness is not reached until the end of this
teach-in process.
R New and replaced brakepads, brake disks and
tyres only reach their optimal braking effect
and traction after approximately 100 km.
 Driving and parking 137

Until then, compensate for the reduced brak‐ This may affect the power steering system
ing effect by applying greater pressure to the and the brake force boosting, for example.
brake pedal.
You will need to use considerably more force
to steer and brake, for example.
Driving tips # Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐
Notes on driving ing.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to & DANGER Risk of death caused by
objects in the driver's footwell exhaust gases
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
This jeopardises the operating and road these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
safety of the vehicle. and leads to poisoning.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely # Never leave the engine or, if present,
so that they cannot get into the driver's the auxiliary heating running in an
footwell. enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
# Ensure floor mats and carpets cannot
lation.
slip and provide sufficient room for the
pedals. & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
# Do not lay multiple floor mats or carpets accident due to shifting down on slippery
on top of one another. road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ increase the engine braking effect, the drive
rect footwear wheels may lose traction.
# Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
Incorrect footwear includes, for example:
faces to increase the engine braking
R shoes with platform soles effect.
R shoes with high heels
R slippers & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐
sonous exhaust gases
There is a risk of an accident.
# Always wear suitable footwear so that
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
you can operate the pedals safely.
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
cle. This is the case when the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident when ignition becomes stuck in snow, for example.
switched off due to steering wheel lock‐ # Keep the tailpipe and the area around
ing
the vehicle free from snow when the
If you switch off the ignition when the vehicle engine or the stationary heater are run‐
is stationary, you can no longer steer the ning.
vehicle. # Open a window on the side of the vehi‐
# Before the vehicle begins to roll, switch cle facing away from the wind to ensure
on the ignition to deactivate steering an adequate supply of fresh air.
wheel locking.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and
& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition engine when pulling away
is switched off while driving
# Do not warm up the engine while the
If you switch off the ignition while driving, vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐
safety functions are restricted or no longer ately.
available.
138 Driving and parking

# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at Vehicles with halogen headlamps:
full throttle until the engine has reached It is not necessary to change the headlamps over
its operating temperature. to symmetrical dipped beam. The statutory
requirements of the countries in which traffic
Notes on short-distance trips drives on the opposite side of the road from the
If the vehicle is predominantly used in short-dis‐ country in which the vehicle is registered are also
tance driving, a fault in the automatic cleaning met without changing over.
function of the diesel particulate filter can occur. Vehicles with LED headlamps:
Due to this, fuel may also accumulate in the
engine oil and cause engine failure. You can set the low beam for driving on the right
or left via the on-board computer (/ page 189).
During automatic cleaning, extremely hot exhaust
gases escape from the exhaust pipe. Maintain a Information about transport by rail
distance of at least 1 m to other objects, e.g. Transporting your vehicle by rail may be subject
parked vehicles, in order to avoid material dam‐ to certain restrictions or require special meas‐
age. ures to be taken in some countries due to varying
If you mainly drive short distances, you should tunnel heights and loading standards.
drive on a motorway or go for a country drive for You can obtain information about this from a
20 minutes every 500 km. This facilitates the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter.
Information on brakes
Information about driving abroad
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
Service brake system overheating
An extensive Mercedes-Benz service is also avail‐
able abroad. Nevertheless, please remember that If you leave your foot on the brake pedal
services or spare parts may not be available when driving, the brake system may overheat.
immediately. The relevant workshop directories This increases the braking distance and the
are available from a Mercedes-Benz Service brake system may even fail.
Centre. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

Fuel # Do not depress the brake pedal and the

In some countries, only fuels with an increased accelerator pedal at the same time
sulphur content are available. while driving.
Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. You
can find further information under "Fuel" * NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings
(/ page 270). by permanently depressing the brake
pedal
AdBlue®
AdBlue® is not available in sufficient quality in all # Do not permanently depress the brake
countries. Therefore, check the AdBlue® level, pedal while driving.
particularly before driving outside Europe # To use braking effect of the engine, shift
(/ page 148). Consult a qualified specialist to a lower gear in good time.
workshop for advice.
Downhill gradients
You can find information about AdBlue® in "Oper‐
ating fluids and capacities" (/ page 271). On long and steep downhill gradients you should
observe the following instructions:
Low beam
R in vehicles with an automatic transmission,
In countries in which traffic drives on the oppo‐
site side of the road from the country in which shift down to shift ranges 2 or 1 in good time
the vehicle is registered, you will have to switch so that the engine is running at a medium to
the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam. This high engine speed (/ page 143).
will prevent oncoming traffic from being dazzled. R in vehicles with a manual transmission, shift
Symmetrical dipped beam will no longer illumi‐ down to a lower gear in good time, so that the
nate the edge of the carriageway as far or as engine is running at a medium to high engine
high. speed.
 Driving and parking 139

% Change the shift range in good time when mends that you only have brakepads and brake
cruise control or the limiter are activated. disks which are approved by Mercedes-Benz
Observe the driving tips (/ page 137). installed on your vehicle.
You thereby make use of the braking effect of the Other brake disks or brakepads may compromise
engine and do not have to brake as often to main‐ the safety of your vehicle.
tain the speed. This relieves the load on the Always replace all brake disks and brakepads on
service brake and prevents the brakes from over‐ an axle at the same time. Always fit new brake‐
heating and wearing too quickly. pads when replacing brake disks.
Heavy and light loads Information about driving on wet roads
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive Notes on aquaplaning
on for a short while. The brakes cool down more Aquaplaning can take place once a certain
quickly in the airflow. amount of water has accumulated on the road
If the brakes have been used only moderately, surface.
you should occasionally test their effectiveness. Observe the following notes during heavy precipi‐
To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed tation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may
while paying attention to the traffic conditions. occur:
The brakes will grip better as a result. R reduce your speed
Wet road surfaces R avoid tyre ruts
If you have been driving for a long time in heavy R avoid sudden steering movements
rain without braking, there may be a delayed
R brake carefully
response when you first apply the brakes. This
may also occur after driving through a car wash Notes on driving through water on roads
or deep water. You must depress the brake pedal If the maximum permissible height of the water is
more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the exceeded when fording, the vehicle can be dam‐
vehicle in front. aged.
While paying attention to the traffic conditions, Observe the following if you must drive through
you should brake the vehicle firmly after driving water:
on a wet road surface or through a car wash. This
heats the brake disks so that they dry more R the water level of standing water may not be
quickly, which protects them against corrosion. above the lower edge of the front bumper
Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads: R you may drive no faster than walking pace

R a layer of salt on the brake disks or brakepads R vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehi‐
can increase braking distances considerably, cles, can create waves which may exceed the
or braking may happen on only one side maximum permissible height of the water
R maintain an especially large safe distance to The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after
the vehicle in front fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to
the traffic conditions until braking power has
To remove the layer of salt: been fully restored.
R apply the brakes from time to time, paying
attention to traffic conditions Notes on driving in mountainous areas
Vehicles with diesel engines: the operating
R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
safety of the diesel engine is guaranteed up to an
of a journey and after the start of a new jour‐ elevation of 2,500 m above sea level. You may
ney exceed this elevation for a short time, e.g. in
New brake disks and brakepads mountainous terrain. Do not drive continuously at
New brakepads and brake disks only reach their elevations above 2,500 m. Otherwise, you may
optimal braking effect after approximately damage the diesel engine.
100 km. When driving in mountainous areas, note that
Until then, compensate for the reduced braking engine output, and therefore start-off gradeabil‐
effect by applying greater pressure to the brake ity, will decrease with increasing elevation. The
pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom‐ ECO start/stop function is no longer available
140 Driving and parking

when driving at elevations higher than 2,500 m R You depress the accelerator pedal.
above sea level. Observe the notes on braking on R A vehicle automatic engine start is required.
downhill gradients (/ page 138).
The maximum permissible trailer loads are valid If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/
for journeys at elevations up to 1,000 m above stop function and one of the doors is opened, the
sea level with gradients up to 12% (/ page 277). engine will automatically start.
Switching the ECO start/stop function off/on
ECO start/stop function # Press the è button on the centre console.
Operation of the ECO start/stop function When the indicator lamp in the è button
lights up, the ECO start/stop function is acti‐
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury vated.
due to automatic engine starting
If the engine was switched off automatically Function of the ECO display
and you then get out, it started again auto‐ The ECO display summarises your driving charac‐
matically. The vehicle could pull away. teristics from the start of the journey to its com‐
# Before leaving the vehicle,always switch pletion and assists you in achieving the most eco‐
off the ignition and secure the vehicle nomical driving style. If you interrupt your trip
against rolling away. and switch off the ignition for longer than four
hours, the ECO display values will automatically
Displaying the ECO start/stop function in the be reset.
instrument cluster: You can influence consumption as follows:
R è: The ECO start/stop function opera‐ R Anticipate road and traffic conditions.
tional.
R Drive in drive program ; if it is available;
R ç: Not all on vehicle conditions for an otherwise, in drive program A
automatic engine stop are met. (/ page 145).
% Depending on the engine, the è symbol R Follow the gearshift recommendations.
first appears during the automatic engine
stop or during the journey.
If all the vehicle conditions for an automatic
engine stop are met, the engine will be automati‐
cally switched off:
R Vehicles with manual transmission: you
decelerate the vehicle to a lower speed, then
engage neutral i and then release the
clutch pedal.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: you
stop the vehicle in transmission position h The inner segment lights up green and the outer
or i. segment fills up:
R 1 Moderate acceleration
The engine restarts automatically in the following
R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling
cases:
R 3 Consistent speed
R Vehicles with manual transmission: You
depress the clutch pedal. The inner segment is grey and the outer segment
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: You empties:
release the brake pedal in transmission posi‐ R 1 Sporty acceleration
tion h and with the HOLD function deactiva‐
R 2 Heavy braking
ted.
R 3 Speed fluctuations
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: You
select transmission position h or k.
 Driving and parking 141

You are driving economically if the edge of the

ECO display lights up and the three outer seg‐
ments are completely full at the same time.
The additional range achieved as a result of your
driving style in comparison with a driver with a
very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus
from start. The range displayed does not indicate
a fixed reduction in consumption.

Activating ECO display

On-board computer
4 ò 5 Trip

# Select ECO display.

The multifunction display will show the ECO
display. k Reverse gear
1-6 Forward gears
7 Reverse gear pull ring
Manual transmission
i Neutral
Using the gearshift lever
# Fully depress the clutch pedal and shift the
* NOTE Damage to the engine and trans‐ gearshift lever to the desired position.
mission by shifting to a gear that is too
low Gearshift recommendation
# When changing between gears 5 and The gearshift recommendations assist you in
6 push the gearshift lever to the right. adopting an economical driving style. Depending
# Do not shift down at high speeds. on the equipment, this will appear at the top or
bottom of the multifunction display.
* NOTE Damage to the transmission by
shifting to reverse gear k while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
# Only shift into reverse gear k when the
vehicle is stationary.

* NOTE Damage to the coupling due to

improper use
Holding the vehicle on inclines with a slipping
coupling can damage it. # If gearshift recommendation 1 appears,
shift to the recommended gear.
# Do not allow the coupling to slip in
order to hold the vehicle on inclines. % In vehicles with an ECO start/stop function,
a gearshift recommendation to switch to neu‐
tral i will be displayed as well.
142 Driving and parking

Automatic transmission # Always shift to park position j before

DIRECT SELECT lever switching off the engine.
# Secure against rolling away with the
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever parking brake.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to leaving children unattended in the * NOTE Transmission damage due to shift‐
vehicle ing at high engine speed or when the
vehicle is rolling
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could, in particular: You can damage the automatic transmission
if you shift from h to k, from k to h or
R open doors, thereby endangering other
directly to j when the engine speed is too
persons or road users. high or the vehicle is rolling.
R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. # Only change the transmission position
R operate vehicle equipment and become when the vehicle is stationary.
trapped, for example.
Depending on the transmission, the automatic
In addition, the children could also set the
transmission switches to transmission position
vehicle in motion by, for example: j (9-speed automatic transmission) ori (7-
R releasing the parking brake. speed automatic transmission) when switching
R changing the transmission position. off the engine. The power transmission between
the engine and transmission is interrupted in
R starting the vehicle.
transmission position i. In this case, shift the
# Never leave children unattended in the automatic transmission to transmission position
vehicle. j before switching off the engine when the vehi‐
# When leaving the vehicle, always take cle is stationary. Observe the messages on the
the key with you and lock the vehicle. multifunction display. Apply the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
children. You use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position. The current transmission
position appears in the multifunction display
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ (/ page 182).
rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
# If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a stand‐
still, always depress the brake pedal
firmly and do not accelerate at the
same time.

Vehicles with 7-speed automatic transmis‐

sion:

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the

vehicle rolling away
j Park position
When the engine is switched off, the auto‐
matic transmission shifts into neutral position k Reverse gear
i. i Neutral
h Drive position
 Driving and parking 143

Engaging reverse gear R Engaging drive position D

# Depress the brake pedal and push the # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first DIRECT SELECT lever downwards past the
point of resistance. first point of resistance.
Selecting neutral N The automatic transmission shifts through the
individual gears automatically when it is in trans‐
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury mission position h. This is determined by the
when neutral position engaged following factors:
The vehicle can roll away if the parking brake R The drive program selected(/ page 144)
is not applied and you park the vehicle with R Shift range is limited (/ page 143)
the neutral position i engaged. R Position of the accelerator pedal
There is a risk of accident and injury. R Driving speed
# Before parking the vehicle, apply the
parking brake. Rocking the vehicle free
This function is only available for vehicles with 7-
# Press the brake pedal and the DIRECT speed automatic transmission.
SELECT lever upwards or downwards to the At speeds of up to 9 km/h, you can switch
first point of resistance. between transmission positions h and k with‐
% When you switch off the engine, the 7-speed out applying the brakes. This helps when rocking
automatic transmission automatically shifts the vehicle free out of snow or slush.
into neutral i. # Push the DIRECT SELECT lever alternately

Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move upwards and downwards past the first point
the vehicle freely, for example, to push it or tow of resistance.
it.
If the automatic transmission should also Restricting the shift range
stay in neutral i when the ignition is Requirements
switched off, proceed as follows: R transmission position h is engaged
# 7-speed automatic transmission: leave the (/ page 143).
key in the ignition lock. R drive program A ; or C is selected
# 9-speed automatic transmission: start the (/ page 145).
vehicle.
# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i.
# Release the brake pedal.
# Switch off the ignition and leave the key in
the ignition lock.
Engaging park position P
# Press the j button on the DIRECT SELECT
lever when the vehicle is stationary.
Park position j is engaged automatically when
# To restrict the shift range: briefly pull the
one of the following conditions is met: steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.
The automatic transmission shifts to the next
R You switch off the engine in transmission lower gear, depending on the gear currently
position h or k (9-speed automatic trans‐ engaged. The shift range is also restricted.
mission).
The shift range selected is shown in the multi‐
R If you remove the key from the ignition lock. function display. The automatic transmission
R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is shifts only as far as the selected gear.
stationary or when driving at a very low speed
and in transmission position h or k.
144 Driving and parking

# Pull and hold the steering wheel gearshift Drive programs

paddle 1.
The automatic transmission will change to a Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
shift range which allows easy acceleration % Depending on the engine line-up and equip‐
and deceleration. To do this, the automatic ment, the vehicle has different driving pro‐
transmission shifts down one or more gears grams.
and restricts the shift range. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to switch
The shift range selected is shown in the multi‐ between the following drive programs.
function display. The automatic transmission The drive program selected appears in the multi‐
shifts only as far as the selected gear. function display next to the transmission position
% The automatic transmission does not shift display. After starting the engine, the automatic
down if you pull the steering wheel gearshift transmission switches automatically to drive pro‐
paddle 1 whilst travelling at too high a gram A.
speed. ¥ Manual
If the maximum engine speed for the restric‐ R Permanent manual gearshifting
ted shift range is reached and you continue
to depress the accelerator pedal, the auto‐ C Sports
matic transmission will shift up automatically. R Stable but sporty handling
This protects against engine overrev.
R Can lead to higher fuel consumption
# To de-restrict the shift range: briefly pull
the steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. A Comfort
The automatic transmission shifts to the next R Comfortable and economical driving
gear up, depending on the gear currently R Balance between traction and stability
engaged. This de-restricts the shift range at
the same time. R Improved driving stability, e.g., on slippery
road surfaces
The shift range selected is shown in the multi‐
function display. The automatic transmission ; Eco
shifts only as far as the selected gear. R Particularly economical driving
# To de-restrict the shift range: pull and hold
the steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. R Reduced engine torque

or R For kickdown, automatic change after A

R Improved driving stability, e.g., on slippery
# engage transmission position h again
(/ page 143). road surfaces
The automatic transmission shifts up one or F/¦ Lift (vehicles with AIRMATIC):
more gears depending on the gear currently
R Driving up to a speed of approx. 30 km/h
engaged. Simultaneously, the shift range
restriction is deactivated and the transmis‐ with increased vehicle level for greater
sion position appears in the multifunction dis‐ ground clearance
play h. R Comfortable and economical driving
Recommended shift ranges for the following driv‐ R Starting from a speed of approx. 100 km/h,
ing conditions: automatic change after A
3 use the engine's braking effect. % For the drive program Lift, the multifunction
2 use the engine's braking effect on downhill display shows the F symbol next to the
gradients and when driving on steep roads, transmission position display. The multimedia
in mountainous areas as well as under ardu‐ system media display shows the ¦ icon.
ous operating conditions.
1 use the engine's braking effect on extremely
steep downhill gradients and on long down‐
hill stretches.
 Driving and parking 145

Selecting the drive program program ¥ to another drive program. The

h transmission position is shown again in
the multifunction display.
# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift pad‐
dle 2.
If the engine speed is sufficient, the auto‐
matic transmission shifts up to the next gear.

If the maximum engine speed is reached in the

currently engaged gear and you continue to
accelerate, the automatic transmission will not
shift up automatically. Always make sure that the
engine speed does not reach the red area of the
rev counter. Observe the gearshift recommenda‐
tion in the multifunction display. When the engine
reaches its maximum speed, the fuel supply is
cut to prevent the engine from overrevving.
# Press the DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 for‐ # To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
wards or backwards. paddle 1.
The drive program selected appears in the Provided that the engine will not exceed its
multifunction display. maximum speed when shifting down, the
automatic transmission shifts to the next
Manual shifting lower gear.
If you pull and hold the steering wheel gear‐
shift paddle 1, the transmission shifts to the
lowest possible gear.
% When coasting, the automatic transmission
shifts down automatically.
Gearshift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. It will
appear in the transmission position and drive pro‐
gram display.
You can change gear manually with the steering
wheel gearshift paddles when the automatic
transmission is in position h. If permissible, the
automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower
gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift
paddle that has been pulled.
To shift the automatic transmission manually, you
have the following options:
R Temporary setting in all drive programs
except ¥ with simultaneous limitation
(/ page 143) of the shift range. # If gearshift recommendation 1 appears,
R Permanent setting in drive program ¥. shift to the recommended gear.
Permanent setting:
Using kickdown
# Select the drive program p(/ page 145).
The ¥ transmission position and current # For maximum acceleration: depress the
gear appears in the multifunction display. accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
% Permanent manual shifting is deactivated
automatically when you switch from drive
146 Driving and parking

% The drive program switches automatically transmission position display. The media dis‐
from ; to A (vehicles with drive pro‐ play for the multimedia system shows the
gram ;). ¦ symbol.
Vehicle levels per drive program
All-wheel drive Drive programs A and ¥:
Notes on the 4MATIC R the vehicle is set to normal level
4MATIC ensures permanent drive for all four R at speeds above approx. 110 km/h, the vehi‐
wheels, and together with ESP® it improves the cle is lowered
vehicle's traction. R at speeds below approx. 75 km/h, the vehicle
% In wintry road conditions, the maximum is raised again
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you Drive program C:
use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
chains if necessary. R the vehicle is set to low level

Use DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) when driv‐ R at higher speeds, the vehicle level does not
ing downhill off-road (/ page 160). continue to lower
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can Drive program F/¦:
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐ R the vehicle is set to high level
ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions. R at speeds above approx. 30 km/h, the vehicle
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐ level lowers to the normal level
cially for maintaining a safe distance from the R at speeds below approx. 10 km/h, the vehicle
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in is raised again
good time and for staying in lane. R At speeds above approx. 100 km/h, the vehi‐
cle switches to drive program A.
AIRMATIC % If the vehicle is raised in the Lift drive pro‐
Function of AIRMATIC gram or lowered when changing from the Lift
drive program to another drive program,
AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with an all- occasional creaking noises may occur at the
round level control system, which also ensures brake.
the best possible suspension and constant
ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
% Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if
When you drive at speed, the vehicle is lowered the electrical connection has been correctly
automatically to improve driving safety and to established, the vehicle remains on normal
reduce fuel consumption. There is also the option level regardless of speed.
of raising the vehicle level while driving slowly, System limits
e.g. for driving off public roads. The AIRMATIC
AIRMATIC may not be available or have only limi‐
settings are dependent on the drive program
selection. ted availability in the following cases:
R The overheating protection has been activa‐
AIRMATIC consists of the following functions and
ted due to frequent level changes within a
components:
short time. The Compressor is cooling mes‐
R all-round air suspension sage is then shown in the multifunction dis‐
R speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel con‐ play.
sumption
R high level for greater ground clearance when
driving slowly; set with drive program Lift
F/¦, e.g. off public roads
R DYNAMIC SELECT switch

% For the drive program Lift, the multifunction

display shows the F symbol next to the
 Driving and parking 147

After the cooling phase, AIRMATIC is again & WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture
available without restrictions.
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash
Refuelling point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
Refuelling the vehicle pure diesel fuel.
While the engine is running, component parts
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from in the exhaust system may overheat without
fuel warning.
Fuels are highly flammable. # Never refuel using petrol.

# Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea‐ # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
tion of sparks must be avoided.
# Switch off the ignition and, if available, * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles
the stationary heater, before and while with a petrol engine
refuelling the vehicle.
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
R do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your fuel can enter the engine.
health.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into could result in damage to the fuel system
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. and the engine. The repair costs are high.
# Do not inhale fuel vapour.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Keep children away from fuel.
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
# Keep doors and windows closed during completely.
the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with * NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles
fuel, observe the following: with a diesel engine
# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with If you have accidentally refuelled with the
soap and water. wrong fuel:
# If fuel comes into contact with your R do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise,
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ fuel can enter the fuel system.
oughly with clean water. Seek medical Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
attention immediately. could result in damage to the fuel system
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ and the engine. The repair costs are high.
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Change immediately out of clothing that
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
has come into contact with fuel. completely.

& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused
to electrostatic charge by overfilled fuel tanks

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.
# Before you open the fuel filler cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the Requirements
metallic vehicle body. R The vehicle is unlocked.
# To avoid creating another electrostatic
R The auxiliary heating is switched off.
charge, do not get into the vehicle again
during the refuelling process.
148 Driving and parking

R The ignition is switched off. the engine again: switch on the ignition three
R The front left-hand door is open. or four times.
% Vehicles that can use a mixture of fuels can
% Do not get back into the vehicle during the be recognised by the sticker "Ethanol up to
refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic E85!" on the fuel filler flap.
charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 269). AdBlue®
Notes on AdBlue®
AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for
the exhaust gas aftertreatment to function prop‐
erly, only use AdBlue® in accordance with
ISO 22241.
AdBlue® has the following properties:
R non-toxic
R colourless and odourless
R non-flammable

If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of

ammonia vapour may be released. Fill the
AdBlue® tank only in well-ventilated areas.
# Open fuel filler flap 1. Do not let AdBlue® come into contact with skin,
# Turn fuel filler cap 2 anti-clockwise and eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue® away from chil‐
remove it. dren.
# Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed,
vapours from entering the vehicle interior. immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly.
# Completely slide the filler neck of the pump
Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at
once.
nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.
# Fill the fuel tank only until the pump nozzle
Observe the notes on the operating fluid AdBlue®
switches off. (/ page 272).
# Replace fuel filler cap 2 and turn it clock‐ AdBlue® availability:
wise. R AdBlue® can be topped up at a qualified spe‐
You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
closed fully. Service Centre.
# Open the front left-hand door. R AdBlue® is available at numerous filling sta‐
# Close fuel filler flap 1. tions via AdBlue® filling pumps.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine and incor‐ R Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at qualified
rect fuelling protector against refuelling specialist workshops, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
with petrol: the filler neck is designed for Service Centre, and at numerous filling sta‐
refuelling at diesel filling pumps for tions as an AdBlue® refill canister or AdBlue®
passenger vehicles. refill bottle.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine without an % Ensure the connection between the refill con‐
incorrect fuelling protector: refuelling pre‐
tainer and vehicle filler neck does not drip.
ferred at diesel filling pumps for passenger
vehicles. However, you can also refuel at a
diesel filling pump for lorries.
% If the fuel tank has been run completely dry,
top up with at least 5 l of fuel. Before starting
 Driving and parking 149

Calling up the AdBlue® range and AdBlue® fill # Park the vehicle on a level surface to fill
level display the AdBlue® tank.
On-board computer:
4 Service 5 AdBlue Requirements
R The auxiliary heating is switched off.
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approx‐
imately -11 °C. The vehicle is equipped with an R The ignition is switched off.
AdBlue® preheating system at the factory. This R The front left-hand door is open.
means that winter operation is also ensured for
The following messages that appear in succes‐
temperatures below -11 °C. If you top up AdBlue®
sion in the multifunction display indicate that you
at temperatures below -11 °C, the AdBlue® level
in the instrument cluster may not be displayed need to refill the AdBlue® tank:
correctly. If the AdBlue® is frozen, drive for at R Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual
least 20 minutes and then park the vehicle for a The AdBlue® tank has dropped to the reserve
minimum of 30 seconds, so that the level is cor‐ level.
rectly displayed. In extreme winter conditions,
R Refill AdBlue Emer. oper. in XXX km See Own-
the time needed to detect the amount topped up
may be considerably longer. Park the vehicle in a er's Manual
warm garage to speed up this process. The low AdBlue® level will result in limited
# Call up the menu. performance after the remaining distance dis‐
The multifunction display will show the played has been driven. Top up AdBlue® as
AdBlue® level. quickly as possible.
R Emergency operation: 20 km/h No start in
Topping up AdBlue® XXX km See Operating Instructions
The vehicle speed is limited to approximately
* NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue®
20 km/h. You will only be able to drive the
being in the fuel vehicle the distance shown. Subsequently, it
# AdBlue® must not be used to fill the fuel will no longer be possible to start the engine.
tank. R Refill AdBlue Engine start not possible
# Only use AdBlue® to fill the AdBlue® The vehicle can no longer be started.
tank.
You can also have the AdBlue® fill level and the
# Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank. AdBlue® range displayed (/ page 149).

* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte‐ Opening the AdBlue® filler cap
rior due to AdBlue® leakage
# After topping up, carefully close the
AdBlue® refill container.
# Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers
permanently in the vehicle.

* NOTE Overfilling the AdBlue® tank due to

the vehicle standing at an angle
The AdBlue® tank can only be filled as inten‐ # Open the front door on the left-hand side and
ded when the vehicle is parked on a level sur‐ fold out filler flap 1.
face. This way, variations in the filling amount
are avoided.
# Close all vehicle doors to prevent ammonia
vapours from entering the vehicle interior.
When filling the reservoir when the vehicle is
standing at an angle, there is a risk of overfill‐
# Turn blue AdBlue® filler cap 2 anti-clockwise
ing. This may damage exhaust gas aftertreat‐ and remove it.
ment components. Fuel filler cap 3 for the fuel remains closed.
150 Driving and parking

Refuelling with a refill canister tinues to be displayed, you must add more
AdBlue®.

Parking
Parking the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot

exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite.
# Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
# In particular, do not park on dry grass‐
land or harvested grain fields.
Example
# Unscrew the cap on AdBlue® refill canister & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
1. due to leaving children unattended in the
# Screw disposable hose 2 onto the opening vehicle
of AdBlue® refill canister 1 until hand-tight. If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
# Screw disposable hose 2 onto the filler neck they could, in particular:
of the vehicle until hand-tight. R open doors, thereby endangering other
# Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister 1. persons or road users.
The filling process stops when the AdBlue® R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
tank is completely full. R operate vehicle equipment and become
AdBlue® refill canister 1 can be removed trapped, for example.
when it has been only partially emptied. In addition, the children could also set the
% Avoid storing AdBlue® containers perma‐ vehicle in motion by, for example:
nently in the vehicle. R releasing the parking brake.
# Unscrew disposable hose 2 in reverse order R changing the transmission position.
from AdBlue® refill canister 1 and the filler R starting the vehicle.
neck of the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the
Closing the AdBlue® filler cap vehicle.
# After filling the AdBlue® tank, place the # When leaving the vehicle, always take
AdBlue® filler cap on the filler neck and the key with you and lock the vehicle.
tighten it clockwise. # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
# Turn the AdBlue® filler cap until the lettering children.
is legible and horizontal.
The filler neck is only locked correctly when * NOTE Damage to the vehicle or the drive‐
this is the case. train due to rolling away
# Open the front left-hand door first, and then # Always park your vehicle safely and
close the filler flap. according to legal requirements.
# Switch on the ignition. # Always properly secure the vehicle
The Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual mes‐ against rolling away.
sage in the multifunction display must go out
after approx. 20 seconds. If the message con‐
 Driving and parking 151

* NOTE Transmission damage caused by In addition, the children could also set the
rolling in neutral position vehicle in motion by, for example:
If the engine is switched off and the vehicle R releasing the parking brake.
rolls in neutral position (e.g. when towing), R changing the transmission position.
this can cause damage to the drivetrain and R starting the vehicle.
transmission.
# Only allow the vehicle to roll briefly in
# Never leave children unattended in the
the neutral position. vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
Depending on the transmission, the automatic the key with you and lock the vehicle.
transmission switches to transmission position # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
j (9-speed automatic transmission) ori (7- children.
speed automatic transmission) when switching
off the engine. The power transmission between For the automatic functions to work correctly, the
the engine and transmission is interrupted in driver must be seated in the correct seat position
transmission position i. In this case, shift the (/ page 69).
automatic transmission to transmission position
% The electric parking brake is only actually
j before switching off the engine when the vehi‐
applied when the red ! indicator lamp
cle is stationary. Observe the messages on the
lights up continuously.
multifunction display. Apply the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away. Automatically applying the electric parking
Observe the following points to ensure that the brake
vehicle is properly secured against rolling away When you remove the key from the ignition lock
unintentionally. when the vehicle is stationary, the parking brake
# Always apply the parking brake. is applied automatically.
# On uphill or downhill inclines: turn the The red ! indicator lamp in the multifunction
front wheels towards the kerb. display lights up. The electric parking brake is
only actually applied when the red ! indicator
# Vehicles with manual transmission:
lamp lights up continuously.
engage first or reverse gear.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Releasing the electric parking brake automat‐
engage transmission position j. ically
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
# Turn the key to position g and switch off the
engine. The electric parking brake of your vehicle is
released when all of the following conditions are
fulfilled:
Electric parking brake
R the co-driver seat is occupied
Information on the electric parking brake R the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is inser‐
ted into the driver's seat belt buckle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
R the engine is running
due to leaving children unattended in the
vehicle R you shift the transmission to position h or
k
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could, in particular: Vehicles with manual transmission:
R open doors, thereby endangering other The electric parking brake of your vehicle is
persons or road users. released when all of the following conditions are
R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. fulfilled:
R operate vehicle equipment and become R the co-driver seat is occupied
trapped, for example. R the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is inser‐
ted into the driver's seat belt buckle
R the engine is running
152 Driving and parking

R a gear is engaged again in some cases. To protect it from dam‐

R you release the clutch pedal and depress the age, the parking brake is temporarily locked
accelerator pedal at the same time and cannot be released – repeat lock. The
parking brake is operational again after
% The holding force of the parking brake is approximately 20 seconds.
already reduced when the pulling-away gear
is engaged. Therefore also depress the brake Emergency braking
pedal when engaging the gear. Only then is If, in exceptional cases, the service brake fails,
your vehicle secured against rolling away. you can use the parking brake to perform emer‐
Applying/releasing the electric parking brake gency braking. The braking distance is then con‐
manually siderably greater.
# While driving, press switch 1 of the electric
Applying the electric parking brake parking brake.
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
switch 1 of the electric parking brake
depressed.
The vehicle's brake lights light up.
The longer electric parking brake switch 1 is
depressed, the greater the braking force.
During the braking procedure, you will receive the
following feedback from the vehicle:
R A warning tone sounds.
R The Release parking brake message appears
in the multifunction display.
R The red ! indicator lamp flashes in the
multifunction display.

# Turn the key to position 1 or 2. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill,
If you turn the key to position g in the igni‐ the electric parking brake is applied.
tion lock, you can only apply the parking
brake within the next five minutes. Parking up the vehicle
# Press switch 1.
Parking up the vehicle for longer than four
When the electric parking brake is applied,
weeks
the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the
# Connect the starter battery to a trickle
multifunction display. The electric parking
brake is only actually applied when the charger via a jump-start connection
red ! indicator lamp lights up continu‐ (/ page 237).
ously. or
# Disconnect all batteries (/ page 239).
Releasing the electric parking brake
# Turn the key to position 1 or 2. Parking up the vehicle for longer than six
If you turn the key from position 1 to posi‐ weeks
tion g in the ignition lock, you can release # Contact a qualified specialist workshop and
the parking brake once. seek advice.
# Depress the brake pedal. The vehicle can otherwise suffer damage as a
# Pull switch 1.
result of lack of use.
The red ! indicator lamp on the multifunc‐
tion display goes out.
% If you apply and release the parking brake
frequently within a short period, it may not
be possible to release the parking brake
 Driving and parking 153

Driving and driving safety systems & WARNING Risk of accident due to
Notes on driving systems and your responsi‐ restricted detection performance of vehi‐
bility cle sensors and cameras

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras
which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu‐ is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving
vring the vehicle. The driving systems are only and safety systems cannot function correctly.
aids. They are not a substitute for you paying There is a risk of an accident.
attention to your surroundings and do not relieve # Keep the area around vehicle sensors or
you of your responsibility pertaining to road traf‐ cameras clear of any obstructions and
fic law. The driver is always responsible for main‐ clean.
taining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for # Have damage to the bumper, radiator
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for grille or stone chipping in the area of
staying in lane. Always pay attention to the traffic the front and rear windows repaired at a
and intervene if necessary. Be aware of the limi‐ qualified specialist workshop.
tations regarding the safe use of these systems.
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of Keep the areas of the cameras and sensors free
accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor of dirt, ice and slush (/ page 229). The sensors
override the laws of physics. They cannot always and cameras must not be covered and the detec‐
take into account road, weather or traffic condi‐ tion ranges around them must be kept free. Do
tions. not attach additional license plate brackets,
advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect
against stone chippings in the detection range of
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there
Some driving and driving safety systems use are no overhanging loads protruding into the
cameras and radar or ultrasonic sensors to moni‐ detection range.
tor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehi‐ In the event of damage, or following a severe
cle. impact, have the function of the sensors checked
at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage
or stone chipping in the area of the cameras
repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of driving systems and driving

safety systems
In this section, you will find information about the
following driving systems and driving safety sys‐
tems:
R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(/ page 154)
R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 154)
R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(/ page 154)
1 Cameras in the outside mirrors R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
2 Multifunction camera (/ page 156)
3 Front camera R Active Brake Assist (/ page 156)
4 Ultrasonic sensors
R Adaptive brake lights (/ page 158)
5 Reversing camera
R Cruise control (/ page 158) and limiter
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the (/ page 158)
radar sensors are integrated on the side of R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
the rear bumpers and/or behind the (/ page 162)
Mercedes star in the radiator grille.
154 Driving and parking

R Hill start assist (/ page 165) Function of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro‐
R HOLD function (/ page 165) gram)
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 166) ESP® can, within physical limits, monitor and
R Reversing camera (/ page 167) improve driving stability and traction in the fol‐
R 360° Camera lowing situations:
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 169) R when driving and pulling away on wet or slip‐
pery road surfaces
R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 172)
R when braking
R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 173)
R Blind Spot Assist (/ page 174) If the vehicle is deviating from the direction
R Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 174) desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehi‐
cle by performing the following actions:
R one or more wheels are braked
Function of ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
R the engine output is adapted according to the
ABS controls the brake pressure in critical situa‐ situation
tions:
% Only use wheels with the recommended tyre
R the wheels are prevented from locking during
braking, for example at maximum full-stop sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
braking or when there is insufficient tyre trac‐ If the ÷ warning lamp flashes in the instru‐
tion ment cluster, one or more wheels have reached
R the steerability of the vehicle in terms of their traction limit:
physical possibilities is ensured when braking R adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions
If ABS intervenes, you will feel pulsations in the
brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal may be an R do not deactivate ESP® under any circum‐
indication of hazardous road conditions and func‐ stances
tions as a reminder to take extra care while driv‐ R only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is
ing. necessary when pulling away
If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously,
Function of BAS (Brake Assist System) ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
BAS supports you with additional braking force in Observe the information on warning lamps and
an emergency braking situation. display messages (/ page 302).
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning
activated: lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continu‐
R BAS automatically boosts the braking force of ously.
the brakes Observe the following points when ESP® is deac‐
R BAS can shorten the braking distance tivated:
R ABS prevents the wheels from locking R vehicle stabilisation is delayed and is signifi‐
cantly reduced in the lower speed range
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
function as usual again. BAS is deactivated. R the drive wheels may start to spin
R traction control is still active

% If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® will still support

you when braking.
 Driving and parking 155

Deactivating or activating ESP® using the on-

board computer

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is

deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out
vehicle stabilisation.
# ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following

situations:
R When using snow chains.
R In deep snow.
# Press button 1.
R On sand or gravel. The å warning lamp in the instrument
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, cluster goes on when ESP® is deactivated.
which enhances traction. % Observe the information on warning lamps
Adjusting settings using the on-board computer is and display messages (/ page 302).
only available on vehicles without the å but‐
ton on the centre console. Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist
On-board computer:
4 ò 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 ESP ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle
# To deactivate/activate: press the a but‐
in the lane:
ton.
If ESP® is deactivated, the å warning lamp R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
in the instrument cluster lights up. speeds above approx. 80 km/h when driving
straight ahead or cornering slightly.
% Observe the information on warning lamps
and display messages (/ page 302). R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individ‐
ual brake application on one side. The instru‐
ment cluster displays a message with the traf‐
Deactivating or activating ESP® using the but‐ fic sign for a strong crosswind.
ton
ESP® Crosswind Assist does not react under the
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is following conditions:
deactivated R The vehicle is subjected to severe jolts and
vibrations, e.g. as a result of uneven surfaces
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out
or potholes.
vehicle stabilisation.
R The vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow or ice
# ESP® should only be deactivated in the or when aquaplaning.
following situations.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following Function of ESP® trailer stabilisation
situations:
R When using snow chains. & WARNING Risk of accident in poor road
and weather conditions
R In deep snow.
R On sand or gravel.
In poor road and weather conditions, the
trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with
which enhances traction. a high centre of gravity may tip over before
ESP® detects this.
156 Driving and parking

# Always adapt your driving style to suit If autonomous braking or a situation-dependent

the current road and weather condi‐ braking boosting effect has occurred, the L
tions. warning lamp flashes briefly and then goes out.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if the autonomous
When you are driving with a trailer, ESP® trailer braking function or the situation-dependent brake
stabilisation can stabilise your vehicle if it begins force boosting is triggered, additional preventive
to swerve from side to side: measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE)
may also be initiated (/ page 36).
R If the system detects the trailer, ESP® trailer
stabilisation is active at speeds above approx‐ & WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐
imately 65 km/h.
ted detection performance of Active
R Minor swerving is reduced by a targeted, indi‐ Brake Assist
vidual brake application on one side.
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly
R In the event of severe swerving, the engine
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
output is also reduced and all wheels are tions.
braked.
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver
is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently
Function of EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distri‐ safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle
bution) speed and for braking in good time.
EBD has the following characteristics: # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake
R monitoring and controlling the braking force
Assist alone.
on the rear wheels
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐
R improving driving stabilisation when braking,
essary.
especially on bends
Observe the system limitations of Active Brake
Function of Active Brake Assist Assist. Due to the nature of the system, complex
but non-critical driving conditions may also cause
Active Brake Assist consists of the following func‐ Active Brake Assist to intervene during braking.
tions:
R Distance warning function
The individual subfunctions are available in
the following speed ranges:
R Autonomous braking function Distance warning function
R Situation-dependent brake force boosting
The distance warning function warns you in the
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the following situations:
risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedes‐ R From a speed of approximately 30 km/h, if
trians, or reduce the effects of such a collision. over several seconds the distance maintained
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐ to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient
sion, a warning tone sounds and the L warn‐ for the driven speed. The L warning lamp
ing lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. in the instrument cluster then lights up.
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous R From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, if
braking can be initiated in critical situations. In your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or
especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone
can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this sounds and the L warning lamp in the
case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur instrument cluster then lights up.
simultaneously with the braking application.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐
If you apply the brake yourself in a situation ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation
detected as critical by Active Brake Assist, or allows this.
apply the brake during autonomous braking, sit‐
uation-dependent brake force boosting occurs.
The brake pressure increases up to maximum
full-stop braking if necessary.
 Driving and parking 157

The distance warning function can aid you in the Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake
following situations with an intermittent warning Assist
tone and a warning lamp: You can cancel a brake application of Active
R Vehicles travelling in front: up to approx‐ Brake Assist at any time by:
imately 250 km/h R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with
R Stationary vehicles: up to approximately kickdown.
80 km/h R Releasing the brake pedal.
R Crossing vehicles: no reaction
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica‐
R Moving pedestrians/cyclists ahead: up to tion when one of the following conditions is fulfil‐
approximately 80 km/h led:
R Crossing cyclists: up to approximately
R You manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle.
60 km/h
R There is no longer a risk of collision.
R Stationary pedestrians: no reaction
R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
Autonomous braking function your vehicle.
The autonomous braking function may intervene System limits
at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in Full system performance is not available for a few
the following situations: seconds after switching on the ignition or after
R Vehicles travelling in front: up to approx‐ driving off.
imately 200 km/h The system may be impaired or may not function
R Stationary vehicles: up to approximately in the following situations:
50 km/h R In snow, rain, fog or heavy spray.
R Crossing vehicles: no reaction R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged
R Cyclists ahead: up to approximately or covered.
80 km/h R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐
R Moving pedestrians/crossing cyclists: up ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong
to approximately 60 km/h radar reflections in multi-storey car parks.
R Stationary pedestrians: no reaction R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
has been detected and displayed.
Situation-dependent brake force boosting
R In complex traffic situations where objects
Situation-dependent brake force boosting may cannot always be clearly identified.
intervene at speeds starting from approximately R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into
7 km/h in the following situations: the sensor detection range.
R Vehicles travelling in front: up to approx‐ R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
imately 250 km/h
R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be
R Stationary vehicles: up to approximately distinguished from the background.
80 km/h
R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.
R Crossing vehicles: no reaction due to special clothing or other objects.
R Cyclists ahead: up to approximately R In bends with a narrow radius.
80 km/h
R Moving pedestrians/crossing cyclists: up Activating or deactivating Active Brake Assist
to approximately 60 km/h
R Stationary pedestrians: no reaction
On-board computer:
4 ò 5 Settings 5 Assistance
5 Active Brake Assist

% It is recommended that Active Brake Assist is

always left activated.
158 Driving and parking

# To activate/deactivate: press the a but‐ System limits

ton. Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
The distance warning function and the auton‐ stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
omous braking function of Active Brake Assist speed is resumed if the uphill gradient evens out
are deactivated or activated. and the vehicle's speed does not fall below
When the functions are deactivated, the æ 30 km/h.
symbol appears in the Assistance graphic in On long and steep downhill gradients, you should
the multifunction display. change down to a lower gear in good time. Take
particular note of this when driving a laden vehi‐
The next time the vehicle is started, Active Brake cle. By doing so, you will make use of the
Assist is automatically activated. engine's braking effect. This will take some of the
strain off the brake system and prevent the
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Adaptive brake lights warn following traffic in an If you change wheel size on your vehicle, check it
is assigned to the correct wheel size category
emergency braking situation with the following
(/ page 258). If the category is changed without
signals:
recoding the control units in the vehicle, the func‐
R By flashing the brake lamps tioning of cruise control may be impaired.
R By activating the hazard warning lights Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds tions:
above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. R in traffic situations where frequent speed
This provides traffic travelling behind you with an changes are required, e.g. in heavy traffic or
even more noticeable warning. on winding roads
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than R off-road or on construction sites
70 km/h at the beginning of the brake applica‐ R on slippery or slick roads, as the drive wheels
tion, the hazard warning lights switch on once the can lose traction when accelerating and the
vehicle is stationary. When pulling away again, vehicle can then skid
the hazard warning lights switch off automatically
R if there is poor visibility
at approximately 10 km/h.
You can also switch off the hazard warning lights Function of the limiter
using the hazard warning button (/ page 107). The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To
adjust to the set speed quickly, the limiter applies
the brakes automatically.
Cruise control and limiter
You can limit the speed as follows:
Function of cruise control
R Variable: for speed restrictions, e.g. in built-
Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehicle up areas.
automatically in order to maintain a previously
stored speed. R Permanent: for long-term speed restrictions,
e.g. when driving in winter tyre mode.
If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the
stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your You can operate the variable limiter with the
foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control lever. You can store any speed
cruise control will resume speed regulation back above 30 km/h. You can also perform settings
to the stored speed. while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has
You operate cruise control using the cruise con‐ been started.
trol lever. You can store any speed above Observe the notes on driving systems and your
30 km/h. responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐
Observe the notes on driving systems and your nise dangers (/ page 153).
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ If you change wheel size on your vehicle, check it
nise dangers (/ page 153). is assigned to the correct wheel size category
(/ page 258). If the category is changed without
recoding the control units in the vehicle, the func‐
tioning of the limiter may be impaired.
 Driving and parking 159

Kickdown # Push the cruise control lever in the direction

If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the of arrow 5.
pressure point (kickdown), the limiter switches to R LIM indicator lamp 2 off: cruise control
passive mode. The multifunction display then is selected.
shows a message and you are able to exceed the R LIM indicator lamp 2 lit: the variable lim‐
stored speed. iter is selected.
After completion of kickdown, the variable limiter
Storing and maintaining the current speed
is activated again in the following situations:
R If the driven speed drops below the stored
# Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 or
down 4.
speed.
The current speed is stored and the vehicle
R If the stored speed is called up. maintains this speed (cruise control) or does
R If you store a new speed. not exceed it (variable limiter).
Operating cruise control or the variable lim‐ When you activate cruise control, the stored
iter speed is briefly shown in the text field of the mul‐
tifunction display. The multifunction display also
Requirements shows the ¯ symbol and the stored speed.
Cruise control When you activate the variable limiter, the multi‐
R Cruise control is selected. function display briefly shows the stored speed.
R The parking brake has been released. The multifunction display also shows the È
symbol and the stored speed.
R ESP® is activated, but may not intervene.
% For vehicles with Active Distance Assist
R The driving speed is at least 30 km/h. DISTRONIC, the segments between the start
R The clutch pedal is not depressed. of the scale and the stored speed also light
R The brake pedal is not depressed. up in the speedometer dial.

Requirements Calling up the stored speed

Variable limiter & WARNING Risk of accident due to stored
R The vehicle has been started. speed
R The variable limiter is selected. If you call up the stored speed and this is
Switching between cruise control and the var‐ lower than your current speed, the vehicle
iable limiter decelerates.
# Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.

# Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction

3.
The last stored speed is called up and the
vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control)
or does not exceed it (variable limiter).
If the last stored speed has previously been
deleted, the currently driven speed is stored.
% When you switch off the vehicle, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Increasing or reducing the speed
# Press the cruise control lever up 1 or down
4 as far as the 1st pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1 km/h.
or
160 Driving and parking

# Press the cruise control lever up 1 or down You can permanently limit the speed to a value
4 beyond the 1st pressure point. between 160 km/h and the maximum permissi‐
The stored speed is increased or reduced by ble speed (/ page 160).
10 km/h. If you accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator
If you have set Miles as the unit for the digital pedal, a message with the stored speed is shown
speedometer, you can maintain any speed from in the multifunction display shortly before the set
20 mph (cruise control) or set it as the limit limit speed is reached.
speed (variable limiter). You can then set the limit
speed in increments of 1 mph and 5 mph. The permanent limiter remains active even if the
variable limiter is deactivated. The permanent
Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter does not switch to passive mode even dur‐
limiter ing kickdown and the driven speed remains
# Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards below the set speed.
6.
Setting the limit speed for winter tyres
or On-board computer:
# Briefly push the cruise control lever in the 4 ò 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
direction of arrow 5. 5 Limit speed (winter tyres)
The ¯ or È symbol and the stored
# Change the setting and confirm using the
speed in the multifunction display then go
out. a button.
By selecting Off you switch off the permanent
% Cruise control is deactivated in the following limiter.
situations:
R you apply the brakes.
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
R you drive below a speed of 30 km/h.
Notes on DSR
R you shift the transmission to position i.
DSR supports you when driving downhill. DSR
R ESP® intervenes. maintains a set speed for you on downhill gradi‐
ents by applying the brakes as required. Main‐
In these cases the variable limiter remains taining the speed is dependent on the road sur‐
activated. face conditions and the downhill gradient and
If you deactivate ESP®, or ABS or ESP® is cannot therefore be guaranteed in all situations.
malfunctioning, cruise control and the limiter
are deactivated. Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐
% Vehicles with manual transmission: if the nise dangers (/ page 153).
engine speed is very low, cruise control or
the limiter is deactivated. When the transmis‐ You can set the speed to between 4 km/h and
sion is in neutral or the clutch pedal is 18 km/h using the brake and accelerator pedals
depressed for longer than six seconds, cruise or the cruise control lever.
control is deactivated. DSR automatically controls in the following situa‐
If cruise control automatically deactivates, a tions:
warning tone sounds and the Cruise control off R if the vehicle is stationary, or its speed is less
message appears briefly in the multifunction dis‐ than 4 km/h , the speed is set to 4 km/h or it
play. is set to the minimum speed for the respec‐
tive gear range.
Information on the permanent limiter
R if you drive faster than 18 km/h off-road, DSR
% The permanent limiter is only available in cer‐ switches to standby mode. DSR remains acti‐
tain countries. vated, but does not brake automatically.
If you wish to limit the vehicle speed permanently R if you drive downhill slower than 18 km/h,
to a specific value (e.g. for driving in winter tyre DSR sets the speed to the previously set
mode), you can set this speed with the perma‐ speed.
nent limiter.
R if you drive faster than 45 km/h, DSR
switches off automatically.
 Driving and parking 161

Activating/deactivating DSR DSR status display in the on-board computer

Requirements R DSR is activated:
R you are driving at 40 km/h or the vehicle is f DSR and the set speed appear in
-
stationary. the status area of the on-board computer.
Activating DSR R DSR is activated, but is not intervening:
- You are driving between 18 km/h and
45 km/h.
- f DSR is not shown in the status area
of the on-board computer. In addition, the
f - - - km/h message appears briefly.
DSR is in standby mode.
R DSR is inactive:
- As soon as you exceed a speed of
45 km/h.
- f DSR is not shown in the status area
of the on-board computer. In addition, the
f Off message appears briefly.
Setting the speed while driving downhill
You can set the speed to between 4 km/h and,
You can activate DSR when the vehicle is station‐ depending on the gear range, up to 18 km/h
ary or moving. using the brake and accelerator pedals or the
# Press the 1 button. cruise control lever.
The indicator lamp in the button is lit when
DSR is switched on.
# Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed between 4 km/h and 18 km/h.
# Release the brake or accelerator pedal.
The current speed is stored. When stationary,
4 km/h or the minimum possible speed for
each gear range is stored. DSR maintains the
stored speed on the downhill gradient and
brakes automatically.
When DSR is activated and the vehicle pulls
away, accelerates or brakes on an incline, the
speed set corresponds to the speed at which the
accelerator or brake pedal is released or the
cruise control lever is operated during DSR regu‐
lation. This is only the case if you are not driving # Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired
faster than 18 km/h. speed on the downhill gradient.
# Release the brake or accelerator pedal.
The current speed is stored.
or
# During a DSR regulation, briefly press the
cruise control lever up 1 or down 2 to the
first pressure point.
The last stored speed is increased or reduced
in increments of 1 km/h.
162 Driving and parking

% It may be a moment before the vehicle starts Observe the notes on driving systems and your
to brake to the set speed. Take this delay into responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐
account when setting the speed with the nise dangers (/ page 153).
cruise control lever.
System limits
Deactivating DSR The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following instances, for example:
R in snow, rain, fog or heavy spray
R if there is dirt on the radar sensors or they
are covered
R if there is interference from radar sources or
strong radar reflections, for example in multi-
storey car parks
R in traffic situations where frequent speed
changes are required, e.g. in heavy traffic or
on winding roads or off-road
R on roads with steep downhill or uphill gradi‐
ents
R on winding roads

The system cannot detect stationary objects

# Press the 1 button.
unless these were previously detected as moving.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
In addition, on slippery or slick roads, braking or
% If you drive faster than 45 km/h, the DSR
accelerating can cause one or several of the drive
switches off automatically.
wheels to lose traction and the vehicle can then
skid.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC these situations.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the
set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles ahead & WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐
are detected, the set distance is maintained, if ation or braking by Active Distance Assist
necessary until the vehicle comes to a halt. The DISTRONIC
vehicle accelerates or brakes, depending on the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐
distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. erate or brake in the following cases, for
Speed and distance are set and stored on the example:
steering wheel. The speed can be set in the range
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐
between 20 km/h and 200 km/h.
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
Other features of Active Distance Assist
R If the stored speed is called up and is con‐
DISTRONIC:
siderably faster or slower than the cur‐
R Depending on the preselected distance, rently driven speed.
DISTRONIC intervenes either dynamically
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
(short distance) or to save fuel (long dis‐
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
tance).
not react to relevant objects.
R Depending on the vehicle mass detected, the
dynamics of the DISTRONIC intervention are # Always carefully observe the traffic con‐
reduced. ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
R The driving style is adapted depending on the
drive program selected. # Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
R Acceleration to the stored speed is initiated if
the turn signal indicator is switched on to
change to the overtaking lane.
 Driving and parking 163

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ Switching between the limiter and Active Dis‐
ficient deceleration by Active Distance tance Assist DISTRONIC
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible
deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi‐
cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suita‐
ble distance from the vehicle in front.
# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection

function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not # Press button 6.
react or has a limited reaction: R LIM indicator lamp 3 off: Active Dis‐
R when driving on a different lane or when tance Assist DISTRONIC is selected.
changing lanes R LIM indicator lamp 3 lit: the variable lim‐
R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐ iter is selected.
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R to complex traffic conditions # To activate with the current speed: briefly

R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic press the cruise control lever briefly up 1 or
down 5 and take your foot off the accelera‐
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC tor pedal.
may neither give warnings nor intervene in The current speed is stored and shown on the
such situations. speedometer. As in the assistance graphic
# Always observe the traffic conditions menu, the multifunction display briefly shows
carefully and react accordingly. the set specified distance and the stored
speed.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not detect or
narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles
# To activate with the stored speed: pull the
or vehicles not travelling in line with your vehicle.
cruise control lever briefly in direction 4 and
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The speed is displayed on the speedometer.
Requirements As in the assistance graphic menu, the multi‐
R The vehicle has been started. It may take up
function display briefly shows the set speci‐
to two minutes of driving before Active Dis‐ fied distance and the stored speed.
tance Assist DISTRONIC is ready for use.
% Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: the speed
R The parking brake has been released.
detected by Traffic Sign Assist can be set by
R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. pulling the lever in direction
R Active Parking Assist is not activated. 4(/ page 173).
R The transmission is in position h. % You can find information on DISTRONIC dis‐
plays under "Displays of Active Distance
R The doors and tailgate are closed. Assist DISTRONIC" (/ page 164).
R The driver's seat belt is fastened. If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal,
the Active Distance Assist suspended message
appears on the multifunction display. The dis‐
tance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then
164 Driving and parking

not be set. The position of the accelerator pedal # Press the cruise control lever up 1 or down
will determine the speed. 5 beyond the 1st pressure point.
When you pull the cruise control lever towards The stored speed is increased or reduced by
you for the first time after starting the vehicle, 10 km/h.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the Increasing or reducing the specified distance
current speed. If the current speed is less than from the vehicle in front
20 km/h, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
adopts the speed of 20 km/h.
Pulling away again with Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
# Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
# Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction
4.
or
# Depress the accelerator pedal briefly with
force.
The functions of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
# Turn controller 3 in direction 2 to increase
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the specified minimum distance and in direc‐
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being tion 1 to reduce the specified minimum dis‐
active when you leave the driver's seat tance.
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle As in the assistance graphic menu, the multi‐
is being braked by Active Distance Assist function display briefly shows the set speci‐
DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. fied distance.
# Always deactivate Active Distance % You can find information on DISTRONIC dis‐
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐ plays under "Active Distance Assist
cle to prevent it from rolling away before DISTRONIC" (/ page 164).
you leave the driver's seat.
Displays of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
# Briefly push the cruise control lever forwards Assistant display
7.
or
# Brake if the vehicle is moving.
or
# Press button 6.
The variable limiter is selected. LIM indicator
lamp 3 in the cruise control lever lights up.
Increasing or reducing the speed
# Press the cruise control lever up 1 or down
5 as far as the 1st pressure point. 1 Vehicle in front, if detected
The stored speed is increased or reduced by 2 Distance indicator
1 km/h.
3 Set specified distance
or 4 Own vehicle
 Driving and parking 165

You can find information on the assistance The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil‐
graphic menu under "Assistance graphic" ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains
(/ page 183). with the driver.
% If you set the speed, the Assistance graphic System limits
briefly appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is only intended to provide
Displays on the speedometer assistance when driving and is not a sufficient
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti‐ means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling
vated, one or two indicator segments light up in away when stationary.
the stored speed range of the speedometer. R The incline may not be greater than 30%.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a Activating or deactivating the HOLD function
vehicle in front, the indicator segments, located
between the speed of the vehicle in front and the Requirements
stored speed, light up. R The vehicle is stationary.
R The engine is running or it has been automati‐
Information on Hill Start Assist cally switched off by the ECO start/stop func‐
tion.
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time R All the doors and the tailgate are closed and
when pulling away on a hill under the following the seatbelt is fastened.
conditions:
R The parking brake has been released.
R Vehicles with manual transmission: a gear
R The selector lever is in the h, k or i posi‐
is engaged.
tion.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva‐
transmission is in position h or k.
ted.
R The parking brake has been released.
Activating the HOLD function
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. HOLD function being active when you
leave the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to the vehicle rolling away If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD
function it could, in the following situations,
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer roll away:
holds the vehicle.
R If there is a malfunction in the system or
# Swiftly move your foot from the brake
in the power supply.
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not
leave the vehicle when it is being held R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
by Hill Start Assist. depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling
HOLD function
away before you leave it.
HOLD function
The HOLD function is only available for vehicles # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐
with automatic transmission. play appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐
release the brake pedal.
still without requiring you to depress the brake
pedal, e.g. when pulling away on steep slopes or % If depressing the brake pedal the first time
when waiting in traffic. When you depress the does not activate the HOLD function, wait
accelerator pedal to pull away, the braking effect briefly and then try again.
is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactiva‐ Deactivating the HOLD function
ted. # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or
166 Driving and parking

# Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐ Front and rear area:
play in the multifunction display goes out. R Reverse gear
The HOLD function is deactivated in the following R Transmission position k
situations:
R Transmission position i
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted. Regardless of transmission position,
R The transmission is shifted to position j.
PARKTRONIC automatically monitors the area
behind the vehicle if the vehicle begins to roll
R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ backwards, e.g. after stopping on an uphill gradi‐
ing brake. ent.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
transmission position j and/or by the electric 18 km/h. PARKTRONIC is reactivated at speeds
parking brake: below 16 km/h.
R The driver's side seat belt is not fastened, or Vehicles with trailer hitch: PARKTRONIC is
a door or the tailgate is open. deactivated for the rear area when you establish
an electrical connection to the trailer or to a rear
R The engine is switched off without the ECO
bicycle rack.
start/stop function.
After uncoupling the trailer, unplug the 7-pin plug
adapter from the socket. Otherwise,
PARKTRONIC PARKTRONIC remains deactivated for the rear
Function of PARKTRONIC area.
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is no
system with ultrasonic sensors. The system moni‐ longer required. PARKTRONIC measures the mini‐
tors the area around your vehicle using sensors mum detection range to an obstacle from the
on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. bumper, not the ball neck.
PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the
distance between your vehicle and an object. Warning displays
The warning ranges in front of and behind the
vehicle are indicated by different warning tones.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute
for you paying attention to the surroundings. You
are always responsible for safe manoeuvring,
parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects etc.
in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and
parking or exiting parking spaces.
Requirements for automatic activation: Front area warning display in the multifunction
R The ignition is switched on. display
R The parking brake has been released.

The selected transmission position determines

whether the front and/or rear area is monitored.
Front area only:
R Forward gear
R Neutral
R Transmission position h
 Driving and parking 167

Problems with PARKTRONIC

There is a malfunction if only the red segments of
the warning display light up. In addition, a warn‐
ing tone sounds for approximately two seconds. If
problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at
a qualified specialist workshop.
If the warning indicators are displaying implausi‐
ble distances, it may be due to the following cau‐
ses:
R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors.
Observe the notes on care of vehicle parts
(/ page 229).
R Licence plates or other detachable parts
in the vicinity of the sensors are not cor‐
rectly fastened: check the licence plate or
Rear area warning display in the rear at the
centre of the roof lining the detachable parts for correct fit.
1 Warning segments for the left side of the R Interference by another source of radio or
vehicle ultrasound waves: check the function of
2 Measurement operational readiness indicator PARKTRONIC at another location.
3 Warning segments for the right side of the Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
vehicle
At least one segment will light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi‐
cle's distance from the obstacle.
In addition, warning tones are emitted. When the
distance to the obstacle is sufficient, you will
hear an intermittent warning tone. The shorter
the distance to the obstacle, the shorter the fre‐
quency of the intermittent warning tones
becomes. When the minimum distance is
reached, you hear a continuous warning tone.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle is
divided into five yellow and two red segments.
PARKTRONIC is active if measurement opera‐
tional readiness indicator 2 lights up.
System limits
# Press the é button.
If PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the indicator
PARKTRONIC may not take the following obsta‐ lamp of the é button lights up.
cles into account:
R obstacles below the detection range, e.g. Reversing camera
people, animals or objects
R obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
Function of the reversing camera
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading The reversing camera is located next to the tail‐
ramps of lorries gate handle and is protected from raindrops and
dust by means of a flap. When the reversing cam‐
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. era is activated, this flap opens (/ page 153).
Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean The flap closes again when you have ended the
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch manoeuvring process or you switch off the
or damage them (/ page 229). engine.
168 Driving and parking

For technical reasons, the flap may remain open

briefly after the reversing camera has been deac‐
tivated.
You can activate the automatic display function of
the reversing camera in the multimedia system .
When you engage reverse gear, the image from
the reversing camera is shown automatically in
the media display. Dynamic guide lines show the
path the vehicle will take for the current steering
movement. This helps you to orient yourself and
to avoid obstacles when reversing. Wide-angle view
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for you paying attention to the sur‐
roundings. You are always responsible for safe
manoeuvring and parking. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking
in parking spaces.
You can use the softkeys located below or to the
side to choose between the following views:

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)

1 Yellow guide line, locating aid
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
Observe the notes on cleaning and care of the
reversing camera (/ page 229).
The reversing camera may show a distorted view
Normal view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ The reversing camera cannot show all objects
face) depending on the current steering which are very near to or under the rear bumper.
angle (dynamic) It will not warn you of a collision, people or
objects.
2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐
imately 1.0 m from the rear area The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mir‐
3 Yellow path marking the course the tyres will ror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
take at the current steering position When you shift out of reverse gear, the dynamic
(dynamic) guide lines are faded out. If, after shifting out of
4 Bumper reverse gear, you drive faster than 16 km/h, the
5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately reversing camera is deactivated.
0.3 m from the rear area System limits
The reversing camera will not function or will only
partially function in the following situations:
R if the tailgate is open
R if there is heavy rain, snow or fog
R if the light conditions are poor, e.g. at night
 Driving and parking 169

R if the camera lens is covered, dirty or misted function display. The arrows show on which side
up. of the road free parking spaces are located.
R if cameras, or vehicle components in which Active Parking Assist displays parking spaces on
the cameras are fitted, are damaged. Have the co-driver side as standard. The parking
the cameras, their positions and their setting spaces on the driver's side are only displayed if
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. you operate the turn signal on the driver's side.
When parking on the driver's side, you must oper‐
% The media display contrast may be impaired ate the turn signal until you have started active
due to direct sunlight or other light sources. parking assistance by pressing the a steering-
In this case, pay particular attention. wheel button.
% Have the media display repaired or replaced Active Parking Assist can assist you with an
if, for example, pixel errors considerably active steering intervention and brake application
restrict its use. during parking and exiting the parking space. The
% Objects that are not at ground level appear active brake application is dependent on the
further away than they actually are. This country-specific version of the vehicle. On vehi‐
includes, for example: cles with manual transmission, active parking
R the bumper of a vehicle parked behind assistance is limited exclusively to power-steering
assistance.
R the drawbar of a trailer
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
R the ball neck of a trailer hitch
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
R the tail-end of a lorry You are always responsible for safe manoeuvring,
R slanted posts parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure
that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
Only use the guide lines of the camera image path of your vehicle.
for orientation. Do not travel further than the
Active Parking Assist is cancelled in the following
lowest horizontal guide line when approach‐
cases, among others:
ing objects. You may otherwise damage your
vehicle and/or the object. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
R You steer.
Opening the reversing camera cover
Multimedia system: R You apply the parking brake.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle R Parking using Active Parking Assist is no lon‐
5 Rear view camera ger possible.
# Select Open camera cover. R You exceed a speed of 10 km/h.

% The camera cover closes automatically after R A wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails.
a while or when the engine is switched off R You engage transmission position j.
with the cover open. R You open the driver's door or a sliding door
on vehicles with a manual transmission.
Active Parking Assist R You open a door or the tailgate, or unfasten
Function of Active Parking Assist your seat belt, on vehicles with an automatic
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking transmission.
assistance system which automatically locates PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
and measures parking spaces on both sides of when you have a trailer coupled up and establish
the vehicle when you are driving forwards up to a an electrical connection between your vehicle
speed of approximately 35 km/h. and the trailer. Active Parking Assist is then not
If all requirements are met, the Ç display available.
appears in the multifunction display. The system
System limits
then independently locates and measures parallel
Objects located above or below the detection
and perpendicular parking spaces on both sides
range of Active Parking Assist are not detected
of the vehicle.
when the parking space is being measured. They
When Active Parking Assist has detected parking are also not taken into account when the parking
spaces, the È display appears in the multi‐ manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads,
170 Driving and parking

overhangs or loading ramps of lorries, or the Active Parking Assist will not assist you with
boundaries of parking spaces. In some circum‐ parking spaces parallel or perpendicular to the
stances, Active Parking Assist may therefore direction of travel in the following situations:
guide you into the parking space prematurely. R if the parking space is on a kerb

& WARNING Risk of accident due to R if the system deems the parking space to be
objects located above or below the blocked, such as by foliage or grass paving
detection range of Active Parking Assist blocks
R if the area is too small for the vehicle to
If there are objects above or below the detec‐
manoeuvre into
tion range, the following situations may arise:
R if the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects. Parking using Active Parking Assist

This could cause a collision. & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
# In these situations, do not use Active ficiently securing the vehicle against roll‐
Parking Assist. ing away when exiting the vehicle
If you leave the driver's seat when the vehicle
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
is being braked by Active Parking Assist only,
space being measured inaccurately. Parking
spaces that are partially occupied by trailer draw‐ it could roll away in the following situations:
bars might not be identified as such or be meas‐ R if there is a malfunction in the system or
ured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist in the power supply.
on level, high-grip ground. R if the electrical system in the engine com‐
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following partment, the battery or the fuses are
situations, among others: tampered with.
R in extreme weather conditions such as ice, R if the battery is disconnected.
packed snow or in heavy rain R if the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehi‐
R when cornering cle occupant.
R for parking spaces which are not on the same # Before leaving the driver's seat, always
level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement secure the vehicle against rolling away.
R when transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle # Bring the vehicle safely to a stop when the
parking symbol with an arrow shows the
R when snow chains are fitted
desired parking space.
Active Parking Assist may also display parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking, for & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
example: cle swinging out while parking or pulling
R parking spaces where parking is prohibited out of a parking space
R parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Active Parking Assist will not assist you with onto areas of the oncoming lane.
parking spaces perpendicular to the direction of
This could cause you to collide with objects
travel in the following situations: or other road users.
R if two parking spaces are located immediately # Pay attention to objects and other road
next to each other users.
R if the parking space is immediately next to a # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
low obstacle such as a kerb cancel the parking procedure with Park‐
R if you are parking forwards ing Pilot.
 Driving and parking 171

# Vehicles with manual transmission: shift Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐
to reverse gear. cle and surroundings during the entire parking
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: procedure.
shift the transmission to position k. # Start the vehicle.
The multifunction display shows the Start # Switch on the turn signal on the side you
Parking Assist? Yes: OK No: ~ message intend to exit the parking space.
and the location of the parking space.
# To cancel the process: press the ~ & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
steering-wheel button or drive off. cle swinging out while parking or pulling
or out of a parking space
# To park using active parking assistance: While parking or exiting a parking space, the
press the a steering-wheel button. vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
The Parking Assist in operation Accelerate of the oncoming lane.
and brake Observe surroundings message is This could cause you to collide with objects
shown in the multifunction display. or other road users.
# Release the steering wheel.
# Pay attention to objects and other road
# Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at users.
all times. Reverse slowly, and do not drive
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
faster than 10 km/h. Parking assistance is
otherwise cancelled and Active Parking Assist cancel the parking procedure with
is stopped. Active Parking Assist.
On vehicles with automatic transmission,
# Vehicles with manual transmission:
when the vehicle approaches the rear border
of the parking space, Active Parking Assist engage 1st gear or reverse gear.
can brake it to a standstill. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
# Stop at the rear border of the parking space. shift the transmission to position h or k.
Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds the continu‐ The Start Parking Assist? Yes: OK No: ~
ous warning tone, if not before. message is shown in the multifunction dis‐
play.
Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking # To cancel the process: press the ~
spaces. Observe the messages on the multifunc‐ steering-wheel button or drive off.
tion display.
or
On completion of the parking procedure, the
Active Parking Assist finished message appears
# To exit the parking space using active
and an acoustic signal sounds. Active Parking parking assistance: press the a steer‐
Assist no longer supports you with steering inter‐ ing-wheel button.
ventions and brake applications. The Parking Assist in operation Accelerate
and brake Observe surroundings message is
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking shown in the multifunction display.
Assist # Release the steering wheel.
Requirements # Pull away and be ready to brake at all times.
R The vehicle has been parked parallel to the Reverse slowly, and do not drive faster than
direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. 10 km/h. Parking assistance is otherwise
cancelled and Active Parking Assist is stop‐
R The border of the parking space must be high
ped.
enough at the front and the rear; a kerb, for On vehicles with automatic transmission,
instance, is not sufficient. when the vehicle approaches the rear border
R The border of the parking space must not be of the parking space, Active Parking Assist
too wide. Your vehicle can be manoeuvred can brake it to a standstill.
into a position at a maximum angle of 45° to
the starting position in the parking space. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking
spaces. Observe the messages on the multifunc‐
R A manoeuvring distance of at least 1 m must
tion display.
be available.
172 Driving and parking

On completion of the parking procedure, the The following information is displayed:

Active Parking Assist finished message appears R the journey length since the last break
and an acoustic signal sounds. Active Parking
R the attention level determined by ATTENTION
Assist no longer supports you with steering inter‐
ventions and brake applications. ASSIST:
The parking assistance function of Active Parking - the fuller the bar is, the higher the detec‐
Assist is stopped. You will then have to steer and ted attention level is
merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is - the bar empties as attentiveness decrea‐
still available. ses
If ATTENTION ASSIST cannot calculate the atten‐
ATTENTION ASSIST tion level and cannot issue a warning, the Sys-
tem suspended message appears.
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST can assist you on long, The bar display is then dimmed. This is the case,
monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and for example, if you are predominantly driving at a
trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indica‐ speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h.
tors of fatigue or increased lapses in concentra‐ System limits
tion on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to
break. 200 km/h speed range.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restric‐
always detect drowsiness or increased lapses in
ted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at
concentration in good time. The system is not a
all, in the following situations:
substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.
On long journeys, take regular and timely breaks R the journey lasts less than approximately 30
that allow you to rest properly. minutes
If fatigue or increased lapses in concentration are R the road condition is poor (uneven road sur‐
detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! face or potholes)
warning appears in the instrument cluster. R the vehicle is subjected to a strong crosswind
You can acknowledge the message and take a R you have a sporty driving style (high cornering
break if necessary. If you do not take a break and speeds or high rates of acceleration)
ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increased R the time is set incorrectly
lapses in concentration, you will be warned again
after a minimum of 15 minutes. R you change lanes and vary your speed fre‐
quently in active driving situations
If a warning is displayed in the instrument cluster,
the multimedia system offers to search for a rest The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness
area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐ assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐
tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐ tinuing the journey in the following situations:
ted and deactivated in the multimedia system.
R you switch off the engine
R you unfasten your seat belt and open the driv‐
er's door (e.g. change drivers or take a break)
Deactivating or activating ATTENTION ASSIST
On-board computer:
4 ò 5 Settings 5 Assistance
5 ATTENTION ASSIST

# Change the setting and confirm using the

a button.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
You can have the current ATTENTION ASSIST À and OFF symbols appear in the assis‐
assessment displayed using the Assistance tance graphic in the multifunction display.
graphic menu in the on-board computer
(/ page 183).
 Driving and parking 173

You can choose between the following settings:

R Off
R Standard: normal system sensitivity.
R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver
is warned earlier and the attention level
detected by the system (Attention Level) is
adapted accordingly.

Traffic Sign Assist

1 Permissible speed
Function of Traffic Sign Assist 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
Traffic Sign Assist aids you by displaying detected
3 Additional sign with restriction (example:
speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the
unknown restriction)
instrument cluster.
Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data If Traffic Sign Assist is not available or cannot
stored in the navigation system, it can also determine the maximum permissible speed, the
update the display without detecting traffic signs. following display appears in the assistance
graphic:
The camera also detects traffic signs with a
restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g.
when wet).
% Traffic signs are only displayed with the
restriction indicated by an additional sign in
the following cases: System limits
R the traffic signs must be observed with The system may be impaired or may not function
the restriction in the following situations:
R the system is unable to clearly determine R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
whether the restriction applies cient illumination of the road, highly variable
If the system detects that you are driving onto a shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or
section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it heavy spray.
triggers a warning. This function is not available R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
in all countries. direct sunlight or reflections.
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicin‐
able to correctly display speed limits and overtak‐ ity of the multifunction camera or if the cam‐
ing restrictions. The actual traffic signs always era is misted up, damaged or obscured.
have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
Observe the notes on driving systems and your to dirt or snow, or because they are covered,
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ or due to insufficient lighting.
nise dangers (/ page 153). R If there are ambiguous signs, e.g. traffic signs
Instrument cluster display in road works or adjacent lanes.
The Traffic Sign Assist display appears in the R If the information in the navigation system's
Assistance graphic menu of the on-board com‐ digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
puter (/ page 183).
Activating/deactivating the Traffic Sign
Assist warning function
On-board computer
4 ò 5 Settings 5 Assistance
5 Traffic Sign Assist

# To activate/deactivate: press the a but‐

ton.
174 Driving and parking

When the warning function is active and you pass System limits
a traffic sign, the instrument cluster shows the Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following
traffic regulations (speed limit and overtaking situations:
restriction) for five seconds. The previous menu
then reappears automatically. R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
The wrong-way warning remains active if you
deactivate the warning function of Traffic Sign R if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
Assist. rain, snow or spray
R if narrow vehicles are within the monitoring
Blind Spot Assist range, e.g. bicycles
R if the road has very wide or very narrow lanes
Function of Blind Spot Assist
R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of
Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing
their lane
radar sensors to monitor the area up to 3 m
behind and 3 m directly next to your vehicle. Warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving
Spot Assist alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a
Blind Spot Assist does not react to either sta‐ prolonged time.
tionary objects or vehicles approaching and Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
overtaking you at a greatly different speed. gear is engaged.
Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you have
situations. correctly established the electrical connection.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated and the
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Own-
tance at the side of the vehicle. er's Manual message appears in the multifunc‐
tion display.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ On-board computer:
nise dangers (/ page 153). 4 ò 5 Settings 5 Assistance
If a vehicle is detected above speeds of approx‐ 5 Blind Spot Assist
imately 30 km/h and this vehicle subsequently
enters the monitoring range directly next to your # To activate/deactivate: press the a but‐
vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror ton.
lights up red. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, grey radar
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in the waves propagating backwards appear next to the
lateral monitoring range and you switch on the vehicle in the assistance graphic in the multifunc‐
turn signal indicator in the corresponding direc‐ tion display. If you drive faster than 30 km/h with
tion, a warning tone sounds. The red warning Blind Spot Assist activated, the radar waves in
lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn sig‐ the assistance graphic appear green. Blind Spot
nal indicator remains switched on, all other Assist is ready for use.
detected vehicles are indicated only by the flash‐ If you switch on the ignition while Blind Spot
ing of the red warning lamp. Assist is activated, the warning lamps in the out‐
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only side mirrors light up for approx. 1.5 seconds.
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
11 km/h.
Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist serves to protect you against
unintentionally leaving your lane. You are also
warned by a vibration in the steering wheel and
by the status symbol flashing in the instrument
 Driving and parking 175

cluster. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid and is R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too
not intended to keep the vehicle in the lane with‐ short and thus the lane markings cannot be
out the driver's cooperation. detected.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ branch off, cross one another or merge.
nise dangers (/ page 153). R The carriageway is very narrow and winding.
The function is available in the speed range
between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
The warning is issued when the following condi‐
tions are met at the same time:
R If Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings.
R If a front wheel drives over lane markings.

To ensure that you are warned only when neces‐

sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark‐
ing, the system detects certain conditions and
warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier under the
following conditions:
R you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
R the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor‐
way. # Press the Ç button.
R the system detects solid lane markings. If the indicator lamp in the button is lit, Lane
Keeping Assist is activated. If all conditions
The warning vibration occurs later under the fol‐ have been satisfied, there may be a warning.
lowing conditions:
If Lane Keeping Assist is activated and you
R you are driving on a road with narrow lanes. are driving at speeds above 60 km/h and
R you cut the corner on a bend. lane markings are detected, the lines in the
assistance display menu of the on-board com‐
% You may also be warned by a vibration in the puter are shown in green. Lane Keeping
steering wheel (4x2 model) or by a warning Assist is ready for use.
tone (4x4 model) and by the status symbol
flashing in the Instrument Display. When the system switches over, the Lane
Keeping Assist on or Lane Keeping Assist off
System limits message is shown briefly in the multifunction
The system may be impaired or may not function display.
in the following situations: % You can find information on the assistance
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ graphic menu under "Assistance graphic"
cient illumination of the road, if there are (/ page 183).
highly variable shade conditions or in rain, Setting the sensitivity of Lane Keeping Assist
snow, fog or spray. On-board computer:
R Glare from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or 4 ò 5 Settings 5 Assistance
reflections. 5 Lane Keeping Assist
R There is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity
# Select the Standard or Adaptive setting.
of the multifunction camera or the camera is
misted up, damaged or obscured.
R No or several unclear lane markings are pres‐
ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area.
R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up.
176 Driving and parking

In the Standard setting, no warning vibration Note the following regarding the tongue weight:
occurs in the following situations: R Make full use of the maximum tongue weight,
R you operate the turn signal in the correspond‐ where possible.
ing direction. In this event, the warnings are R Never fall below a legally prescribed minimum
suppressed for a certain period of time. tongue weight; the tongue weight must
R a driving safety system intervenes or regu‐ always be positive.
lates, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. R Do not exceed or fall below the permissible
tongue weights – this must be observed dur‐
In the Adaptive setting, there will also be no
ing loading and unloading of the trailer.
warning vibration in the following situations:
R you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Do not exceed the following values:
R you brake hard. R Permitted braked or unbraked towing capa‐
city
R you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lane quickly. The maximum permissible towing capacity for
unbraked trailers is 750 kg.
R you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi‐
cle
Trailer operation R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehi‐
Notes on trailer operation cle
R Permissible gross weight of the trailer
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if R Permissible gross combination weight
the tongue weight is exceeded
R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer
The carrier system may detach from the vehi‐
cle, thereby endangering other road users. The relevant permitted values, which must not be
# Always comply with the permissible
exceeded, can be found in the following places:
tongue weight when using a carrier. R In your vehicle documents
R On the identification plate of the trailer hitch
You can find specifications regarding the ball
R On the trailer's identification plate
neck on the trailer's identification plate. You can
find specifications regarding the trailer on the R On the vehicle identification plate
towing vehicle's identification plate and in the
If there are discrepancies between the values, the
Technical Data (/ page 277).
lowest one shall apply.
You can attach carrier systems such as a bicycle
Before driving off, ensure the following:
rack or load-bearing implement to the ball neck.
When using carrier systems on the ball neck, the R The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow‐
maximum load capacity is 75 kg. ing vehicle has been set for the maximum
load.
If the trailer coupling is detachable, it is essential
to comply with the operating instructions of the R The headlamps have been set correctly.
trailer coupling manufacturer. Comply with the maximum permissible speed of
Place your vehicle/trailer combination on surfa‐ 80 km/h or 100 km/h, even in countries in
ces that are as even as possible and secure it which higher speeds are permitted for vehicle/
against rolling away (/ page 150). Couple and trailer combinations.
uncouple the trailer carefully. % During trailer operation, remember that
PARKTRONIC is available only to a limited
extent, if at all.
% The height of the ball head will change
depending on the vehicle's load. In this case,
use a trailer with a height-adjustable draw‐
bar.
 Driving and parking 177

Vehicles with a detachable trailer coupling & WARNING Danger of accident due to
Reduce the risk of damage to the trailer coupling non-engaged ball coupling
and contribute to environmental protection. If you
do not need the ball neck, remove it from the ball If the ball coupling has not engaged, the
neck mount and fit its cover in the rear bumper trailer can become detached.
(/ page 177). Only with the cover fitted can the # Always engage the ball coupling as
emission values indicated for real operation be described and ensure that it is securely
achieved. installed.
% During trailer operation, the permissible
gross vehicle weight is increased by 100 kg Requirements
for vehicles registered as passenger vehicles. R Trailer hitch key
The maximum permissible rear axle load # Note the number of the key that belongs to
must be observed. the ball neck of the trailer hitch.
With this number, you will receive a replace‐
Fitting the cover for trailer coupling ment key at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
holder for the ball neck on the vehicle can be
protected with a cover in the bumper.
# Release the two quick-release fasteners for
the cover in the bumper and remove the
cover (/ page 177).
# Take the ball neck of the trailer hitch out of
the stowage space on the right-hand side in
the rear and stow the cover away.

# Insert the cover flush into the recess on the

rear bumper and press it upwards against the
bumper covering at the latching points on the
outside right and left.
# Turn fasteners from position 1 to position # Unlock lock 6 in handwheel 1 with the key.
2. Red mark 3 on the handwheel must be
# Ensure that the fasteners are fully engaged aligned with green area 2 on ball neck 4
and firmly in position 2. (fitting position).
# If red mark 3 is not aligned with green area
Attaching the ball neck 2, unlock lock 6 in handwheel 1 with the
key.
& WARNING Danger of accident‑ and injury # Pull handwheel 1 outwards. Turn red mark
due to incorrectly installed and secured 3 into green area 2 of ball neck 4 until
ball coupling handwheel 1 engages.
If the ball coupling has not engaged, it can # Slide ball neck 4 vertically into the holder
become detached during driving and endan‐ until it audibly engages.
ger other road users. The ball neck will lock automatically. Green
# Engage the ball coupling as described mark 3 on handwheel 1 is aligned with
and ensure that it is securely installed. green area 2 on ball neck 4.
178 Driving and parking

Only if the green mark on the handwheel is % Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
aligned with the green area on the ball neck is holder for the ball neck on the vehicle can be
the ball neck securely engaged. protected with a cover in the bumper.
# Lock lock 6 in handwheel 1 with the key. # Store the ball neck with the key inserted in
# Remove the key and place cap 5 on lock 6. the stowage space on the right-hand side in
The ball neck is securely installed only if the the rear and remove the cover for the ball
ball neck can be locked and the key removed. neck holder.
# Store the trailer hitch key in a safe place, e.g. # Insert the cover in the lower section of the
in the vehicle document wallet. bumper and tighten the two quick-release fas‐
teners for the cover (/ page 177).
If you cannot remove the key, the ball neck may
be dirty. Coupling/uncoupling a trailer
# Remove the ball neck (/ page 178) and
clean it (/ page 229). Requirements
R The ball neck must be engaged in a securely
If you still cannot lock the ball neck after cleaning locked position.
it, the trailer hitch is damaged. Trailers with 7-pin plugs can be connected to the
# Remove the ball neck. vehicle using the following adapters:
Safe trailer operation is not guaranteed. The
R Adapter plug
ball neck must no longer be used for trailer
operation. R Adapter cable
# Have the trailer hitch checked at a qualified Coupling a trailer
specialist workshop.
* NOTE Damage to the starter battery due
Removing the ball neck to full discharge
Charging the trailer battery using the power
Requirements
supply of the trailer can damage the starter
R Trailer hitch key
battery.
# Do not use the vehicle's power supply
to charge the trailer battery.

# Remove cap 5 from lock 6 in handwheel

1.
# Unlock lock 6 in handwheel 1 with the key.
# Hold ball neck 4 in place. 1 Eyelet for breakaway cable
# Pull handwheel 1 outwards. Turn red mark The eyelet on the ball neck is used exclusively for
3 on handwheel 1 into green area 2 of attaching the trailer breakaway cable. You must
ball neck 4 until handwheel 1 engages. not attach a tow rope, a tow bar or anything simi‐
Pay attention to the pictogram on handwheel lar to the eyelet. The eyelet has not been
1. designed for such a load and may tear.
# Pull ball neck 4 out downwards. # Shift the transmission to position j.

# If the ball neck is dirty, clean it # Apply the vehicle's parking brake.
(/ page 229). # Close all the doors.
 Driving and parking 179

# Position the trailer on a level surface behind Even if the trailer is connected correctly, a mes‐
the vehicle. sage may nevertheless appear on the multifunc‐
tion display in the following cases:
% The height of the ball head will change
depending on the vehicle's load. In this case, R LEDs have been installed in the trailer's light‐
use a trailer with a height-adjustable draw‐ ing system.
bar. R The current has fallen below the trailer light‐
# Couple up the trailer. ing system's minimum current (50 mA)
% You can connect accessories up to a maxi‐
mum of 240 W to the permanent power sup‐
ply.
# Remove objects or devices that prevent the
trailer from rolling, e.g. chocks.
# Release the trailer's parking brake.
Uncoupling a trailer

& WARNING Risk of being crushed and

# To install an adapter: open the cover of the becoming trapped when uncoupling a
socket. trailer
# Insert the plug with the tab 1 into the sock‐ When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged
et's groove 3. inertia-activated brake, your hand may
become trapped between the vehicle and the
# Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far
trailer drawbar.
as it will go.
# Do not uncouple trailers with an
# Let the cover engage.
engaged overrun brake.
# Attach the cable to the trailer with cable ties
(only in the case of adapter cable).
* NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a
# Make sure that the cable is always slack for state of overrun
ease of movement during cornering.
Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage
# Establish all electrical and other connections
the vehicle.
to the trailer. In the process, attach the trail‐
er's breakaway cable to the eyelet on the ball # Do not uncouple trailers with an

neck. engaged overrun brake.

# Check that the trailer's lighting system works # Shift the transmission to position j.
properly.
# Apply the vehicle's parking brake.
# Indicate in both directions and check whether
the corresponding turn signal light on the # Close all the doors.
trailer is flashing. # Apply the trailer's parking brake.
A trailer is detected only if the electrical con‐ # Further secure the trailer against rolling away
nection is established correctly and the light‐ with a wheel chock or similar object.
ing system is in working order. The function
of other systems also depends on this, e.g. # Remove the trailer cables and safety chains.
ESP®, PARKTRONIC, Active Parking Assist, # Uncouple the trailer.
Blind Spot Assist or Lane Keeping Assist.
180 Instrument cluster and on-board computer

Notes on the instrument cluster and on- These segments show you what speed range is
board computer available:
R Variable limiter activated (/ page 159)
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an The segments light up from the start of the
instrument cluster malfunction scale to the selected limit speed.
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal‐ R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC switched
functioned, you may not notice restrictions to on (/ page 162)
safety-relevant system functions. One or two segments light up in the saved
The operating safety of your vehicle may be speed range.
impaired. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
# Drive on carefully. vehicle in front.
# Have the vehicle checked immediately The segments light up from the speed of the
at a qualified specialist workshop. vehicle in front up to the saved speed.

If you are uncertain regarding the operational You can show the speed as a digital speedometer
safety of your vehicle, park the vehicle safely as on the display as well.
soon as possible. Inform a qualified specialist If you change your vehicle's wheel size, check its
workshop. assignment to the wheel size group
The on-board computer will show only messages (/ page 258). If the assignment changes with‐
and warnings from certain systems on the dis‐ out recoding the control units in the vehicle, the
play. You should therefore make sure your vehicle speedometer will not display the speed accu‐
is operating safely at all times. rately. The current vehicle speed may then be
You can find an overview of the indicator and higher than the speed shown by the speedome‐
warning lamps on the instrument cluster in "At a ter. Driving and driving safety systems may then
glance". be operationally impaired or may detect a mal‐
function and switch themselves off.
In some countries, an audible signal will sound
Overview of the instrument cluster and/or a message will appear on the display
when the vehicle reaches the maximum speed
permitted by law, e.g. at 120 km/h.
Rev counter

* NOTE Engine damage due to maximum

engine speed being exceeded
If the maximum permissible engine speed is
exceeded, the engine may be damaged.
# Avoid driving in the red speed range
Instrument cluster (example) (danger zone).
1 Speedometer
2 Multifunction display Outside temperature display
3 Rev counter You should pay special attention to road condi‐
tions when temperatures are around freezing
4 Coolant temperature display
point.
5 Fuel level
The outside temperature is displayed on the mul‐
Speedometer tifunction display (/ page 182).
In vehicles with Active Distance Assist Changes in the outside temperature will be dis‐
DISTRONIC, there are illuminated segments on played after a short delay.
the speedometer dial.
 Instrument cluster and on-board computer 181

Coolant temperature display

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening

the bonnet
If you open the bonnet when the engine has
overheated or when there is a fire in the
engine compartment, the following situations
may occur:
R You could come into contact with hot
gases. 1 Display
R You could come into contact with other 2 Right control panel
hot, escaping operating fluids. 3 Left control panel
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the When you switch the power supply on, the on-
engine to cool down. board computer will be activated.
# In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ Vehicles with manual transmission: if you remove
partment, keep the bonnet closed and the key, then quickly re-insert it and switch the
call the fire service. power supply on, the on-board computer and the
instrument cluster will not be activated.
The coolant temperature display is located within
the instrument cluster's rev counter. You can control the displays and the settings on
the on-board computer with the steering wheel
During normal driving and if the coolant level is buttons on the left 3 and right 2 control pan‐
correct, the display is permitted to rise to 120°C. els.
Steering-wheel buttons
Overview and operation of the on-board
computer Left control panel on the steering wheel

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ ò R Call up the main menu
mation systems and communications
: Press briefly
equipment
9 R Scroll through lists
If you operate information and communica‐
R Select menu or function
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when
driving, you will be distracted from the traffic R In the Radio or Media menu, open
situation. This could also cause you to lose the track or station list and select
control of the vehicle. a station, audio track or video
# Only operate this equipment when the scene.
traffic situation permits. R In the Telephone menu, switch to
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the the telephone book and select a
vehicle whilst paying attention to road name or a telephone number.
and traffic conditions and operate the : Press and hold
equipment with the vehicle stationary. 9 R Quickly scroll through all lists
You must observe the legal requirements for the R In the Radio or Media menu, use
country in which you are currently driving when rapid scroll to select a station,
operating the on-board computer. audio track or video scene.
R In the Telephone menu with the
telephone book open, start rapid
scroll.
182 Instrument cluster and on-board computer

Left control panel on the steering wheel

a R In all menus, confirm the selected
entry on the list or the display
R In the Radio or Media menu, open
the list of available radio sources
or media.
R In the Telephone menu, switch to
the telephone book and start dial‐
ling the selected number. Multifunction display (example)
ñ R Switch off LINGUATRONIC 1 Drive program (/ page 144)
2 Additional speedometer
% Press briefly 3 Transmission position (/ page 142)
R Back 4 Time
R Hide display messages 5 Outside temperature
R In the Radio or Media menu, exit 6 Display section for display messages, menus
the track or station list and menu list
R Exit the telephone book or redial 7 Status area
memory
To call up the menu bar in display section 6,
% Press and hold press the ò steering-wheel button.
R Call up the standard display in the % You can switch additional speedometer 2
Trip menu on and off in the Instrument cluster submenu
of the Settings menu.
Right control panel on the steering wheel The following displays may appear in status area
7 of the display:
6 R Make or accept a call
Z Gearshift recommendation with manual
R Switch to the redial memory transmission (/ page 141) or automatic
Reject or end a call transmission (/ page 145)
~ R
R Exit the telephone book or redial 1 A door is not completely closed
memory = PARKTRONIC (/ page 166)
¯ Cruise control (/ page 158)
W R Adjust the volume
X È Limiter (/ page 158)
z DSR (/ page 160)
ó R Switch on LINGUATRONIC
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 108)
8 R Switch the sound on/off or Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
(/ page 109)
è ECO start/stop function (/ page 140)
Overview of what is shown on the multi‐
ë HOLD function (/ page 165)
function display
120 Maximum permitted speed exceeded (for
km/h certain countries only)
The display for Active Parking Assist XjY may
also be shown in the footer of the multifunction
display (/ page 169).
 Instrument cluster and on-board computer 183

Setting the instrument lighting Menus and submenus

Service menu
# Press the ò button to call up the list of
menus.
# With the : or 9 button, select the
Service menu.
# Press the a button to confirm.

You have the following options in the Service

menu:
R Calling up display messages in the message
memory (/ page 279).
R Checking the tyre pressure electronically or
restarting the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem (/ page 255).
R Checking the engine oil level electronically
The displays on the instrument cluster are illumi‐
nated during the day. A dimming function is not (/ page 183).
possible in daylight. R Calling up the service due date
The light sensor on the instrument cluster auto‐ R Displaying the AdBlue® fill level (in BlueTEC®
matically controls the brightness of the display vehicles).
lighting.
When the light has been switched on, the bright‐ Assistant display menu
ness control is influenced by the ambient light.
You can then adjust the brightness of the instru‐
ment lighting and the display lighting with con‐
troller 1 as well.
# Turn controller 1 up or down.

Overview of menus on the on-board com‐

puter
Use the ò steering-wheel button to call up the
list of menus and select a menu.
# Press the ò button to call up the list of
You can find operating information in "Overview menus.
and operation of the on-board computer"
(/ page 181).
# With the : or 9 button, select the
Assistance graphic menu.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call
# Press the a button to confirm.
up the following menus:
The status of the following driving or driving
R Trip menu (/ page 184)
safety systems can be displayed:
R Navi menu (navigation instructions)
R Rear window wiper (/ page 116)
(/ page 185)
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 156)
R Radio menu (/ page 186)
R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 172)
R Media menu (/ page 186)
R DSR (/ page 160)
R Telephone menu (/ page 188)
R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 173)
R Assistance graphic menu (/ page 183)
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R Service menu (/ page 183)
(/ page 163)
R Settings menu (/ page 189)
184 Instrument cluster and on-board computer

R Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 175) Displaying trip computer "From start" or
R Blind Spot Assist (/ page 174) "From reset"
# Press the : or 9 button to switch
between the assistant display and the evalua‐
tion of ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 172).
The evaluation of ATTENTION ASSIST shows
the length of journey since the last break and
the calculated attention level.

Calling up displays on the Trip menu

Displaying the range and current fuel con‐
sumption # Press the ò button to call up the list of
menus.
# Use the : or 9 button to select the
Trip menu.
# Press the a button.
# Press the : or 9 button to select the
From start or From reset submenu.
The following values will be displayed:
R 1 Distance
R 2 Length of journey
1 Approximate range R 3 Average speed
2 Current fuel consumption R 4 Average fuel consumption
3 Recuperation display
The values on the From start submenu relate to
# Press the ò button to call up the list of those measured since the start of the journey.
menus. The values on the From reset submenu relate to
# Use the : or 9 button to select the those measured since the submenu was last
Trip menu. reset.
# Press the a button. The trip computer will automatically be reset
# With the : or 9 button, select range under the following conditions:
and consumption. R The ignition has been switched off for longer
than four hours (only From start).
If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank, the display will show a vehicle being R A time of 9999 hours has been exceeded.
refuelled Ï instead of the approximate range R A distance of 99,999 km has been exceeded.
1.
Displaying the digital speedometer
Recuperation display 3 shows whether and, if
so, how much kinetic energy is being converted # Press the ò button to call up the list of
to electrical energy while the vehicle is coasting. menus.
The recuperated energy is then stored in the # Use the : or 9 button to select the
starter battery. Trip menu.
# Press the a button.
# Select the digital speedometer using
the : or 9 button.
 Instrument cluster and on-board computer 185

Resetting values
The values of the following functions can be
reset:
R Trip distance
R "From start" trip computer
R "From reset" trip computer
R ECO display

# Press the ò button to call up the list of

menus. No change of direction announced
# Use the : or 9 button to select the 1 Distance to the next destination
Trip menu. 2 Expected arrival time
# Press the a button. 3 Distance to the next change of direction
4 Name of current road
# Use the : button to select Yes and con‐
firm with the a button.
If the ECO display values are reset, the values in
the "From start" trip computer will also be reset.
If the values in the "From start" trip computer are
reset, the ECO display values will also be reset.

Navigation menu
In the Navi menu, the display shows navigation
instructions from the multimedia system.
Change of direction announced with lane recom‐
# Switch on the multimedia system. mendation
# Press the ò button to call up the list of 1 Road to which the change of direction leads
menus. 2 Distance to the change of direction
# With the : or 9 button, select the 3 Change-of-direction symbol
Navi menu. 4 Recommended lane and new lane during a
# Press the a button to confirm. change of direction (white)
5 Possible lane (light grey)
Route guidance not active
6 Lane not recommended (dark grey)
If the digital map contains the corresponding
data, lane recommendations for upcoming
changes of direction can be displayed in the case
of multi-lane roads. New lanes may be added dur‐
ing the change of direction.
Lane not recommended 6: in this lane, you will
not be able to complete the next change of direc‐
tion without changing lane.
Possible lane 5: in this lane will you be able to
1 Direction of travel complete the next change of direction.
2 Name of current road Recommended lane 4: in this lane, you will be
able to complete both the next change of direc‐
Route guidance active tion and the one after that.
186 Instrument cluster and on-board computer

No route to the selected destination could be

calculated.
R O
You have reached the destination or an inter‐
mediate destination.

Radio menu

Change of direction without lane recommenda‐

tion
1 Road to which the change of direction leads
2 Distance to the change of direction and dis‐
tance indicator graphic
3 Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is made, you will see
distance indicator graphic 2 in addition to
change-of-direction symbol 3. This will reduce 1 Frequency band
in size from bottom to top as you approach the 2 Channel with preset position
announced change of direction. When the dis‐ 3 Artist's name
tance indicator runs out, the change of direction 4 Name of track
will begin.
# Switch on the multimedia system.
# Press the ò button to call up the list of
menus.
# Use the : or 9 button to select the
Radio menu.
# Press the a button to confirm.
The display will show the station currently
selected 2.
# To open the station list: briefly press
Change of direction with lane recommendation the : or 9 button.
1 Road to which the change of direction leads # To select a station in the station list:
2 Distance to the change of direction and dis‐ briefly press the : or 9 button.
tance indicator graphic # To select a station in the station list with
3 Change-of-direction symbol rapid scroll: press and hold the : or
4 Lane recommendation 9 button.
# To select a frequency band or station
The following additional navigation status dis‐ memory: briefly press the a button.
plays are possible:
# Use the : or 9 button to select a fre‐
R New route... or Calculating route…
quency band or station memory.
A new route is being calculated. # Press the a button to confirm.
R Road not mapped
% You can find further information, e.g. about
The vehicle's position is within the area of the saving stations and about DAB radio mode
digital map, but the road is not known, e.g. (Digital Audio Broadcasting) in "Radio" .
unpaved roads (off-road).
R No route Media menu
# Switch on the multimedia system.
 Instrument cluster and on-board computer 187

# Press the ò button to call up the list of Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can
menus. play back audio files from different audio players
# Use the : or 9 button to select the or data storage media.
Media menu. # To select the audio player or data storage

# Press the a button to confirm. medium: briefly press the a button.

The display will show the list of media sour‐
Changing the media source ces.
# Use the : or 9 button to select the
audio player or data storage medium.
# Press the a button to confirm.

# To open the track list: briefly press the :

or 9 button.
# To select the next or previous track on
the track list: briefly press the : or 9
button.
# To select a track on the track list with
You can change the media source and the play‐ rapid scroll: press and hold the : or
back type (audio, video or TV) in the Media menu. 9 button until the desired track has been
# To open/close the media source list: reached.
briefly press the a button. If you press and hold the : or 9 but‐
ton, the rapid scroll speed will increase after
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the list a short time. Not all audio players or data
will show the following media sources, for storage media support this function.
example:
If the corresponding track information has been
R Disc (CD/DVD) saved to the audio player or data storage
R Memory card (SD or SDHC) medium, the display can show the following:
R Media Register R Track number
R USB storage devices R Track name
RBluetooth® audio equipment R Artist
% Observe the additional information on media R Album
support in "Media" .
The track information will not be displayed in AUX
Operating the audio player or data storage audio mode (auxiliary audio mode: external audio
media source connected).
Operating DVD-Video
# To select the DVD drive or disc: briefly
press the a button.
The display will show the list of media sour‐
ces.
# Use the : or 9 button to select the
DVD drive or disc.
# Press the a button to confirm.
# To open the scene list: briefly press
1 Media source, e.g. the name of the USB flash the : or 9 button.
drive # To select the next or previous scene on
2 Current track the scene list: briefly press the : or
3 Artist's name 9 button.
4 Name of album # To select a scene on the scene list with
5 Folder name rapid scroll: press and hold the : or
188 Instrument cluster and on-board computer

9 button until the desired scene has been Bluetooth® from a Mercedes-Benz service centre
reached. or on the internet under https://www.mercedes-
# Press the a button to confirm. benz.com/connect.
# To accept a call: press the 6 button.

Telephone menu
If someone calls you when you are in the Tele-
phone menu, a corresponding message will
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
appear on the display.
ating integrated communication equip‐
# To reject or end a call: press the ~ but‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
ton.
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you Dialling a number from the telephone book
could be distracted from the traffic situation. # Use the :, 9 or a button to switch
This could also cause you to lose control of to the telephone book.
the vehicle.
# Use the : or 9 button to scroll
# Only operate this equipment when the
through names.
traffic situation permits. If you press and hold the button for longer
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the than one second, the names in the telephone
vehicle whilst paying attention to road book will be displayed quickly one after the
and traffic conditions and operate the other.
equipment with the vehicle stationary. or
When using the phone, you must observe the
# Press and hold the : or 9 button for
legal requirements for the country in which you longer than five seconds.
are currently driving. Rapid scrolling – the name that starts with
the next letter or the previous letter in the
# Switch on the mobile phone (see the separate
alphabet is displayed.
operating instructions from the manufac‐
turer). Rapid scrolling will stop when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
# Switch on the multimedia system.
# If only one telephone number has been
# Insert the mobile phone into the mobile saved for a name: press the 6 or a
phone cradle. button to start dialling.
or or
# Establish a Bluetooth® connection with the # If several telephone numbers have been
multimedia system . saved for a name: press the 6 or a
# Press the ò button to call up the list of button to display the telephone numbers.
menus. # Use the : or 9 button to select the
# Use the : or 9 button to select the telephone number.
Telephone menu. # Press the 6 or a button to start dial‐
# Press the a button to confirm. ling.
The display will show one of the following # To exit the telephone book: press the ~
messages: or % button.
R Telephone ready or name of the mobile Using redial
phone network provider: the mobile # Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
phone has found a network and is ready memory.
to receive.
# Use the : or 9 button to select the
R Telephone No service: no network is avail‐ name or telephone number.
able or the mobile phone is searching for
a network.
# Press the 6 or a button to start dial‐
ling.
You can obtain further information about suitable # To exit the redial memory: press the ~
mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via or % button.
 Instrument cluster and on-board computer 189

Settings menu # To switch between low beam for right-

and left-side traffic: use the : or 9
# Press the ò button to call up the list of
button to select Dipped beams Setting for.
menus.
The display will show the selected setting.
# Use the : or 9 button to select the # Change the selected setting with the a
Settings menu.
button.
# Press the a button to confirm. When you change the setting, the switchover
will not take place until the next time the
You have the following options on the Settings
vehicle is stationary.
menu:
R Changing the settings for the driver assis‐ When you switch over the low beam for right- or
tance systems on the Assistance submenu left-side traffic, motorway mode and the
enhanced fog light function may not be available.
R Changing the settings for the exterior lighting
This deactivation will take place only if the setting
on the Lights submenu for driving on the right or left is the opposite to
R Changing the display options on the Instru‐ your vehicle's national version.
ment cluster submenu You can have the low beam set for right- or left-
R Setting the permanent limiter on the Vehicle side traffic at a qualified specialist workshop as
submenu well.
R Resetting the settings to factory settings
Instrument cluster submenu
# Select the desired submenu and confirm your # Use the : or 9 button to select the
selection. Instrument cluster submenu.
Assistance submenu # Press the a button to confirm.
# Select a driving or driver assistance system # To select the unit of measurement for dis‐
and configure a setting. tance: use the : or 9 button to select
R Switching ESP® on/off (/ page 155). the Display unit Speed-/odometer function.
R Switching Traffic Sign Assist on/off
The display will show the selected setting km
(/ page 173). or Miles.
R Switching Active Brake Assist on/off
# Change the selected setting with the a
(/ page 157). button.
R Switching Blind Spot Assist on/off
# To switch the additional speedometer on/
(/ page 174). off: use the : or 9 button to select
Addit. speedo.
R Adjusting ATTENTION ASSIST
The current selection will appear.
(/ page 172).
# Press the a button to change the setting.
R Adjusting Lane Keeping Assist
(/ page 175). Vehicle submenu
Lights submenu # Use the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
The following settings are possible on the Lights
submenu:
# Press the a button to confirm.
R Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off
# To set the permanent limiter: use the :
(/ page 108) or 9 button to select Limit speed (winter
tyres).
R Switching between low beam for right- and
The display will show the current setting.
left-side traffic (in vehicles with Intelligent
Light System only) # To change the setting: press the a but‐
ton.
# Use the : or 9 button to select the # To save the entry: press the a button.
Lights submenu.
# Press the a button to confirm. % You can find further information in "Perma‐
nent limiter" (/ page 160).
190 Instrument cluster and on-board computer

# To reset to factory settings: use the :

or 9 button to select the Factory settings
submenu.
# Press the a button to confirm.
The Reset all settings? function will be dis‐
played.
# Use the : or 9 button to select No or
Yes.
# Press the a button to confirm.
If you selected Yes previously, the display will
show a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, not all functions will be reset.
The Limit speed (winter tyres) function for the
permanent limiter can be adjusted only on the
Vehicle submenu.
 Mercedes PRO 191

Information about Mercedes PRO (Mercedes Use the Info call button in the overhead con‐
me) trol panel to make a call to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Centre (/ page 192).
Mercedes-Benz Vans vehicles support the follow‐
R Mercedes-Benz Emergency call system (SOS
ing telematics solutions depending on what is
button)
selected:
Use the G button (SOS button) in the
R Mercedes PRO
overhead control panel to make a call to the
R Mercedes me Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre
When you have registered and logged in with a (/ page 192).
user account to the Mercedes PRO Portal or R Accident Recovery
Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers Accident Recovery is available for you as a
from Mercedes-Benz Vans will be available to supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency
you. call system. If desired, at the conclusion of an
Availability of Mercedes PRO is country-depend‐ emergency call, your call is forwarded to the
ent. You can check the availability of Mercedes Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre, so you can
PRO in your country in the Mercedes PRO Portal: have your vehicle towed away to a Mercedes-
http://www.mercedes.pro Benz service centre, for example
Availability of Mercedes me is country-depend‐ (/ page 192).
ent. You can check the availability of Mercedes The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the
me in your country in the Mercedes me Portal: Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are availa‐
http://www.mercedes.me ble for you around the clock for the use of the
For more information on Mercedes PRO or services. Observe the legal requirements for the
Mercedes me contact a Mercedes-Benz service country in which you are staying.
centre or visit the Mercedes PRO Portal or To use the services in your vehicle, the following
Mercedes me Portal. conditions must be met:
R Your vehicle is in an area with sufficient GSM
Information about Mercedes PRO connect network coverage.
(Mercedes me connect) R The ignition is switched on.
Mercedes PRO connect or Mercedes me connect More information on Mercedes PRO and
is the connectivity product from Mercedes-Benz Mercedes PRO connect and the range of services
that intelligently connects your vehicle with your offered can be found in the Mercedes PRO sup‐
smartphone, your tablet or your PC. You can then plement at: https://moba.i.daimler.com/
call up diverse information about your vehicle at markets/ece-row/baix/trucks/mercedespro/
any time, for example, or control specific vehicle en_GB/index.html
functions remotely.
Further information about Mercedes me and
Amongst others, Mercedes PRO connect or Mercedes me connect and the range of services
Mercedes me connect provide the following serv‐ offered can be found in the Mercedes me supple‐
ices: ment at: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/
R Breakdown Management (breakdown assis‐ ece-row/baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/
tance call button) #emotions/Startseite.html
In the event of a breakdown, you can use the
breakdown assistance call button in the over‐ Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
head control panel to make a call to the using the multimedia system
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
(/ page 192). Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 g
You can also select a menu entry in the multi‐
media system (/ page 191). # Call Mercedes PRO connect or Mercedes me
R Info call/General question about your vehicle connect.
(Info call button), if available With your approval, the vehicle transmits the
required data to the Mercedes-Benz Cus‐
192 Mercedes PRO

tomer Centre. The data transfer is shown in An emergency call can be initiated even if a
the media display. breakdown assistance or Info call is active. This
has priority over all other active calls.
Then, you can select a service in the voice selec‐
tion menu and be connected to a specialist at the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Information on the breakdown assistance
You can find information on the following topics: call via the overhead control panel
R Vehicle breakdown or accident A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
R Activation of Mercedes PRO connect or using the breakdown assistance button has been
Mercedes me connect or questions about the initiated via the overhead control panel:
connectivity product In the event of a breakdown, you will get support:
R Questions about the vehicle or about opera‐ R A qualified technician carries out repairs on
tion of the vehicle site and/or the vehicle will be towed to the
R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
R Other products and services from Mercedes- You may be charged for these services.
Benz Data is transmitted during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 192).
Making a call via the overhead control panel
Giving permission for data transfer
Requirements:
R There is an active breakdown assistance call
(/ page 192).
The Do you want to transmit vehicle data and
the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Centre in order to improve the processing
of your request? message appears.
# Select Yes.
Relevant identification data is transmitted
automatically.

Transmitted data during a service call

1 Breakdown assistance call button In certain countries you must confirm the data
transfer.
2 Cover for G button (SOS button)
3 G button (SOS button) The following requirements must be met for data
transmission:
4 Info call button
R The ignition is switched on.
# To make a breakdown assistance call:
R The necessary data transmission technology
press button 1.
is supported by the mobile network provider.
Making an emergency call R A sufficient mobile phone connection quality
# Briefly press the cover on G button 2 to is provided.
open it. The data transferred when calling depends on the
# Press and hold G button 3 for at least services activated and the type of call made:
one second.
R General information about the vehicle
Making an Info call R Accident and breakdown assistance
# Press button 4. R Service appointment agreement
 Mercedes PRO 193

The following data is transmitted if the data pro‐

tection query has been confirmed in the multime‐
dia system or in the instrument cluster:
R Vehicle identification number
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Set language for the multimedia system
R Confirmation of the data protection prompt

If a call is made for a service appointment via the

service reminder, the following data may be
transmitted:
R Current mileage and maintenance data

If accident and breakdown assistance is called

via the voice control system, and the data protec‐
tion query has been confirmed, the following data
can also be called up from the vehicle by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:
R Current vehicle location

The following data is transmitted if the data pro‐

tection query has been declined in the multime‐
dia system or in the instrument cluster:
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Rejection of the data protection prompt
194 MBUX multimedia system

Overview and operation 3 Operating strip, calls up applications

Notes on MBUX multimedia system 4 Touchpad and controls for the multimedia
system
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ % You can find further information about opera‐
mation systems and communications tion as well as about applications and serv‐
equipment ices in the Digital Owner's Manual.
If you operate information and communica‐ There are two USB ports in the centre console
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when storage compartment.
driving, you will be distracted from the traffic The USB port with the ç symbol facilitates the
situation. This could also cause you to lose connection of the mobile phone with the multi‐
control of the vehicle. media system using a suitable cable. This will
# Only operate this equipment when the enable you to use the functions of the mobile
traffic situation permits. phone via Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
Anti-theft protection
vehicle whilst paying attention to road This device is equipped with technical provisions
and traffic conditions and operate the to protect it against theft. More detailed informa‐
equipment with the vehicle stationary. tion about anti-theft protection can be obtained
at a qualified specialist workshop.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.

& WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐

dling data storage media
If you handle a data storage medium while
driving, your attention is diverted from the
traffic conditions. This could also cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only handle a data storage medium
when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

1 Control panel for multimedia system

2 Media display with touch functionality
 MBUX multimedia system 195

Home screen overview

1 On the home screen: displays the first three Operating the MBUX multimedia system
applications
Using the steering wheel buttons
In other displays: calls up the home screen
2 Calls up the profile
3 Calls up the global search
4 SOS NOT READY display only when the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is not
available
5 Displays, for example network display, bat‐
tery status of the mobile phone connected,
signal strength of the mobile phone network,
time
6 Calls up the Notifications Centre
The star indicates new notifications.
7 Calls up an application using the symbol
8 Name of the application, beneath the current
selection or information
9 Quick-access (in the example: calls up desti‐ 1 6 Make or accept a call
nation entry and enters the destination
2 W Increases the volume
address for home)
A Number of applications and currently selec‐ 3 8 Mutes
ted display area 4 X Reduces volume
B Calls up SUGGESTIONS and FAVOURITES 5 ~ Rejects or ends a call
6 ó Switches on LINGUATRONIC
# Press one of the buttons.
Using the touchscreen
# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left
or right.
# To select an entry: tap on the entry.
196 MBUX multimedia system

# To enter characters with the keyboard: tap Calling up applications using buttons
on a button.
# To use handwriting to enter characters:
write the character with one finger on the
touchscreen.
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section
of a website: move two fingers together or
apart.
# To call up a global menu in the applica‐
tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until 1 % Calls up the telephone
the OPTIONS menu appears. 2 z Calls up the navigation or map
3 | Pressing repeatedly calls up the
On the touchpad desired audio source
4 ´ Sets vehicle functions
5 ß Calls up favourites
# Press one of the buttons.

Function of LINGUATRONIC
If you use the voice control system in an emer‐
gency your voice can change and your telephone
call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be
unnecessarily delayed.
Familiarise yourself with the voice control system
functions before starting the journey.
With LINGUATRONIC, various applications of the
MBUX multimedia system can be operated by
1 G Returns to the previous display voice input. LINGUATRONIC is operational
approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is
2 ~ Calls up the control menu of the last switched on and is available from the driver's and
active audio source co-driver's seat.
3 © Shows the home screen and calls up
The following applications of the multimedia sys‐
applications
tem can be operated:
4 Touchpad
R Navigation
# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left R Telephone
or right.
R Radio and TV
# To select an entry: press on the entry.
R Media player
# To enter a character: enter a character
R Messages
using the keypad.
R Vehicle functions
or
# Write a character on the touchpad.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any direc‐ Starting LINGUATRONIC
tion. # Press the £ rocker switch up on the multi‐
function steering wheel.
You can say a voice command after an acous‐
tic signal.
 MBUX multimedia system 197

Information on profiles, suggestions and Configuring suggestions

favourites # Select Ä for a profile.
Using the multimedia system up to seven profiles # Select Suggestions settings.
can be created in the vehicle. # Switch Allow destination suggestions, Allow
Profiles store your personal vehicle settings and music suggestions and Allow contact sugges-
settings for the multimedia system. tions on or off.
If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver # To deactivate the learn function for one
can select their profile before the journey, with‐ day: activate Deact. learn. for 24h.
out changing the settings of other drivers. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained
The following settings are saved in your profile, and no data recorded for the active profile.
for example: Suggestions will continue to be shown.
R Radio (including station list) Example: if the option is switched on and a
route to a new destination has been calcula‐
R Last destinations
ted, this destination would not be taken into
R Favourites and suggestions account for the learn function.
The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It
then offers suggestions for the most likely naviga‐ System settings
tion destinations, media sources, radio stations
or contacts. The requirements for that are the Overview of the system settings menu
selection of a profile, your consent to the record‐ In the system settings menu, you can make set‐
ing of data and sufficient collected data. tings in the following menus and control ele‐
Favourites are quick accesses to frequently used ments:
applications. Favourites can be selected from cat‐ R Display
egories or added directly in an application.
R Control elements:
R LINGUATRONIC
Configuring profiles and suggestions
R Sound:
Multimedia system:
- Entertainment
4 © 5 f Profiles
- Navigation and traffic announcements
Creating a new profile - Telephone
# Select W Create profile . - Voice amplification to the rear
# Select an avatar. R Connectivity:
# Enter the name and confirm with a. - Transmission of the vehicle location
# Select Continue r. - Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC
# Select Current settings. R Time & date
# Select Save. R Language
# Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect R Units for distance
phone, to connect a mobile phone with the R Software updates
user profile.
R Data import/export
# Select Finished.
R PIN protection
Selecting profile options R System Reset
# Select Ä for a profile.
The following functions are available: Information on important system updates
R Resetting or deleting a profile
Important system updates may be necessary for
R Resetting favourites the security of your multimedia system's data.
R Configuring suggestions Install these updates, or else the security of your
multimedia system cannot be ensured.
198 MBUX multimedia system

A system update consists of three steps: update is being installed and vehicle functions
R Downloading or copying of the data required are restricted.
for installation If errors should occur during the installation, the
R Installation of the downloaded system update multimedia system automatically attempts to
restore the previous version. If restoration of the
R Activating the downloaded system update by
previous version is not possible, a symbol
restarting the system appears on the media display. Consult a qualified
% An Internet connection is required for online specialist workshop to resolve the problem.
updates. For automatic online updates, your
vehicle must have a permanently installed Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
communication module.
% You can start the software update manually Requirements:
via the system settings. If automatic software R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul‐
updates are activated, the system updates timedia system with external hotspots:
will be downloaded automatically . Settings there is no communication module installed.
for automatic software updates can also be R The device to be connected supports at least
made in the system settings. one of the types of connection described.
The multimedia system provides a corresponding Multimedia system:
message when a system update is available. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System
You have the following selection options: 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
R Download
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
The system update will be downloaded in the
background. # Select Wi-Fi.
R Details Connecting the multimedia system to an
Information about the pending system update external hotspot via Wi-Fi
is displayed. The type of connection established must be
selected on the multimedia system and on the
R Later
device to be connected.
The system update can be downloaded man‐
% The connection procedure may differ depend‐
ually at a later time.
ing on the device. Follow the instructions that
Deep system updates are shown in the display. Further information
Deep system updates access vehicle or system can be found in the manufacturer's operating
settings and can therefore only be carried out instructions.
when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is # Select Internet settings.
switched off. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
When the download of a deep system update is # Select Add hotspot.
complete and the downloaded system update is
ready for installation, you will be notified, for Connecting using a security key
example, after the next ignition cycle. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
% Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location network.
before starting the installation. # Select Connect using security key.
Requirements for the installation: # Have the security key displayed on the device
R The ignition is switched off. to be connected (see the manufacturer's
R Notes and warnings have been read and operating instructions).
accepted. # Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐
R The electric parking brake has been applied. tem.
# Confirm the entry with ¡.
If all requirements are met, the downloaded sys‐
tem update is installed. The multimedia system
cannot be operated while the downloaded system
 MBUX multimedia system 199

Connecting using a WPS PIN Connecting using a button

# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi # Select Connect via WPS PBC.
network. # Press the push button on the device to be
# Select Connect using WPS PIN input. connected (see the manufacturer's operating
The multimedia system generates an eight- instructions).
digit PIN. # Select Continue.
# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
Connecting using a security key
# Confirm the entry.
# Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
Connecting using a button A security key is displayed.
# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi # Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐
network. nected. The vehicle is displayed with the
# Select Connect via WPS PBC. DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.
# Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options # Enter the security key which is shown in the
on the device to be connected (see the manu‐ media display on the device to be connected.
facturer's operating instructions). # Confirm the entry.
# Press the WPS button on the device to be Connecting using NFC
connected.
# Select Connect via NFC.
# Select Continue in the multimedia system.
# Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the
Activating automatic connection manufacturer's operating instructions).
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Hold the device to be connected at the vehi‐
# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi cle's NFC interface.
network. # Select Finished.
# Activate Permanent Internet connection. The mobile device is now connected to the
multimedia system hotspot via NFC.
Connecting with a known Wi-Fi
Generating a new security key
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
# Select Vehicle hotspot.
# Select a Wi-Fi network.
The connection is established again. # Select Generate security key.
# Select New security key.
Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi A connection will be established with the
hotspot for external devices newly created security key.
The type of connection established depends on
the device to be connected. The function must be
# To save a security key: select Save.
supported by the multimedia system and by the When a new security key is saved, all existing
device to be connected. The type of connection Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If
established must be selected on the multimedia the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐
system and on the device to be connected. lished, the new security key must be entered.
# Select Vehicle hotspot.

# Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.

System language
Notes on the system language
Connecting using WPS PIN generation
This function allows you to determine the lan‐
# Select Connect using WPS PIN generation. guage for the menu displays and the navigation
# Enter the PIN shown in the media display on messages. The selected language affects the
the device to be connected and confirm. characters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all languages.
Connecting using WPS PIN entry If a language is not available, the navigation
# Select Connect using WPS PIN input. announcements will be in English.
# Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
200 MBUX multimedia system

Setting the system language A prompt appears again asking whether you
Multimedia system: really wish to reset.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System # Select Yes.
5 Language The multimedia system is reset to the factory
# Set the language.
settings.
% If you are using Arabic map data, the text Resetting using a button
information can also be shown in Arabic on # Press both the % and f buttons at the
the navigation map. To do so, select as same time until the multimedia system
the language from the language list. Naviga‐ restarts (at least 15 seconds).
tion announcements are then also made in The multimedia system is restarted. No data
Arabic. is deleted during this process.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset func‐

Navigation
tion)
Switching navigation on
& WARNING Risk of accidents due to fail‐ Multimedia system:
ure of multimedia display functions 4 © 5 Navigation
While the multimedia system is being reset, # Alternatively: press the z button.
its functions such as the reversing camera The map shows the current vehicle location.
are not available. The navigation menu is shown.
# Only reset the multimedia system when
The navigation menu is hidden if route guid‐
the vehicle is stationary. ance is active.
Multimedia system: # To show: tap on the touchscreen.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset # To hide: the menu is hidden automatically.
Personal data is deleted, for example:
R Station presets
R Connected mobile phones
R Individual user profiles

% The guest profile is reset when the settings

are restored to the factory settings.
A query appears again asking if the system
should really be reset.
# Select Yes.

If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears

asking if you also wish to restore this to the fac‐
tory settings during a reset.
# Variant 1: select Yes.

# Enter the current PIN.

The PIN is reset.
# Variant 2: select No.
The current PIN stays the same after reset‐
ting.
% If you have forgotten your PIN, a Mercedes-
Benz service centre can deactivate the PIN
protection for you.
 MBUX multimedia system 201

Navigation overview

Example: digital map with navigation menu • To call up the POSITION menu
1 To enter a POI or address and additional des‐ - Store position
tination entry options • To show Compass
2 To interrupt route guidance (if route guidance - To show Qibla (available in selected coun‐
is active) tries)
3 To repeat a navigation announcement and 5 Quick-access and settings
switch navigation announcements on or off • To show Traffic
4 To call up the ON ROUTE menu
• To show Parking
• To show Route overview • To show Motorway information
• To select Alternative routes • Via Advanced options to use View,
• Report traffic incident (Car-to-X) Announcements and Route
• To call up the TRAFFIC menu % Some options are not available in all coun‐
• To show Traffic announcements tries.
• To show Area announcements
• To show Live Traffic Subscription Info
• To show Route list
202 MBUX multimedia system

Entering a destination
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to?

1 Country in which the vehicle is located % You can find further information about desti‐
2 Enters a POI or address nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the
Digital Owner's Manual.
Underneath: Multimedia system suggestions
during destination entry Changing the country
During input: delete the entry with £. # Select the country indicator in 1.
3 List with additional destination entry options # Enter the country indicator.
During destination entry: select search result
# Select the country in 3.
4 Deletes entered character
5 a Confirms an entry Using online search
6 Calls up handwriting recognition % Requirements: the media display shows an
7 Enters a space Internet connection with a double-arrow sym‐
8 Activates voice input bol in the status line.
9 Sets the written language % Online search is not available in all countries.
A Switches to numbers, special characters and Destination entry uses online map services. If the
symbols on-board search finds no suitable destinations or
B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters if you change countries, the online search is avail‐
# Enter the destination in 2. The entries can able.
be made in any order. For the destination you can enter an address, a
POI or a three-word address.
The following entries can be made, for example:
# Select country indicator 1.
R Town, street, house number
# Select the provider for the online service from
R Street, town
the countries list.
R Postcode
# Enter the destination in 2.
R POI name or POI category The search results are displayed.
R Contact name # Select the destination in list 3.

# Select a search result in list 3. The detailed view for the route is displayed.
# Calculate the route (/ page 203). or
 MBUX multimedia system 203

# Enter the destination in 2. Selecting route settings

The search results are displayed. # Select Z.
# Select the destination in list 3. # Select Advanced.
The detailed view for the route is displayed.
# Select Route.
# Select the route type.
Calculating a route and using settings for
route guidance # Take traffic information into consideration
with Dynamic route guidance r.
Requirements: # Selecting route options with Avoid options.
R The destination has been entered.
# Activate Alternative routes.
R The destination address is shown.
Alternative routes are calculated for every
R For the commuter route: you have created a route.
profile (/ page 197). # Activate Activate commuter route.
R The Allow destination suggestions option is If the requirements are met, the multimedia
switched on . system automatically detects that the vehicle
R The multimedia system has gathered suffi‐ is on a commuter route. Route guidance
cient data in order to show destination sug‐ begins without voice output.
gestions.
R Routes have been learned for these destina‐ Using map functions
tion suggestions.
Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
4 © 5 Navigation
Enlarging the map scale
# When the map is shown, tap twice quickly
with one finger on the media display.
or
# Move two fingers apart on the media display.

Reducing the map scale

# Tap with two fingers on the media display.

or
# Move two fingers together on the media dis‐

1 ¥ No route yet play.

¦ A route has been mapped Moving the map
# Select ¥. # Move one finger in any direction on the
The route to the destination is calculated. touchscreen.
Route guidance begins. # To reset the map to the current vehicle
or position: press \ briefly.
# Select ¦. Selecting map orientation
# Select Set as intermediate dest.. # Press the Ä compass symbol repeatedly
The destination address is set as the next on the map.
intermediate destination. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D
or heading up to 2D north up.
# Select Start new route guidance. Switching motorway information on or off
The destination address is set as the new
destination. The previous destination and the # Select Z.
intermediate destinations are deleted. Route # Activate or deactivate Motorway information.
guidance to the new destination begins.
204 MBUX multimedia system

Using services # Select Advanced.

Requirements:
# Select View.
R There is an Internet connection. # Select Map elements.
R Mercedes PRO connect or Mercedes me con‐ # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-
nect is available. TENTS category.
R You have set up a user account in the # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.
Mercedes PRO Portal or Mercedes me Portal. Current weather information is displayed on
R The vehicle is connected to a user account the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud
and you have accepted the conditions of use cover.
for the service. Parking service
Further information can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.pro or https:// & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
www.mercedes.me due to not observing the maximum per‐
R The service is available and has been activa‐ mitted access height
ted. If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi‐
Multimedia system: mum permitted access height for multi-storey
and underground car parks, the roof and
4 © 5 Navigation
other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.
Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traf‐ Vehicle occupants may be injured.
fic Information # Before entering a multi-storey car park

# Select Z. or underground car park, observe the

signposted entrance height.
# Activate Traffic.
# If the vehicle height is greater than the
# Select Advanced. access height, do not enter.
# Select View.
# Select Map elements. * NOTE Before selecting the parking option
# Switch on Traffic incidents, Free-flowing traf- The data is based on information provided by
fic and Delay. the respective service provider.
If traffic information has been received, then
Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the
traffic incidents such as roadworks, road
accuracy of the information provided relating
blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn‐
to the multi-storey car park/parking area.
ing messages are displayed.
# Always observe the local Information
The traffic delay is displayed for the current
and conditions.
route. Traffic delays lasting a period of one
minute or longer are taken into consideration.
% This service is not available in all countries.
Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X- # Tap on j on the map.
Communication # Select a parking option.
If hazard warnings are available these are shown The map shows the parking options in the
as symbols on the map. The display depends on vicinity.
the settings for the Traffic and Traffic incidents
options.
# Set the options.
If Traffic is switched off and Traffic incidents
is switched on, the symbols are shown on the
prospective route.
Displaying weather information and other
map contents
# Select Z.
 MBUX multimedia system 205

The following information is displayed (if avail‐ & WARNING Risk of an accident from oper‐
able): ating mobile communication equipment
R Destination address, distance from cur‐ while the vehicle is in motion
rent vehicle position and arrival time
Mobile communications devices distract the
R Information on the multi-storey car driver from the traffic situation. This could
park/car park, for example: also cause the driver to lose control of the
- Opening times vehicle.
- Parking charges # As the driver, only operate mobile com‐

- Current occupancy munications devices when the vehicle is

stationary.
- Maximum parking time
# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
- Maximum access height communications devices in the areas
The maximum access height shown by intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
the parking service does not replace rear passenger compartment.
the need for observation of the actual
circumstances. You must observe the legal requirements for the
R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, country in which you are currently driving when
coins, bank notes, cards) operating mobile communication equipment in
the vehicle.
R Details on parking tariffs
Bluetooth® connection:
R Number of available parking spaces
The menu view and the available functions in the
R Payment method (e.g. at the parking phone menu are partly dependent on the Blue‐
meter) tooth® profile of the mobile phone connected.
R Services/facilities at the parking option
If the mobile phone supports these Bluetooth®
R Telephone number profiles, the full range of features is available:
R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
Telephone - The mobile phone's contacts are automat‐
Telephony ically displayed on the multimedia system.
R MAP (Message Access Profile)
Notes on telephony
- The message functions of the mobile
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ phone can be used on the multimedia sys‐
ating integrated communication equip‐ tem.
ment while the vehicle is in motion Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functional‐
If you operate communication equipment ity can by used with any mobile device.
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you For information on the functionality of the mobile
could be distracted from the traffic situation. device to be connected, see the manufacturer's
This could also cause you to lose control of operating instructions.
the vehicle. Network connection:
# Only operate this equipment when the
In the following cases, calls may be interrupted
traffic situation permits.
while driving:
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
R there is insufficient network coverage in the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
area.
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary. R you switch to a transmitting/receiving station
in which no communication channel is free.
206 MBUX multimedia system

R the SIM card used is not compatible with the

network available
R a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into
the network with the second SIM card at the
same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD
Voice® for improved speech quality. A require‐
ment for this is that the mobile phone and the
mobile phone network provider of the person you
are calling support HD Voice®.
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may fluctuate.
Further information can be obtained from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Telephone menu overview

1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con‐ Telephony operating modes overview
nected mobile phone/the mobile phones Depending on the equipment, the following tele‐
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con‐ phone operating modes are available:
nected mobile phone/the mobile phones R One mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
(two phone mode) media system via Bluetooth® .
3 Battery status of the connected mobile
R Two mobile phones are connected with the
phone
multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone
4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
mode).
5 Options
- You can use all the functions of the multi‐
6 Device manager
media system with the mobile phone in
7 Messages the foreground.
8 Numerical pad - You can receive incoming calls and mes‐
9 Contact search sages with the mobile phone in the back‐
ground.
 MBUX multimedia system 207

You can interchange the mobile phone in smartphone integration, only one additional
the foreground and background. mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth®
with the multimedia system.
Connecting a mobile phone
The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte‐
Requirements: gration is only possible with an Internet connec‐
R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone tion. The appropriate application must be down‐
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐ loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone
tions). Integration. The mobile phone must be switched
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia on and connected to a USB port with the ç
system. symbol on the multimedia system using a suita‐
ble cable.
Multimedia system: Apps for Smartphone Integration
4 © 5 Phone
R Apple CarPlay®
Searching for a mobile phone R Android Auto
# Select í.
You can start Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto
# Select Connect new device. using the Apps menu.
Connecting a mobile phone Alternative: If an application is active via Smart‐
Authorisation follows using secure simple pairing. phone Integration (e.g. when music is being
# Select a mobile phone. played or route guidance is active), you can call
A code is displayed in the multimedia system up the active application using the | or z
and on the mobile phone. or % application buttons
# If both codes match, confirm the code on the You can end Smartphone Integration by discon‐
mobile phone. necting the connecting cable between the mobile
phone and multimedia system.
Functions in the Telephony menu % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
The functions available in the Telephony menu the connecting cable only when the vehicle is
include the following: stationary.
R Making calls, e.g.: When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®, cer‐
- R Accepting a call tain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile
phone. This enables you to get the best out of
- k End call selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is
- i Create conferen. call not directly accessible.
- Accepting or rejecting a waiting call The following system information is transmitted:
R Managing contacts, e.g.: R Software release of the multimedia system
- Downloading mobile phone contacts R System ID (anonymised)
- Editing the format of a contact's name The transfer of this data is used to optimise com‐
- Saving contacts in the vehicle munication between the vehicle and the mobile
R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: phone.
- Using the read-aloud function To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
mobile phone, a vehicle ID is randomly gener‐
- Dictating a new message
ated.
This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐
Overview of Smartphone Integration tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐
With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain media system is reset (/ page 200).
functions on your mobile phone via the multime‐
dia system display.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia
system. Also for use with two phone mode with
208 MBUX multimedia system

The following vehicle status data is transmitted: R Compass direction

R The transmission position engaged R Acceleration direction
R The distinction between parked, standstill, This data is only transferred while the navigation
rolling and driving system is active, in order to improve it (e.g. so it
R The day/night mode of the instrument cluster can continue functioning when in a tunnel).
The transfer of this data is used to alter how con‐
tent is displayed to correspond to the driving sit‐ Web browser overview
uation.
The web browser is launched on the home screen
The following position data is transmitted: after selecting Mercedes PRO & Apps or
R Coordinates Mercedes me & Apps via z Browser.
R Speed

1 URL entry
2 Bookmarks
3 Web page, back
4 Web page, forwards
5 To refresh/stop
6 Options
% Some functions are country-dependent.
% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle
is in motion.

Radio and media

Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function

Ì Play Select to start or continue playback.

Ë Pause Select to pause the playback.

 MBUX multimedia system 209

Symbol Designation Function

: Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the

active playlist.
R Select once: the active playlist is
repeated.
R Select twice: the current track is
repeated.
R Select three times: the function is
deactivated.
9 Random playback Select to play the tracks in random order.

û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previ‐

ous track.
f Options Select to show additional options.

5 Categories Select to show or search through available

categories (e.g. playback lists, albums,
artists, etc.).
è Search Select to search in the active menu. You
can search for artists or genres, for exam‐
ple.
Z Settings Select to make settings.

© Home Select to return to the home screen.

G Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available Multimedia system:

in the Media menu: 4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5 ª
R Connect external data carriers to the multi‐ Using Bluetooth® Audio, you can play back music
media system (e.g. via USB or Bluetooth®) files via the MBUX multimedia system from an
R Playback of audio or video files external data storage medium, e.g. your smart‐
phone.
# To play back audio files using the multimedia
Authorising Bluetooth® audio equipment for
system, authorise the external data storage
media playback
medium on the MBUX multimedia system.
Requirements:
Authorising a new Bluetooth® audio device
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment . # Select Connect new device.
R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® # Select an audio device.
audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on
the multimedia system and on the mobile
R The audio equipment is "visible" for other
phone.
devices.
# If the codes are identical, confirm on the
audio equipment.
210 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Only as Bluetooth audio device.

The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected
with the multimedia system.
Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth®
audio equipment
# Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the
list.
The connection is established.

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol Designation Function

© Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

û/ü Skip forwards/ Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
back
Z Settings Select to show further options. Settings can be made to
the following additional functions, for example:
R Navigation and traffic announcements
R Frequency fix function
R Radio additional text
R Emergency warnings

The setting options are country-dependent.

2 Full screen Select to switch to the DAB slide show.
This function is not available in all countries.
8 Silent function Select to switch off the sound.

f Store radio sta‐ Select to save a station in the presets.

tions
4 Station list Select to display the station list.

ª Search Select to browse the active menu, for example, by artist

or genre.

Additional functions of TuneIn radio

% A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.
 MBUX multimedia system 211

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional set‐

tings are available in the TuneIn
Radio menu:
R Selecting stream
R Logging on to or out of the
TuneIn account
ß Favourites Select during playback to save
the station currently set as a
favourite.
6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue
playback.
5 To browse Select to choose a category
and then a radio station.

Depending on the frequency band selected, dif‐

ferent functions are available to you.
Select the desired frequency band in the radio
menu head runner.

Sound settings
Overview of functions in the Sound menu
The sound system is available for all functions in
the radio and media modes. The settings, for
example for the equaliser, effect the playback of
all media sources.
The following functions are available:
R Equaliser:
- Treble, mid-range and bass
R Balance and fader
R Volume:
- Automatic volume adjustment
212 Transporting

Notes on loading guidelines & WARNING Risk of accident due to

exceeding the permissible wheel/axle
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning loads or the gross vehicle weight
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust The driving characteristics, as well as steering
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust and braking, may be greatly impaired. Over‐
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐ loaded tyres may overheat and burst as a
gate is open when the engine is running, consequence.
especially if the vehicle is in motion. # When transporting a load, always
# Always switch off the engine before observe the permissible wheel loads,
opening the tailgate. axle loads and the maximum permissi‐
# Never drive with the tailgate open. ble gross mass for the vehicle (including
occupants).
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
objects in the vehicle & WARNING Risk of injury if unsuitable
climbing aids are used
When objects are unsecured or inadequately
secured, they can slip, tip over or be thrown In the event that you use openings in the
about, striking vehicle occupants. bodywork or attachments as steps, you
This also applies to: could:
R Slip and/or fall.
R luggage or loads
R Damage the vehicle and thus slip and fall.
R seats which have been removed and are
being transported in the vehicle in an # Always use non-slip, stable climbing
exceptional case aids, e.g. a suitable ladder.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt * NOTE Damage caused by the use of
changes in direction. openings in the bodywork or detachable
# Always stow objects in such a way that part as a step
they cannot be tossed about. Using the lower guide of the sliding door (car‐
# Before travelling, secure objects, lug‐ riage) as a step can damage the trim and/or
gage or load to prevent them slipping or mechanism of the sliding door.
tipping over. # Do not use the guide of the sliding door
# When a seat is removed, keep it prefera‐ (carriage) as a step.
bly outside the vehicle.
If you are using a roof luggage rack, please note
the maximum roof load and the maximum load
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
capacity of the roof luggage rack (/ page 278).
rectly positioned load
The handling characteristics of your vehicle are
The centre of gravity of the load can be too dependent on the load distribution.
high and/or too far towards the rear.
Therefore, please observe the following notes
This can significantly impair handling as well when loading:
as steering and braking characteristics.
R the load must not protrude above the upper
# Always make sure that the centre of
edge of the seat backrests.
gravity of the load is between the axles
and as low as possible near the rear R if possible, always transport the load in the
axle. load compartment.
R fasten the load to the tie-down eyes and dis‐
tribute the load evenly among them.
 Transporting 213

R if available, use a load protection net to After loading

secure the load (/ page 216). Observe the following after loading the vehicle:
R use tie-down eyes and fastening components
R Check that the luggage and/or load is secure
which are suitable for the weight and size of before every journey and at regular intervals
the load. on long trips.
Observe the operating instructions of the manu‐ R Close all doors and the tailgate.
facturer when using load securing aids or lashing R Adjust the range of the headlamps according
material and the notes on their expiration dates. to the vehicle load (/ page 106).
In the following cases, load securing aids or lash‐ R Adjust the tyre pressure according to the
ing materials are worn out, should not be used vehicle load (/ page 250).
and must be replaced:
R Adapt your driving style according to the vehi‐
R there is missing or illegible identification cle load.
R there is cord breakage or damage to load-
bearing seams or other traces of cracking
Load distribution
R there are cuts, holes, deformations, crushed
areas or other damage
* NOTE Damage to the floor covering due
R there is damage to clamping elements or fas‐ to uneven loading
teners
Excessive point loading on the load compart‐
If the luggage compartment floor or loading area ment floor or on the load area can negatively
are damaged in the event of an accident, have affect the driving characteristics and could
the tie-down eyes and the lashing material damage the floor covering.
checked at a specialist workshop. # Distribute the load evenly. When doing
Even if you adhere to all the loading guidelines, so, ensure that the overall centre of
an increased load increases the risk of injury in gravity of the load is always as low and
the event of an accident. close to the centre as possible and
between the axles near the rear axle.
Before loading
Check and, when necessary, adjust the tyre pres‐
Observe the following notes:
sure (/ page 250).
R Always transport loads in the load compart‐
When loading ment and with the seat backrests folded up
Observe the following when loading the vehicle: and properly locked in position.
R Never exceed the permissible axle load or the R Always place the load against the front or rear
vehicle's permissible gross mass. seat backrests.
The vehicle's kerb weight is increased if R Move large and heavy loads as far as possible
accessories or optional equipment are fitted. towards the front of the vehicle in the direc‐
This reduces the maximum payload. tion of travel, against the front or rear seats.
Stow loads flush with the rear or front seats.
R Observe the notes on load distribution
(/ page 213). R Additionally secure the load with suitable load
securing aids or lashing material.
R Observe the notes on load securing
(/ page 214) and the legal requirements of R The load must not protrude above the upper
the country in which you are currently driving. edge of the seat backrests.
R Observe the information on the carrier sys‐ R Transport loads behind seats that are not
tems (/ page 219). occupied.
R If the rear bench seat is not occupied, insert
the seat belts crosswise into the seat belt
buckle of the opposite seat belt.
214 Transporting

Load compartment variants lation and any ensuing consequences.

You can vary the load compartment according to Observe country-specific laws.
your transportation requirements as follows: Make sure that the load is secure before every
R by folding the rear seat backrests or rear journey and at regular intervals during a long
bench seat backrests forward to the table journey. Adjust the load securing as necessary.
position Information on how to secure loads correctly can
R by folding the rear seats forwards
be obtained from the manufacturers of the load
securing aids or lashing material for load secur‐
R by folding the rear bench seat forwards ing, for example.
R by removing the rear seats and/or the rear Also observe the notes on loading guidelines
bench seat (/ page 212).
R by removing the seat/bunk combination When securing loads, observe the following:
R by folding up or removing the bed extension R Fill spaces between the load and the load
of the seat/bunk combination compartment walls or wheel wells. For this
You will find information about the rear seats and purpose, use rigid load securing aids, such as
the rear bench seat in the "Seats" section chocks, wooden fixings or padding.
(/ page 74). R Attach secured and stabilised loads in all
directions.
Use the lashing points or the tie-down eyes
Securing loads
and guide rails in the rear compartment.
Notes on load securing
Only use lashing materials, such as lashing
nets and lashing straps, which have been tes‐
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle if the maxi‐ ted in accordance with current standards
mum loading capacity of the lashing (e.g. DIN EN). Always use the lashing points
points is exceeded closest to the load and pad sharp edges.
If you combine various lashing points to % You can obtain lashing material tested in
secure a load, always take the maximum load‐ accordance with current standards (e.g.
ing capacity of the weakest lashing point into DIN EN) from a specialist company or from a
account. qualified specialist workshop.
During maximum full-stop braking, forces may
act which can multiply the weight of the load. Note on the lashing points and tie-down eyes
on the load compartment floor for touring
# Always use several lashing points to dis‐
motorcycles (vehicle category M1)
tribute and spread the load.
# Distribute the load on the lashing points
evenly.

Observe the information relating to the maximum

loading capacity of the lashing points
(/ page 278).
As the driver, you are responsible for ensuring the
following:
R The load is secured against slipping, tipping,
rolling or falling off.
Take usual traffic conditions as well as swerv‐
ing or full brake application and bad roads
into account.
R The applicable requirements and guidelines
relating to load-securing practices are met. Example: lashing angle for optimal load security
If this is not the case, this may constitute a d Vertical to the load compartment floor
punishable offence, depending on local legis‐ e Load compartment floor
 Transporting 215

1 Direction of pull with 75° lashing angle

2 Direction of pull with 45° lashing angle
The lashing angle is the angle formed between
the load compartment floor and the lashing mate‐
rial. For optimum load securing in accordance
with standard ISO 27955 the lashing angle must
be between 45° 2 and 75° 1. The maximum
nominal tensile load of 350 daN for the tie-down
eyes in the load compartment floor or in the
guide rails may not be exceeded.

Overview of lashing points

Example: guide rails

Tie-down eyes for guide rails

Fitting
Example: variable lashing points in the guide rails # Turn metal retaining ring 3 so that it is paral‐
1 Guide rails lel to the long axis of tie-down eye 2 as illus‐
2 Tie-down eye trated.
Do not attempt to modify or repair the lashing The locking pin can only be pushed down suf‐
points, tie-down eyes or lashing materials. Read ficiently and allow the tie-down eye to be fit‐
the information on qualified specialist workshops ted, moved or removed, if the metal retaining
(/ page 22). ring is parallel to the long axis of the tie-down
eye.
# Hold tie-down eye 2 between your forefinger
Fitting and removing tie-down eyes and middle finger as illustrated, and place
your thumb through metal retaining ring 3
& WARNING Risk of injury due to incor‐ and on the central pressure point.
rectly installed tie-down eyes
# Use your thumb to push the locking pin down
If the tie-down eyes are not correctly instal‐ as far as it will go.
led, they can slip or tear out. # Push tie-down eye 2 near the load using the
This may cause objects, luggage or the load notches on guide rail 1, and move it approx‐
to slip, tip over or be thrown about the vehicle imately 12 mm.
interior, striking vehicle occupants. # Remove your thumb from the pressure point
# Make sure that the tie-down eyes are and slide tie-down eye 2 until it engages.
correctly installed and do not move.

# Observe the notes on the loading guidelines

and on securing loads (/ page 212).
216 Transporting

# Turn metal retaining ring 3 so that it is per‐ The load protection net partitions the load com‐
pendicular to the long axis of tie-down eye partment. It protects vehicle occupants from light
2. objects and/or luggage slipping or tipping over.
The locking pin cannot be pushed down far if You can install the load protection net at an angle
the metal retaining ring is perpendicular to behind the front seats or behind the first row of
the long axis of the tie-down eye. This pre‐ rear seats.
vents the tie-down eye from being released
# Observe the notes on securing loads
unintentionally, e.g. if the tie-down eye is
stepped on. (/ page 214).
# Check that tie-down eye 2 is seated cor‐
rectly.
The tie-down eye cannot be moved.
Removing
# Turn metal retaining ring 3 so that it is paral‐
lel to the long axis of tie-down eye 2.
# Grip tie-down eye 2 as described above
under fitting and use your thumb to push the
locking pin down as far as it will go.
# Slide tie-down eye 2 and pull it up and out
through the notch of guide rail 1.

Load securing aid

Removing/fitting a load protection net Upper retainer

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to

objects being poorly secured
The load protection net alone cannot restrain
or secure heavy objects, luggage or heavy
loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load during
sudden changes in direction, braking or in the
event of an accident.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown about the vehi‐
cle.
# Secure objects, luggage or loads against
slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using
lashing material, even when you are
Floor anchorage (example: secured tie-down eye)
using the load protection net.
Fitting
& WARNING Risk of injury due to sitting # Remove the luggage compartment partition if
behind a load protection net necessary (/ page 217).
Vehicle occupants can be pressed against the # Clip the load protection net into upper retain‐
load protection net. There is a risk of injury! ers 1 in such a way that tensioning straps
# Never allow vehicle occupants to sit
3 face the rear of the vehicle.
behind the load protection net. # Fit tie-down eyes 5 into the guide rails close
to the rear seat legs (/ page 215). Position
them at least 5 cm from the seat legs to allow
subsequent movement of the rear seat.
 Transporting 217

# Check that tie-down eyes 5 are seated cor‐ This also applies to:
rectly.
R luggage or loads
Tie-down eyes 5 should not move.
R seats which have been removed and are
# Clip hooks 4 on tensioning straps 3 into
tie-down eyes 5. being transported in the vehicle in an
exceptional case
# Fold tensioning element 2 up.
# Pull the loose end of tensioning straps 3 There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
down in the direction of the arrow until ten‐ event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt
sioning straps 3 are tight. changes in direction.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
# Fold tensioning element 2 down to achieve
the final tension on the straps. they cannot be tossed about.
# Before travelling, secure objects, lug‐
# If necessary, fit the luggage compartment
partition (/ page 217). gage or load to prevent them slipping or
tipping over.
# After travelling a short distance, check that
# When a seat is removed, keep it prefera‐
the load protection net is taut, and retighten
it if necessary. bly outside the vehicle.

Removing & WARNING Risk of accident or injury

# Remove the luggage compartment partition if when the luggage compartment partition
necessary (/ page 217). is not locked in position
# Fold tensioning element 2 up. The luggage compartment partition can come
Tensioning straps 3 are slack. loose when driving and be thrown about the
# Unclip hooks 4 of tensioning straps 3 from vehicle interior.
tie-down eyes 5 at the bottom. # Fit the luggage compartment partition
# Unclip the load protection net from upper as described.
retainers 1. # After fitting the luggage compartment
# When required, remove tie-down eyes 5 partition, always make sure that the lug‐
(/ page 215). gage compartment partition is locked
and folded down.
# If necessary, fit the luggage compartment
partition (/ page 217).
# Roll up the load protection net and fasten it, * NOTE Damage to the luggage compart‐
still rolled up, using the Velcro fasteners. ment partition due to heavy loads

Adjusting the front seat with the load protec‐ If the luggage compartment partition is loa‐
ded with too much weight, the fixture points
tion net fitted
and the luggage compartment partition may
# Fold tensioning element 2 on straps 3 be damaged.
upwards. # Do not load more than 50 kg on the lug‐
The load protection net slackens. gage compartment partition.
# Correctly adjust the front seat.
# Re-tension the load protection net. The luggage compartment partition is only
secured correctly when both levers are locked.
# Comply with the loading guidelines
Using the luggage compartment partition
(/ page 212).
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
objects in the vehicle
When objects are unsecured or inadequately
secured, they can slip, tip over or be thrown
about, striking vehicle occupants.
218 Transporting

Opening the stowage compartments # Fold up luggage compartment partition 1.

Make sure that luggage compartment partition
1 is always folded down when the vehicle is
moving.
Folding down the luggage compartment parti‐
tion

# Pull handle 2 in the direction of the arrow.

Cover 1 folds upwards in the middle. # Fold down luggage compartment partition 1
until it engages.
# Slide cover 1 to the stop in the direction of
Luggage compartment partition 1 is locked.
the arrow.
Removing the luggage compartment partition
Closing the stowage compartments

# Pull cover 1 on handle 2 in the direction of

the arrow.
# Push cover 1 down in the middle until it is
fully closed.
Folding up the luggage compartment parti‐ # Fold up luggage compartment partition 1.
tion to an angle of 70° # Swing levers 2 inwards.
Luggage compartment partition 1 is
released.
# Remove luggage compartment partition 1.

# Pull handle 2 in the direction of the arrow.

Luggage compartment partition 1 is
released.
 Transporting 219

Fitting the luggage compartment partition * NOTE Damage due to exceeding the
maximum permissible roof load
If the weight of the roof luggage, including the
roof luggage rack, exceeds the maximum per‐
missible roof load, this can cause damage to
the vehicle.
# Do not exceed the maximum permissi‐
ble roof load.
# Arrange the supporting feet of the roof
luggage rack at an even distance from
each other.
# Install the basic carrier bars for rail in
front of and behind the mid-section sup‐
port.

If possible, fit luggage compartment partition 1 * NOTE Damage to the threaded holes of
with the help of another person. the roof luggage rack due to an exces‐
# Place luggage compartment partition 1 into sively high tightening torque
the vehicle at an angle. An excessively high tightening torque or an
# Rotate luggage compartment partition 1 in insufficient screw-in depth can cause damage
the vehicle and insert it into the guide rails. to the thread of the roof luggage rack's threa‐
ded holes.
The guide rails have triangular markings at the # Tighten the screws to a maximum tor‐
place to be inserted which must be at the same que of 10 Nm.
height as levers 2.
# Comply with the minimum screw pene‐
# Swing levers 2 outwards. tration of four revolutions in the thread.
Luggage compartment partition 1 is locked.
# Fold luggage compartment partition 1
Use roof and rear luggage racks that have
been approved or recommended for
down.
Mercedes-Benz. These help to prevent vehicle
damage.
Carrier systems
You can install a roof luggage rack on the roof
Notes on carrier systems and, for example, a rear bicycle rack on the tail‐
gate.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
Install the cover caps of the securing thread after
exceeding the maximum roof load
removing the roof luggage rack.
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual If you have installed a rear luggage rack on the
driving characteristics as well as the steering tailgate, the additional weight restricts the assis‐
and braking characteristics alter. tance offered by the pneumatic springs when you
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the open the tailgate. You will then need more force
driving characteristics, as well as steering and to open the tailgate. At low outside temperatures
braking, will be greatly impaired. below freezing point, you should provide addi‐
# Never exceed the maximum roof load tional support for the tailgate after opening it in
and adjust your driving style. order to prevent it from lowering unintentionally.

You can find information on the maximum roof

load under "Lashing points and carrier systems"
(/ page 278).
220 Maintenance and care

Notes on maintenance on the remaining time or distance before the next

service due date.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmen‐ Under arduous operating conditions or if the vehi‐
tally pollution from disposal not in an cle is subjected to increased loads, the ASSYST
environmentally responsible manner PLUS service interval display may shorten the
service interval.
If, for operating reasons, individual mainte‐
nance work is carried out under your own You can obtain further information concerning
direction, the environmental protection the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified spe‐
requirements must be observed. When dis‐ cialist workshop.
posing of operating fluids, e.g. engine oil, the
legal requirements must be observed. This Displaying the service due date
also affects all parts that have come into con‐
tact with operating fluids, e.g. filters. Requirements
# Dispose of empty containers, cleaning
R The ignition is switched on.
cloths and care products in an environ‐ On-board computer:
mentally responsible manner. 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS
# Follow the instructions for use of care
The next service due date is displayed.
products.
# Do not allow the engine to run longer
# To exit the display: press the a or %
than necessary when stationary. steering-wheel button.

When working on the vehicle, comply with all Information on regular maintenance work
safety regulations, such as the operating instruc‐
tions, regulations concerning hazardous materi‐ * NOTE Premature wear through failure to
als, environmental protection measures, work observe service due dates
safety and accident prevention regulations.
Maintenance work which is not carried out at
You must secure the vehicle on jack stands of the right time or incompletely can lead to
sufficient load capacity if work is being carried increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
out underneath the vehicle.
# Adhere to the prescribed service inter‐
Please also refer to the notes about qualified spe‐ vals.
cialist workshops (/ page 22).
# Always have the prescribed mainte‐
The scope and regularity of the inspection and nance work carried out at a qualified
maintenance work primarily depend on the often specialist workshop.
diverse operating conditions.
You can obtain further information concerning
the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified spe‐ Notes on special service requirements
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐
mal vehicle use. Maintenance work will need to
You will find information about operating fluids be performed more often than prescribed if the
approved for Mercedes-Benz and capacities vehicle is operated under arduous operating con‐
under "Operating Fluids and Capacities" ditions or increased loads.
(/ page 269).
Arduous operating conditions include:
Observe the information under "Mercedes-Benz
R regular city driving with frequent intermediate
GenuineParts" (/ page 16).
stops
R frequent short-distance driving
Service interval display R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or
Service interval display function on poor road surfaces
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the
instrument cluster display provides information
 Maintenance and care 221

R when the engine is often left idling for long # Never touch components of the ignition
periods system or the fuel injection system
R operation in particularly dusty conditions when the ignition is switched on.
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently
used The following are examples of live components:
In these or similar operating conditions, have the R ignition coils
air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, R spark plug connectors
replaced more frequently. R injectors
If the vehicle is subjected to increased loads, the
tyres must be checked more frequently. You can & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
obtain further information at a qualified specialist ponent parts in the engine compartment
workshop.
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
Non-operational times with the battery dis‐ cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
connected # Allow the engine to cool down and only

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can touch component parts described in the
calculate the service due date only when the bat‐ following.
tery is connected.
# Display and note down the service due date * NOTE Damage to bonnet or windscreen
on the instrument cluster before disconnect‐ wipers when opening the bonnet
ing the battery (/ page 220). If the windscreen wipers have been folded
back from the windscreen when the bonnet is
opened, the windscreen wipers or the bonnet
Engine compartment
may be damaged.
Opening and closing the bonnet # Ensure that the windscreen wipers have
not been folded back from the wind‐
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving screen.
with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view. Opening the bonnet
# Never release the bonnet when driving.

# Before every trip, ensure that the engine

bonnet is locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

when opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end
position.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
engine bonnet's range of movement.
# Do not open or close the bonnet if there
is a person in the bonnet's range of
movement.

& WARNING Risk of injury from touching # Pull handle 1 to release the bonnet.
components under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection sys‐
tem work under high voltage. You could
receive an electric shock.
222 Maintenance and care

Engine oil
Checking engine oil level with on-board com‐
puter (engine without oil dipstick)
Requirements:
R The engine oil level is determined during driv‐
ing.
R The engine is at normal operating tempera‐
ture.
R The vehicle is level during the measuring
process.
R The bonnet is not open.

Depending on the driving profile, the oil level can

be displayed only after a driving time of up to
# Reach into the gap, push lever 2 of the bon‐ 30 minutes and only when the ignition is
net catch to the left and lift the bonnet. switched on.
When the bonnet has opened around 40 cm, On-board computer:
it will be automatically opened and held by
4 Service 5 Engine oil level
the gas pressure spring dampers.
Closing the bonnet One of the following messages appears on
the display of the on-board computer:
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable Engine oil level Measurement in progress...
materials in the engine compartment or # Measurement of the oil level not yet possible.
on the exhaust system Repeat the query after driving for a maximum
Flammable materials may ignite. of 30 minutes.
# Ensure that there are no flammable Engine oil level OK
external materials in the engine com‐
The bar for displaying the oil level on the display
partment or on the exhaust system
is green and is between "min" and "max".
after maintenance work has been car‐
ried out. # Do not top up oil. The engine oil level is cor‐
rect.
* NOTE Damage to the bonnet due to Engine oil level Warm up engine
pressing it closed manually
# Warm up the engine to operating tempera‐
Pushing the bonnet closed with your hands ture.
could damage it.
# To close the bonnet, let it drop from the Engine oil level Correct measurement only if vehi-
specified height. cle is on level ground
# Park the vehicle on a level surface.
# Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height
of approximately 30 cm, applying a little force Engine oil level Add 1,0 l
as you let it go. The bar for displaying the oil level on the display
# If the bonnet remains slightly open, open it is orange and is below "min".
again and let it fall, applying slightly more The oil level is too low.
force as you let it go, until it engages. # Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 224).

Engine oil level Reduce oil level

The bar for displaying the oil level on the display
is orange and is above "max".
The oil level is too high.
 Maintenance and care 223

# Siphon off any excess engine oil that has # Switch on the ignition.
been added. To do so, consult a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop. Waiting period for engine oil level not observed
# If the engine is at normal operating tempera‐
For engine oil level turn on ignition ture, repeat the engine oil measurement after
# Switch the ignition on to check the engine oil approximately five minutes.
level. # If the engine is not at normal operating tem‐
perature, repeat the engine oil measurement
Engine oil level System inoperative after approximately 30 minutes.
The fill level sensor is defective or not plugged in.
# Have the oil level display checked at a quali‐ Engine oil level Not with the engine running
fied specialist workshop. # Switch off the engine and, when it is at nor‐
mal operating temperature, wait approx‐
Engine oil level System currently unavail. imately five minutes before measuring the
# Close the bonnet. engine oil level.
Checking engine oil level with on-board com‐ Engine oil level System inoperative
puter (engine with oil dipstick) The engine oil level measurement is malfunction‐
Requirements: ing.
R The vehicle is level during the measuring # Check the oil level with the oil dipstick
process. (/ page 223).
R The engine is switched off at normal operat‐ # Have the oil level display checked at a quali‐
ing temperature. fied specialist workshop.
R A waiting period of five minutes is observed. Checking the engine oil level with an oil dip‐
R The ignition is switched on. stick
To check the engine oil level with the on-board & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
computer, the engine must have a fill level sen‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
sor. If not, the engine oil level can be checked
only with the oil dipstick (/ page 223). Certain component parts in the engine com‐
On-board computer: partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
4 Service 5 Engine oil level
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only
The following messages may appear on the touch component parts described in the
display of the on-board computer: following.
Engine oil level OK
# Do not top up oil. The engine oil becomes dirty during operation,
loses quality and also gradually loses volume.
Engine oil level Add 1,0 l Check the oil level regularly and top up the oil or
have it changed if necessary.
# Add the specified quantity of oil
(/ page 224). Regularly check the fluid level and the major
assemblies for leaks. If you detect fluid loss, for
# Repeat the engine oil measurement after a
example, oil drops on the vehicle parking space,
few minutes.
consult a qualified specialist workshop as quickly
as possible.
Engine oil level Reduce oil level
# Only check the oil level when the engine is at
The oil level is too high.
normal operating temperature.
# Siphon off any excess engine oil that has
been added. To do so, consult a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.

For engine oil level turn on ignition

224 Maintenance and care

Topping up the engine oil

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from

engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it
may ignite.
# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening.
# Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐
oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐
nent parts before starting the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐

Oil dipstick and engine oil filler opening (example: ponent parts in the engine compartment
petrol engine) Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.

* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too

much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter.
# Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Engine damage due to use of addi‐

Oil dipstick and engine oil filler opening (example: tives in the engine oil
diesel engine)
The use of additional additives in the engine
# Pull oil dipstick 1 out of the dipstick tube. oil can damage the engine.
# Wipe the oil dipstick 1 using a lint-free # Do not use any additional additives in
cloth. the engine oil.
# Insert the oil dipstick 1 back into the guide
tube as far as it will go and pull it out again. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
If the level is between MIN mark 3 and MAX damage due to hydraulic fluid level spill‐
mark 2, the oil level is adequate. ages while topping up
# If the oil level has dropped to or below mini‐
If fluid spills onto soil, the environment will be
mum mark 3, open cap 4 and top up the damaged.
engine oil (/ page 224).
# Make sure that no fluid spills while top‐
The difference in quantity between marks 2 and ping up.
3 depends on the engine:
R Diesel engines, about 2 l
R Petrol engines about 1.5 litres
 Maintenance and care 225

# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out

next to the filler opening.
# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from
component parts before starting the
vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot

coolant
If you open the cap, you could be scalded.
# Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap.
# When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses.
# Open the cap slowly to release pres‐
Example: engine oil filler opening
sure.
# Observe the information regarding approved
engine oil under "Operating fluids and capaci‐ Only check and top up the coolant level when the
ties" (/ page 273). vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the
# Unscrew and remove the cap 1. engine has cooled down. The coolant tempera‐
ture must be below 50°C.
# Top up engine oil.
# Fit the cap 1 on the filler opening and & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
tighten. ponent parts in the engine compartment
When doing so, make sure that the cap
engages correctly. Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
# If present, check the oil level using the oil dip‐ cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
stick (/ page 223).
# Allow the engine to cool down and only
# In the case of vehicles without an oil dipstick, touch component parts described in the
check the oil level with the on-board com‐ following.
puter after the next journey (/ page 222).
It is necessary to run the engine for an extended Coolant contains glycol and is therefore poison‐
period after each oil top up to correctly detect ous.
the oil level. Fill level changes during oil top ups # Observe the information under "Operating flu‐
may not be immediately visible. Depending on the ids and capacities" (/ page 274).
driving profile, the new oil level can only be dis‐
played after a driving time of up to 60 minutes. * NOTE Paintwork damage due to coolant
If necessary, only top up the quantity of oil shown If coolant gets on painted surfaces, the paint‐
in the instrument cluster display and check the work can be damaged.
oil level again after the next journey.
# Add coolant carefully.

# Remove spilled coolant.

Checking/topping up the coolant
Regularly check the engine cooling system and
& WARNING Risk of fire‑ and injury from the heating system for leaks. If there is a loss of
antifreeze coolant, have the cause determined and rectified
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com‐ in a qualified specialist workshop without delay.
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it
may ignite.
# Allow the engine to cool down before
you top up the antifreeze.
226 Maintenance and care

Filling up the windscreen washer system

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from

windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
flammable.
# Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and
the creation of sparks when using wind‐
screen washer concentrate.

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐

ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
Example: cap and coolant expansion reservoir cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
Checking the coolant level # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
# Slowly turn the cap 1 of the coolant expan‐
following.
sion reservoir 2 half a turn anti-clockwise
and allow overpressure to escape.
# Turn cap 1 further and remove it.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting
due to unsuitable windscreen washer
The coolant level is correct in the following cases: fluid
R up to marker bar 3 when the engine is cold
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may
R if the engine is warm, up to 1.5 cm over damage the plastic surface of the exterior
marker bar 3 lighting.
Topping up the coolant # Only use windscreen washer fluids that

Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz to are also suitable for use on plastic sur‐
avoid damaging the engine cooling system. faces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐
Fit.
# Refer to the information on coolant
(/ page 274). Topping up the washer fluid
# Refill the coolant up to the marker bar 3 in
the filler opening of the coolant expansion
reservoir 2.
# Replace cap 1 and tighten in a clockwise
direction.
# Start the engine.

# Set the temperature in the vehicle interior to

the maximum output on the control panel of
the climate control.
# After about five minutes, switch off the
engine again and allow it to cool down.
# Check the coolant level again and top up the
coolant if necessary.

Washer fluid reservoir (example)

# Observe the notes on windshield cleaning
agents (/ page 275).
 Maintenance and care 227

# Pull cap 1 upwards by the tab. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐
# Top up the washer fluid. lowing before using an automatic car wash:
# Push cap 1 onto the filler opening until it R Active Brake Assist is deactivated.
audibly engages. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva‐
ted.
R the HOLD function is switched off.
Cleaning and care
R the side windows and roof are completely
Notes on washing the vehicle in an automatic
closed.
car wash
R the outside mirrors are folded in and an addi‐
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to tional antenna is removed, if present.
reduced braking power after washing the R the climate control blower is switched off.
vehicle R the windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing If the vehicle is very dirty, wash off excess dirt
the vehicle. before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car
# After the vehicle has been washed, wash.
brake carefully while paying attention to After leaving the car wash, pay attention to the
the traffic conditions until braking
following:
power has been fully restored.
R the outside mirrors are fully folded out again
and an additional antenna is mounted again.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to auto‐
matic braking R wax residues on the windscreen and wiper
rubbers are removed to prevent smearing and
When the following functions are activated, reduce wiper noise.
the vehicle brakes automatically in certain sit‐
uations: Remove wax residues from the camera lens in
vehicles with a reversing camera (/ page 229).
R Active Brake Assist
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Notes on use of a high-pressure cleaner
R HOLD function

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate & WARNING Risk of an accident when
these systems in the following or similar sit‐ using high-pressure cleaners with round-
uations: spray nozzles
# when towing The water jet can cause externally invisible
# in a car wash damage.
Components damaged in this way may unex‐
* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car pectedly fail.
wash # Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with
round-spray nozzles.
# Before driving into a car wash make
# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts
sure that the car wash is suitable for the
vehicle dimensions. replaced immediately.
# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐
ance between the underbody and the * NOTE Damage to component parts due
guide rails of the car wash. to improper high-pressure cleaning
# Ensure that the clearance width of the Components can be damaged if the distance
car wash, in particular the width of the of the high-pressure nozzle is too small.
guide rails, is sufficient. # Maintain a minimum distance of about
30 cm between the high-pressure noz‐
zle and car parts.
228 Maintenance and care

# Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with R use preservative agents in the

a round-spray nozzle. engine after washing the engine.
# Keep the water jet moving constantly R protect the belt drive from preserva‐
while cleaning. tion agents.
# Do not clean the following components
with the high-pressure cleaner:
R electrical components
Washing the vehicle by hand
R plug connectors Observe the legal requirements, for example in
R reversing camera
many countries washing by hand is only allowed
at specially designated wash bays.
R drivetrain
# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water and a
R seals soft car sponge. When doing so, do not
R hoses expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. a Mercedes-
* NOTE Damage caused by the use of a Benz approved car shampoo.
high-pressure cleaner in the vehicle inte‐ # Carefully spray the vehicle with water and dry
rior off with a leather cloth. Do not point the
The pressurised water created by the high- water jet directly into the air inlet grille.
pressure cleaner and the associated spray When operating the vehicle in winter, remove all
could cause considerable damage to the vehi‐ traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon
cle. as possible.
# Never use a high-pressure cleaner in the
vehicle interior. Notes on care of paint and matt finish

* NOTE Damage to the emissions control * NOTE Paintwork damage and corrosion
system due to improper cleaning due to inadequate care
Cleaning the system when it is warm or the Failure to promptly and thoroughly remove
direct effect of water jets in the exhaust pipe dirt from bird droppings or other residue
can damage the emissions control system. could result in paintwork damage and corro‐
# Clean the system only when it is cold. sion at a later date.
# Do not direct the water jet into the # Clean dirt off paint and matt finish thor‐
exhaust pipe. oughly and as soon as possible.

Washing the engine Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid
paintwork damage.
* NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to Paint
washing the engine
R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
# To prevent damage and malfunctions of then wash off.
the engine, observe the following R Bird droppings: soak with water and then
points: wash off.
R when using high-pressure or steam
R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by
cleaners, do not point the water jet
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro‐
directly at electrical components
leum ether or lighter fluid.
and the end of electric cables.
R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a moist
R make sure that no water enters the
cloth and clean water.
vent and ventilation openings.
R Tar stains: use tar remover.
R Wax: use silicone remover.
 Maintenance and care 229

R Do not affix stickers, films or similar. supervise children especially closely in

R Remove dirt as soon as possible. this area.
Matt finish # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
R Only use care products approved for touching them.
Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy * NOTE Damage caused by the use of
wheels. openings in the bodywork or detachable
part as a step
R Use only automatic car washes that meet cur‐
rent technological standards. Using the lower guide of the sliding door (car‐
R Do not use a wash program that ends with a riage) as a step can damage the trim and/or
hot wax treatment in automatic car washes. mechanism of the sliding door.
# Do not use the guide of the sliding door
R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish‐
ing products, or gloss preservers, e.g. wax. (carriage) as a step.
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at
% Information on suitable cleaning agents or
a qualified specialist workshop. cleaning cloths can be obtained from a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
Notes on the care of vehicle parts To prevent damage to the vehicle, observe the
notes for cleaning and care of the following car
& WARNING Risk of injury if unsuitable parts:
climbing aids are used
Wheels and rims
In the event that you use openings in the R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaner.
bodywork or attachments as steps, you R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to
could: remove brake dust. Otherwise, wheel bolts
R Slip and/or fall. and brake components could be damaged.
R Damage the vehicle and thus slip and fall. R To avoid corrosion of brake discs and brake‐
pads, drive for a few minutes after cleaning
# Always use non-slip, stable climbing
before parking the vehicle. The brake discs
aids, e.g. a suitable ladder.
and brakepads warm up and dry out.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the Windows

windscreen wipers are switched on while R Clean the windows inside and outside with a
the windscreen is being cleaned damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom‐
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
R Do not use dry cloths, abrasive cleaning
while you are cleaning the windscreen or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper agents or cleaners containing solvents to
arm. clean the inside of windows.
# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐ Wiper blades
ers and the ignition before cleaning the R With the wiper arms folded away, clean the
windscreen or wiper blades. wiper blades with a damp cloth
(/ page 116).
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe R Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
and tailpipe trims Exterior lighting
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
become very hot. If you come into contact cleaning agent, for example, car shampoo.
with these parts of the vehicle, you could R Only use cleaning agents or cloths suitable
burn yourself. for plastic covers.
# Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and
230 Maintenance and care

Sensors # Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐

R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bump‐ ucts containing solvents to clean the
ers with a soft cloth and car shampoo cockpit.
(/ page 153).
R When using a high-pressure cleaner, keep a & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
minimum distance of 30 cm. bleached seat belts
Reversing camera and 360° Camera Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
R Open the camera cover with the multimedia weaken them.
system (/ page 169). This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear
R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the or fail in an accident.
camera lens. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, observe the
Sliding door
following notes for cleaning and care:
R Remove foreign objects from the vicinity of
the contact plates and contact pins of the Seat belts
sliding door. R Clean with lukewarm soapy water.
R Clean the contact plates and contact pins R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
with a mild cleaning agent and a soft cloth. R No heating over 80°C or drying in direct sun‐
R Do not oil or grease the contact plates and light.
the contact pins.
Lens of the instrument cluster
Tailpipes R Clean the surfaces carefully with a cotton or
R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for microfibre cloth and acrylic glass care prod‐
Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and ucts.
after washing the vehicle. R Do not use any other agents.
R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
Display
Trailer hitch R Switch off the display and let it cool down.
R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch
R Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre
manufacturer's operating instructions. cloth and a suitable display cleaning product
R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pres‐ (TFT-LCD).
sure cleaner or solvent. R Do not use any other agents.
R Remove traces of rust on the ball, for exam‐
ple, with a wire brush. Digital rearview mirror
R Clean the mirror glass with a cloth moistened
R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
with glass cleaner.
R After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball
R Clean the light sensors of the inside rearview
head.
mirror with a dry cotton cloth.
% Before using trailers with anti-swerve cou‐ R Do not spray the glass cleaner on the mirror
pling, note the manufacturer's Operator's glass.
Manual. R Do not use any other agents.

Notes on interior care Plastic trim

R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth.

& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic R If very dirty: use a cleaning product recom‐
parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ mended for Mercedes-Benz.
vent-based care products R Do not affix stickers, films or similar.
Care and cleaning products containing sol‐ R Do not allow to come into contact with cos‐
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to metics, insect repellent and sun creams.
become porous. When the airbags are
deployed, plastic parts may break away.
 Maintenance and care 231

Roof lining R If very dirty: use a cleaning product recom‐

R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. mended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents,
Carpet
R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec‐
polishes or waxes.
ommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Genuine leather seat covers
R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
dry cloth.
R Leather care: use a leather care agent recom‐
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Imitation leather seat covers

R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water.
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Cloth seat covers

R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth and 1%
soap solution and allow to dry.
Steering wheel from genuine leather or DINA‐
MICA

* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners

# Do not use solvent-based cleaning
agents such as tar remover or wheel
cleaner; neither should you use polishes
or waxes. Otherwise you may damage
the finish.

R Clean with a damp cloth and a 1% soapy

water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
R If very dirty: use a cleaning product recom‐
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Leather care: use a leather care agent recom‐
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
% Leather is a natural product. It has natural
surface characteristics, for example, differen‐
ces in structure, traces of growth and injury
or slight colour nuances.
Real wood and trim elements
R Clean with a microfibre cloth.
R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp
cloth and soapy water.
232 Breakdown assistance

Emergency Setting up the warning triangle

Removing the safety vest
The safety vest is located in the door stowage
compartment in the driver's door.
# Take the safety vest out of the door stowage
compartment.
% Safety vests can also be stored in the door
stowage compartment of the co-driver's
door.

# Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri‐

angle and lock them at the top using upper
press-stud 2.
# Fold stand 3 down and out to the side.

% When using the warning triangle you must

observe the legal requirements for the coun‐
try in which you are currently driving.

Removing the first-aid kit (soft sided)

1 Maximum number of washes
2 Maximum wash temperature The first-aid kit (soft sided) is located in the stow‐
age compartment in the co-driver door.
3 Do not bleach
# Remove first-aid (soft sided) kit from the
4 Do not iron
stowage compartment.
5 Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry-clean Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit (soft
7 This is a class 2 vest sided) at least once a year. Replace any expired
or missing contents.
The safety vest only fulfils the legally required Observe the legal requirements of the country in
standards if it is the correct size and is com‐ which you are currently driving.
pletely closed.
Replace the safety vest in the following cases:
Removing the fire extinguisher
R if damaged or if the reflex strips are dirty
R if the maximum permitted number of washes & WARNING Risk of accident due to an
is exceeded incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in
R if the safety vest's fluorescence has faded the driver's footwell
A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or
Warning triangle block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road
Removing the warning triangle
safety of the vehicle.
The warning triangle is located in the stowage
compartment in the driver's door. The fire extinguisher can be flung around and
injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.
# Take warning triangle out of the stowage com‐
# Always store and secure the fire extin‐
partment.
guisher in the bracket.
# Do not remove the fire extinguisher
while driving.
 Breakdown assistance 233

emergency calls if you or others are in need of

rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the
event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
Message in the media display:
SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or there is
a malfunction with the emergency call system.
This does not necessarily indicate a total failure
of the emergency call system. Emergency calls
can still be transmitted.
# Open the clasp of holder 2. The display refers only to the vehicle and does
# Remove fire extinguisher 1 from its holder. not take account of the availability of mobile
phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
For vehicles with a swivelling front seat, the gency call centre.
retainer with the fire extinguisher is located at
The functionality of the emergency call system on
the side of the seat base.
the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT
Please read the instructions on the fire extin‐ READY display goes out when the ignition is
guisher carefully and familiarise yourself with its switched on.
operation. Have the fire extinguisher refilled after
each use and checked every one or two years. It During an active emergency call, G appears in
may otherwise fail in an emergency. the display.
Observe the legal requirements of the country in You can find more information on the regional
which you are currently driving. availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system at: https://www.mercedes-benz-
mobile.com/extra/ecall/
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system % If no emergency call is available due to a
Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ technical problem in the vehicle, the red SOS
gency call system NOT READY message appears in the multi‐
function display of the instrument cluster or
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only in the media display and the red LED indica‐
functions in areas where mobile phone coverage tor lights up.
is available from the relevant contract partner.
Insufficient network coverage from the relevant
contract partner may result in an emergency call Triggering an automatic Mercedes-Benz emer‐
not being transmitted. gency call
The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐ Requirements:
matic emergency call can be made. R The ignition is switched on.
% The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
activated at the factory. Using the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system is free of charge. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system auto‐
matically triggers an emergency call after activa‐
tion of the restraint system in the event of an
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency accident, for example airbags or seat belt ten‐
call system sioners.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can When the emergency call is made:
help to decisively reduce the time between an R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
accident and the arrival of emergency services at Benz emergency call centre.
the site of the accident. It helps locate an acci‐
R A message with accident data is transmitted
dent site in places that are difficult to access.
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
The emergency call can be triggered automati‐
cally (/ page 233).
You also have the option of triggering the emer‐
gency call manually (/ page 234). Only make
234 Breakdown assistance

The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre
can transmit the vehicle position data to one can transmit the vehicle position data to one
of the public emergency services call centres. of the public emergency services call centres.
R Under certain circumstances data is also R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
transmitted in the voice channel to the conditions permit you to do so until a voice
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. connection is established with the emergency
This allows measures for rescue, recovery or call centre operator.
towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to R Based on the call, the operator decides
be initiated quickly. whether it is necessary to call rescue teams
and/or the police to the accident site.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel
flashes until the emergency call is finished. R Under certain circumstances data is also
transmitted in the voice channel to the
It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐ Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
matic emergency call.
This allows measures for rescue, recovery or
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can‐ towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to
not connect to the Mercedes-Benz emergency be initiated quickly.
call centre, the emergency call is automatically
sent to the public emergency services call centre. If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can‐
If no connection can be made to the public emer‐ not connect to the Mercedes-Benz emergency
gency services, a corresponding message call centre, the emergency call is automatically
appears in the display. sent to the public emergency services call centre.
# Dial the emergency number 112 on your If no connection can be made to the public emer‐
mobile phone. gency services, a corresponding message
appears in the media display.
If an emergency call has been initiated:
# Dial the emergency number 112 on your
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
mobile phone.
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emergency Ending an unintentional Mercedes-Benz emer‐
call centre operator. gency call
R Based on the call, the operator decides # Select ~ on the multifunction steering
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams wheel.
and/or the police to the accident site.
R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐ Transmitted data Mercedes-Benz with the
lance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Mercedes-Benz emergency call
In the event of an automatic or manual emer‐
Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call, as well as for a 112 emergency call,
gency call data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
# To use the SOS button in the overhead gency call centre or the public emergency serv‐
control panel: press the SOS button at least ices call centre.
one second long. The following data is transmitted:
# To use voice control: use the LINGUA‐ R Vehicle's GPS position data
TRONIC Call the Mercedes accident centre R GPS position data on the route (a few hun‐
voice command . dred metres before the incident)
When the emergency call is made: R Direction of travel
R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes- R Vehicle identification number
Benz emergency call centre. R Vehicle drive type
R A message with accident data is transmitted R The estimated number of people in the vehi‐
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. cle
R Whether the emergency call was initiated
manually or automatically
 Breakdown assistance 235

R Time of the accident Flat tyre

R Language setting on the multimedia system Notes on flat tyres
For accident clarification purposes, the following
measures can be taken up to an hour after the & WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat
emergency call has been initiated: tyre
R The current vehicle position can be called up A flat tyre strongly impairs the vehicle's driv‐
R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
ing characteristics, as well as its steering and
can be established braking characteristics.
# Do not drive with a flat tyre.
% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving
# Replace the flat tyre with the spare
traffic information, cannot be used for up to
two hours after sending an emergency call. wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.

Function of the emergency call system self- You will find a sticker with the Mercedes-Benz
diagnosis (Russia) Service24h telephone number on the B-pillar on
the driver's side, for example.
Your car verifies the operability of the emergency
call system each time the ignition is ON. For vehicles with a spare wheel, information in
the event of a flat tyre can be found under
In the event of a system malfunction, you will be "Wheels and tyres" (/ page 256).
informed by the following signals:
R The SOS NOT READY message in the instru‐
ment cluster or the red SOS NOT READY mes‐ Battery
sage on the display, if available Notes on the starter battery
R The flashing indicator lamp in the overhead
Work on the battery, e.g. removing or installing,
control panel requires specialist knowledge and the use of spe‐
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after cial tools. Therefore, always have work on the
switching ignition ON the red indicator SOS NOT battery carried out at a qualified specialist work‐
READY in the upper right corner of the multime‐ shop.
dia display is switched OFF, this means the emer‐
gency call system passed diagnostics success‐ & WARNING Risk of an accident due to
fully. work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐
tery
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
(Russia) can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
can restrict functions relevant for safety sys‐
Requirements: tems and impair the operating safety of your
R The starter battery has sufficient charge. vehicle.
R The ignition is switched on. You could lose control of the vehicle in the
R The vehicle has been stationary for at least following situations in particular:
one minute. R when braking

# To start the test mode: press and hold the R in the event of abrupt steering manoeu‐
~ button on the multifunction steering vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is
wheel or the F button on the overhead not adapted to the road conditions
control panel for at least five seconds. # In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐
Test mode is started and ended automatically lar incident, contact a qualified special‐
after completion of the speech test. ist workshop immediately.
# To stop test mode manually: switch off the # Do not drive on.
ignition or press the F button on the over‐
# Always have work on the battery carried
head control panel for at least five seconds.
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
The test mode is ended.
236 Breakdown assistance

R Further information on ABS (/ page 154) + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental

R Further information on ESP®(/ page 154) damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
teries
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries that have been tested
and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
These batteries provide increased impact protec‐
tion to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering Batteries contain pollutants. It is
acid burns should the battery be damaged in an illegal to dispose of them with the household
accident. rubbish.
#
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐
trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly Dispose of batteries in an
explosive gas mixture in the battery. environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
# To discharge any electrostatic charge
specialist workshop or to a collection
that may have built up, touch the metal point for used batteries.
vehicle body before handling the bat‐
tery. Observe the safety notes and protective meas‐
ures when handling batteries.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while
the battery is charging and when jump-starting. Risk of explosion
Make sure that neither you nor the battery is
electrostatically charged.
Electrostatic charge can occur in the following Fire, naked flames and smoking are
cases, for example: prohibited when handling the battery.
R You are wearing synthetic clothing. Avoid creating sparks.
R There is friction between your clothing and
the seat. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐
sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes
R You drag or push the battery across a carpet
and clothing. Wear suitable protective
or other synthetic materials. clothing, in particular gloves, an apron
R You rub the battery with cloths or towels. and a safety mask. Immediately rinse
electrolyte acid splashes off with
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns clean water. If necessary, seek medi‐
from the battery acid cal advice.
Battery acid is caustic. Wear eye protection.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
# Do not lean over the battery.
Keep children at a safe distance.
# Do not inhale battery gases.

# Keep children away from the battery.

# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐

oughly with plenty of clean water and Observe these Operating Instructions.
seek medical attention immediately.
 Breakdown assistance 237

Observe the following notes: In this case, observe the following points:
R Recharge the battery more frequently in the R do not give the vehicle starting assistance or
following cases: charge the battery
- You predominantly drive short distances. R the service life of a battery that has been
- You predominantly drive at low outside thawed may be reduced drastically
temperatures. R the starting behaviour may deteriorate, par‐
- You leave the vehicle parked for a lengthy ticularly at low temperatures
period. R it is recommended that you have a thawed
battery checked at a qualified specialist work‐
In order for the batteries to achieve their max‐ shop
imum possible service life, they must always
be sufficiently charged. & WARNING Risk of explosion during
R Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you charging process and starting assistance
wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a During the charging process and starting
long period of time. assistance, the battery may release an explo‐
R When you park the vehicle, remove the key if sive gas mixture.
you do not require any electrical consumers. # Avoid fire, naked flames, creating
The vehicle will then use very little energy, sparks and smoking.
thus conserving battery power.
# Make sure there is sufficient ventilation.
R If your vehicle requires jump-starting, or if you
# Do not lean over a battery.
wish to provide jump-starting assistance to
another vehicle, only use the jump-start con‐
nection point in the engine compartment & WARNING Danger of chemical burns
(/ page 237). from the battery acid
Installation locations Battery acid is caustic.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
two batteries located in the seat base of the clothing.
right-hand front seat, depending on the equip‐ # Do not lean over the battery.
ment version: # Do not inhale battery gases.
R Starter battery # Keep children away from the battery.
R Support battery # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐
oughly with plenty of clean water and
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V seek medical attention immediately.
battery
Starting assistance
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
zen battery
extended attempts to start the engine
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐
tures slightly above or below freezing point. Numerous or extended attempts to start the
engine may damage the catalytic converter
During starting assistance or battery charg‐ due to non-combusted fuel.
ing, battery gas can be released.
# Avoid numerous and extended attempts
# Always allow a battery to thaw before
to start the engine.
charging it or performing starting assis‐
tance. Do not use a rapid charging device to start the
vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
If the warning/indicator lamps do not light up in the engine can be jump-started from another
the instrument cluster at temperatures around or vehicle or from a donor battery using jump leads.
below freezing, it is highly probable that the dis‐ For this purpose, the vehicle has a jump-start
charged battery has frozen. connection point in the engine compartment.
238 Breakdown assistance

When jump-starting, observe the following points: Connecting and disconnecting the jump lead
R The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If
the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
starting assistance is to be provided using a
donor battery or a starting assistance device.
R You may only jump-start the vehicle when the
engine and exhaust system are cold.
R Do not start the engine if the battery is fro‐
zen. Let the battery thaw first.
R Starting assistance may only be provided
using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
R Only use jump leads that have a sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
R If the battery is fully discharged, attach the
donor battery for a few minutes before
attempting to start. This charges the dis‐ Example: jump-start connection point
charged battery a little.
R Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. # Push contact protection cover 1 of the
jump-start connection point towards the rear
Jump leads and further information regarding of the vehicle against the spring pressure as
starting assistance can be obtained at any quali‐ far as it will go.
fied specialist workshop. The jump-start connection point is visible.
Ensure the following before connecting the jump
lead:
R The jump leads are not damaged.
R Parts of the terminal clamps which are not
insulated do not come into contact with other
metal parts while the jump leads are connec‐
ted to the battery.
R The jump leads do not touch moving parts
when the engine is started and while it is run‐
ning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
# Apply the parking brake.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position j.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: shift
to neutral. Terminal connection diagram
# Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. audio # Remove the cover from positive terminal 3
device, blower. of the donor battery.
# Switch off the ignition immediately and # Connect the positive terminal clamp of the
remove the key. jump lead to positive terminal 3 of the
# Open the bonnet (/ page 221). donor battery, and then to positive terminal
5 of the jump-start connection point.
# Connect the negative terminal clamp of the
jump lead to negative terminal 2 of the
donor battery, and then to earth contact 4
of your own vehicle.
# Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run
it at idling speed.
 Breakdown assistance 239

# Insert the key into the ignition lock, start the % If a battery is not fitted and not in service,
engine and let it run for several minutes. you should charge it every three months. This
# Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch helps to counteract self-discharging and pre‐
on an electrical consumer in your own vehi‐ vent damage to the battery.
cle, e.g. the rear window heater or the light‐ 12 V battery care
ing.
# Disconnect the negative terminal clamp of * NOTE Battery discharge due to leakage
the jump lead from earth contact 4 and currents
then from negative terminal 2 of the donor
battery. Dirty battery terminal clamps and battery sur‐
faces cause leakage currents. This can lead
# Disconnect the positive terminal clamp of the to the battery discharging.
jump lead from positive terminal 5 on the
# Keep the battery terminals and battery
jump-start connection point, and then from
positive terminal 3 of the donor battery. surfaces clean and dry.
Contact protection cover 1 is automatically
returned forwards to its original position by * NOTE Damage to the battery housing
the spring force and the jump-start connec‐ due to improper cleaning
tion point is closed.
If you use cleaning agents containing fuel,
# Position the cover on positive terminal 3 of these can damage the battery housing.
the donor battery. # Do not use cleaning agents containing
# Have the battery checked at a qualified spe‐ fuel.
cialist workshop.
Charging the 12 V battery * NOTE Damage to the battery due to self-
discharge
* NOTE Damage to the electronics caused If dirt gets into the battery cell, the self-dis‐
by non-approved charging devices charge of the battery is increased and the
Charging a fitted battery with a battery battery can be damaged.
charger which has not been approved by # Only clean the battery with the cell caps
Mercedes-Benz can damage the on-board screwed in.
electronics.
# Only use a battery charger which has Observe the following points on battery care:
been approved by Mercedes-Benz and # Regularly check the battery terminals and the
which permits charging the battery fastening of the negative cable to the chassis
when it is fitted in the vehicle. to ensure that they are firmly seated.
# Only charge the battery using the jump- # Lightly grease the undersides of the battery
start connection point. terminal clamps with acid-resistant grease.
# Only clean the battery housing with commer‐
A battery charger specially adapted for
cially available cleaning agents.
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved
for Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory.
Further information is available from any Disconnecting and removing the starter bat‐
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Read the operat‐ tery
ing instructions for your charger before charging
the battery. & WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐
Recharge the battery more frequently if you use gen gas igniting
the vehicle mainly for short trips and/or drive at There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting
low outside temperatures. when charging the battery if there is a short
# Connect the battery charger to the positive circuit or sparks start to form.
terminal and earth contact in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure.
240 Breakdown assistance

# Make sure that the positive terminal of If, in exceptional circumstances, you must dis‐
the connected battery does not come connect the battery yourself, pay attention to the
into contact with vehicle parts. following:
# Never place metal objects or tools on a R Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
battery. (/ page 235).
# The described order of the battery R Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
clamps must be observed when con‐ away.
necting and disconnecting the battery. R After the battery has been disconnected, the
# When giving starting assistance, always parking brake is automatically applied. You
make sure that you only connect battery can then no longer move the vehicle.
terminals with identical polarity. R For vehicles with an automatic transmission,
# During starting assistance, you must the transmission is locked in position j after
observe the described order for con‐ disconnecting the battery. You can then no
necting and disconnecting the jump longer move the vehicle.
lead. R The battery and the cover of the positive ter‐
# Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐ minal clamp must be fitted securely during
tery clamps while the engine is running. operation.

& WARNING Danger of chemical burns

from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
# Do not lean over the battery.

# Do not inhale battery gases.

# Keep children away from the battery.

Seat base (example: right-hand front seat)
# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐
oughly with plenty of clean water and The following description on connecting and fit‐
seek medical attention immediately. ting the battery uses the example of the starter
battery in the seat base of the right-hand front
seat.
* NOTE Damage to electronic components
# Switch off all electrical consumers.
due to work carried out incorrectly on the
battery # Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition lock.
If the starter battery is disconnected before
the key is removed from the ignition lock, # Open the front right-hand door.
electronic components or assemblies, such # Press both catch springs 1 down and
as the alternator, can be damaged. remove cover 2 upwards from the seat
# Switch off the engine and remove the base.
key from the ignition lock. # Remove cover 2 by pulling upwards at an
# Check to see that there are no indicator angle from the seat base.
lamps lit in the instrument cluster.
# Always remove the negative terminal
clamp first and then the positive termi‐
nal clamp.
# Do not interchange the battery clamps.

Always have work on the battery carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.
 Breakdown assistance 241

Connecting and fitting the starter battery

& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐

gen gas igniting
There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting
when charging the battery if there is a short
circuit or sparks start to form.
# Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come
Open seat base (example: right-hand front seat) into contact with vehicle parts.
# Never place metal objects or tools on a
# Remove screws 5 from holder 6.
battery.
# Remove holder 6. # The described order of the battery
# Remove vent hose 4 from the top of the bat‐ clamps must be observed when con‐
tery. necting and disconnecting the battery.
# Pull the battery out of the seat base until the # When giving starting assistance, always
negative terminal clamp can be released and make sure that you only connect battery
removed. terminals with identical polarity.
# Disconnect the negative terminal clamp from # During starting assistance, you must
negative terminal 3. observe the described order for con‐
# Remove the negative terminal clamp in such a necting and disconnecting the jump
way that the battery terminal clamp no longer lead.
touches negative terminal 3. # Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐
tery clamps while the engine is running.

* NOTE Damage to the on-board electron‐

ics due to reversing the battery clamps
Incorrectly connecting the battery can dam‐
age the on-board electronics.
# Always connect the battery as descri‐
bed in the following sequence. Never
reverse the terminal clamps.
Example: starter battery The following description on connecting and fit‐
# Remove the battery from the seat base and ting the battery uses the example of the starter
place it on the door sill as shown. If neces‐ battery in the seat base of the right-hand front
sary, hold the battery by handles 9. seat.
# Remove the clamp cover of positive terminal
8.
# Remove positive terminal clamp 8 from pos‐
itive terminal 7.
# Remove positive clamp 8 in such a way that
it no longer touches positive terminal 7.
# Lift the battery out of the door sill by handles
9.

Example: starter battery

# Place the battery on the door sill as shown
and secure with handles 3 if necessary.
242 Breakdown assistance

# Connect positive terminal clamp 2 to posi‐ Carry out the following work after connecting the
tive terminal 1. The positive lead must be battery:
routed parallel to the side of the battery hous‐ # Reset the side windows (/ page 63).
ing in the connection area, as shown.
# Reset the outside mirrors (/ page 118).
# Place the positive terminal clamp cover on
# Reset the electric sliding doors (/ page 57).
positive terminal 1.
# Reset the EASY-PACK tailgate (/ page 60).
# Fold both handles 3 down onto the battery.
# Push the battery into the seat base until the
negative terminal clamp can be connected. Towing or tow-starting
# Connect the negative terminal clamp to nega‐ Overview of permissible towing methods
tive terminal 4.
# Push the battery into the seat base as far as & WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐
it will go. ted safety-related functions during the
towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐
ger available in the following situations:
R the ignition is switched off.
R the brake system or power steering sys‐
tem is malfunctioning.
R the energy supply or the on-board electri‐
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signifi‐
Open seat base with fitted battery (example: cantly more effort may be required to steer
right-hand front seat) and brake than is normally required.
# Connect vent hose 5 to the battery connec‐ # Use a tow bar.

tion at the top, beside negative terminal 4. # Make sure that the steering wheel can
# Place holder 7 over the lower edge of the move freely before towing the vehicle
battery housing and the threaded holes for away.
screws 6.
# Screw on holder 7 with screws 6. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing
The battery is secured to prevent slipping. with steering wheel lock
You will no longer be able to steer the vehicle
if the steering wheel lock is engaged.
# Always switch on the ignition when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow
bar.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to towing

away a vehicle that is too heavy
If the vehicle being tow started or towed away
is heavier than the permissible gross weight
Seat base (example: right-hand front seat)
of your vehicle, the following situations may
# Insert cover 9 in front of the battery com‐ arise:
partment down into the seat base and close R The towing eye may become detached.
it.
R The vehicle/trailer combination may even
Catch springs 8 of cover 9 should engage
audibly. tip over.
 Breakdown assistance 243

# Before tow starting or towing away a # Secure the tow rope on the same side
vehicle, check that it does not exceed on both vehicles.
the permissible gross weight. # Secure the tow rope to the towing eyes.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of
# Do not exceed the legally prescribed
your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identifi‐ length of the tow rope.
cation plate (/ page 268). # Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g.
with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to auto‐ make other road users aware that a
matic braking vehicle is being towed.
When the following functions are activated, # During the journey, observe the brake
the vehicle brakes automatically in certain sit‐ lamps of the towing vehicle and main‐
uations: tain the distance so that the tow rope
does not sag.
R Active Brake Assist
# Do not use steel cables or chains to tow
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC your vehicle.
R HOLD function

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate * NOTE Damage due to towing the vehicle
these systems in the following or similar sit‐ at too high a speed or too far
uations: Towing the vehicle at too high a speed or too
# when towing far can damage the drivetrain.
# in a car wash # Do not exceed a towing speed of
50 km/h.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐ # Do not exceed a towing distance of
tion of the tow bar or improper use of the 50 km.
towing device
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
the towing eyes or the trailer tow hitch. mission when towing due to shifting into
transmission position j
# Do not use the towing eyes to recover a
vehicle. If you open the driver's or co-driver's door
when towing, it can lead to the automatic
* NOTE Damage due to pulling force being transmission shifting to position j and
too high becoming damaged.
# Shift the automatic transmission to
Pulling away abruptly can damage the vehi‐ position i.
cles if the tractive forces are too high.
# Do not open any doors during the tow‐
# Pull away as straight, slowly and
ing process.
smoothly as possible.
When towing away, you must observe the legal
* NOTE Damage due to improper towing requirements for the country in which you are
with a tow rope currently driving.
If you ignore safety and protective measures In the event of a breakdown, Mercedes-Benz rec‐
when towing with a tow rope, this can result ommends that you have the vehicle transported
in damage to the vehicle. instead of towed.
Observe the following points: Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or
trailer if it has transmission damage.
244 Breakdown assistance

Permissible towing methods

Both axles on the Front axle raised Rear axle raised

ground

Vehicles with manual Yes, no further than No Yes, if the steering

transmission 50 km at 50 km/h wheel is fixed in the
centre position with a
steering wheel lock.
Maximum 50 km at
50 km/h
Vehicles with auto‐ Yes, no further than No Yes, if the steering
matic transmission 50 km at 50 km/h wheel is fixed in the
centre position with a
steering wheel lock.
Maximum 50 km at
50 km/h
Vehicles with all-wheel Yes, no further than No No
drive (4MATIC) 50 km at 50 km/h

% If the transmission cannot be shifted to posi‐ # Deactivate automatic locking (/ page 53).
tion i, have the vehicle transported # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 157).
(/ page 245). A towing vehicle with lifting
equipment is required for vehicle transport.
# Shift the transmission to neutral.
# Release the parking brake (/ page 152).
Towing away the vehicle with both axles on Vehicles with automatic transmission
the ground # Switch on the hazard warning lamps
# Observe the notes on permissible towing (/ page 107).
methods (/ page 242). # Fit the towing eye (/ page 246).
# Make sure that the battery is connected and # Secure the towing device.
charged. # Switch on the ignition.
If the battery is discharged, observe the following # Deactivate automatic locking (/ page 53).
points: # Do not activate the HOLD function.
R The ignition cannot be switched on.
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 157).
R It is not possible to release or apply the elec‐
# Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
tric parking brake.
(/ page 163).
R The transmission cannot be shifted to posi‐
# Shift the transmission to i (/ page 143).
tion i.
# Release the parking brake (/ page 152).
Vehicles with manual transmission
Recovering a vehicle that is stuck
# Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(/ page 107).
* NOTE Damage due to pulling force being
# Fit the towing eye (/ page 246). too high
# Secure the towing device. Pulling away abruptly can damage the vehi‐
# Switch on the ignition. cles if the tractive forces are too high.
 Breakdown assistance 245

# Pull away as straight, slowly and Do not exceed a towing speed of 50 km/h.
smoothly as possible.
Loading the vehicle for transport
If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or muddy
ground, recover the vehicle with the utmost care, * NOTE Damage due to incorrect attach‐
especially so if the vehicle is laden. ment
# Observe the notes on permissible towing
methods (/ page 242). The vehicle may be damaged when lashing to
chassis components.
# Never attempt to recover a vehicle that is
# Only lash the vehicle at the wheels.
stuck when a trailer is attached.
# If possible, pull the vehicle out backwards # Observe the notes on permissible towing
using the tracks it made before it became methods (/ page 242).
stuck.
# To load the vehicle onto a trailer or trans‐
porter, use the trailer tow hitch or the towing
Towing the vehicle with the axle raised eye.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing Before loading the vehicle
with the ignition switched on # Switch on the ignition.
When towing away with the front axle raised # Vehicles with manual transmission: shift
and the ignition switched on, ASR can brake the transmission to neutral.
the rear axle wheels in an erratic manner. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The vehicle can lose directional stability. shift the transmission to position i.
# Switch off the ignition before towing the # Release the parking brake (/ page 152).
vehicle with the front axle raised. # Load the vehicle onto the transporter.

* NOTE Damage to the transmission due to * NOTE Damage to the drive train due to
towing with an axle raised on vehicles incorrect positioning of the vehicle
with 4MATIC # Do not position the vehicle above the
The transmission can be damaged by towing connection point of the transport vehi‐
with the front or rear axle raised. cle.
# Vehicles with 4MATIC may be towed
with both axles on the ground or loaded
and transported.

With the rear axle raised

# Observe the notes on permissible towing
methods (/ page 242).
# Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(/ page 107).
# Deactivate tow-away protection (/ page 67).
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
position.
# Fix the steering wheel in the centre position After loading the vehicle
with a steering wheel lock. # Vehicles with manual transmission:
# Release the parking brake (/ page 152). engage first or reverse gear.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission:
# Turn the key to position g in the ignition lock
and remove the key from the ignition lock. shift the transmission to position j.
# Deactivate tow-away protection (/ page 67).
# Take the key with you when leaving the vehi‐
cle.
246 Breakdown assistance

# Turn the key to position g in the ignition lock # Insert the screwdriver into the towing eye and
and remove it from the ignition lock. turn the towing eye anti-clockwise.
# Use the parking brake to secure the vehicle # Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
against rolling away. # Insert cover 1 with the lug at the top and
# Secure the vehicle by the wheels. press it in at the bottom until it engages.
# Stow the towing eye and the screwdriver with
Towing eye storage location the vehicle tool kit.
The towing eye is located in the vehicle tool kit Rear towing eye
(/ page 247).

Fitting/removing the towing eye

Fitting and removing the front towing eye

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to

incorrect use of the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐
cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐
ess.
# Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.

Rear towing eye under the bumper

# When towing away or tow-starting a vehicle,
attach the towing device to rear towing eye
2.
# If the vehicle is equipped with a trailer tow
hitch, attach the towing device to the trailer
tow hitch (/ page 277).
# Observe the notes on permissible towing
Fixture for the front towing eye in the bumper methods (/ page 242).
# Take the towing eye and screwdriver from the
vehicle tool kit (/ page 247). Tow starting vehicle (emergency engine start)
Fitting Vehicles with automatic transmission
# Press the arrow on cover 1 and remove
cover 1 from the opening. * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
You will see the fixture for the towing eye. mission due to tow-starting
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the The automatic transmission may be damaged
stop. in the process of tow-starting vehicles with
# Insert the screwdriver into the towing eye and automatic transmission.
tighten the towing eye. # Vehicles with automatic transmission
# Stow the screwdriver in the vehicle tool kit. must not be tow-started.

Removing # Observe the notes and information on start‐

# Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle tool ing assistance (/ page 237).
kit.
 Breakdown assistance 247

Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicle tool kit

# Observe the notes on permissible towing Information on the vehicle tool kit
methods (/ page 242).
Before tow-starting, ensure the following: The vehicle tool kit is in the rear stowage com‐
partment.
R make sure that the battery is connected and
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐
charged. The ignition cannot be switched on
cles without a spare wheel are not equipped with
otherwise and there will be no steering and
a tyre-changing tool.
braking assistance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a tyre-change tool
R use a towing bar and attach it to the front
kit, you can find it in the vehicle tool kit in the
towing eye (/ page 246) only.
rear stowage compartment.
R if the engine does not start after a few sec‐
Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to
onds, try a jump-starting procedure using the
the vehicle. For more information on which tyre-
battery of another vehicle (/ page 237).
change tool kits are required and approved for
Tow-starting procedure performing a wheel change on your vehicle, con‐
# Switch on the hazard warning lamps sult a qualified specialist workshop.
(/ page 107). Required tyre-change tool kits may include the
# If necessary, allow the engine and the following, for example:
exhaust system to cool down. R Jack
# Switch on the ignition. R Wheel spanner
# Shift to 2nd or 3rd gear. R Ratchet ring spanner
# Release the parking brake. % The jack has a maximum weight of 7.5 kg
# Keep the clutch pedal fully depressed when depending on the vehicle's equipment.
tow starting the vehicle. You will find the maximum load capacity of
# Release the clutch pedal slowly. the jack stated on the adhesive label
attached to the jack.
# When the engine has started, shift to neutral The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a
immediately. malfunction, please contact a qualified spe‐
# Stop in accordance with the traffic condi‐ cialist workshop.
tions.
# Use the parking brake to secure the vehicle Stowage compartment in the rear
against rolling away.
# Remove the towing device. Opening the stowage compartment
# Remove the towing eye.
# Switch off the hazard warning lamps
(/ page 107).

Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses

* NOTE Electrical fuses

# Observe the information in the supple‐
ment. You may otherwise fail to recog‐
nise dangers.

The fuse allocation chart and the information on

the fuses can be found in the "Fuse allocation
chart" Supplement. Stowage compartment in the rear on the right-
hand side of the vehicle
248 Breakdown assistance

# If necessary, fold up the rear seat.

# Turn top rotary catch 1 clockwise and bot‐
tom rotary catch 1 anti-clockwise.
# Remove cover 2.
Removing the vehicle tool kit and jack from
the tool holder

Stowage compartment with tool holder

# Remove clamping strap 4.
# Lift off tool holder cover 3.
# Carefully pull the vehicle tool kit and jack
upwards out of the stowage compartment.
Lift the jack slightly before removing it and
turn it to a diagonal position in the stowage
compartment.
Stowing the vehicle tool kit and the jack
# Before stowing, wind the jack to the fully
closed position and place it so that the hand‐
wheel is facing forwards and the plate is
facing inwards.
# Place the jack and vehicle tool kit into the
tool holder.
# Replace cover 3 of the tool holder.
# Tighten clamping strap 4.
Closing the stowage compartment
# Put on cover 2.
# Turn top rotary catch 1 anti-clockwise and
bottom rotary catch 1 clockwise.
# Fold down the rear seat.
 Wheels and tyres 249

Information on noise or unusual driving Minimum tread depth for:

characteristics R Summer tyres: 3 mm
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises R M+S tyres: 4 mm
and unusual driving characteristics, e.g. pulling to
one side. This may indicate damage to the wheels # For safety reasons, replace the tyres
or tyres. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, before the legally-prescribed limit for
reduce your speed. Stop the vehicle as soon as the minimum tread depth is reached.
possible to check if wheels and tyres have been
damaged or are no longer functioning properly. Conduct the following checks regularly on all
Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the wheels, at least once a month or as required, e.g.
unusual driving characteristics. If no signs of before a long journey or when driving off-road:
damage can be detected, have the tyres and R check the tyre pressure (/ page 250)
wheels checked at a qualified specialist work‐
R check the valve caps
shop.
Valves must be protected from moisture and
dirt with valve caps specifically approved by
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
tyres R visually inspect the tread depth and the tyre
tread across the whole tyre width
& WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged
tyres The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is
3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tyres Information on driving with summer tyres
immediately. At temperatures below 10 °C summer tyres lose
elasticity and therefore traction and braking
Check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S
damage regularly, i.e. at least every two weeks, tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold tempera‐
as well as after driving off-road or on rough tures could cause tears to form, thereby damag‐
roads. Damaged wheels can lead to a loss of tyre ing the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot
pressure. accept responsibility for this type of damage.
Look out for the following types of damage, for Once you have fitted the summer tyres:
example: R Check the tyre pressures (/ page 250)
R cuts in the tyres R Restart the tyre pressure monitor
R punctures in the tyres (/ page 255)
R tears in the tyres
R bulges on tyres Information on M+S tyres
R deformation or severe corrosion on wheels At temperatures below 10 °C use winter tyres or
all-season tyres – both are marked with M+S.
& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to
Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake
insufficient tyre tread
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
tyre grip. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems
The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet such as ABS and ESP® to also function optimally
roads, especially when the speed of the vehi‐ in winter. These tyres have been developed spe‐
cle is not adapted to suit the conditions. cifically for driving in snow.
# Thus, you should regularly check the Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all
tread depth and the condition of the wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
tread across the entire width of all Always observe the maximum permissible speed
tyres. specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted.
250 Wheels and tyres

If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum R Use snow chains only when the road surface
permissible speed than the maximum design is completely snow-covered. Remove the
speed of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning snow chains as soon as possible when you
sign in the driver's field of vision. You can obtain come to a road that is not snow-covered.
this at a qualified specialist workshop. R Local regulations may restrict the use of
Once you have fitted the winter tyres, take the snow chains. Observe the applicable regula‐
following measures: tions before fitting snow chains.
R check the tyre pressure (/ page 250) R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum per‐
R restart the tyre pressure monitor
missible speed is 50 km/h.
(/ page 255) % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away
(/ page 155). This allows the wheels to
spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Notes on snow chains
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use snow chains that have been Tyre pressure
checked and approved. You can find further infor‐ Notes on tyre pressure
mation on snow chains recommended for
Mercedes-Benz in the wheel and tyre overview at Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too
https://www.mercedes-benz.de. low can:
R Shorten the service life of the tyres
& WARNING Risk of accident due to snow
R Cause increased tyre damage
chains breaking
R Adversely affect handling characteristics and
If you drive too fast with snow chains, they thus driving safety, for example, due to aqua‐
can break, injure other persons, and damage planing
the vehicle.
# Observe the maximum permissible & WARNING Risk of accident due to repea‐
speed for operation with snow chains. ted pressure drop in the tyres
The wheels, valves or tyres could be dam‐
* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from fit‐ aged.
ted snow chains
Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres
If snow chains are fitted to steel wheels, the bursting.
wheel trims can be damaged. # Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
# Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels # Check whether the tyre has a puncture
before fitting snow chains. or the valve has a leak.
# If you are unable to rectify the damage,
Observe the following notes when using snow
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
chains:
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain Information on the recommended tyre pressure
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found
information on them at a qualified specialist on the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap
workshop. and in the tyre pressure tables (/ page 251).
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre
have been specifically approved for your vehi‐ pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does
cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre
the same quality standard. pressure.
R The snow chains must be retightened after Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor: you can
driving approximately 1 km. This is the only also check the tyre pressure using the on-board
way to ensure the snow chains are optimally computer.
seated with clearance to adjacent compo‐
nents.
 Wheels and tyres 251

Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are The tyre pressure values given for partly laden
cold. Conditions for cold tyres are: vehicles are minimum values which offer you
R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres
good ride comfort. They are not for trailer opera‐
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. tion.
R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.
You can also use the tyre pressure values for a
fully laden vehicle. These are always allowed and
Notes on trailer operation permissible. However, in a partially laden vehicle,
The applicable tyre pressure for the tyres of the the ride is not as comfortable and fuel consump‐
rear axle is always the recommended tyre pres‐ tion is only minimally reduced. In addition, wear
sure for a full load. is greater in the middle of the tyre tread.
Set the correct tyre pressure before loading the
Overview of the tyre pressure table vehicle. Once the vehicle is laden, check the tyre
pressures and correct them if necessary.
Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are
cold. The tyres are cold under the following con‐
ditions:
R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.

Vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of

2,800 kg
The tyre pressure values apply to the following
vehicles:
R gross vehicle weight of 2,800 kg
R permissible axle load of 1,490 kg on the front
and rear axles
Additionally, the tyre pressure table may also R the tyres referred to under "Wheel and tyre
state tyre pressures for different load conditions. combinations" (/ page 261)
These are defined in the tyre pressure informa‐
tion table as different numbers of passengers Tyre pressure for the spare wheel is 350 kPa
and amounts of luggage. The actual number of (3.5 bar/51 psi).
seats may differ – for more information, please
refer to the vehicle's registration documents.

Partially laden vehicle Fully laden vehicle

Tyres/disc Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle
wheel

195/65 R 16 C 340 kPa (3.4 340 kPa (3.4 bar/49 360 kPa (3.6 360 kPa (3.6
bar/49 psi) psi) bar/52 psi) bar/52 psi)
205/65 R 16 C 310 kPa (3.1 310 kPa (3.1 bar/45 340 kPa (3.4 340 kPa (3.4
bar/45 psi) psi) bar/49 psi) bar/49 psi)
225/60 R 16 C 300 kPa (3.0 300 kPa (3.0 bar/44 320 kPa (3.2 320 kPa (3.2
bar/44 psi) psi) bar/46 psi) bar/46 psi)
225/55 R 17 C 310 kPa (3.1 310 kPa (3.1 bar/45 330 kPa (3.3 330 kPa (3.3
bar/45 psi) psi) bar/48 psi) bar/48 psi)
225/55 R 17 270 kPa (2.7 260 kPa (2.6 bar/38 290 kPa (2.9 300 kPa (3.0
XL bar/39 psi) psi) bar/42 psi) bar/44 psi)
252 Wheels and tyres

Partially laden vehicle Fully laden vehicle

Tyres/disc Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle
wheel

235/55 R 17 260 kPa (2.6 250 kPa (2.5 bar/36 270 kPa (2.7 280 kPa (2.8
XL 103W/V bar/38 psi) psi) bar/39 psi) bar/41 psi)
245/45 R 18 270 kPa (2.7 260 kPa (2.6 bar/38 290 kPa (2.9 310 kPa (3.1
XL 100W bar/39 psi) psi) bar/42 psi) bar/45 psi)
245/45 R 18 280 kPa (2.8 270 kPa (2.7 bar/39 300 kPa (3.0 310 kPa (3.1
XL 100V bar/41 psi) psi) bar/44 psi) bar/45 psi)
245/45 R 19 230 kPa (2.3 230 kPa (2.3 bar/33 250 kPa (2.5 260 kPa (2.6
XL 102Y bar/33 psi) psi) bar/36 psi) bar/38 psi)
245/45 R 19 260 kPa (2.6 260 kPa (2.6 bar/38 280 kPa (2.8 290 kPa (2.9
XL 102W bar/38 psi) psi) bar/41 psi) bar/42 psi)

Vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of Tyre pressure for the spare wheel is 350 kPa
3,050 kg or 3,100 kg without 4MATIC (3.5 bar/51 psi).
The following tyre pressure values apply to the
following vehicles:
R with a gross vehicle weight of 3,050 kg or
3,100 kg
R with a permissible axle load of 1,550 kg on
the rear axle
R the tyres referred to under "Wheel and tyre
combinations" (/ page 261)

Partially laden vehicle1 Fully laden vehicle

Tyres/disc Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle
wheel

205/65 R 16 C 310 kPa (3.1 310 kPa (3.1 bar/45 360 kPa (3.6 360 kPa (3.6
bar/45 psi) psi) bar/52 psi) bar/52 psi)
225/60 R 16 C 300 kPa (3.0 300 kPa (3.0 bar/44 340 kPa (3.4 340 kPa (3.4
bar/44 psi) psi) bar/49 psi) bar/49 psi)
225/55 R 17 270 kPa (2.7 260 kPa (2.6 bar/38 300 kPa (3.0 310 kPa (3.1
XL bar/39 psi) psi) bar/44 psi) bar/45 psi)
235/55 R 17 260 kPa (2.6 250 kPa (2.5 bar/36 280 kPa (2.8 290 kPa (2.9
XL 103W/V bar/38 psi) psi) bar/41 psi) bar/42 psi)
245/45 R 18 270 kPa (2.7 260 kPa (2.6 bar/38 310 kPa (3.1 330 kPa (3.3
XL 100W bar/39 psi) psi) bar/45 psi) bar/48 psi)
245/45 R 18 280 kPa (2.8 270 kPa (2.7 bar/39 320 kPa (3.2 330 kPa (3.3
XL 100V bar/41 psi) psi) bar/46 psi) bar/48 psi)

1 The tyre pressures for the partially laden vehicle are not valid for the Marco Polo with integrated kitchen.
 Wheels and tyres 253

Partially laden vehicle1 Fully laden vehicle

Tyres/disc Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle
wheel

245/45 R 19 230 kPa (2.3 230 kPa (2.3 bar/33 260 kPa (2.6 270 kPa (2.7
XL 102Y bar/33 psi) psi) bar/38 psi) bar/39 psi)
245/45 R 19 260 kPa (2.6 260 kPa (2.6 bar/38 290 kPa (2.9 300 kPa (3.0
XL 102W bar/38 psi) psi) bar/42 psi) bar/44 psi)

Vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of

3,050 kg or 3,100 kg and 4MATIC
The following tyre pressure values apply to the
following vehicles:
R with a gross vehicle weight of 3,050 kg or
3,100 kg
R with 4MATIC
R the tyres referred to under "Wheel and tyre
combinations" (/ page 261)

Vehicles with a permissible axle load of 1,550 kg on the rear axle

Partially laden vehicle1 Fully laden vehicle

Tyres/disc Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle
wheel

225/55 R 17 C 320 kPa (3.2 310 kPa (3.1 bar/45 350 kPa (3.5 350 kPa (3.5
bar/46 psi) psi) bar/51 psi) bar/51 psi)
225/55 R 17 280 kPa (2.8 260 kPa (2.6 bar/38 310 kPa (3.1 310 kPa (3.1
XL bar/41 psi) psi) bar/45 psi) bar/45 psi)
235/55 R 17 270 kPa (2.7 250 kPa (2.5 bar/36 290 kPa (2.9 290 kPa (2.9
XL 103W/V bar/39 psi) psi) bar/42 psi) bar/42 psi)
245/45 R 18 290 kPa (2.9 270 kPa (2.7 bar/39 330 kPa (3.3 330 kPa (3.3
XL 100V bar/42 psi) psi) bar/48 psi) bar/48 psi)
245/45 R 18 280 kPa (2.8 260 kPa (2.6 bar/38 320 kPa (3.2 330 kPa (3.3
XL 100W bar/41 psi) psi) bar/46 psi) bar/48 psi)
245/45 R 19 230 kPa (2.3 230 kPa (2.3 bar/33 260 kPa (2.6 270 kPa (2.7
XL 102Y bar/33 psi) psi) bar/38 psi) bar/39 psi)
245/45 R 19 260 kPa (2.6 260 kPa (2.6 bar/38 290 kPa (2.9 300 kPa (3.0
XL 102W bar/38 psi) psi) bar/42 psi) bar/44 psi)

1 The tyre pressures for the partially laden vehicle are not valid for the Marco Polo with integrated kitchen.
254 Wheels and tyres

Vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of R with 4x4 all-wheel drive

3,200 kg R the tyres referred to under "Wheel and tyre
The following tyre pressure values apply to the combinations" (/ page 261)
following vehicles:
R with a gross vehicle weight of 3,200 kg
R with a permissible axle load of 1,650 kg on
the rear axle

Partially laden vehicle1 Fully laden vehicle

Tyres/disc Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle
wheel

225/55 R 17 C 320 kPa (3.2 310 kPa (3.1 bar/45 350 kPa (3.5 440 kPa (4.4
bar/46 psi) psi) bar/51 psi) bar/64 psi)
235/55 R 17 270 kPa (2.7 250 kPa (2.5 bar/36 280 kPa (2.8 310 kPa (3.1
XL 103W/V bar/39 psi) psi) bar/41 psi) bar/45 psi)
245/45 R 19 230 kPa (2.3 230 kPa (2.3 bar/33 260 kPa (2.6 280 kPa (2.8
XL 102Y bar/33 psi) psi) bar/38 psi) bar/41 psi)
245/45 R 19 270 kPa (2.7 270 kPa (2.7 bar/39 290 kPa (2.9 310 kPa (3.1
XL 102W bar/39 psi) psi) bar/42 psi) bar/45 psi)

Tyre pressure monitoring system The h warning lamp in the instrument cluster
displays a detected pressure loss or a malfunc‐
Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tion as follows:
tem
The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre R if the h warning lamp is lit continuously,
temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicle by the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is sig‐
means of a tyre pressure sensor. nificantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor
is not malfunctioning.
New tyre pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tyres,
are automatically taught-in during the first jour‐ R if the h warning lamp flashes for around a
ney they are used. minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pres‐
sure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suit‐ R a message also appears in the instrument
able for the operating situation (/ page 250). cluster.
Note that the correct tyre pressure for the cur‐ System limits
rent operating situation must first be taught-in to
The system may be impaired or may not function
the tyre pressure monitoring system. If a substan‐
in the following situations:
tial loss of pressure occurs, the warning thresh‐
old for the warning message is aligned to the R the tyre pressure has been set incorrectly.
taught-in reference values. Restart the tyre pres‐ R there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
sure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pres‐ example, by a foreign object penetrating the
sure (/ page 255). The current pressures are tyre.
saved as new reference values. This will ensure R there is a malfunction caused by another
that a warning message will only appear if the
radio signal source.
tyre pressure drops significantly.
If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it
may take more than ten minutes for the h
tyre pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
1 The tyre pressures for the partially laden vehicle are not valid for the Marco Polo with integrated kitchen.
 Wheels and tyres 255

malfunction. When the fault has been rectified, # Press the ò button to call up the list of
the h warning lamp goes out after you have menus.
driven for a few minutes. # Use the : or 9 button to select
The tyre pressure values indicated by the on- Service.
board computer may differ from those measured # Press the a button.
at a filling station using a pressure gauge.
# Use the : or 9 button to select Tyre
The tyre pressures shown by the on-board com‐ pressure.
puter refer to those measured at sea level. At
high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated # Press the a button.
by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown The display shows the current tyre pressure
by the on-board computer. In this case, do not of each wheel or the Tyre pressures will be
reduce the tyre pressures. displayed after a few minutes of driving mes‐
sage.
Checking the tyre pressure electronically # Press the : button.
Requirements: The Use current pressures as new reference
R The ignition is switched on. values message is shown in the display.
# To confirm restart: press the a button.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the
system checks whether the current tyre pres‐
sures are within the specified range. The new
tyre pressures are then accepted as refer‐
ence values, monitored and displayed.
# To cancel restart: press the % button.
The tyre pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.

# Press the ò button to call up the list of

menus.
# Press the : or 9 button to select
Service.
# Press the a button.
# Press the : or 9 button to select
Tyre pressure.
# Press the a button.
The display shows the current tyre pressure
of each wheel.
If the vehicle was parked for longer than
20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed
after a few minutes of driving message appears in
the display.
% Also be sure to observe the notes on tyre
pressure (/ page 250).
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor
Requirements
R The ignition is switched on.
R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating condition on
each of the four wheels (/ page 251).
256 Wheels and tyres

Radio equipment approval of the tyre pres‐ Country Radio equipment approval
sure monitoring system number
Radio equipment approval numbers Philip‐
Country Radio equipment approval pines
number
Argentina
NTC
Type Approved.
No: ESD-1306995C
CNC: H-12336
Singapore Complies with IDA Standards
Model: Schrader HSW4 DA-103365
Brazil South
Africa

MODELO: GG4 TA-2013/461

ANATEL: 0381-13-8001
United TRA
Este equipamento opera em Arab Emi‐
caráter secundário, isto é, não Registered No: ER0104996/13
rates
tem direito à proteção contrain‐ Dealer No: DA0047074/10
terferência prejudicial, mesmo de Abu Dhabi
estações do mesmo tipo e não and Dubai
pode causar interferência a siste‐
mas operando em caráter pri‐
mário. Changing a wheel
Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres
Jordan Kingdom of Jordan Type approval
for Tyre Pressure Sensor and ECU You can ask for information regarding permitted
Manufacturer: Schrader Electron‐ wheel/tyre combinations at a qualified specialist
ics Ltd. workshop.
Model: Mercedes HS Snap in 433 & WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐
MHz rect sizes of wheels and tyres
Type Approval Number:
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are fit‐
TRC/LPD/2013/48
ted, the wheel brakes or components in the
Type Approval Number: LPD brake system and in the wheel suspension
may be damaged.
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
# Always replace wheels and tyres with
MR7907 ANRT 2013
those that fulfil the specifications of the
Date d'agrement: 05/03/2013 original part.
Moldova For wheels, pay attention to the following:
R Designation
R Type

For tyres, pay attention to the following:

R Designation
R Manufacturer
R Type
 Wheels and tyres 257

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ # Avoid obstacles or drive over them with
ing the specified tyre load-bearing capa‐ particular care.
city or the permissible speed rating # Reduce speed when driving over kerbs,
Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the speed bumps, manhole covers and pot‐
tyres can lead to tyre damage and could holes.
cause the tyres to explode. # Avoid especially high kerbs.
# Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. * NOTE Damage to electronic component
# Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity parts through the use of tyre-fitting tools
rating and speed rating required for Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
your vehicle. system: there are electronic component
parts in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should
* NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage through not be applied in the area of the valve.
tyre types and sizes that have not been Otherwise, the electronic component parts
approved could be damaged.
For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and # Always have tyres changed at a qualified
accessories which have been specially specialist workshop.
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
These tyres have been specially adapted for Accessories that are not approved for your vehi‐
use with the control systems, such as ABS or cle by Mercedes-Benz, or are not being used cor‐
ESP®. rectly, can impair operating safety.
Otherwise, certain properties, such as han‐ Before purchasing and using non-approved
dling characteristics, vehicle noise and con‐ accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop
sumption could be adversely affected. Fur‐ and enquire about:
thermore, other tyre sizes could result in the R suitability
tyres rubbing against the body and axle com‐ R legal stipulations
ponents when loaded. This could result in
damage to the tyre or the vehicle. R factory recommendations

# Only use tyres, wheels and accessories Observe the following points when selecting, fit‐
that have been checked and recommen‐ ting and replacing tyres:
ded by Mercedes-Benz. R Country-specific requirements for tyre
approval that define a specific tyre type for
* NOTE Driving safety put at risk by retrea‐ your vehicle.
ded tyres Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in
Retreaded tyres are not checked or recom‐ certain regions and areas of operation can be
mended by Mercedes-Benz, as previous dam‐ highly beneficial.
age is not always detected during the retread R Use only tyres and wheels of the same type,
process. design (summer tyres, winter tyres, all-season
Driving safety cannot, therefore, be guaran‐ tyres) and make.
teed. R Only fit wheels of the same size and tread
# Do not use used tyres when their previ‐ design on one axle (left and right).
ous usage is unknown. It is only permissible to fit a different wheel
size to this in the event of a flat tyre in order
* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage to drive to the specialist workshop.
when driving over obstacles R Only fit tyres of the correct size onto the
wheels.
Large wheels have a lower tyre section width.
As the section width decreases, the risk of R Do not make any modifications to the brake
wheels and tyres being damaged when driv‐ system, the wheels or the tyres.
ing over obstacles increases.
258 Wheels and tyres

The use of wheel spacers or brake dust Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
shields is not permitted and results in the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can
invalidation of the vehicle's general operating render the general operating permit invalid.
permit. On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel
R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000
system: all fitted wheels must be equipped to 10,000 km depending on the wear. Ensure the
with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels.
monitoring system. It is imperative to observe the instructions and
R At temperatures below 10°C use winter tyres safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing
or all-season tyres with the M+S marking on so.
all wheels.
Winter tyres bearing the i snowflake sym‐ Size categories of wheels
bol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road condi‐ The determined vehicle speed is displayed in the
tions. instrument cluster and is important for control‐
ling the driving safety systems and driving sys‐
R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tems. The display accuracy of the speedometer
tread. and the odometer is legally prescribed. Determin‐
R Observe the maximum permissible speed for ing the speed is dependent on the tyre size or the
the M+S tyres fitted. rolling circumference of the tyres. The rim diame‐
If this is below the vehicle's maximum per‐ ter is always specified in inches.
missible speed, this must be indicated in an For this reason, the vehicle control units can be
appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. coded for the following wheel size categories:
R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the
first 100 km. Wheel size category 1
R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, 195/65 R 16 C
regardless of wear.
205/65 R 16 C
For more information on wheels and tyres, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop. 225/60 R 16 C
Also observe the following further related sub‐ 225/55 R 17 C
jects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 250) 225/55 R 17 XL
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 251) 245/45 R 18 XL
R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
(/ page 265) Wheel size category 2
225/55 R 17 XL
Notes on changing wheels
235/55 R 17 XL
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐
245/55 R 17 XL
ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can 245/45 R 18 XL
severely impair the driving characteristics. 245/50 R 18 XL
The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo‐
nents may also be damaged. 245/45 R 19 XL
# Only interchange the front and rear
% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you stay
wheels if the wheels and tyres have the within a wheel size category when changing a
same dimensions. tyre. In this way, you avoid recoding the con‐
trol units.
 Wheels and tyres 259

Due to the legally prescribed accuracy of the # Switch off the engine.
speedometer and odometer displays, the follow‐ # Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
ing tyres are not permitted for taxis and hire cars: # On level terrain: place chocks or other suita‐
R Wheel size category 1 ble objects under the front and rear of the
- 195/65 R16C wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel to
R Wheel size category 2
be changed.
- 225/55 R17XL
# On slight inclines: place chocks or other
suitable objects under the wheels on the
- 245/45 R18XL front and rear axles opposite the wheel to be
If the wheel size category changes, you must changed.
have your vehicle's control units recoded at a
qualified specialist workshop.

Information on the direction of the tyres'

rotation
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aqua‐
planing. You will only gain these benefits if the
correct direction of rotation is observed.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its # If included in the vehicle equipment, take the
correct direction of rotation. tyre-change tool kit out of the vehicle tool kit
You may also fit a spare wheel against the direc‐ (/ page 247).
tion of rotation. Observe the time restriction on # If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
use as well as the speed limitation specified on the spare wheel from the spare wheel bracket
the spare wheel. (/ page 265).
# If necessary, remove the wheel cover.
Information on storing wheels # Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel
nuts/bolts on the wheel you wish to change
Observe the following when storing wheels:
by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the
R Wheels that have been removed should be wheel bolts/nuts completely.
stored in a cool, dry and, if possible, dark # Raise the vehicle (/ page 259).
place.
R Protect the tyres from oil, grease and fuel.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
Requirements positioning of the jack
R The tyre-change tool kit is available. If you do not position the jack correctly at the
R The vehicle is not on a slope. appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground. # Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of
# Apply the parking brake. the jack must be positioned vertically
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead under the jacking point of the vehicle.
position.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: & WARNING Risk of injury from vehicle tip‐
engage first or reverse gear k. ping
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: On slopes, the jack could tip with the vehicle
shift the transmission to position j. raised.
260 Wheels and tyres

# Never change a wheel on a slope.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jack support point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
# The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐
port points.

Requirements:
R There are no persons in the vehicle.
R The vehicle is prepared for changing a wheel
(/ page 259). Jacking points 1 (rubber stoppers) are located
behind the front wheel arches and in front of the
Important notes on using the jack: rear wheel arches.
R Only use the vehicle-specific jack that has # Place jack 2 beneath corresponding jack
been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz support point 1.
to raise the vehicle. If the jack is used incor‐ # Turn handwheel 3 until the plate of jack 2
rectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is sits securely on jack support point 1.
raised.
# Ensure that the base of jack 2 is positioned
R The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle vertically under jacking point 1.
for a short time while a wheel is being
# Assemble adapter 4 and ratchet 5 from
changed and is not suitable for carrying out
maintenance work under the vehicle. the vehicle tool kit.
# Place adapter 4 and ratchet 5 on the hexa‐
R Avoid changing a wheel on uphill and downhill
slopes. gon nut of jack 2 so that the lettering
AUF/UP is visible.
R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
# Turn ratchet wrench 5 in the AUF/UP direc‐
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large,
flat, load bearing and non-slip underlay. tion until the tyre is raised a maximum of
3 cm off the ground.
R The base of the jack is positioned vertically When doing so, jack 2 may move to one of
under the jack support point. the side support surfaces.
Safety instructions while the vehicle is raised:
R Do not put your hands or feet under the vehi‐ Removing a wheel
cle.
Requirements:
R Do not lie underneath the vehicle. R The vehicle is raised (/ page 259).
R Do not start the vehicle and do not release
the parking brake. When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force
to the brake discs since this could impair the
R Do not open or close any doors. level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on

wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface.

# Unscrew the wheel bolts.

# Remove the wheel.
 Wheels and tyres 261

Fitting a new wheel Requirements:

R The new wheel has been fitted (/ page 261).
Requirements
R The wheel is removed (/ page 260).

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a

wheel
Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the
wheel bolts to come loose, as too can dam‐
aged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.
# Never oil or grease the threads.

# In the event of damage to the threads,

contact a qualified specialist workshop # Place the adapter and the ratchet on the hex‐
immediately. agon head nut of the jack such that the letter‐
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐ ing AB/DOWN is visible.
aged hub threads replaced. # To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet of the
# Do not continue driving. jack anti-clockwise.
# Steel wheels: tighten the wheel bolts or
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel nuts evenly in a crosswise pattern in
wheel bolts and nuts the sequence indicated (1 to 5) and to a
maximum of 200 Nm.
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts # Light-alloy wheels: tighten the wheel bolts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
or wheel nuts evenly in a crosswise pattern in
# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts the sequence indicated (1 to 5) and to a
when the vehicle is on the ground. maximum of 180 Nm.
# Observe the information on the choice of
# Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted
tyres (/ page 256). wheel and adjust it if necessary.
# Observe the instructions and safety notes on Vehicles with the tyre pressure monitor sys‐
changing a wheel (/ page 256). tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped with
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts or functioning sensors.
wheel nuts which have been approved by # Retighten the wheel bolts to the specified
Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question. tightening torque after the vehicle has been
# Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfa‐ driven 50 km.
ces. % When using a wheel or spare wheel with a
new or newly painted disk wheel, have the
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change wheel bolts or wheel nuts retightened again
after approximately 1,000 to 5,000 km.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ Observe the specified tightening torque.
rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel Information on wheel and tyre combinations
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
General notes
prescribed torque.
Information on tyres, wheels and permissible
# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel
combinations can be obtained at a qualified spe‐
nuts are tightened to the prescribed cialist workshop.
tightening torque.
The smaller the cross-section of a tyre of a spe‐
# If you are not sure, do not move the
cific wheel size, the worse the driving comfort on
vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist poor road surfaces. Ride and damping comfort
workshop and have the tightening tor‐ are reduced and the risk increases that when you
que checked immediately. drive over obstacles, damage to wheels and tyres
may result.
262 Wheels and tyres

If you change wheel size on your vehicle, check it

is assigned to the correct wheel size category
(/ page 258). If the assignment changes with‐
out recoding the control units in the vehicle, the
speedometer will not display the speed accu‐
rately. Driving safety systems and driving systems
may then be operationally impaired or may detect
a malfunction and switch themselves off.
You will find a table with the recommended tyre
pressures for various vehicle loads on the inside
of the vehicle's fuel filler flap or under "Tyre pres‐
sure tables" (/ page 251).
Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the
tyres are cold.
Observe the following notes:
R always fit the vehicle with tyres of the same
size on a given axle (left/right)
R always fit the same type of wheels on your
vehicle at a given time (summer tyres, winter
tyres)
You can obtain information about tyres that have
been specially designed and approved for your
vehicle from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
% Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be fitted
at the factory in all countries.

Tyres
R16

Tyres Steel or light-alloy wheels

195/65 R16 C 100/98T 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52

195/65 R16 C 104/102T (100T) 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52
205/65 R16 C 107/105T (103T) 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52
205/65 R16 C 107/105T (103H) 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52
205/65 R16 C 103/101H 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52
225/60 R16 C 105/103H 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 52

195/65 R16 C 100/98T: only for vehicles with a

gross vehicle weight up to 2,800 kg.

R17

Tyres Steel wheels

225/55 R17 C 109/107H (104H) 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50

225/55 R17 C 104/102H (106N) 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50
 Wheels and tyres 263

Tyres Steel wheels

225/55 R17 C 109/107T (104T) 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50

225/55 R17 XL 101V 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50
225/55 R17 XL 101H 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50
235/55 R17 XL 103W/V 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50

R17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels

225/55 R17 C 109/107H (104H) 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51

225/55 R17 C 104/102H (106N) 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51
225/55 R17 C 109/107T (104T) 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51
225/55 R17 XL 101V 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51
225/55 R17 XL 101H 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51
235/55 R17 XL 103W/V 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51

R18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels

245/45 R18 XL 100W 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

245/45 R18 XL 100V 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

245/45 R18 XL 100W: only for vehicles with a 245/45 R18 XL 100V: only for vehicles with a
permissible gross weight up to 3,100 kg and a permissible gross weight up to 3,100 kg and a
permissible axle load of 1,550 kg on the rear permissible axle load of 1,550 kg on the rear
axle. Not for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight axle. Not for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight
up to 3,200 kg. up to 3,200 kg.

R19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels

245/45 R19 XL 102Y 8 J x 19 H2 ET 52

245/45 R19 XL 102Y: only for vehicles with a The following additional wheel/tyre combinations
permissible gross weight up to 3,200 kg and a apply to vehicles with 4MATIC.
permissible axle load of 1,650 kg on the rear
axle. Use of snow chains is not permitted.
Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
264 Wheels and tyres

R17

Tyres Steel wheels

225/55 R17 C 109/107H (104H) 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50

225/55 R17 C 104/102H (106N) 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50
225/55 R17 C 109/107T (104T) 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50
225/55 R17 XL 101H/V12 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50
235/55 R17 XL 103W/V 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 50

R17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels

225/55 R17 C 109/107H (104H) 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51

225/55 R17 C 104/102H (106N) 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51
225/55 R17 C 109/107T (104T) 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51
225/55 R17 XL 101H/V 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51
235/55 R17 XL 103W/V 7 J x 17 H2 ET 51

225/55 R17 XL 101H/V: only for vehicles with a permissible axle load of 1,550 kg on the rear
permissible gross weight up to 3,100 kg and a axle.

R18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels

245/45 R18 XL 100W 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

245/45 R18 XL 100V 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

245/45 R18 XL 100W: only for vehicles with a 245/45 R18 XL 100V: only for vehicles with a
permissible gross weight up to 3,100 kg and a permissible gross weight up to 3,100 kg and a
permissible axle load of 1,550 kg on the rear permissible axle load of 1,550 kg on the rear
axle. Not for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight axle. Not for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight
up to 3,200 kg. up to 3,200 kg.

R19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels

245/45 R19 XL 102Y 8 J x 19 H2 ET 52

245/45 R19 XL 102Y: only for vehicles with a

permissible gross weight up to 3,200 kg and a
permissible axle load of 1,650 kg on the rear
axle. Use of snow chains is not permitted.
Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
 Wheels and tyres 265

Spare wheel wheel. The spare wheel is not equipped with

a sensor for monitoring tyre pressure.
Notes on the emergency spare wheel and
spare wheel
Fitting/removing the spare wheel
Spare wheel: wheel and tyre dimensions as well
as the type of tyre correspond to the other fitted Removing the spare wheel under the rear of
wheels. the vehicle
A fitted spare wheel changes the driving charac‐
teristics and bears risks.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐

rect wheel and tyre dimensions
Driving with the spare wheel fitted can
severely impair the vehicle's driving charac‐
teristics.
To avoid risks, observe the following points:
# Drive carefully
# Take the wheel wrench and auxiliary tool for
# Never fit more than one spare wheel the spare wheel lifter out of the vehicle tool
which is different from the wheel to be kit (/ page 247).
replaced. # Carefully prise off cover cap 1 with a suita‐
# Only use the spare wheel for a short ble tool, e.g. a screwdriver. Be careful not to
period of time. damage the paintwork or the covering cap
# Change a spare wheel which is of a dif‐ when doing so.
ferent size at the nearest qualified spe‐
cialist workshop. Be sure to pay atten‐
tion to the correct wheel and tyre
dimensions as well as the tyre type.

R When using a spare wheel (which is different

from the wheel to be replaced) a top speed of
80 km/h must not be exceeded.
R The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must be
checked before starting a journey
(/ page 251).
# Push auxiliary tool 2 through the opening
R Have the emergency spare wheel replaced by into the winch guide.
a qualified specialist workshop.
# Attach wheel wrench 3 to auxiliary tool 2
The following should be checked regularly, partic‐ for the spare wheel lifter.
ularly prior to long journeys: # Turn wheel wrench 3 in the direction of
R the secure positioning of the spare tyre arrow 5 until you feel resistance or until the
R the tyre pressure of the spare wheel (adjust friction clutch of the winch overwinds.
the tyre pressure if necessary) (/ page 251) The spare wheel is lowered.
R the fastenings of the spare wheel bracket

The spare wheel is located in a spare wheel

bracket under the rear of the vehicle.
Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare
wheel.
% If you have fitted a spare wheel, the tyre
pressure monitor will not function for this
266 Wheels and tyres

# Stow wheel wrench 3 and auxiliary tool 2

for the spare wheel lifter in the vehicle tool
kit.

# Pull the spare wheel out from under the vehi‐

cle.
# Press cable 6 downwards and hold spring
8 at an angle against wheel gripper 7.
Wheel gripper 7 is released.
# Pull wheel gripper 7 out of the wheel brace.
Fitting the spare wheel under the rear of the
vehicle
% Light-alloy wheels cannot be transported
under the vehicle. In this case, transport the
light-alloy wheel in the load compartment,
and only turn up cable 6.
# Take wheel wrench 3 and auxiliary tool 2
for the spare wheel lifter out of the vehicle
tool kit (/ page 247).
# Place the wheel on the ground with the wheel
brace pointing upwards.
# Guide wheel gripper 7 at an angle on wire
6 from above into the wheel brace.
# Slide the wheel slightly under the vehicle.
# Attach wheel wrench 3 to auxiliary tool 2
for the spare wheel lifter.
# Turn wheel wrench 3 in the direction of
arrow 4 until you feel resistance and the
friction clutch of the winch overwinds in
jerks.
The wheel is firmly secured to the underside
of the vehicle.
# Pull wheel wrench 3 and auxiliary tool 2
for the spare wheel lifter out of the opening
for the winch.
# Close the winch opening with covering cap
1.
 Technical data 267

Information on the technical data This could jeopardise the operating safety of
The technical data was determined in accordance the vehicle.
with EU Directives. The given data only applies to # Have the low-reflection exterior aerial
vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
further information at a qualified specialist work‐ # When operating two-way radios in the
shop. vehicle, always connect them to the
Only for certain countries: you can find vehicle- low-reflection exterior aerial.
specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CER‐
TIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents * NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐
are supplied when the vehicle is delivered. mit due to failure to comply with the
instructions for installation and use
On-board electronics The operating permit may be invalidated if the
Notes on work on the engine electronics instructions for installation and use of two-
way radios are not observed.
* NOTE Premature wear through improper # Only use approved frequency bands.
maintenance # Observe the maximum permissible out‐

Improper maintenance may cause vehicle put power in these frequency bands.
components to wear more quickly and the # Only use approved aerial positions.
vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated.
# Always have work on the engine elec‐
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road
tronics and related components carried Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of after‐
out at a qualified specialist workshop. market radio frequency transmitting equipment)
when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the
legal requirements for detachable parts.
Two-way radios If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply or aerial con‐
Installation notes for two-way radios nections intended for use with the fittings.
Observe the manufacturer's supplements during
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
installation.
improper work on two-way radios
Two-way radio transmission output
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit‐
ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation The maximum transmission outputs (PEAK) at the
from the two-way radios can interfere with base of the aerial must not exceed the values in
the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the the following table:
operating safety of the vehicle. Frequency band and maximum transmission
# You should have all work on electrical output
and electronic components carried out Frequency band Maximum transmis‐
at a qualified specialist workshop. sion output

& WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐ Short wave 100 W

rect operation of two-way radios 3 – 54 MHz
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle 4 m waveband 30 W
improperly, their electromagnetic radiation
can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is 74 – 88 MHz
true in the following situations, in particular: 2 m waveband 50 W
R The two-way radio is not connected to an 144 – 174 MHz
exterior aerial.
R The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or Trunked radio sys‐ 10 W
is not a low-reflection aerial. tem/Tetra
380 – 460 MHz
268 Technical data

Frequency band Maximum transmis‐

sion output
70 cm waveband 35 W
420 – 450 MHz
Two-way radio 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)

The following devices can be used in the vehicle

without restrictions: Example: vehicle identification plate
R two-way radios with a maximum transmission 1 Vehicle identification plate
output of up to 100 mW 2 Vehicle manufacturer
R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies 3 EU general operating permit number (only for
in the 380 – 410 MHz frequency band and a certain countries)
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W 4 VIN (vehicle identification number)
(trunked radio system/Tetra) 5 Permissible gross mass (kg)
R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) 6 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combina‐
tion (kg) (for specific countries only)
There are no restrictions when positioning the
7 Permissible front axle load (kg)
aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow‐
ing frequency bands: 8 Permissible rear axle load (kg)
9 Paint code
R Trunked radio system/Tetra
R 70 cm waveband Engraved VIN in the engine compartment
R 2G/3G/4G

Vehicle identification plate, vehicle identifi‐

cation number (VIN) and engine number
Vehicle identification plate

VIN 1 is engraved into the longitudinal member

in the engine compartment next to the fuse box.
Vehicle identification plate 1 is on the B-pillar
on the driver's side. Engine number
% The data is vehicle-specific and can differ The engine number is stamped onto the crank‐
from that shown. Always observe the specifi‐ case. You can obtain further information from a
cations on your vehicle's identification plate. qualified specialist workshop.
 Technical data 269

Operating fluids and capacities Further information on approved operating fluids

is available at the following locations:
Notes on operating fluids
R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating ating Fluids at https://bevo.mercedes-
fluids harmful to your health benz.com (by entering the designation)
R at a qualified specialist workshop
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐
ful to your health. Additives (special additives) for approved operat‐
# Observe the text on the original contain‐ ing fluids are neither required nor permitted.
ers when using, storing or disposing of Approved fuel additives are the exception. Addi‐
operating fluids. tives can cause engine damage and must there‐
fore not be added to the operating fluids.
# Always store operating fluids sealed in
their original containers. The use of additives is always the responsibility
of the vehicle operator. The use of additives may
# Always keep children away from operat‐
result in the restriction or loss of your warranty
ing fluids.
claims.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from

pollution due to disposing of operating fuel
fluids in a non-environmentally responsi‐
Fuels are highly flammable.
ble manner
# Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea‐
Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can tion of sparks must be avoided.
cause considerable damage to the environ‐
# Switch off the ignition and, if available,
ment.
the stationary heater, before and while
# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐
refuelling the vehicle.
ronmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following: & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
R fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
AdBlue®
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
R lubricants
# Do not inhale fuel vapour.
R coolant
# Keep children away from fuel.
R brake fluid
# Keep doors and windows closed during
R windscreen washer fluid
the refuelling process.
R climate control system refrigerants
If you or other people come into contact with
Only use products which have been approved for fuel, observe the following:
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused
# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
by the use of products that have not been
approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz soap and water.
guarantee or goodwill gestures. # If fuel comes into contact with your

You can identify operating fluids approved by eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on oughly with clean water. Seek medical
the container: attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) ing.
# Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
270 Technical data

Fuel
Notes on fuel grades on vehicles with petrol
engines
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 269).

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, engine
and exhaust system. 1 For petrol with maximum 5% ethanol by vol‐
# Only refuel using premium-grade unlea‐ ume
ded petrol that conforms to European 2 For petrol with maximum 10% ethanol by vol‐
standard EN 228 or an equivalent speci‐ ume
fication.
According to European standard EN 16942 you
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by can find the compatibility indications at the fol‐
volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with lowing locations:
E10 fuel. R on the vehicle on the instruction label in the
Never refuel with the following: fuel filler flap
R diesel R throughout Europe on the fuel pumps or
pump nozzles suitable for your vehicle
R petrol with more than 10% ethanol by vol‐
ume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐
R petrol with more than 3% methanol by vol‐ phur, this can produce unpleasant odours.
ume, e.g. M15, M30, M50, M85, M100 The recommended octane number for your vehi‐
R petrol with additives containing metal cle can be found on the instruction label in the
fuel filler flap (/ page 147).
# Do not mix such fuels with the fuel rec‐ Further information on fuel can be obtained at a
ommended for your vehicle. filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.
If you have accidentally refuelled with the Notes on additives in petrol
wrong fuel: Observe the notes on operating fluids
# do not switch the ignition on. (/ page 269).
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
additives
* NOTE Malfunctions due to contaminated
fuel Even small amounts of the wrong additive
may lead to malfunctions.
Fuel contamination can lead to malfunctions
# Only add cleaning additives recommen‐
in the fuel system.
ded for Mercedes-Benzto the fuel.
# If you are using drums or canisters to
refuel the vehicle, you should filter the Mercedes-Benz recommends using brand-name
fuel before filling. fuels with additives.
In some countries, the available fuel may not con‐
The following compatibility indications for fuel
tain sufficient amounts of additives. Deposits
apply to your vehicle.
could build up in the fuel injection system as a
result.
In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-
Benz service centre, the fuel should be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
 Technical data 271

You must observe the notes and mixing ratios In accordance with the European standard
indicated on the tank. EN 16942, you will find the compatibility marks
for fuel in the following places:
Notes on fuel quality for vehicles with diesel
engines R On the vehicle on the information label in the
fuel filler flap
General notes R Throughout Europe on the fuel dispenser or
Observe the notes on operating fluids pump nozzles suitable for your vehicle
(/ page 269).

& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash
point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
pure diesel fuel.
# Never refuel using petrol in diesel
engines.
# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel 1 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% by vol‐
ume bio-diesel (fatty acid methyl ester)
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
# Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel
that conforms to European standard
EN 590, or an equivalent specification.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel
fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel
fuel with a sulphur content less than
50 ppm.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels: 2 For paraffinic diesel fuel
R Petrol
XTL-compatible vehicles
R Marine diesel Alternatively, you can also refuel with paraffinic
R Heating oil diesel fuel (e.g. HVO=hydrogenated vegetable oil,
R Pure fatty acid methyl ester (bio-diesel) or GTL=Gas-To-Liquid) that complies with the Euro‐
vegetable oil pean standard EN 15940. Paraffinic diesel fuels
are collectively known as XTL.
R Paraffin or kerosene
% Refuel with paraffinic diesel fuels to
If you have accidentally refuelled with the EN 15940 only if the appropriate compati‐
wrong fuel: bility mark is present in your fuel filler
# Do not switch the ignition on. flap.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. B10- fatty acid methyl ester
Mercedes-Benz approves the use of B10 fatty
* NOTE Malfunction due to contaminated acid methyl ester (low-sulphur diesel fuel with a
fuel maximum of up to 10% by volume fatty acid
methyl ester) for all vehicles with Euro 5 diesel
Impurities in the fuel can lead to malfunctions engines with Common Rail Direct Injector (CDI).
of the fuel system.
You may only refuel with the approved fatty acid
# If you are using drums or canisters to
methyl ester if the fatty acid methyl ester propor‐
refuel the vehicle, you should filter the tion conforms to the ASTM D6751 Standard. It
fuel before filling. must also have the required oxidation stability of
at least 6 h, in accordance with the EN 14112
272 Technical data

Standard. The sulphur content of the diesel fuel Tank content and reserve fuel
may not exceed the limit values for the sulphur The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
content of diesel fuel stated above. Only depending on the vehicle equipment.
approved fatty acid methyl ester with this fuel
quality can avoid damage being caused due to Capacity
residue build-up and/or corrosion. Model Total capacity
Pure fatty acid methyl ester and diesel fuel that
Vehicles with a diesel Approx. 57 litres
has a higher percentage of fatty acid methyl
engine: or
ester, for example, B20, could damage the fuel
system and the engine. Approx. 70 litres
The identification of the fatty acid methyl ester on
Vehicles with a petrol Approx. 70 litres
the fuel dispenser must clearly indicate that it ful‐
engine
fils the standard for low-sulphur diesel fuel. If the
identification is not clear, do not refuel. Model Of which reserve
Sulphur content by weight fuel
Vehicles with a diesel Approx. 10 litres
* NOTE Damage to the emission control engine:
system for vehicles with diesel particu‐
late filters Vehicles with a petrol Approx. 13 litres
engine
If you use diesel fuel with a sulphur content
that is too high, the emission control system
may be damaged. AdBlue®
# In countries without sulphur-free diesel
fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel Notes on AdBlue®
fuel with a sulphur content less than Observe the notes on operating fluids
50 ppm. (/ page 269).
AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
Vehicle without diesel particulate filter: In gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.
countries in which only diesel fuel with a higher It may be improper or punishable in some coun‐
sulphur content is available, the vehicle's engine
tries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue® or
oil change is carried out at shorter intervals. Fur‐
one that does not comply with the specifications
ther information on oil change intervals can be
of these operating instructions.
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Information about current country-specific sul‐ * NOTE Damage caused by additives in
phur content is available: AdBlue® or by diluting AdBlue®
R At any Mercedes-Benz service centre
The AdBlue® exhaust gas aftertreatment sys‐
R At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.comunder tem could be destroyed by the following:
the specifications on Sheet Number 136.2
R additives in AdBlue®
Notes on low outside temperatures R diluting AdBlue®
Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel
fuel as possible at the beginning of winter. # Only use AdBlue® in accordance with
Before switching to winter diesel fuel, the fuel ISO 22241.
tank should be as empty as possible. When first # Do not mix additives.
refuelling with winter diesel fuel, only refuel using # Do not dilute AdBlue®.
a small amount, for example, to reserve level. The
next time you refuel, fill the fuel tank again nor‐
mally.
Further information on fuel is available:
R At a filling station
R At a qualified specialist workshop
 Technical data 273

* NOTE Damage and malfunctions caused function display and on the minimum top-up
quantity when the fuel tank is empty is also to be
by impurities in AdBlue®
understood as guide values.
Impurities in AdBlue® result in the following: Display the AdBlue® range and level
R higher emission values (/ page 183).
R damage to the catalytic converter
R engine damage Engine oil
R malfunctions in the AdBlue® exhaust gas Notes on engine oil
aftertreatment system Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 269).
# Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.

AdBlue® residue crystallises after some time and

stain the affected surfaces. Clean the dirty surfa‐
ces with water as soon as possible.
If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of
ammonia vapour may be released. Do not inhale
any ammonia vapours that may be released. Fill
the AdBlue® tank only in well-ventilated areas.
AdBlue® consumption and filling capacity
Filling capacities * NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
The total capacity of the AdBlue® tank may vary, tives
depending on the vehicle equipment.
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters
Total capacity of AdBlue® tank which do not correspond to the specifi‐
Vehicle Total capacity cations explicitly prescribed for the
service intervals.
All models 11.5 l, 24 l or 25 l # Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
AdBlue® consumption than prescribed.
Like fuel consumption, AdBlue® consumption is
highly dependent upon driving style and operat‐
# Do not use additives.
ing conditions. AdBlue® consumption is usually # Have the engine oil renewed at regular
within a range of 0 and 5% of the fuel consump‐ intervals.
tion. If necessary, AdBlue® must be refilled in
accordance with the instructions when the refill Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil
message is displayed in the instrument cluster. changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
This may also be necessary between the sched‐ Only Mercedes-Benz-approved engine oils may be
uled maintenance. used in Mercedes-Benz engines.
Check the AdBlue® fill level before making jour‐ Further information on engine oil and oil filter:
neys outside of Europe. R in the Mercedes-Benz Specification for
Service Products at https://bevo.mercedes-
AdBlue® range and fill level
benz.com (by entering the designation)
The AdBlue® fill level and range can be displayed
R at a qualified specialist workshop
via the on-board computer. The AdBlue® range
shown depends strongly on the driving style and
operating conditions. The actual range can there‐
fore deviate from the range currently displayed in
the on-board computer. The information supplied
in the Owner's Manual regarding the reserve
quantity at the first display warning in the multi‐
274 Technical data

Quality and capacity of engine oil vapour pockets may form in the brake system
MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval when the brakes are applied hard.
This impairs the braking effect.
Petrol engines MB-Freigabe orMB-
Approval # Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
All models 229.5, 229.6*
Diesel engines MB-Freigabe orMB- * NOTE Damage to paint, plastic or rubber
Approval by brake fluid

All models 228.51, 229.31, There is a risk of damage to property if brake

229.51, 229.52, fluid comes into contact with paint, plastic or
229.71* rubber.
# If paint, plastic or rubber comes into
* recommended for lowest possible fuel con‐ contact with brake fluid, rinse with
sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each water immediately.
case; observe possible restrictions of the
approved SAE viscosity classes) Observe the notes on paintwork/matt finish
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, paintwork care (/ page 228).
it is recommended to use the engine oil specifica‐ Have the brake fluid renewed every two years at
tions marked in the table for the lowest SAE vis‐ a qualified specialist workshop.
cosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
the approved SAE viscosity classes. in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
If the engine oils listed in the table are not availa‐ 331.0.
ble, you may add a maximum 1.0 l of the follow‐ Information on brake fluid is available at the fol‐
ing engine oils once only: lowing locations:
R vehicles with petrol engines: MB-Freigabe R in the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Oper‐
or MB-Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B4 ating Fluids 331.0
R vehicles with diesel engines: MB-Freigabe - at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
or MB-Approval 228.5, 229.3 or
- in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
229.5ACEA C3
R at a qualified specialist workshop
Replacement amount
Petrol engines Engine oil Coolant
All models Approximately 7.7 l Notes on coolant
Observe the notes on operating fluids
Diesel engines Engine oil
(/ page 269).
All models Approximately 9.0 l
& WARNING Risk of fire‑ and injury from
antifreeze
Notes on brake fluid
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com‐
Observe the notes on operating fluids ponent parts in the engine compartment, it
(/ page 269). may ignite.
# Allow the engine to cool down before
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to you top up the antifreeze.
vapour pockets forming in the brake sys‐ # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
tem
next to the filler opening.
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture # Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of component parts before starting the
the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vehicle.
 Technical data 275

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐ Windscreen washer fluid

ant Notes on windscreen washer fluid
# Only add coolant that has been pre‐ Observe the notes on operating fluids
mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐ (/ page 269).
tection.
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to
Information on coolant is available at the follow‐ windscreen washer concentrate
ing locations: Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
R in the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Oper‐ flammable. It could ignite if it comes into con‐
ating Fluids 320.1 tact with hot engine component parts or the
exhaust system.
- at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
# Make sure that no windscreen washer
- in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
concentrate spills out next to the filler
R at a qualified specialist workshop opening.

* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting
peratures
due to unsuitable windscreen washer
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine fluid
cooling system is not sufficiently protected
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may
against overheating and corrosion at high out‐
damage the plastic surface of the exterior
side temperatures.
lighting.
# Always use coolant approved by
# Only use windscreen washer fluids
Mercedes-Benz .
which are also suitable for use on plas‐
# Observe the instructions in the
tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐ WinterFit.
ating Fluids 320.1.
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
* NOTE Paintwork damage due to coolant mixing windscreen washer fluids
# Do not spill coolant on painted surfa‐ # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐
ces. terFit with other windscreen washer flu‐
ids.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Other‐
Note the proportion of anti-corrosion agent/anti‐ wise, the fill level sensor may give a false reading.
freeze in the engine cooling system within the fol‐ Recommended windscreen washer fluid:
lowing temperature ranges:
R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R at least 50% (antifreeze protection up to
R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
about -37°C)
R maximum 55% (antifreeze protection up to For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐
-45°C) tion on the anti-freeze container.
Mix the washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid
Capacities, coolant
all year round.
Coolant capacity
Model Capacity Refrigerant

All models Approx. 10.4 l Notes on refrigerant

Observe the notes on operating fluids
Approx. 13.4 l (/ page 269).
on vehicles with auxil‐
iary heating
276 Technical data

% Your vehicle's climate control system may be Vehicle data

filled with the refrigerant R134a. The refriger‐
ant R134a contains fluorinated greenhouse Information on vehicle dimensions
gas. The following section contains important techni‐
cal data for your vehicle. Your vehicle documents
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect refrig‐ contain further vehicle-specific and equipment-
erant dependent technical data such as vehicle dimen‐
If an incorrect refrigerant is used, this can sions and weights.
damage the climate control system. Current technical data can also be found online
# Use only the refrigerant R‑134a or the at https://www.mercedes-benz.com.
PAG oil approved for your vehicle by The values specified may vary as a result of the
Mercedes-Benz. following variables:
# The approved PAG oil must not be mixed R tyres
with any other PAG oil that is not R loading
approved for R‑134a refrigerant.
R condition of the suspension
Maintenance work, such as topping up the refrig‐ R optional equipment
erant or replacing components, may be carried
out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard
J639, must be adhered to.
Have all work on the climate control system car‐
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
The information label for the refrigerant type
used can be found on the radiator cross-member.

Opening range
All models
1 Height of the tailgate when 2153 mm
opened
2 Opening range of the tail‐ 1047 mm
gate
Example: refrigerant information label Vehicle dimensions
1 Warning symbols
All models
2 Refrigerant capacity
3 Applicable standards Vehicle length
4 PAG oil part number Compact version 4895 mm
5 Refrigerant type Long version 5140 mm
Warning symbols 1 refer to the following: Extra-long body 5370 mm
R Potential dangers Vehicle width
R The performance of maintenance work at a Including outside mirrors 2249 mm
qualified specialist workshop
Excluding outside mirrors 1928 mm
Load width 1205 mm
Vehicle height
 Technical data 277

All models Overview of mounting dimensions

Loading height
Compact version 1327 mm
Long version 1326 mm
Extra-long body 1297 mm
Wheelbase
Compact version 3200 mm
Long version 3200 mm
Extra-long body 3430 mm

Trailer hitch
Notes on the trailer hitch
1 Fastening points
& WARNING Risk of accident due to imper‐
2 Distance from road surface
missible attachment of a trailer tow hitch
If you install a trailer tow hitch or other com‐ The distance between the trailer hitch and the
ponents, the longitudinal frame member is road surface on an unladen vehicle depends on
weakened and can break. The trailer may the vehicle type and the vehicle's equipment.
become detached from the vehicle. Thus, it cannot be specified. The distance to the
road surface of a laden vehicle is between 350
There is a risk of an accident. mm and 420 mm.
Only retrofit a trailer tow hitch if permissible.

Observe the notes on trailer operation Trailer loads

(/ page 176). When towing a trailer, the permissible gross vehi‐
Retrofitting a trailer hitch is only permissible if a cle weight is increased by 100 kg for vehicles
towing capacity is specified in your vehicle docu‐ with passenger vehicle approval. The maximum
ments. permissible rear axle load may be exceeded by
Only use a trailer hitch which has been tested 150 kg when towing a trailer.
and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for The road speed of the vehicle must be limited to
your vehicle. a maximum of 100 km/h in accordance with
Directive 92/21/EEC.
The permissible weights and loads which must
not be exceeded can also be obtained from the
following sources of information:
R Vehicle documents
R The type plates of the trailer hitch, trailer and
vehicle
If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
When driving in mountainous areas, note that the
engine power output, and with it the gradient
climbing capability of the vehicle, decrease with
increasing elevation.
The following values apply for a minimum start-
off gradeability of 12%.
278 Technical data

Maximum permissible gross combination weight, trailer loads and noseweight

Permissible gross mass of vehicle combination 4800 – 5700 kg

Permissible towing capacity, braked 2000 – 2500 kg
Permissible towing capacity, unbraked 750 kg
Permissible noseweight 100 kg

Lashing points and carrier systems Maximum roof load / pairs of roof rack sup‐
ports
Loading capacity of the lashing points and
tie-down eyes Maximum roof load Minimum number
of pairs of supports
Observe the notes on securing loads
(/ page 214). 150 kg 3
Nominal tensile load is the maximum permissible
This information applies if the load is distributed
pulling force on the lashing point.
evenly across the entire roof area.
Guide rails If the roof luggage rack is shorter, reduce the
The nominal tensile load of the lashing points of a load proportionately. The maximum load per pair
guide rail is 350 daN if you observe the following: of roof rack supports is 50 kg. The maximum load
of basic carrier bars for rail is 100 kg.
R the load on the load compartment floor is
secured to two lashing points on the rail The driving, braking and steering characteristics
of the vehicle will change with the type of load,
R the distance to the nearest load-securing
the weight and the centre of gravity of the load.
point on the same rail is approximately 1 m
Comply with the loading guidelines and further
information about load distribution
Information about roof luggage racks (/ page 213).
Observe the notes on the carrier systems
(/ page 219).

* NOTE Risk of accident if the maximum

permissible roof load is exceeded
If the weight of the roof luggage, including the
roof luggage rack, exceeds the maximum per‐
missible roof load, there is a risk of an acci‐
dent.
# Ensure that the weight of the roof lug‐
gage and roof luggage rack does not
exceed the maximum permissible roof
load.
# Arrange the supporting feet of the roof
luggage rack at an even distance from
each other.
# Install the basic carrier bars for rail in
front of and behind the mid-section sup‐
port.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 279

Display messages # With the = or ; button, select the

Service menu.
Introduction
# With the : or 9 button, select
Notes on display messages Announcements.
The bar will show the number of saved mes‐
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an sages.
instrument cluster malfunction # Press a to confirm.
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal‐ The first saved display message will be dis‐
functioned, you may not notice restrictions to played.
safety-relevant system functions. If there are no display messages, the display
The operating safety of your vehicle may be will show No messages.
impaired. # Press the : or 9 button to scroll
# Drive on carefully. through the display messages.
# Have the vehicle checked immediately All saved display messages are numbered in
at a qualified specialist workshop. the message memory. The current message
number is shown on the lowest bar of the dis‐
The on-board computer shows messages and play as a means of orientation, together with
warnings from specific systems on the instru‐ the number of saved display messages.
ment cluster display. Ensure that your vehicle is # Press % to exit the display messages
operating safely at all times. screen.
If you are uncertain regarding the operational
safety of your vehicle, park the vehicle safely as
soon as possible. Inform a qualified specialist
workshop.
Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐
plified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from
the symbols on the display.
The display shows high-priority display messages
in red. A warning tone will also sound for specific
display messages.
Please act in accordance with the display mes‐
sages and follow the additional notes in this Own‐
er's Manual.
You can hide low-priority display messages using
the a or % steering-wheel button. The dis‐
play messages will be saved to the message
memory. Rectify the cause of a display message
as quickly as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
The display will show these display messages
permanently until the cause of the display mes‐
sage has been rectified.
Calling up saved display messages
The on-board computer saves specific display
messages to the message memory. You can call
up the saved display messages. Use the buttons
on the steering wheel.
# Press the ò button to call up the list of
menus.
280 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS, BAS, hill start assist and ESP® as well as its driving safety sys‐
tems are unavailable due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could

÷
be automatically deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
inoperative See Owner's
Manual & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunc‐
tioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not per‐
form any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired
and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving
safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop.

!
* ABS, BAS, hill start assist and ESP® as well as its driving safety sys‐
tems are temporarily unavailable.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could

÷
be automatically deactivated.
The on-board electrical system voltage may be insufficient, for
example.
currently unavailable The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
See Owner's Manual functions listed above.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunc‐

tioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not per‐
form any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired
and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving
safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully and, on a suitable stretch of road, make some

slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h.
# Check whether the display message has disappeared and ESP®
is operational.

If the display message continues to be shown:

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 281

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front-passenger airbag * The front passenger airbag is disabled while the vehicle is in motion
disabled See Owner's even though an adult or a person with a corresponding build is
Manual occupying the front passenger seat.
If additional forces are applied to the seat or the front passenger is
not sitting on the seat surface properly (/ page 33), the weight the
system detects may be too low.

& WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front
passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed
in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended pro‐
tective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example,
come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the per‐
son is sitting too close to the dashboard.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both
before and during the journey.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con‐

ditions.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front
passenger seat.
# Switch off the ignition.
# The front passenger must get out of the vehicle.
# Make sure that the front passenger seat is unoccupied, close
the front passenger door and switch on the ignition.
# Observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the
centre console and the display messages.
# With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on, check
the following:
R The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up
continuously. If the indicator lamp is lit, the automatic front
passenger airbag actuation has disabled the front passenger
airbag (/ page 33).
R The display must not show the messages Front-passenger
airbag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger air-
bag disabled See Owner's Manual.
# Wait for at least one minute until the necessary system checks
have been completed.
# Ensure that the display does not show either of the two display
messages about the front passenger airbag.

If these conditions are met, the front passenger seat can be occu‐
pied again.
If these conditions are not met, the automatic front passenger air‐
bag actuation is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
282 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Further information on airbag shutoff can be found under "Auto‐
matic front passenger airbag actuation" (/ page 33).
Front-passenger airbag * The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion
enabled See Owner's although:
Manual R the front passenger seat is occupied by a child in a child
restraint system or a person of small stature.
or
R the front passenger seat is not occupied.

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the
weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-

facing child restraint system while the front passenger air‐
bag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system
on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in
the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat
with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH
of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con‐

ditions.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front
passenger seat.
# Switch off the ignition.
# Open the front passenger door.
# Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front
passenger seat.
# Make sure there are no objects applying additional weight to the
seat.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the vehicle occupant's weight on the front passenger
seat as greater than it actually is.
# Make sure that the front passenger seat is unoccupied, close
the front passenger door and switch on the ignition.
# Observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the
centre console and the display.
# With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on, check
the following:
R The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up
continuously. If the indicator lamp is lit, the automatic front
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 283

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

passenger airbag actuation has disabled the front passenger
airbag.
R The display must not show the messages Front-passenger
airbag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger air-
bag disabled See Owner's Manual.
# Wait for at least one minute until the necessary system checks
have been completed.
# Ensure that the display does not show either of the two display
messages about the front passenger airbag.

If these conditions are met, the front passenger seat can be occu‐
pied again. Observe the notes on seat occupancy recognition and
the result of the classification of the automatic front passenger air‐
bag actuation (/ page 33).
If these conditions are not met, the automatic front passenger air‐
bag actuation is malfunctioning.
# Fit the child restraint system to a suitable rear seat.

or
# Seat a person of small stature on a suitable rear seat.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Further information on airbag shutoff can be found under "Auto‐

matic front passenger airbag actuation" (/ page 33).
Check brake pad wear * The brakepads have reached their wear limit.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with all-wheel * The brake system is overheating in vehicles with all-wheel drive.
drive: Traction control and braking power will be impaired.

J & WARNING Risk of accident due to overheated brake system

If you rest your foot on the brake pedal during while driving, the
Caution Brakes overhea- brake system may overheat.
ted Drive carefully This increases the braking distance and the brake system may
even fail.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

# Do not press the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simul‐

taneously while driving.

# Drive on carefully.
When the brake system has cooled down, the display message
will disappear. Traction control will then be fully operational
again.

J
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

Check brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the brak‐
ing characteristics may be impaired.
284 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Do not top up the brake fluid.

T
* EBD is unavailable due to a malfunction. This means that ABS, BAS,
hill start assist and ESP® as well as its driving safety systems, for
example, are also unavailable.

!
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could
be automatically deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

÷
functions listed above.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are mal‐
inoperative See Owner's functioning
Manual The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not per‐
form any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired
and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving
safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop.

÷
* ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could
be automatically deactivated.
inoperative See Owner's The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
Manual functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock up at an
early stage in the event of maximum full-stop braking, for example.
This will severely impair steerability and braking. Braking distance
may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabili‐
sation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷
* ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could
currently unavailable be automatically deactivated.
See Owner's Manual The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock up at an
early stage in the event of maximum full-stop braking, for example.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 285

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

This will severely impair steerability and braking. Braking distance
may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabili‐
sation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer‐

ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.
The functions mentioned above will be available again when the
display message goes out.

If the display message continues to be shown:

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!
* The red ! indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights up.
A warning tone also sounds.
You are driving with the parking brake applied or performing emer‐
Release parking brake gency braking using the parking brake.
# Release the parking brake (/ page 152).

!
* The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red ! indicator
lamp is off.
The parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. after the starter battery
Parking brake See Own- has been disconnected.
er's Manual Releasing the parking brake:
# Switch the ignition off and back on again.

# Depress the brake pedal and briefly pull the handle of the park‐
ing brake (/ page 152).
# After around ten seconds, push down the handle of the parking
brake.

If the yellow ! warning lamp is off:

# Release the parking brake.

If the yellow ! warning lamp remains lit:

# Do not drive on.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission

to j.
# Turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

286 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow ! warning lamp and the red ! indicator lamp light
up.
The parking brake is malfunctioning.
Releasing the parking brake:
# Switch the ignition off and back on again.

# Release the parking brake.

If the parking brake still cannot be released:

# Do not drive on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning

lamp lights up.
The parking brake is malfunctioning.
# Switch the ignition off and back on again.

# Release or apply the parking brake.

If the red ! indicator lamp continues flashing:

# Do not drive on.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission

to j.
# Turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

!
* The red ! indicator lamp lights up.
You have tried to release the parking brake without depressing the
brake pedal.
Depress brake pedal to # Depress the brake pedal.
release # To release, pull the handle on the parking brake.

PRE-SAFE inoperative * Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
See Owner's Manual safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Information on these functions can be found under "PRE‑SAFE®

(anticipatory occupant protection)" (/ page 36).

6
* The restraint system is malfunctioning. In addition, the 6 warn‐
ing lamp on the instrument cluster lights up.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint

Restraint sys. malfunc- system
tion Consult workshop
Components in the restraint system may be activated uninten‐
tionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immedi‐
ately at a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 287

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Further information on the restraint system and its components can
be found under "Occupant safety".

6
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning. In addition,
the 6 warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint

Front left malfunction system
Consult workshop (exam‐
ple) Components in the restraint system may be activated uninten‐
tionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immedi‐
ately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6
* The corresponding window airbag is malfunctioning. In addition, the
6 warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction

Left windowbag malfunc- in the windowbag
tion Consult work-
shop (example) The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not
be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
# Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

120 km/h Maximum * For certain countries only: the maximum permissible speed has
speed exceeded been exceeded.
# Drive more slowly.

À
* ATTENTION ASSIST has failed.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST inop-

erative

ATTENTION ASSIST: * Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue
Take a break! or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver.
A warning tone also sounds.
# If necessary, take a break.

On long journeys, take regular and timely breaks that allow you to
rest properly.
Active Distance Assist * An activation condition for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has
- - - km/h not been fulfilled.
288 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Comply with the activation conditions for Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC (/ page 162).
Active Distance Assist * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been deactivated
Off (/ page 162).
In the event of a deactivation not initiated by the driver, a warning
tone sounds as well.
Active Distance Assist * A warning tone also sounds. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
inoperative malfunctioning. In addition, BAS may have failed.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist * A warning tone also sounds. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and
and Limiter inoperative the limiter are malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist * You are accelerating. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
suspended intervene for the duration of the acceleration process.
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC will be activated again.
Active Distance Assist * A warning tone also sounds.
currently unavailable Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been switched off and is
See Owner's Manual temporarily non-operational.
The following causes are possible:
R The function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
R The radar sensor system is temporarily non-operational, e.g. due
to electromagnetic radiation close to TV or radio transmitting
stations or other sources of radiation.
R The system is outside the operating temperature range.
R The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.

If the causes mentioned above no longer apply, the display message

will disappear and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC will be opera‐
tional again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Restart the engine.

Active Distance Assist * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again following
available again temporary non-availability. You can now switch Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC on again (/ page 163).
Active Brake Assist Func- * Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction.
tions limited See Own- # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
er's Manual

Active Brake Assist Func- * Active Brake Assist is temporarily non-operational.

tions currently limited The following causes are possible:
See Owner's Manual
R The sensors in the front bumper are dirty.
R The function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 289

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

R The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations
or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
R The system is outside the operating temperature range.
R The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.

If the causes mentioned above no longer apply, the display message

will disappear and Active Brake Assist will be operational again.
If the display message does not go out:
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Switch off the engine.

# Clean the sensors in the front bumper (/ page 229).

# Restart the engine.

Radar sensors dirty See * A warning tone also sounds.

Owner's Manual At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys‐
tems is temporarily non-operational or operational only on a restric‐
ted basis:
R Active Brake Assist
R Blind Spot Assist
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

The following causes are possible:

R The sensors in the radiator grille and/or in the bumpers are
dirty.
R The function of the driving system or driving safety system is
impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
If the causes mentioned above no longer apply, the display message
will disappear and the driving systems or driving safety systems will
be operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Switch off the engine.

# Clean the sensors in the following places:

R In the radiator grille
R In the front bumper
R In the rear bumper
# Restart the engine.

Limiter - - - km/h * The limiter cannot be activated while you have the accelerator pedal
depressed beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
# If conditions permit, drive at a speed greater than 30 km/h and
store the speed.
290 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Limiter passive * You have the accelerator pedal depressed beyond the point of
resistance. Whilst you are accelerating, the limiter does not control
your speed.
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The limiter will be
reactivated and will limit your speed.
Cruise control - - - km/h * An activation condition for cruise control has not been met.
For example, you are aiming to store a speed below 30 km/h.
# If conditions permit, drive at a speed greater than 30 km/h and
store the speed.
# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control
(/ page 159).
Cruise control and Lim- * A warning tone also sounds. Cruise control and the limiter are mal‐
iter inoperative functioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist not * Blind Spot Assist is switched off during trailer operation.
available when towing a # Acknowledge the display message with the a steering wheel
trailer See Owner's Man- button.
ual

Blind Spot Assist inoper- * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

ative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist cur- * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily non-operational.

rently unavailable See The following causes are possible:
Owner's Manual
R The function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
R The radar sensor system is temporarily non-operational, e.g. due
to electromagnetic radiation close to TV or radio transmitting
stations or other sources of radiation.
R The system is outside the operating temperature range.

If the causes mentioned above no longer apply, the display message

will disappear and Lane Keeping Assist will be operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Switch off the engine.

# Restart the engine.

Ã
* DSR has been switched on but is not active as you are driving at a
speed greater than 18 km/h. If you drive at a speed below 18 km/h,
DSR will automatically brake again to the set speed.
--- km/h

Ã
* DSR was deactivated.
If it was not deactivated by the driver, e.g. due to a malfunction of
the ESP®, a warning tone also sounds.
Off
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 291

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ã
* A warning tone also sounds. DSR is unavailable due to a malfunc‐
tion.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

inoperative

Active Parking Assist * An acoustic signal sounds as well. The active parking assistance
cancelled systems have been cancelled and Active Parking Assist will auto‐
matically be aborted. You have touched the steering wheel, for
example, or have driven at too high a speed.
# Steer and brake manually.

# Repeat the parking procedure if necessary. Comply with the

deactivation conditions (/ page 169).
Active Parking Assist * PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or defective.
inoperative # Comply with the instructions and aids in "Function of
PARKTRONIC"(/ page 166).
# If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a
qualified specialist workshop:
* Active Parking Assist is not available or is malfunctioning.
# Switch off the ignition.

# Restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed, or if the display

does not show the j symbol:
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Lane Keeping Assist * Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Lane Keeping Assist cur- * Lane Keeping Assist has been switched off and is temporarily non-
rently unavailable See operational.
Owner's Manual The following causes are possible:
R The windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
R Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
R Lane markings are absent for a long period of time.
R The lane markings are worn, dark or covered by dirt or snow, for
example.
If the causes mentioned above no longer apply, the display message
will disappear and Lane Keeping Assist will be operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Clean the windscreen.

Traffic Sign Assist inoper- * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

ative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
292 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Traffic Sign Assist cur- * Traffic Sign Assist has been switched off and is temporarily non-
rently unavailable See operational.
Owner's Manual The following causes are possible:
R The windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
R Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

If the causes mentioned above no longer apply, the display message

will disappear and Traffic Sign Assist will be operational again.
If the display message does not go out:
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Clean the windscreen.

ë
* The HOLD function has been deactivated. The vehicle has started
skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
Off # Switch the HOLD function on again later (/ page 165).

* The HOLD function has been deactivated. An activation condition

will no longer be met when the brake pedal is depressed.
A warning tone also sounds.
# Check the activation conditions of the HOLD function
(/ page 165).

Â
* The vehicle level may be lowered for the following reasons:
R You have selected a different drive program.
R You have exceeded the speed limit.
Lowering

Á
* The vehicle level may be raised for the following reasons:
R You have selected a different drive program.
R You have fallen below the speed limit.
Vehicle rising

Á
* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the com‐
pressor first needs to cool down to enable the selected driving level
to be set.
Compressor is cooling When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue
rising to the selected vehicle level.
# Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make
sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.

ä
* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's han‐
dling characteristics may be affected.

* NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be

Malfunction See Own- damaged by large steering movements
er's Manual
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for
scraping sounds.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 293

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle
in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher
vehicle level if possible.

# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not

exceed 80 km/h.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* A warning tone also sounds.
The battery is no longer being charged for one of the following rea‐
sons:
See Owner's Manual R defective alternator
R torn poly-V belt
R malfunction in the electronics

# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and

switch off the engine.
Do not continue driving. If you do, the engine may overheat.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

!
* There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Clean the fuel filter

?
* A warning tone also sounds. The coolant is too hot.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

Coolant Stop vehicle If you open the bonnet when the engine has overheated or when
Switch engine off there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situa‐
tions may occur:
R You could come into contact with hot gases.
R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping oper‐
ating fluids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the
bonnet closed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded.
# Let the motor cool down before opening the cap.
294 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety
glasses.
# Open the cap slowly to release pressure.

# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and

switch off the engine.
# Monitor the coolant temperature display ? on the instrument
cluster.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down.
# Ensure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
# Avoiding high engine loads, drive on to the nearest qualified spe‐
cialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant tempera‐
ture display remains below 120°C.

?
* The fan motor is defective.
# Check the coolant temperature display ? on the instrument
cluster.
If the coolant temperature is below 120°C, you can continue driving
to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Avoid high engine loads, e.g. driving on hilly roads or stop-and-go
driving.

+
* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

Top up coolant See Own- # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
er’s Manual
# Top up with coolant, following the notes on coolant
(/ page 225).

If you frequently need to top up the coolant:

# Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

¸
* The engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace air cleaner

4
* A warning tone also sounds. The oil level in your vehicle has fallen to
the minimum.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient

Check eng. oil lev. when engine oil
next refuelling
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest

(/ page 223).
# If necessary, top up the engine oil (/ page 224).
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 295

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

If engine oil frequently needs to be topped up:
# Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

4
* The oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and
switch off the engine.
Engine oil level Stop vehi- # Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
cle Switch engine off # Check the oil level (/ page 223).

# If necessary, top up the engine oil (/ page 224).

6
* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
Operation of the auxiliary heating (stationary heater) is deactivated
in the reserve range.
Reserve fuel level # Refuel the vehicle.

Ï
* There is very little fuel in the fuel tank.
# It is absolutely essential to refuel at the nearest filling station.

AdBlue®

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ø
* A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® level has fallen below the
reserve range.
# Top up with AdBlue® as soon as possible (/ page 149).
Refill AdBlue See Own-
er’s Manual

Ø
* A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® level is sufficient only for
the distance displayed. If you subsequently start the engine again,
you will be able to drive the vehicle only at a maximum speed of
20 km/h for the distance shown. Engine management will then pre‐
Refill AdBlue Emer. oper.
vent the engine from starting.
in XXX km See Owner's
Manual # Top up with AdBlue® immediately (/ page 149).

Ø
* A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can
drive the distance shown at a maximum speed of 20 km/h. If you
subsequently switch off the engine, the engine management system
will prevent the engine from being started again. You will then be
Limp-home mode: 20
km/h No start ... km able to start the engine only once you have refilled the AdBlue®
See Owner's Manual. tank.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Top up with AdBlue® immediately (/ page 149).

296 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ø
* A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no
longer start the engine.
# Top up with at least 8 l AdBlue®(/ page 149).
Refill AdBlue Start not # Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and wait for
possible approximately one minute.
The engine can be restarted once the engine management has
detected the new level.

¯
* A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system Malfunc-

tion See Owner's Manual

¯
* A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
The displayed distance is the maximum you can drive. If you subse‐
quently start the engine again, you will be able to drive the vehicle
only at a maximum speed of 20 km/h for the distance shown. After
AdBlue malfunction
that, the engine management system will prevent the engine from
Emer. oper. in XXX km
being started again.
See Owner's Manual
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

¯
* A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
You may continue to drive the displayed distance at a maximum
speed of 20 km/h. If you subsequently switch off the engine, the
engine management system will prevent the engine from being star‐
Limp-home mode: 20
ted again.
km/h No start ... km
See Owner's Manual. # Drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and
consult a qualified specialist workshop.

¯
* A warning tone also sounds. The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
You can no longer start the engine.
# Inform a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Refill AdBlue Start not
possible

Tyres

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Rectify tyre pressure * The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the differ‐
ence in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great.
# Check the tyre pressure at the next opportunity .

# Correct the tyre pressure as necessary.

# Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 255).

Check tyre(s) * A warning tone also sounds.

The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 297

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pres‐

sure
R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and brak‐
ing may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle without steering or braking suddenly. Pay atten‐

tion to the traffic conditions.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Check the tyres. If necessary, replace the wheel (/ page 259).
# Check the tyre pressure. Correct the tyre pressure as neces‐
sary .
Warning tyre defect * The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre

R The tyres can overheat and cause a fire.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and brak‐
ing may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Do not drive on with a flat tyre.

# Observe the notes on flat tyres.

# Stop the vehicle without steering or braking suddenly. Pay atten‐

tion to the traffic conditions.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Check the tyres. If necessary, replace the wheel (/ page 259).
Tyre press. monitor cur- * Due to a source of radio interference, no signals from the tyre pres‐
rently unavailable sure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem is temporarily malfunctioning.
The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as
soon as the cause has been rectified.
Wheel sensor(s) missing * There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of at least one tyre.
The display is not showing any pressure value for the tyre in ques‐
tion.
# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Tyre pressure monitor * The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The
inoperative No wheel tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
sensors
298 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
The tyre pressure monitoring system will switch on after a few
minutes of driving.
Tyre pressure monitor * The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Â
* You have inserted an incorrect key into the ignition lock.
# Use the correct key.

Key does not belong to

vehicle

Â
* The key is in the ignition lock.
# Remove the key.

Remove key

Â
* The key needs to be replaced.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace key

Â
* The key battery is discharged.
# Replace the battery (/ page 50).

Change key batteries

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Clutch overheated Avoid * A warning tone also sounds. The clutch is under heavy load and the
pulling away Engage/ permissible operating temperature of the clutch has been exceeded.
disengage clutch quickly Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over exten‐
if req. ded distances.
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Leave the engine running.

The clutch will cool more quickly when the engine is running.
or
# If possible, continue driving at a steady speed.
# Remove your foot from the clutch pedal and do not let the clutch
slip.
The clutch may also cool down during driving.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 299

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Cooling down can take a few minutes. When the clutch has cooled
down, the display message will disappear and the clutch will be fully
operational again.

Ò
* The tailgate is open.
# Close the tailgate.

Ó
* A warning tone also sounds. The bonnet is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet

unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
# Never release the bonnet when driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con‐

ditions.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Close the bonnet.

C
* In addition, a warning tone sounds during the trip.
The display shows the open door or doors.
# Close all the doors.

¥
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
# Top up the washer fluid (/ page 226).

Top up washer fluid

Ð
* A warning tone also sounds. The power assistance for the steering
could be malfunctioning. You may need to steer more forcefully.
# Carefully continue to a qualified specialist workshop and have

Power steering malfunc- the steering checked immediately.

tion See Owner's Manual

Telephone No service * Your vehicle is outside the transmission and receiver range of the
mobile phone network provider.
To start engine, shift to * You have attempted to start the engine in transmission position k
either P or N or h.
# Shift the transmission to position j or i.

Auxiliary battery malfunc- * The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being
tion charged.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Apply brake to deselect * You have tried to shift the transmission to position h, k or i
Park (P) position without applying the brake.
# Depress the brake pedal.
300 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Apply brake to select R * You have tried to shift the transmission to position k without
applying the brake.
# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position k.

N permanently active * A warning tone also sounds. While the vehicle is rolling or driving,
Risk of vehicle rolling the transmission was shifted to position i.
# To stop, depress the brake pedal and, when the vehicle is at a
standstill, shift the transmission to position j.
# To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position k
or h.
Risk of vehicle rolling * A warning tone also sounds. The driver's door is open and the trans‐
Vehicle not in P mission is in position i, k or h.
# Shift the transmission to position j.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Without changing gear, * A warning tone also sounds. You can no longer change the transmis‐
consult workshop sion position due to a malfunction.
If transmission position h has been selected:
# Without changing the transmission position, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.

If transmission position j, k or i has been selected:

# Inform a qualified specialist workshop.

Reversing not poss. Con- * The transmission is malfunctioning. Transmission position k can‐
sult workshop not be selected.
# Inform a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunc- * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission automatically

tion Stop switches to neutral i.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con‐
ditions.
# Shift the transmission to position j.

# Inform a qualified specialist workshop.

Stop vehicle Leave * The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily
engine running Wait impaired or not possible.
Transmission cooling # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con‐
ditions. Do not continue driving!
# Leave the engine running.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

&
* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. The hot-water
auxiliary heater (stationary heater) has switched itself off or cannot
be switched on.
# Drive for an extended distance.
inoperative Battery low
The battery will be charged. The hot-water auxiliary heater (sta‐
tionary heater) will be operational again as soon as the on-board
electrical system voltage is sufficient.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 301

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

&
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The hot-water auxiliary heater
(stationary heater) cannot be switched on.
# Refuel the vehicle.

inoperative Refuel vehi-

cle

&
* The hot-water auxiliary heater (stationary heater) is malfunctioning.
# When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine
has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the hot-
inoperative See Owner's water auxiliary heater (stationary heater), waiting several
Man. minutes between each attempt (/ page 128).

If the hot-water auxiliary heater (stationary heater) does not switch

on:
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b
* The corresponding light source is defective.
Have defective LED lights replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
Left dipped beam (exam‐ # Observe the notes on changing a bulb (/ page 111).
ple) # Replace the defective bulb at the front (/ page 112) or rear
(/ page 113).
% Vehicles with LED lights on the trailer: if the current falls below
the minimum of 50 mA, a display message may appear even
though the trailer lights are working properly.
Adaptive Main-beam * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
Assist inoperative # Switch high beam on/off manually.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Main-beam * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inopera‐

Assist currently unavaila- tive.
ble See Owner's Manual The following causes are possible:
R The windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
R Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

# Clean the windscreen.

When the system detects that the camera is fully operational,
the display will show the message Adaptive Main-beam Assist
available again
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Active Light System inop- * The active light function is faulty.
erative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
302 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b
* The light sensor is faulty. The automatic driving lights are malfunc‐
tioning.
# Switch the light functions on/off manually (/ page 105).

AUTO lights inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Intell. Light System inop- * The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system
erative remains available without the Intelligent Light System functions.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

b
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction See Own-

er's Manual

Warning and indicator lamps

Indicator and warning lamps on the instru‐
ment cluster
Some systems will perform a self-test when the
ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warn‐
ing lamps may briefly light up or flash. This
behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and
warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they
light up or flash after the engine has been started
or during a journey.

Safety systems

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

6
*The red warning lamp for the restraint system is on while the engine
is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
Restraint system warning & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint
lamp system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintention‐
ally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pay attention to the display messages.

# Drive on carefully.
# Have the restraint system and its components checked by a quali‐
fied specialist workshop immediately.
Further information on the restraint system and its components can
be found under "Occupant safety".
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 303

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

J
*The red brake system warning lamp is on while the engine is running.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction. As a result, BAS, hill start
assist and ESP® as well as their driving safety systems are not availa‐
ble.
Brake system warning
lamp ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated and additional driving sys‐
tems may have been switched off automatically.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are mal‐
functioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform
any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired
and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving
safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop.

# Switch off the engine, wait a while and restart the engine.
# Check whether the display message has disappeared and ESP® is
operational.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

J
*The red brake system warning lamp is on while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
The brake force boosting is malfunctioning.
Brake system warning & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting
lamp is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal
force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics
may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency
braking situations.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

J
*The red brake system warning lamp is on while the engine is running.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

Brake system warning
lamp If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the brak‐
ing characteristics may be impaired.
304 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp
# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Do not top up the brake fluid.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

!
*The yellow ABS warning lamp is on while the engine is running.
ABS has been switched off due to a malfunction. As a result, BAS, hill
start assist and ESP® as well as their driving safety systems have also
been switched off.
ABS warning lamp
ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated and additional driving sys‐
tems may have been switched off automatically.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunction‐

ing
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform
any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired
and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving
safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.

# Switch off the engine, wait a while and restart the engine.
# Check whether the display message has disappeared and ESP® is
operational.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

# Drive on carefully.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If the ABS control unit is defective, other systems may be available

only with restrictions or may be unavailable, e.g. the navigation sys‐
tem or the automatic transmission.

÷
*The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control intervenes because there is a risk of skidding
or at least one wheel is spinning.
ESP® warning lamp Cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been auto‐
matically switched off.
# When pulling away, accelerate only as much as is necessary.

# Depress the accelerator pedal less during your journey.

# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

# Do not switch off ESP®.

 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 305

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp
In exceptional cases, it may be better to switch off
ESP®(/ page 154).

÷
*The yellow ESP® warning lamp is on while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated and other driving systems could be
ESP® warning lamp automatically deactivated.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisa‐
tion. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pay attention to the display messages.

# Drive on carefully.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

å
*The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is on while the engine is running
or the ECO start-stop function is active.
ESP® has been switched off.
ESP® OFF warning lamp
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactiva‐
ted
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of fur‐
ther driving safety systems is also limited.
# Drive on carefully.

# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.

# Switch ESP® on again.

In exceptional cases, it may be better to switch off

ESP®(/ page 154).
# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be switched on:

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

306 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

!
*The red indicator lamp for the parking brake flashes or is on and/or
the yellow warning lamp for the parking brake is on.
The parking brake is malfunctioning or the display shows an instruc‐
tion to release the parking brake.
Indicator lamp for park‐
ing brake If only the red indicator lamp for the parking brake lights up, the park‐
ing brake has been applied.
Pay attention to the display messages.

Seat belt

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

ü
*The red seat belt warning lamp lights up or flashes after the engine
has started. A warning tone may also sound.
For certain countries only: The red seat belt warning lamp lights up
for a maximum of six seconds after the ignition has been switched on.
Seat belt warning lamp
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to
fasten their seat belts.
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 30).

ü
*The red warning lamp for the seat belt lights up after the engine
starts as soon as the driver's or front passenger door has been
closed.
The driver's or front passenger's seat belt is not fastened.
Seat belt warning lamp
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 30).
The warning lamp will go out.
In vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag deactivation, there
are objects on the front passenger seat.
# Take the objects off the front passenger seat and stow them in a
well-secured place.
The warning lamp will go out.

ü
*The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning
tone sounds.
The driver's or front passenger's seat belt is not fastened. You are
driving at a speed greater than 25 km/h or have briefly exceeded
Seat belt warning lamp 25 km/h.
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 30).
The warning lamp and the intermittent warning tone will go out.
In vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag actuation, there are
objects on the front passenger seat. You are driving at a speed
greater than 25 km/h or have briefly exceeded 25 km/h.
# Take the objects off the front passenger seat and stow them in a
well-secured place.
The warning lamp and the intermittent warning tone will go out.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 307

Driving systems

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

·
*The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the selected
speed.
# Increase the distance to the vehicle in front.
Warning lamp for dis‐
tance warning function

·
*The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
A warning tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle on your antici‐
pated route at excessive speed.
Warning lamp for dis‐
# Be ready to apply the brakes immediately.
tance warning function
# Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. If necessary, apply
the brakes or avoid an obstacle.
You can find further information about the distance warning function
in "Active Brake Assist" (/ page 156).

Vehicle

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

Ð
*The red power steering system warning lamp is on while the engine is
running. A warning tone also sounds.
The power assistance for the steering may be malfunctioning. You
may need to use more force to steer.
Power steering system
# Carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop and have the
warning lamp
steering checked immediately.

Engine

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

;
*The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is on while the engine is
running.
There may be a malfunction in the following vehicle systems:
Engine diagnostics warn‐ R engine management
ing lamp R injection
R exhaust system
R ignition system (in vehicles with a petrol engine)
R fuel system

This can cause the emissions limit values to be exceeded and the
engine to run in emergency mode.
# Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
308 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

6
*The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is on while the engine is run‐
ning.
The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
Fuel reserve warning Operation of the auxiliary heating (stationary heater) is deactivated in
lamp the reserve range.
# Refuel the vehicle.

?
*
The red coolant warning lamp is on while the engine is running and
the coolant temperature display is at the start of the scale.
Coolant warning lamp The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature display is defec‐
tive.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. If the coolant
is too hot, the engine may be damaged.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and
switch off the engine. Do not continue driving!
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

?
*The red coolant warning lamp is on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the air supply to the radiator may be
Coolant warning lamp impaired or the radiator's electric fan may be faulty.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is not being adequately cooled.
# Pay attention to the display messages.

# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and

switch off the engine.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine
has cooled down.
# Check the coolant level and top up with coolant, complying with
the instructions (/ page 225).
# If the coolant has to be topped up frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Ensure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired, e.g. by a
plastic bag that has been blown onto the grille.
# Monitor the coolant temperature display on the instrument clus‐
ter.
# Do not restart the engine until the coolant temperature is below
120°C. If you do, the engine may be damaged.
# Drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Avoid high
engine loads, e.g. driving on hilly roads or stop-and-go driving.

?
*The red coolant warning lamp is on while the engine is running. A
warning tone also sounds.
The coolant has exceeded the temperature of 120°C. The air supply
to the radiator may be impaired or the coolant level may be too low.
Coolant warning lamp
The engine has not been sufficiently cooled and may be damaged.
 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 309

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet when the engine has overheated or when
there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations
may occur:
R You could come into contact with hot gases.
R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operat‐
ing fluids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the
bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Pay attention to the display messages.

# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and
switch off the engine.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine
has cooled down.
# Check the coolant level and top up with coolant, complying with
the instructions (/ page 225).
# If the coolant has to be topped up frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Ensure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired, e.g. by a
plastic bag that has been blown onto the grille.
# Monitor the coolant temperature display on the instrument clus‐
ter.
# If the coolant temperature is below 120°C, you can continue driv‐
ing to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
# Avoid high engine loads, e.g. driving on hilly roads or stop-and-go
driving.

Tyres

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

h
*The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure
loss/malfunction) is on.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected a loss of pressure
in at least one tyre.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp
310 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lamp

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pres‐

sure
R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking
may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle without steering or braking suddenly. Pay atten‐

tion to the traffic conditions.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Pay attention to the display messages.
# Check the tyres and, if necessary, replace the wheel
(/ page 259).
# Check the tyre pressure .

In vehicles with steering-wheel buttons, you can check the tyre pres‐
sure electronically (/ page 255).
# Correct the tyre pressure as necessary.

h
*The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure
loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then
remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure
monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if
there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving char‐
acteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.

# Pay attention to the display messages.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Index 311

1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Function............................................. 109
4MATIC Switching on/off................................ 110
Function............................................. 146
AdBlue®
12 V socket
Additive...................................... 148, 272
see Socket (12 V)
Displaying the fill level........................ 149
230 V socket Filling capacity................................... 273
see Socket (230 V) Journeys abroad................................. 138
360° Camera Notes.................................................. 148
Care................................................... 229 Purity.......................................... 148, 272
Opening the camera cover (revers‐ Topping up.......................................... 149
ing camera)........................................ 169 Add-on equipment.................................... 17
A Add-on equipment guidelines................. 17
Additive
ABS (anti-lock braking system)............. 154
AdBlue®...................................... 148, 272
Acceleration Engine oil............................................ 273
see Using kickdown
Additives
Acoustic locking verification signal Fuel.................................................... 270
Activating/deactivating........................ 49
Additives (AdBlue®)
Activating/deactivating air-recircu‐
see AdBlue®
lation mode............................................. 124
Additives (engine oil)
Active Brake Assist see Additive
Activating/deactivating...................... 157
Function/notes.................................. 156 Additives (fuel)
see Fuel
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Calling up a speed.............................. 163 After-sales service
Displays.............................................. 164 see ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function............................................. 162 Air recirculation button
Increasing/decreasing speed............. 163 Convenience opening/closing............ 125
Requirements:.................................... 163 Air suspension
Selecting............................................ 163 see AIRMATIC
Steering wheel buttons....................... 163
Storing a speed.................................. 163 Airbag
Switching off/deactivating................. 163 Activation............................................. 27
Switching on/activating..................... 163 Front airbag (driver, co-driver).............. 31
System limitations.............................. 162 Installation locations............................ 31
Overview.............................................. 31
Active headlamps................................... 107 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp.... 34
Active Parking Assist Protection impaired.............................. 32
Exiting a parking space....................... 171 Protection provided.............................. 32
Function............................................. 169 Side airbag........................................... 31
Parking............................................... 170 Window airbag...................................... 31
System limitations.............................. 169 AIRMATIC
Adaptive Suspension......................................... 146
see Lane Keeping Assist Alarm system
Adaptive brake lights............................. 158 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Adaptive cruise control Alertness assistant
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see ATTENTION ASSIST
Adaptive Highbeam Assist All-wheel drive
Function............................................. 108 Notes.................................................. 146
Switching on/off................................ 109
312 Index

All-wheel drive Priming and deactivating the inte‐

see 4MATIC rior motion sensor................................ 68
Ambient lighting Priming and deactivating tow-away
Setting (MBUX multimedia system)..... 111 protection............................................. 67
Stopping the alarm............................... 67
Android Auto Tow-away protection function............... 67
see Smartphone integration
Attachments............................................. 17
Animals
Pets in the vehicle................................ 48 ATTENTION ASSIST
Function............................................. 172
Anti-lock braking system Switching on/off................................ 172
see ABS (anti-lock braking system) System limitations.............................. 172
Anti-skid chains Authorised workshop
see Snow chains see Qualified specialist workshop
Anti-theft alarm system Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Function of co-driver airbag shutoff..... 33
Anti-theft protection Automatic dipped beam........................ 105
Immobiliser.......................................... 66
Automatic distance adjustment
Anti-theft protection
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Anticipatory occupant protection
stop function)......................................... 140
see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐
pant protection) Automatic engine stop (ECO start/
stop function)......................................... 140
Anticipatory occupant protection
system Automatic front passenger front air‐
see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ bag shutoff
pant protection) PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp.... 34
Automatic measures after an acci‐
Apple CarPlay®
dent........................................................... 36
see Smartphone integration
Automatic transmission
Aquaplaning............................................ 139
DIRECT SELECT lever......................... 142
Armrest Drive program display......................... 145
Stowage compartment......................... 97 Drive programs................................... 144
Ashtray DYNAMIC SELECT switch................... 144
Rear passenger compartment............ 102 Engage park position.......................... 143
Use (front centre console).................. 101 Engaging drive position...................... 143
Assistance graphic (on-board com‐ Engaging neutral................................. 143
puter)....................................................... 183 Engaging reverse gear........................ 143
Kickdown............................................ 145
Assistance systems Manual shifting................................... 145
see Driving safety system Restricting the shift range.................. 143
ASSYST Selecting the drive program............... 145
see ASSYST PLUS service interval display Steering wheel gearshift paddles....... 145
ASSYST PLUS service interval display Transmission position display............. 142
Displaying the service due date......... 220 Transmission positions....................... 142
Function/notes.................................. 220 Auxiliary heating
Non-operational times with the Notes.................................................. 126
battery disconnected.......................... 221 Auxiliary warm-air heater
Regular maintenance work................. 220 Function............................................. 130
Special service requirements............. 220 Operating the switch clock................. 131
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Overview, timer.................................. 130
Function............................................... 67 Problems............................................ 134
Interior motion sensor function............ 68 Setting the switch-on time.................. 131
 Index 313

Switching on/off by remote control... 132 Restricted braking effect (salt-trea‐

Axle load................................................. 268 ted roads)........................................... 138
Running-in notes................................ 136
B Wet road surfaces.............................. 138
Back support Brake Assist System
see Lumbar support (4-way) see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Ball coupling Brake Assistance
Attaching............................................ 177 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Ball neck Brake fluid
Removing............................................ 178 Notes.................................................. 274
BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 154 Brakeforce Distribution
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distri‐
Battery bution)................................................ 156
Care................................................... 237
Charging............................................. 237 Brakes
Charging a vehicle battery.................. 237 Post-collision brake.............................. 36
Connecting and fitting the starter Breakdown
battery................................................ 241 Changing a wheel............................... 259
Disconnecting and removing the Recovering the vehicle....................... 244
starter battery.................................... 239 Tow starting........................................ 246
Jump-starting (vehicle)....................... 237 Towing away (both axles on the
Key....................................................... 50 ground)............................................... 244
Notes (vehicle)................................... 235 Towing away (raised front or rear
Remote control (stationary heat‐ axle)................................................... 245
ing/ventilation).......................... 129, 133 Transporting the vehicle..................... 245
Belt Vehicle stuck...................................... 244
see Seat belt Breakdown
Belt warning see Flat tyre
see Seat belt Buttons on the steering wheel.................. 8
Blind Spot Assist
Function.............................................. 174 C
Switching on/off................................ 174 Camera
System limitations.............................. 174 see Reversing camera
Bottle holder........................................... 100 Car wash
Brake see Care
ABS (anti-lock braking system)........... 154 Car wash (care)...................................... 227
Activating/deactivating the HOLD Car-to-X-Communication
function.............................................. 165 Displaying hazard warnings................ 204
Active Brake Assist............................. 156
Adaptive brake lights.......................... 158 Care
BAS (Brake Assist System)................. 154 Automatic car wash............................ 227
Braking with parking brake:................ 138 Carpet................................................ 230
Downhill gradient............................... 138 Display............................................... 230
Driving notes.............................. 137, 138 Exterior lighting.................................. 229
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distri‐ High-pressure cleaner........................ 227
bution)................................................ 156 Instrument cluster.............................. 230
Heavy and light loads......................... 138 Matt finish.......................................... 228
HOLD function.................................... 165 Paint................................................... 228
New brake discs and brake pads/ Plastic trim......................................... 230
linings................................................. 138 Real wood/trim elements.................. 230
New/replaced brake disks and Reversing camera............................... 229
brakepads.......................................... 136 Reversing camera/360° Camera....... 229
Roof lining.......................................... 230
314 Index

Seat belt............................................. 230 Top Tether............................................ 43

Seat cover.......................................... 230 Children
Sensors.............................................. 229 Avoiding dangers in the vehicle............ 37
Tailpipes............................................. 229 Basic instructions................................. 37
Trailer hitch........................................ 229
Washing by hand................................ 228 Cigarette lighter
Wheels/rims...................................... 229 Front centre console.......................... 102
Windows............................................ 229 Cleaning
Wiper blades...................................... 229 see Care
Carpet (care)........................................... 230 Climate control
Carrier systems Activating/deactivating...................... 122
Notes.................................................. 219 Activating/deactivating air-recircu‐
lation mode........................................ 124
Centre console Adjusting the air vents........................ 126
Between the seats (overview)............... 12 Air distribution settings...................... 123
Lower section (overview)...................... 11 Auxiliary heating................................. 126
Middle section (overview)..................... 10 Auxiliary warm-air heater.................... 130
Stowage compartment......................... 96 Demisting the windscreen.................. 124
Top (overview)........................................ 9 Demisting windows............................. 124
Changing a bulb Hot-water auxiliary heater.................. 127
see Changing bulbs Refrigerant......................................... 275
Changing a wheel Setting automatic mode..................... 123
Lowering the vehicle........................... 261 Setting the air distribution.................. 123
Preparing........................................... 259 Setting the airflow.............................. 123
Raising the vehicle............................. 259 Setting the temperature..................... 124
Removing a wheel.............................. 260 Switching residual heat utilisation
on/off................................................ 125
Changing bulbs Switching the A/C function on/off.... 122
Light bulb types halogen headlamps... 112 Switching the rear window heater
Notes.................................................. 111 on/off................................................ 125
Changing lamps Switching the reset function
see Changing bulbs on/off (control panel)......................... 124
Charging TEMPMATIC control panel.................. 120
Battery............................................... 237 THERMOTRONIC control panel........... 121
Ventilating the vehicle (conveni‐
Child safety lock
ence opening)...................................... 62
Hinged windows................................... 48
Co-driver airbag shutoff
Child safety lock (doors).......................... 47
see Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff
Child seat
Cockpit (overview)..................................... 6
Approval categories.............................. 40
Attaching (notes).................................. 40 Combination switch
Basic instructions................................. 37 see Headlamp flasher
Front passenger seat (notes)................ 46 see High beam
Front passenger seat (without see Indicator
automatic airbag shutoff)..................... 45 Comfort rear bench seat
ISOFIX (fitting)...................................... 42 Adjusting the seat backrest.................. 79
Notes on risks and dangers.................. 37 Constant headlamp mode
Recommended child restraint sys‐ see Daytime running lights
tems..................................................... 39
Seats suitable for belt-secured Convenience closing................................ 63
child restraint systems......................... 44 Convenience opening.............................. 62
Seats suitable for ISOFIX child Convenience opening/closing.............. 125
restraint systems.................................. 41
Securing on the co-driver seat............. 46 Conversions.............................................. 17
Securing on the rear seat..................... 45
 Index 315

Coolant Destination entry

Checking level.................................... 225 Entering a POI or address................... 202
Filling capacities................................. 275 Diagnostics connection........................... 21
Topping up......................................... 225
Dial telephone number (on-board
Coolant (engine) computer)............................................... 188
Notes.................................................. 274
Diesel
Copyright.................................................. 26 Low outside temperatures.................. 271
Cornering light........................................ 107 Notes.................................................. 271
Crosswind Assist Digital Owner's Manual........................... 15
Function/notes.................................. 155 Dipped beam
Cruise control Setting for abroad (symmetrical)........ 105
Calling up a speed.............................. 159 Switching on/off................................ 105
Function............................................. 158 Dipped beam
Lever.................................................. 159 see Automatic dipped beam
Requirements..................................... 159
Selecting............................................ 159 DIRECT SELECT lever
Setting the speed............................... 159 Engaging drive position...................... 143
Storing a speed.................................. 159 Engaging neutral................................. 143
Switching off...................................... 159 Engaging park position automati‐
Switching on....................................... 159 cally.................................................... 143
System limits...................................... 158 Engaging reverse gear........................ 143
Function............................................. 142
Cup holder Selecting park position....................... 143
Switching the cooling/heating Transmission positions....................... 142
function on/off................................... 101
Direction indicator
Cup holders see Indicator
Inserting in the rear passenger
compartment...................................... 101 Display (care)......................................... 230
Display (MBUX multimedia system)
D Operating........................................... 195
Dashboard lighting Display (multimedia system)
see Instrument lighting Home screen...................................... 195
Data collection (vehicle).......................... 24 Display (on-board computer)................ 182
Data protection rights Display message
Data storage......................................... 26 Calling up (on-board computer).......... 279
Data storage Notes................................................. 279
Data protection rights.......................... 26 Distance adjustment
Daytime running lights see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Replacing light sources....................... 112 Distance control
Switching on/off................................ 105 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Dealership Distance warning function
see Qualified specialist workshop see Active Brake Assist
Declaration of conformity DISTRONIC
Electromagnetic compatibility.............. 19 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Jack...................................................... 21 Door
Radio operating permit of transmit‐ Locking (emergency key element)........ 53
ter key.................................................. 21 Unlocking (emergency key element)..... 53
Specific absorption rate....................... 19
Door control panel................................... 14
Wireless vehicle components............... 19
Demisting windscreen........................... 124 Drive program display............................ 145
316 Index

Drive programs Mountainous terrain........................... 139

see DYNAMIC SELECT Drowsiness detection
Driving characteristics (unusual)......... 249 see ATTENTION ASSIST
Driving instructions DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Running-in notes................................ 136 Activating/deactivating...................... 161
Driving notes Notes.................................................. 160
Brake subject to load.......................... 138 DYNAMIC SELECT
Braking............................................... 138 Drive program display......................... 145
Downhill gradient............................... 138 Drive programs................................... 144
General driving tips............................ 137 Function............................................. 144
New brake discs and brake pads/ Operating........................................... 145
linings................................................. 138 Selecting the drive program............... 145
Parking brake..................................... 138
Restricted braking effect (salt-trea‐ E
ted roads)........................................... 138 E10.......................................................... 270
Transport by rail................................. 138
Wet road surfaces.............................. 138 EASY-ENTRY easy entry and exit fea‐
ture
Driving safety system Folding the EASY-ENTRY section
ABS (anti-lock braking system)........... 154 forwards and back (rear bench seat).... 78
Adaptive brake lights.......................... 158 Using (luxury rear seat)........................ 85
BAS (Brake Assist System)................. 154 Using (rear bench seat)........................ 78
Cameras............................................. 153 Using (rear seat)................................... 81
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distri‐
bution)................................................ 156 EASY-PACK tailgate
ESP® Crosswind Assist....................... 155 Notes................................................... 58
Opening and closing............................. 59
ESP® trailer stabilisation.................... 155
Overview............................................ 153 EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu‐
Radar and ultrasonic sensors............. 153 tion)......................................................... 156
Responsibility..................................... 153 ECO display
Driving safety system Activating............................................ 141
see Active Brake Assist Function............................................. 140
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ECO start/stop function
Driving system Automatic engine start....................... 140
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Automatic engine stop....................... 140
see Active Parking Assist Operation........................................... 140
see AIRMATIC Switching on/off................................ 140
see ATTENTION ASSIST Electric parking brake
see Blind Spot Assist Applying automatically........................ 151
see Cruise control Applying or releasing manually........... 152
see Driving safety system Emergency braking............................. 152
see HOLD function Notes.................................................. 151
see Lane Keeping Assist Releasing automatically...................... 151
see Limiter Electric sliding door
see PARKTRONIC Function............................................... 54
see Reversing camera Opening with button............................. 55
see Traffic Sign Assist Opening/closing from the outside....... 57
Driving tips Opening/closing with the door
Aquaplaning....................................... 139 handle.................................................. 57
Driving abroad (information)............... 138 Opening/closing with the key........ 56, 57
Driving abroad (symmetrical Problems.............................................. 57
dipped beam)..................................... 105 Programming the key........................... 56
Driving on flooded roads.................... 139 Programming the key button................ 57
Driving on wet roads.......................... 139 Resetting.............................................. 57
 Index 317

Electromagnetic compatibility (dec‐ ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

laration of conformity)............................. 19 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Electronic Stability Program ESP®
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Crosswind Assist................................ 155
Electronics.............................................. 267 Trailer stabilisation............................. 155
Emergency ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Fire extinguisher................................ 232 Activating/deactivating (on-board
First-aid kit (soft-sided)...................... 232 computer)........................................... 155
Removing the warning triangle........... 232 Function/notes.................................. 154
Safety vest......................................... 232 Switching on/off (button)................... 155
Setting up the warning triangle.......... 232 Exterior lighting
Emergency braking Care................................................... 229
Electric parking brake......................... 152 Exterior lighting
Emergency engine start........................ 246 see Lights
Emergency key element
F
Locking door........................................ 53
Removing/inserting............................. 50 Fatigue detection
Unlocking door..................................... 53 see ATTENTION ASSIST
Engaging drive position (automatic Fault message
transmission).......................................... 143 see Display message
Engaging neutral (automatic trans‐ Filling up the windscreen washing
mission).................................................. 143 system.................................................... 226
Engaging reverse gear........................... 143 Fire extinguisher.................................... 232
Engine First-aid kit (soft-sided)......................... 232
ECO start/stop function..................... 140 Flat tyre
Engine number................................... 268 Changing a wheel............................... 259
Parking............................................... 150 Notes................................................. 235
Starting (key)...................................... 136
Fog light (extended range).................... 108
Starting assistance............................. 237
Foil covering
Engine electronics (notes...................... 267
Radar and ultrasonic sensors............. 153
Engine number....................................... 268 Folding table
Engine oil Installing and removing........................ 98
Additive.............................................. 273 Moving................................................. 98
Checking the oil level using the on- Using.................................................. 100
board computer......................... 222, 223 Foreign trip
Checking the oil level with a dip‐ Symmetrical dipped beam.................. 105
stick................................................... 223
Filling capacity.................................... 274 Free software........................................... 26
Topping up.......................................... 224 Frequencies
Engine output Mobile phone..................................... 267
Notes on changes................................. 22 Two-way radio..................................... 267
Engine pre-heating Front airbag (driver, co-driver)................ 31
see Auxiliary heating Front door
Environmental protection Opening (from inside)........................... 51
Notes.................................................... 16 Unlocking (from inside)......................... 51
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles........... 16 Front seats
ERA-GLONASS test mode Rotate................................................... 74
Starting/ending................................. 235 Front wheel arch
Fitting/removing the cover................. 112
318 Index

Wing.................................................... 112 Highbeam

Fuel Adaptive Highbeam Assist.................. 108
Additives............................................ 270 Hill start assist....................................... 165
Diesel................................................. 271 Hinged windows
E10..................................................... 270 Child safety lock................................... 48
Flexible fuel vehicles.......................... 270
Fuel reserve........................................ 272 HOLD function
Journeys abroad................................. 138 Notes.................................................. 165
Low outside temperatures.................. 271 Switching on/off................................ 165
Petrol.................................................. 270 Home screen (media display)................ 195
Quality (diesel).................................... 271 Hot-water auxiliary heater
Quality (petrol)................................... 270 Displays (remote control)................... 129
Refuelling............................................ 147 Function............................................. 127
Sulphur content.................................. 270 Problems............................................ 130
Tank capacity..................................... 272 Switching on/off by remote control... 128
Fuel consumption Switching on/off with the button....... 128
Displaying the average....................... 184
Fuses....................................................... 247 I
Identification plate
G Engine................................................ 268
Gearshift lever........................................ 141 Refrigerant......................................... 275
Vehicle............................................... 268
Gearshift recommendation
Manual shifting (automatic trans‐ Ignition key
mission).............................................. 145 see Key
Manual transmission........................... 141 Ignition lock............................................ 136
General operating permit number Immobiliser.............................................. 66
(EC).......................................................... 268 Implied warranty (vehicle)....................... 24
Glasses compartment.............................. 97 Indicator
Glove compartment Activating/deactivating...................... 106
Opening/closing.................................. 97 Indicator lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps
H
Installations.............................................. 17
Handbrake (electrical)
Instrument cluster
see Electric parking brake
Adjusting the lighting......................... 183
Handling control system Displays.............................................. 180
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Notes.................................................. 180
Hazard warning light system Notes on warning/indicator lamps..... 302
Switching on/off................................ 107 Overview............................................ 180
Head restraint Warning/indicator lamps overview......... 7
Adjusting electrically............................ 93 Instrument cluster (care)...................... 230
Adjusting mechanically........................ 92 Instrument lighting................................ 183
Headlamp flasher................................... 106 Instrument panel
Help call see Cockpit (overview)
see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Intelligent Light System
High beam Activating/deactivating...................... 108
Activating/deactivating...................... 106 Active headlamps............................... 107
Replacing light sources....................... 112 Adaptive Highbeam Assist.................. 108
High-pressure cleaner (care)................ 227 Cornering light.................................... 107
Motorway mode................................. 108
Overview............................................ 107
 Index 319

Interior lighting Level control

Ambient lighting.................................. 111 see AIRMATIC
Setting................................................ 111 Light switch (overview)......................... 105
Switch-off delay time.......................... 111
Lighting
Interior motion sensor Adjusting the instrument lighting....... 183
Function............................................... 68 Intelligent Light System...................... 107
Switching on and off............................ 68
Lighting
iPad® attachment................................... 104 see Lights
iPhone® Lights
see Smartphone integration Active headlamps............................... 107
ISOFIX child seat anchor Adaptive Highbeam Assist.................. 108
Fitting................................................... 42 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.......... 109
Seats suitable for attaching.................. 41 Automatic dipped beam..................... 105
Combination switch............................ 106
J Cornering light.................................... 107
Dipped beam...................................... 105
Jack
Driving abroad (symmetrical
Declaration of conformity..................... 21 dipped beam)..................................... 105
Storage location................................. 247 Fog light (extended range).................. 108
Stowage compartment in the rear...... 247 Hazard warning light........................... 107
Journeys abroad Headlamp flasher............................... 106
Notes.................................................. 138 High beam.......................................... 106
Jump-start connection point................. 237 Indicator............................................. 106
Light switch........................................ 105
K Motorway mode................................. 108
Parking light....................................... 105
Key
Range................................................. 106
Acoustic locking verification signal...... 49 Rear fog light...................................... 106
Battery................................................. 50 Responsibility with lighting systems... 105
Convenience opening......................... 125 Setting the exterior lighting switch-
Emergency key element....................... 50 off delay time...................................... 110
Functions............................................. 49 Standing light..................................... 105
Key ring attachment............................. 50 Switching the Intelligent Light Sys‐
Overview.............................................. 49 tem on/off......................................... 108
Problem................................................ 51 Switching the surround lighting
Programming the button for the on/off................................................. 110
electric sliding door.............................. 57
Start the vehicle................................. 136 Limiter
Unlocking setting................................. 50 Calling up a speed.............................. 159
Function............................................. 158
Key positions.......................................... 136 Kickdown............................................ 158
Lever.................................................. 159
L Passive............................................... 158
Lane Keeping Assist Permanent setting.............................. 160
Activating/deactivating...................... 175 Requirements..................................... 159
Function.............................................. 174 Selecting............................................ 159
Sensitivity........................................... 175 Setting the speed............................... 159
Language Storing a speed.................................. 159
Notes.................................................. 199 Switching off...................................... 159
Setting............................................... 200 Switching on....................................... 159
System limits...................................... 158
Lashing points
Information......................................... 278 Limiting the opening angle (tailgate)..... 60
Overview............................................. 215 LINGUATRONIC
Operable functions............................. 196
320 Index

Starting.............................................. 196 Displaying weather information.......... 204

Live Traffic Information Moving............................................... 203
Switching the traffic information Selecting the map orientation............ 203
display on........................................... 204 Setting the map scale........................ 203
Switching motorway information
Load compartment and rear interior on/off................................................ 203
lamps
Replacing light sources....................... 115 Matt finish (cleaning instructions)....... 228
Load distribution.................................... 213 Maximum gross vehicle weight............ 268
Load protection net................................ 216 Maximum speed
see Limiter
Load securing
Fitting and removing tie-down eyes.... 215 MBUX multimedia system
Lashing points.................................... 215 Notes.................................................. 194
Notes.................................................. 214 Operating the touchscreen................. 195
Overview............................................ 194
Load securing aid Resetting (factory setting).................. 200
Luggage compartment partition......... 217
Removing/fitting a load protection MBUX multimedia system
net...................................................... 216 see Display (MBUX multimedia system)
Loading guidelines................................. 212 Media
Menu (on-board computer)................. 186
Low beam Operating media playback.................. 186
Replacing light sources....................... 112 Overview of the functions and sym‐
Lubricant additives bols.................................................... 208
see Additive Selecting a media source................... 186
Luggage compartment partition Media display
Folding up/down................................ 217 Home screen...................................... 195
Removing/fitting................................ 217 Media mode
Stowage compartments...................... 217 Connecting Bluetooth® audio
Lumbar support (4-way).......................... 73 equipment.......................................... 209
Luxury rear seat Medical aids............................................. 23
Adjusting electrically............................ 86 Memory function (seat)........................... 73
Adjusting the head restraint................. 94
EASY-ENTRY easy entry and exit Menu (on-board computer)
feature.................................................. 85 Assistance graphic............................. 183
Moving................................................. 87 Media................................................. 186
Navigation.......................................... 185
M Radio.................................................. 186
Service............................................... 183
M+S tyres................................................ 249 Settings.............................................. 189
Main beam Telephone........................................... 188
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.......... 109 Menu overview (on-board computer)... 183
Maintenance Mercedes me
Notes................................................. 220 Information......................................... 191
Maintenance Mercedes me connect
see ASSYST PLUS service interval display Breakdown assistance call via the
Malfunction breakdown assistance button............. 192
Restraint system.................................. 27 Calling the Customer Centre............... 191
Manual transmission Consenting to data transfer................ 192
Engaging reverse gear......................... 141 Information......................................... 191
Using the gearshift lever..................... 141 Making a call via the overhead con‐
Map trol panel............................................ 192
Displaying online map contents......... 204 Transferred data................................. 192
 Index 321

Mercedes PRO Navigation

Information......................................... 191 see Destination entry
Mercedes PRO connect see Map
Breakdown assistance call via the see Route
breakdown assistance button............. 192 Navigation instructions (on-board
Calling the Customer Centre............... 191 computer)............................................... 185
Consenting to data transfer................ 192 Notes
Information......................................... 191 Carrier systems.................................. 219
Making a call via the overhead con‐
trol panel............................................ 192 O
Transferred data................................. 192
Occupant safety
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system see Airbag
Automatic emergency call.................. 233 see Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff
Information........................................ 233 see Automatic measures after an accident
Information on data transfer.............. 234 see Child seat
Manual emergency call...................... 234 see Pets in the vehicle
Overview............................................ 233 see Post-collision brake
Self-diagnosis (Russia)....................... 235
see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS
pant protection)
test mode........................................... 235
see Restraint system
Mercedes-Benz service centre see Seat belt
see Qualified specialist workshop On-board computer
Message (multifunction display) Assistance graphic menu................... 183
see Display message Digital speedometer........................... 184
Message memory................................... 279 Displaying the service due date......... 220
Mirrors Media menu....................................... 186
see Outside mirrors Menu navigation................................. 185
Menu overview................................... 183
Mobile phone Multifunction display.......................... 182
Frequencies........................................ 267 Operation........................................... 181
Transmission output (maximum)........ 267 Overview............................................. 181
Mobile phone Radio menu........................................ 186
see Mobile phone Service menu..................................... 183
see Smartphone integration Settings menu.................................... 189
see Telephone Showing the range.............................. 184
Model series Telephone menu................................. 188
see Vehicle identification plate Trip menu........................................... 184
Motorway mode..................................... 108 On-board diagnostics interface
see Diagnostics connection
Mounting a load...................................... 212
On-board electronics
Multifunction display (on-board Engine electronics.............................. 267
computer)............................................... 182 Notes.................................................. 267
Multimedia system Two-way radios................................... 267
see MBUX multimedia system Open-source software............................. 26
N Opening and closing the pop-out
windows.................................................... 62
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer)................. 185 Opening/closing the bonnet................. 221
Overview............................................ 201 Operating fluids
Showing/hiding the menu.................. 200 AdBlue®.............................................. 272
Switching on...................................... 200 Additives (fuel)................................... 270
Brake fluid.......................................... 274
Coolant (engine)................................. 274
322 Index

Engine oil............................................ 273 PASSENGER AIR BAG status display

Fuel (diesel)........................................ 271 see Automatic front passenger
Fuel (petrol)........................................ 270 front airbag shutoff
Notes................................................. 269 Permissible axle load............................. 268
Windscreen washer fluid.................... 275
Permissible gross mass........................ 268
Operating safety
Changes in the engine power output.... 22 Permitted towing methods.................... 242
Declaration of conformity (electro‐ Petrol....................................................... 270
magnetic compatibility)........................ 19 Pets in the vehicle.................................... 48
Declaration of conformity (Jack)........... 21
Declaration of conformity (wireless Plastic trim (care).................................. 230
vehicle components)............................ 19 Post-collision brake................................. 36
Information........................................... 18 Power supply
Operating sun visor................................ 119 Engaging............................................. 136
Original parts............................................ 16 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
Outside mirrors protection)
Folding in/out..................................... 118 Function............................................... 36
Setting................................................ 118 Reversing measures............................. 36
Setting options..................................... 14 Profile
Overhead control panel Creating a new profile........................ 197
Adjusting the interior lighting.............. 111 Notes.................................................. 197
Overview.............................................. 13 Selecting profile options..................... 197
Owner's Manual (digital)......................... 15 Q
Owner's Manual (vehicle equipment)..... 17
QR code (rescue card)............................. 24
P Qualified specialist workshop................ 22
Paint (cleaning instructions)................. 228 R
Paint code............................................... 268 Radar and ultrasonic sensors
Panorama sliding sunroof Damage.............................................. 153
Closing................................................. 64 Radio
Notes................................................... 63 Menu (on-board computer)................. 186
Opening................................................ 64 Overview of the functions and sym‐
Opening and closing the roller sun‐ bols..................................................... 210
blind..................................................... 65
Problem................................................ 66 Radio operating permit
Transmitter key..................................... 21
Park position
Engaging............................................. 143 REACH regulation..................................... 23
Engaging automatically....................... 143 Real wood (care).................................... 230
Parking aid Rear and load compartment lamps
see PARKTRONIC Replacing light sources....................... 115
Parking assistance systems Rear bench seat
see Active Parking Assist Folding forwards and backwards.......... 80
Parking brake (electrical) Moving................................................. 79
see Electric parking brake Notes.................................................... 74
Parking light........................................... 105 Seat/bunk combination....................... 88
Using the entry and exit feature
Parking up............................................... 152 (EASY-ENTRY)....................................... 78
PARKTRONIC Rear bench seat
Function............................................. 166 see Seats
Switching on/off................................ 167 Rear fog light.......................................... 106
 Index 323

Rear seat Standing/parking lights...................... 112

Adjusting the seat backrest.................. 82 Surround lighting................................ 115
EASY-ENTRY easy entry and exit Turn signal light................................... 112
feature.................................................. 81 Rescue card.............................................. 24
Folding forwards and backwards.......... 83
Installing and removing........................ 84 Reset function (MBUX multimedia
Moving................................................. 82 system)................................................... 200
Rear seats Reset function (MBUX multimedia
Notes.................................................... 74 system)
Seat anchorage.................................... 74 see Reset function (MBUX multi‐
Seating variants.................................... 74 media system)
Rear window Resetting (factory setting)
Separately opening and closing............ 60 see Reset function (MBUX multi‐
media system)
Rear window wiper
Replacing............................................ 118 Resetting the trip computer.................. 184
Switching on/off................................. 116 Residual heat utilisation
Recycling Switching on/off................................ 125
see Take-back of end-of-life vehi‐ Restraint system
cles (environmental protection) Basic instructions for children.............. 37
Reducing agent Function in an accident........................ 27
see AdBlue® Functionality......................................... 27
Malfunction.......................................... 27
Refrigerant (air conditioning) Protection impaired.............................. 27
Notes.................................................. 275 Protection provided.............................. 27
Refrigerator box Self-test................................................ 27
Switching on and off.......................... 104 Warning lamps...................................... 27
Refuel Restricting the shift range.................... 143
Topping up AdBlue®........................... 149 Reversing camera
Refuelling Care................................................... 229
Displaying the AdBlue® level.............. 149 Function............................................. 167
Refuelling the vehicle.......................... 147 Opening the camera cover (360°
Registration Camera)............................................. 169
Vehicle................................................. 22 Roll away protection
Regulating headlamp range.................. 106 see HOLD function
Roller sunblind
Remote control (stationary heat‐
ing/ventilation) Panorama sliding sunroof..................... 65
Displays.............................................. 129 Roof carrier
Replacing the battery................. 129, 133 see Roof luggage rack
Setting........................................ 128, 132 Roof lining (care).................................... 230
Replacing a wheel Roof luggage rack.................................. 278
Fitting a new wheel............................. 261 Route
Replacing bulbs Calculating......................................... 203
Tail lamp types.................................... 113 Selecting options............................... 203
Tail lamps............................................ 113 Running-in notes.................................... 136
Replacing light sources
Daytime running lights........................ 112 S
Fitting/removing cover (front
wheel arch)......................................... 112 Safety systems
High beam.......................................... 112 see Driving safety system
Low beam........................................... 112 Safety vest.............................................. 232
Rear and load compartment lamps..... 115
324 Index

Seat Service
Adjusting (manually)............................. 69 see ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Seat belt Service (on-board computer)................ 183
Activating/deactivating seat belt Service Centre
adjustment........................................... 30 see Qualified specialist workshop
Adjusting the height............................. 30
Care................................................... 230 Service products
Fastening............................................. 30 Refrigerant (air conditioning).............. 275
Protection impaired.............................. 29 Setting a speed limit
Protection provided.............................. 28 see Limiter
Releasing.............................................. 30 Setting the airflow................................. 123
Seat belt adjustment (function)............ 30
Warning lamps..................................... 30 Setting the map scale
see Map
Seat belt adjustment
Activating/deactivating........................ 30 Setting the speed
Function............................................... 30 see Cruise control
Seat belt tensioners Setting the temperature........................ 124
Activation............................................. 27 Settings (on-board computer)............... 189
Seat cover (care).................................... 230 Shift paddles
Seat ventilation see Steering wheel gearshift paddles
Switching on/off.................................. 95 Shifting
Seat/bunk combination Gearshift recommendation (man‐
Folding up the bed extension............... 90 ual shifting, automatic transmis‐
Installing and removing......................... 91 sion)................................................... 145
Installing and removing stowage Gearshift recommendation (man‐
compartments...................................... 98 ual transmission)................................ 141
Installing/removing bed extension....... 90 Short-distance trips............................... 138
Moving................................................. 90 Showing the range................................. 184
Notes................................................... 88
Setting up/folding away the berth....... 90 Side airbag................................................ 31
Seats Side window
4-way lumbar support.......................... 73 Closing using the key........................... 63
Adjusting (electrically).......................... 71 Convenience closing............................ 63
Adjusting armrests............................... 74 Convenience opening........................... 62
Adjusting the head restraints Opening with the key............................ 62
mechanically........................................ 92 Problems.............................................. 63
Correct driver's seat position............... 69 Side windows
Installing and removing rear bench Adjusting.............................................. 63
seat...................................................... 81 Closing................................................. 61
Operating the memory function........... 73 Closing (all)........................................... 61
Rotate (front seat)................................ 74 Opening................................................ 61
Setting options..................................... 14 Opening (all)......................................... 61
Securing luggage.................................... 212 Sliding door
Selecting a gear B-pillar door sill (button)....................... 55
see Shifting Centre console (button)....................... 55
Child safety lock................................... 47
Selector lever Closing (from the inside)...................... 54
see DIRECT SELECT lever Closing (from the outside).................... 54
Self-test Opening (from the inside)..................... 54
Automatic front passenger front Opening (from the outside).................. 54
airbag shutoff....................................... 34 Sliding sunroof
Sensors (care)........................................ 229 see Panorama sliding sunroof
 Index 325

Smartphone Stop/start function

see Smartphone integration see ECO start/stop function
see Telephone Stopping the alarm (ATA)......................... 67
Smartphone integration Stowage compartment in the rear
Overview............................................ 207 Jack.................................................... 247
Snow chains........................................... 250 Vehicle tool kit.................................... 247
Socket (12 V) Stowage space
Front centre console.......................... 102 Glasses compartment.......................... 97
Rear.................................................... 103 Suggestions
Socket (230 V) Configuring......................................... 197
Rear.................................................... 103 Sulphur content..................................... 270
Software update Summer tyres......................................... 249
System updates.................................. 197
Surround lighting
Sound menu Switching on/off................................ 110
Functions overview............................. 211
Suspension
Spare wheel see AIRMATIC
Fitting/removing................................ 265
Notes................................................. 265 SVHC (substances of very high con‐
cern).......................................................... 23
Specialist workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop Switch clock
Overview............................................ 130
Specific absorption rate.......................... 19
Switch-off delay time
Speed limitation, winter tyres Exterior............................................... 110
Setting................................................ 160 Interior................................................ 111
Speedometer.......................................... 180 Switching on the ignition...................... 136
Standard Switching seat heating on/off................ 94
see Lane Keeping Assist
Switching the A/C function on/off...... 122
Standing light......................................... 105
Switching the rear window heater
Standing/parking lights on/off...................................................... 125
Replacing light sources....................... 112
Switching the reset function on/off
Starting assistance (control panel)........................................ 124
see Jump-start connection point
System settings
Starting-off aid
Overview of the system settings
see Hill start assist menu.................................................. 197
Stationary heater Reset function (MBUX multimedia
see Auxiliary heating system).............................................. 200
Stationary heating System settings
see Auxiliary warm-air heater see Language
Stationary heating/ventilation
Displays (remote control)................... 129 T
Setting (remote control)............. 128, 132 Table
Stationary heating/ventilation see Folding table
see Auxiliary warm-air heater Tail lamps (replacing bulbs)................... 113
see Hot-water auxiliary heater
Tailgate
Steering wheel Adjusting.............................................. 60
Adjusting.............................................. 96 EASY-PACK........................................... 58
Steering wheel gearshift paddles......... 145 Limiting the opening angle................... 60
Steering-wheel buttons............................. 8 Opening and closing............................. 58
Opening in an emergency..................... 58
326 Index

Programming the key button................ 61 Towing eye

Separately opening rear window.......... 60 Fitting/removing................................ 246
Tailpipes (care)....................................... 229 Storage location................................. 246
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Towing methods..................................... 242
(environmental protection)..................... 16 Traffic information
Tank capacity Switching on the display.................... 204
Fuel.................................................... 272 Traffic Sign Assist
Reserve (fuel)..................................... 272 Function/notes.................................. 173
Tank content Setting................................................ 173
AdBlue®.............................................. 273 System limitations.............................. 173
Technical data Trailer hitch
Information......................................... 267 Attaching the ball coupling................. 177
Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch).... 277 Care................................................... 229
Notes (trailer hitch)............................ 277 Fitting the cover for trailer coupling... 177
Tyre pressure monitor........................ 256 General notes..................................... 277
Vehicle identification plate................. 268 Information about trailer operation..... 176
Mounting dimensions......................... 277
Telephone Removing the ball neck...................... 178
Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐ Socket................................................ 178
key).................................................... 207
Connecting a mobile phone Trailer loads............................................ 277
(Secure Simple Pairing)...................... 207 Trailer operation
Functions in the telephone menu....... 207 Attaching the ball coupling................. 177
Menu (on-board computer)................. 188 Coupling/Decoupling the trailer......... 178
Notes................................................. 205 Notes.................................................. 176
Operating modes................................ 206 Permissible axle load......................... 268
Telephone menu overview.................. 206 Removing the ball neck...................... 178
Telephony operating modes Socket................................................ 178
Trailer loads........................................ 277
Bluetooth® Telephony......................... 206
Business telephony............................ 206 Trailer stabilisation................................ 155
TEMPMATIC (control panel)................... 120 Transmission position display.............. 142
THERMOTRONIC (control panel)............ 121 Transmitter key
Radio operating permit......................... 21
Tie-down eyes......................................... 215
Transport by rail..................................... 138
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit Transporting (vehicle breakdown)........ 245
Top Tether................................................. 43 Trim element (care)................................ 230
Touch Control Turn signal light
Operating........................................... 195 Replacing light sources....................... 112
Touchpad Two-way radio telephone
Operating........................................... 195 see Mobile phone
Touchscreen Two-way radios
Operating........................................... 195 Frequencies........................................ 267
Tow starting............................................ 246 Installation notes................................ 267
Transmission output (maximum)........ 267
Tow-away protection
Tyre pressure
Function............................................... 67
Checking (tyre pressure monitoring
Priming and deactivating...................... 67
system).............................................. 255
Towing away Notes................................................. 250
Both axles on the ground................... 244 Restarting the tyre pressure moni‐
Raised front or rear axle..................... 245 tor...................................................... 255
 Index 327

Tyre pressure monitoring system Updates

(function)............................................ 254 Important system updates.................. 197
Tyre pressure table............................. 251 Using kickdown...................................... 145
Tyre pressure monitor Using the stowage net on the seat
Checking the tyre pressures.............. 255 backrest.................................................... 97
Checking the tyre temperature.......... 255
Function............................................. 254 V
Restarting.......................................... 255
Technical data.................................... 256 Vehicle
Correct use.......................................... 23
Tyre pressure table................................ 251 Data collection..................................... 24
Tyre temperature Diagnostics connection........................ 21
Checking (tyre pressure monitoring Equipment............................................ 17
system).............................................. 255 Implied warranty................................... 24
Tyre pressure monitoring system Locking (automatic).............................. 53
(function)............................................ 254 Locking/unlocking (emergency key
Tyre tread................................................ 249 element)............................................... 53
Lowering............................................. 261
Tyres
Medical aids......................................... 23
Checking............................................ 249 Parking............................................... 150
Checking the tyre pressure (tyre Parking up.......................................... 152
pressure monitoring system).............. 255 QR code rescue card............................ 24
Direction of rotation........................... 259 Qualified specialist workshop............... 22
Fitting................................................. 261 Raising............................................... 259
Flat tyre.............................................. 235 REACH regulation................................. 23
M+S tyres........................................... 249 Registration.......................................... 22
Noise.................................................. 249 Starting (key)...................................... 136
Notes on fitting.................................. 256 SVHC (substances of very high
Removing........................................... 260 concern)............................................... 23
Replacing................................... 256, 259 Switching on the power supply........... 136
Restarting the tyre pressure moni‐ Unlocking (from inside)........................ 52
tor...................................................... 255 Ventilating (convenience opening)........ 62
Selecting............................................ 256
Snow chains....................................... 250 Vehicle data
Storing............................................... 259 Vehicle height..................................... 276
Summer tyres..................................... 249 Vehicle length..................................... 276
Tyre pressure (Notes)......................... 250 Vehicle width...................................... 276
Tyre pressure monitoring system Wheelbase.......................................... 276
(function)............................................ 254 Vehicle data storage
Tyre pressure table............................. 251 Electronic control units........................ 24
Unusual driving characteristics.......... 249 Service providers................................. 26
Wheel size categories......................... 258 Vehicle dimensions................................ 276
Wheel/tyre combination..................... 261
Vehicle identification number
Tyres see VIN
see Wheels
Vehicle identification plate
U EC general operating permit num‐
ber..................................................... 268
Unlocking setting..................................... 50 Maximum permissible gross vehi‐
Unlocking/locking cle weight........................................... 268
Switching automatic locking fea‐ Paint code.......................................... 268
ture on/off........................................... 53 Permissible axle load......................... 268
Unlocking and opening front doors VIN..................................................... 268
from inside........................................... 51 Vehicle interior
Replacing light sources....................... 115
328 Index

Vehicle key Washer fluid

see Key see Windscreen washer fluid
Vehicle maintenance Washing by hand (care)......................... 228
see ASSYST PLUS service interval display Washing the engine............................... 227
Vehicle tool kit Weather information.............................. 204
Jack.................................................... 247
Storage location................................. 247 Web browsers
Towing eye.......................................... 246 Overview............................................ 208
VIN Wheel rotation........................................ 258
Identification plate............................. 268 Wheels
Reading out........................................ 268 Care................................................... 229
Seat................................................... 268 Changing............................................ 258
Windscreen........................................ 268 Checking............................................ 249
Vision Checking the tyre pressure (tyre
Demisting windows............................. 124 pressure monitoring system).............. 255
Fitting................................................. 261
W Flat tyre.............................................. 235
Noise.................................................. 249
Warning system Notes on fitting.................................. 256
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Removing........................................... 260
Warning triangle Replacing................................... 256, 259
Removing........................................... 232 Restarting the tyre pressure moni‐
Setting up........................................... 232 tor...................................................... 255
Warning/indicator lamp Selecting............................................ 256
! ABS warning lamp..................... 304 Snow chains....................................... 250
Storing............................................... 259
J Brake system warning lamp...... 303 Technical data.................................... 261
? Coolant warning lamp............... 308 Tyre pressure (Notes)......................... 250
; Engine diagnostics warning Tyre pressure monitoring system
(function)............................................ 254
lamp................................................... 307
Tyre pressure table............................. 251
å ESP® OFF warning lamp............ 305 Unusual driving characteristics.......... 249
÷ ESP® warning lamp........... 304, 305 Wheel size categories......................... 258
Wheel/tyre combination..................... 261
6 Fuel reserve warning lamp........ 308
! Indicator lamp for parking Wheels (care)......................................... 229
brake.................................................. 306 Wi-Fi
Setting................................................ 198
Ð Power steering system warn‐
Window airbag.......................................... 31
ing lamp............................................. 307
Window lifter
6 Restraint system warning see Side windows
lamp................................................... 302 Windows
ü Seat belt warning lamp............. 306 see Side windows
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐ Windows (care)...................................... 229
tem warning lamp....................... 309, 310 Windscreen
· Warning lamp for distance Demisting........................................... 124
warning function................................ 307 Replacing the wiper blades................. 116
Warning/indicator lamps Windscreen
Notes................................................. 302 see Windscreen
Overview................................................ 7 Windscreen washer fluid....................... 275
PASSENGER AIR BAG........................... 34 Windscreen wipers
Warranty................................................... 24 Replacing the wiper blades................. 116
 Index 329

Switching on/off................................. 116

Winter driving (snow chains)................ 250
Winter tyres
Setting a permanent speed limita‐
tion..................................................... 160
Wiper blades
Care................................................... 229
Replacing............................................ 116
Replacing (rear window)...................... 118
Wireless vehicle components
Specific absorption rate....................... 19
Wireless vehicle components (dec‐
laration of conformity)............................. 19
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop